RTB UserManual en 12

R&S®RTB2000
Oscilloscope
User Manual
(=Q@;2)
1333161102
Version 12
This manual describes the following R&S®RTB2000 models with firmware version 2.4xx:
● R&S®RTB2002 (1333.1005K02)
● R&S®RTB2004 (1333.1005K04)
© 2022 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Muenchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1333.1611.02 | Version 12 | R&S®RTB2000
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol, e.g. R&S®RTB is indicated as
R&S RTB2000.
R&S®RTB2000 Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 19
1.1 Safety and regulatory information.............................................................................19
1.1.1 Safety instructions.........................................................................................................19
1.1.2 Labels on the product....................................................................................................24
1.1.3 Warning messages in the documentation..................................................................... 24
1.1.4 CE declaration of conformity......................................................................................... 25
1.1.5 UKCA declaration of conformity.................................................................................... 26
1.1.6 Korea certification class A.............................................................................................27
1.2 Documentation overview............................................................................................27
1.2.1 Manuals and instrument help........................................................................................ 27
1.2.2 Data sheet and brochure...............................................................................................28
1.2.3 Calibration certificate.....................................................................................................28
1.2.4 Release notes and open source acknowledgment....................................................... 28
1.3 Conventions used in the documentation..................................................................28
1.3.1 Typographical conventions............................................................................................28
1.3.2 Conventions for procedure descriptions........................................................................29
1.3.3 Notes on screenshots................................................................................................... 29
2 Getting started......................................................................................30
2.1 Preparing for use........................................................................................................ 30
2.1.1 Lifting and carrying........................................................................................................30
2.1.2 Unpacking and checking............................................................................................... 30
2.1.3 Choosing the operating site.......................................................................................... 30
2.1.4 Setting up the product................................................................................................... 31
2.1.4.1 Placing the product on a bench top...............................................................................31
2.1.4.2 Mounting the product in a rack......................................................................................32
2.1.5 Considerations for test setup........................................................................................ 32
2.1.6 Connecting to power..................................................................................................... 33
2.1.7 Switching on or off.........................................................................................................34
2.2 Instrument tour............................................................................................................35
2.2.1 Front panel.................................................................................................................... 35
2.2.1.1 Input connectors............................................................................................................36
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 3

2.2.1.2 Other connectors on the front panel..............................................................................36

2.2.2 Rear panel.....................................................................................................................37
3 Operating basics.................................................................................. 39
3.1 Display overview......................................................................................................... 39
3.2 Selecting the application............................................................................................40
3.3 Using the touchscreen............................................................................................... 40
3.3.1 Accessing functionality using the main menu............................................................... 40
3.3.2 Accessing functionality using shortcuts.........................................................................42
3.3.3 Entering data.................................................................................................................42
3.3.4 Using gestures.............................................................................................................. 43
3.4 Front panel keys..........................................................................................................44
3.4.1 Action controls...............................................................................................................44
3.4.2 Analysis controls........................................................................................................... 45
3.5 Using the toolbar.........................................................................................................46
3.6 Quick access............................................................................................................... 47
3.7 Menu history................................................................................................................48
3.8 Getting help................................................................................................................. 49
4 Waveform setup................................................................................... 50
4.1 Connecting probes and displaying a signal.............................................................50
4.2 Horizontal setup.......................................................................................................... 51
4.2.1 HORIZONTAL controls..................................................................................................53
4.2.2 Shortcuts for horizontal settings....................................................................................54
4.2.3 Horizontal settings.........................................................................................................54
4.3 Vertical setup...............................................................................................................55
4.3.1 VERTICAL controls....................................................................................................... 56
4.3.2 Short menu for analog channels................................................................................... 58
4.3.3 Vertical settings............................................................................................................. 58
4.3.4 Threshold settings.........................................................................................................62
4.3.5 Label settings................................................................................................................ 63
4.4 Probes.......................................................................................................................... 64
4.4.1 Adjusting passive probes.............................................................................................. 64
4.4.2 Probe settings............................................................................................................... 65
4.5 Acquisition setup........................................................................................................ 66
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 4

4.5.1 Shortcuts for acquisition settings.................................................................................. 66

4.5.2 Acquisition settings....................................................................................................... 67
5 Trigger................................................................................................... 71
5.1 Trigger controls...........................................................................................................72
5.2 Shortcuts for trigger settings.................................................................................... 73
5.3 General trigger settings..............................................................................................74
5.4 Edge trigger................................................................................................................. 76
5.5 Width trigger................................................................................................................78
5.6 Video trigger................................................................................................................ 80
5.7 Pattern trigger............................................................................................................. 82
5.8 Timeout trigger............................................................................................................ 85
5.9 Actions on trigger....................................................................................................... 86
6 Waveform analysis...............................................................................89
6.1 Zoom............................................................................................................................ 89
6.1.1 Zooming in.................................................................................................................... 89
6.1.2 Modifying the zoom....................................................................................................... 91
6.1.3 Zoom settings................................................................................................................92
6.2 Mathematics................................................................................................................ 93
6.2.1 Short menu for math waveforms................................................................................... 93
6.2.2 Configuring math waveforms........................................................................................ 94
6.2.3 Settings for math waveforms.........................................................................................94
6.2.4 Mathematic functions.................................................................................................... 95
6.2.4.1 Derivative...................................................................................................................... 97
6.2.5 Filters............................................................................................................................ 98
6.2.6 Tracks............................................................................................................................98
6.2.6.1 Settings for tracks....................................................................................................... 100
6.2.6.2 Demo for tracks...........................................................................................................101
6.2.6.3 Example signals for tracks.......................................................................................... 101
6.2.7 Saving and loading formularies...................................................................................101
6.3 Reference waveforms............................................................................................... 102
6.3.1 Using references......................................................................................................... 103
6.3.2 Settings for reference waveforms............................................................................... 104
6.4 History and segmented memory (option R&S RTB-K15)...................................... 107
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 5

6.4.1 Segmented memory....................................................................................................107

6.4.2 Activating the history................................................................................................... 108
6.4.3 History settings............................................................................................................108
6.4.4 Segment table and history player................................................................................ 110
6.4.5 Exporting history data..................................................................................................113
6.4.5.1 Saving history to file.................................................................................................... 113
6.4.5.2 File organization and content...................................................................................... 114
6.5 Search........................................................................................................................ 115
6.5.1 Search conditions and results..................................................................................... 115
6.5.2 General search settings...............................................................................................118
6.5.3 Edge search................................................................................................................ 119
6.5.4 Width search............................................................................................................... 120
6.5.5 Peak search................................................................................................................ 122
6.5.6 Rise/fall time search....................................................................................................122
6.5.7 Runt setup...................................................................................................................124
6.5.8 Data2Clock..................................................................................................................125
6.5.9 Pattern search.............................................................................................................127
7 Measurements.................................................................................... 130
7.1 Quick measurements................................................................................................130
7.2 Automatic measurements........................................................................................ 131
7.2.1 Measurement results...................................................................................................131
7.2.1.1 Statistics......................................................................................................................132
7.2.2 Measurement types.....................................................................................................134
7.2.2.1 Horizontal measurements (Time)................................................................................ 135
7.2.2.2 Vertical measurements (Amplitude)............................................................................ 136
7.2.2.3 Counting......................................................................................................................138
7.2.3 Settings for automatic measurements.........................................................................138
7.2.4 Delay setup................................................................................................................. 141
7.3 Cursor measurements.............................................................................................. 141
7.3.1 Cursor settings............................................................................................................ 143
8 Applications........................................................................................147
8.1 Mask testing.............................................................................................................. 147
8.1.1 About masks and mask testing................................................................................... 147
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 6

8.1.2 Using masks................................................................................................................148

8.1.3 Mask window...............................................................................................................151
8.1.4 Mask menu..................................................................................................................152
8.2 FFT analysis.............................................................................................................. 155
8.2.1 FFT display................................................................................................................. 155
8.2.2 Performing FFT analysis............................................................................................. 157
8.2.3 FFT setup....................................................................................................................157
8.2.3.1 Short menu for FFT.....................................................................................................157
8.2.3.2 Settings in the FFT window.........................................................................................158
8.2.3.3 FFT menu....................................................................................................................159
8.3 XY-Diagram................................................................................................................ 163
8.4 Digital voltmeter........................................................................................................ 164
8.4.1 Using the meter...........................................................................................................165
8.4.2 Meter settings..............................................................................................................166
8.5 Trigger counter..........................................................................................................167
8.6 Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36).............................................................................168
8.6.1 About the bode plot..................................................................................................... 168
8.6.2 Using a bode plot........................................................................................................ 169
8.6.3 Bode plot window controls.......................................................................................... 171
8.6.4 Bode plot settings........................................................................................................173
9 Documenting results......................................................................... 176

9.1 Saving and loading instrument settings.................................................................177
9.2 Saving waveform data.............................................................................................. 178
9.2.1 Waveform export settings............................................................................................179
9.2.2 Waveform file formats................................................................................................. 180
9.2.2.1 CSV format..................................................................................................................180
9.2.2.2 TXT format.................................................................................................................. 181
9.2.2.3 BIN format................................................................................................................... 182
9.2.2.4 FLT format................................................................................................................... 182
9.2.2.5 TRF format.................................................................................................................. 182
9.3 Annotations............................................................................................................... 182
9.4 Screenshots...............................................................................................................183
9.4.1 Screenshot settings.....................................................................................................184
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 7

9.5 Quick save with onetouch........................................................................................185

9.6 Export and import..................................................................................................... 186
10 General instrument setup..................................................................189

10.1 Instrument settings...................................................................................................189
10.2 Display settings.........................................................................................................192
10.3 Reset.......................................................................................................................... 195
10.4 Locking the touchscreen..........................................................................................196
10.5 Performing a self-alignment.....................................................................................196
10.6 Setting the date, time and language........................................................................197
10.7 Options.......................................................................................................................199
10.7.1 Activating options........................................................................................................ 199
10.8 Updating the firmware.............................................................................................. 200
11 Network connections and remote operation................................... 201

11.1 LAN connection.........................................................................................................201
11.1.1 LAN settings................................................................................................................201
11.2 USB connection........................................................................................................ 204
11.2.1 USB TMC.................................................................................................................... 204
11.2.2 USB VCP.................................................................................................................... 205
11.2.3 USB MTP.................................................................................................................... 205
11.3 Remote access using a web browser..................................................................... 205
11.3.1 Accessing the instrument using a web browser.......................................................... 205
11.3.2 Instrument home......................................................................................................... 206
11.3.3 Screenshot.................................................................................................................. 206
11.3.4 SCPI device control.....................................................................................................207
11.3.5 Save/load.................................................................................................................... 208
11.3.6 Network settings..........................................................................................................209
11.3.7 Change password....................................................................................................... 210
11.3.8 Livescreen...................................................................................................................210
11.3.9 Remote front panel......................................................................................................210
12 Serial bus analysis............................................................................. 211

12.1 Basics of protocol analysis......................................................................................211
12.1.1 Protocol - common settings.........................................................................................212
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 8

12.1.2 Displaying decode results........................................................................................... 214

12.1.3 Bus table: decode results............................................................................................215
12.1.4 Bus labels....................................................................................................................217
12.1.5 Label list...................................................................................................................... 218
12.1.5.1 Using label lists........................................................................................................... 218
12.1.5.2 Content and format of the PTT file.............................................................................. 219
12.2 SPI bus (option R&S RTB-K1)..................................................................................221
12.2.1 The SPI protocol......................................................................................................... 221
12.2.2 SPI configuration.........................................................................................................221
12.2.3 SPI trigger................................................................................................................... 225
12.2.4 SPI decode results...................................................................................................... 228
12.3 I²C (option R&S RTB-K1).......................................................................................... 229
12.3.1 The I²C protocol.......................................................................................................... 229
12.3.2 I²C configuration..........................................................................................................231
12.3.3 I²C trigger.................................................................................................................... 232
12.3.4 I²C decode results....................................................................................................... 235
12.3.5 I²C label list................................................................................................................. 236
12.4 UART / RS232 (option R&S RTB-K2)....................................................................... 238
12.4.1 The UART / RS232 interface.......................................................................................238
12.4.2 UART configuration..................................................................................................... 238
12.4.3 UART trigger............................................................................................................... 241
12.4.4 UART decode results.................................................................................................. 243
12.5 CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)....................................................................................... 244
12.5.1 The CAN protocol........................................................................................................245
12.5.2 CAN configuration....................................................................................................... 246
12.5.3 CAN trigger................................................................................................................. 248
12.5.4 CAN decode results.................................................................................................... 252
12.5.5 Search on decoded CAN data.................................................................................... 254
12.5.6 CAN label list...............................................................................................................256
12.6 LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)......................................................................................... 258
12.6.1 The LIN protocol..........................................................................................................258
12.6.2 LIN configuration......................................................................................................... 260
12.6.3 LIN trigger................................................................................................................... 262
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 9

12.6.4 LIN decode results...................................................................................................... 265

12.6.5 Search on decoded LIN data...................................................................................... 266
12.6.6 LIN label list.................................................................................................................269
13 Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO).....................................272

13.1 Short menu for logic channels................................................................................ 272
13.2 Logic analyzer settings............................................................................................ 274
13.3 Triggering on logic channels................................................................................... 276
13.4 Analyzing logic channels......................................................................................... 276
13.5 Parallel buses............................................................................................................ 276
13.5.1 Parallel bus configuration............................................................................................277
13.5.2 Decode results............................................................................................................ 279
14 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)..........................................281

14.1 Function generator................................................................................................... 281
14.1.1 Using the function generator....................................................................................... 281
14.1.2 Basic settings of the function generator...................................................................... 284
14.1.3 Sweep settings............................................................................................................287
14.1.4 Modulation settings..................................................................................................... 288
14.1.5 Burst settings.............................................................................................................. 290
14.1.6 Arbitrary setup settings............................................................................................... 291
14.2 Pattern generator...................................................................................................... 294
14.2.1 Pattern selection......................................................................................................... 294
14.2.2 Settings for square wave pattern................................................................................ 295
14.2.3 Settings for counter pattern.........................................................................................296
14.2.4 Settings for arbitrary pattern........................................................................................296
14.2.4.1 General settings.......................................................................................................... 297
14.2.4.2 Pattern setup...............................................................................................................298
14.2.4.3 Timing setup................................................................................................................299
14.2.5 Settings for manual pattern......................................................................................... 300
14.2.6 Settings for serial buses..............................................................................................300
15 Remote control commands...............................................................302

15.1 Conventions used in command description.......................................................... 302
15.2 Programming examples........................................................................................... 303
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 10

15.2.1 Documenting results................................................................................................... 303

15.2.1.1 Saving screenshots to file........................................................................................... 303
15.2.1.2 Saving, copying, and loading setup data.................................................................... 304
15.2.1.3 Reading waveform data in real format........................................................................ 305
15.2.1.4 Reading waveform data in unsigned integer format....................................................305
Data conversion.......................................................................................................... 306
15.2.2 Firmware update......................................................................................................... 307
15.2.2.1 Using MMEM:DATA + DIAGnostic:UPDate:LOAD...................................................... 307
15.2.2.2 Using DIAGnostic:UPDdate:TRANsfer....................................................................... 307
15.2.3 Search.........................................................................................................................308
15.2.3.1 Searching for a pulse of specified width......................................................................308
15.2.4 Function generator...................................................................................................... 309
15.3 Common commands.................................................................................................309
15.4 Waveform setup........................................................................................................ 312
15.4.1 Automatic setup.......................................................................................................... 313
15.4.2 Starting and stopping acquisition................................................................................ 313
15.4.3 Vertical settings........................................................................................................... 314
15.4.4 Passive probes............................................................................................................321
15.4.5 Horizontal settings.......................................................................................................322
15.4.6 Acquisition settings..................................................................................................... 324
15.4.7 Waveform data............................................................................................................ 330
15.5 Trigger........................................................................................................................ 330
15.5.1 General trigger settings...............................................................................................331
15.5.2 Edge trigger.................................................................................................................333
15.5.3 Width trigger................................................................................................................335
15.5.4 Video/TV trigger.......................................................................................................... 337
15.5.5 Pattern trigger............................................................................................................. 338
15.5.5.1 Pattern definition......................................................................................................... 338
15.5.5.2 Time limitation............................................................................................................. 339
15.5.6 Timeout trigger............................................................................................................ 341
15.5.7 Serial bus.................................................................................................................... 342
15.5.8 Actions on trigger........................................................................................................ 342
15.6 Waveform analysis....................................................................................................345
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 11

15.6.1 Zoom........................................................................................................................... 345

15.6.2 Mathematics................................................................................................................346
15.6.3 Reference waveforms................................................................................................. 350
15.6.4 Search.........................................................................................................................355
15.6.4.1 General search settings.............................................................................................. 355
15.6.4.2 Edge search configuration.......................................................................................... 357
15.6.4.3 Width search configuration..........................................................................................357
15.6.4.4 Peak search configuration...........................................................................................359
15.6.4.5 Rise/fall time search configuration.............................................................................. 360
15.6.4.6 Runt search configuration........................................................................................... 362
15.6.4.7 Data2Clock search configuration................................................................................ 363
15.6.4.8 Pattern search configuration....................................................................................... 365
15.6.4.9 Search results............................................................................................................. 368
15.6.5 History (option R&S RTB-K15)....................................................................................370
15.6.5.1 History settings............................................................................................................370
15.6.5.2 Displaying history segments....................................................................................... 373
15.6.5.3 Timestamps.................................................................................................................376
15.6.5.4 Export of history data.................................................................................................. 380
15.7 Measurements........................................................................................................... 381
15.7.1 Quick measurements.................................................................................................. 381
15.7.2 Automatic measurements........................................................................................... 382
15.7.2.1 Measurement settings.................................................................................................382
15.7.2.2 Measurements results.................................................................................................386
15.7.2.3 Reference levels......................................................................................................... 392
15.7.3 Cursor measurements.................................................................................................394
15.7.3.1 Cursor settings............................................................................................................ 394
15.7.3.2 Cursor measurement results.......................................................................................398
15.8 Applications...............................................................................................................400
15.8.1 General....................................................................................................................... 400
15.8.2 Mask testing................................................................................................................ 400
15.8.2.1 Mask setup..................................................................................................................400
15.8.2.2 Actions on violation..................................................................................................... 402
15.8.2.3 Mask test.....................................................................................................................405
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 12

15.8.2.4 Mask data....................................................................................................................406

15.8.3 FFT analysis................................................................................................................407
15.8.3.2 Frequency settings......................................................................................................409
15.8.3.3 Time settings............................................................................................................... 411
15.8.3.4 Waveform settings.......................................................................................................411
15.8.3.5 Waveform data............................................................................................................ 412
15.8.4 XY-Waveforms.............................................................................................................415
15.8.5 Digital voltmeter.......................................................................................................... 416
15.8.6 Trigger counter............................................................................................................ 418
15.8.7 Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36)................................................................................419
15.8.7.1 Bode plot setup........................................................................................................... 419
15.8.7.2 Bode plot diagram settings..........................................................................................423
15.8.7.3 Marker table................................................................................................................ 425
15.9 Documenting results................................................................................................ 427
15.9.1 Transfer of waveform data.......................................................................................... 427
15.9.1.1 Format settings........................................................................................................... 427
15.9.1.2 Analog channels..........................................................................................................429
15.9.1.3 Math waveforms..........................................................................................................433
15.9.1.4 Reference waveforms................................................................................................. 434
15.9.1.5 Masks..........................................................................................................................435
15.9.1.6 Logic channels............................................................................................................ 436
15.9.1.7 Parameters for data evaluation................................................................................... 436
15.9.2 Waveform data export to file....................................................................................... 439
15.9.3 Screenshots................................................................................................................ 440
15.9.4 Instrument settings: mass MEMomory subsystem......................................................443
15.10 General instrument setup.........................................................................................449
15.10.1 Display settings........................................................................................................... 449
15.10.2 System settings...........................................................................................................454
15.10.3 LAN settings................................................................................................................458
15.10.4 USB settings............................................................................................................... 460
15.10.5 Trigger out................................................................................................................... 461
15.10.6 Firmware update......................................................................................................... 462
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 13

15.11 Serial bus analysis....................................................................................................463

15.11.1 General....................................................................................................................... 463
15.11.2 SPI (option R&S RTB-K1)........................................................................................... 466
15.11.2.1 SPI (with CS)- configuration........................................................................................466
15.11.2.2 SPI (no CS) - configuration......................................................................................... 469
15.11.2.3 SPI - trigger................................................................................................................. 473
15.11.2.4 SPI - decode results....................................................................................................475
15.11.3 I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)............................................................................................ 479
15.11.3.1 I²C - configuration........................................................................................................479
15.11.3.2 I²C - trigger.................................................................................................................. 480
15.11.3.3 I²C - decode results.....................................................................................................483
15.11.4 UART (option R&S RTB-K2)....................................................................................... 490
15.11.4.1 UART - configuration...................................................................................................490
15.11.4.2 UART - trigger............................................................................................................. 493
15.11.4.3 UART - decode results................................................................................................ 495
15.11.5 CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)......................................................................................... 499
15.11.5.1 CAN - configuration.....................................................................................................500
15.11.5.2 CAN - trigger............................................................................................................... 501
15.11.5.3 CAN - decode results.................................................................................................. 505
15.11.5.4 CAN - search............................................................................................................... 511
15.11.6 LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)........................................................................................... 516
15.11.6.1 LIN - configuration.......................................................................................................516
15.11.6.2 LIN - trigger................................................................................................................. 517
15.11.6.3 LIN - decode results.................................................................................................... 520
15.11.6.4 LIN - search.................................................................................................................526
15.12 Mixed signal option (option R&S RTB-B1)..............................................................529
15.12.1 Logic channels............................................................................................................ 529
15.12.1.1 Logic channels - activity display..................................................................................529
15.12.1.2 Logic analyzer configuration....................................................................................... 530
15.12.1.3 Logic channels - waveform data................................................................................. 534
15.12.2 Parallel buses..............................................................................................................537
15.12.2.1 Parallel bus - line configuration................................................................................... 537
15.12.2.2 Parallel clocked bus configuration...............................................................................538
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 14

15.12.2.3 Parallel buses - decode results................................................................................... 539

15.13 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)................................................................. 541
15.13.1 Function generator...................................................................................................... 541
15.13.1.1 Basic settings of the function generator...................................................................... 541
15.13.1.2 Arbitrary waveform setup............................................................................................ 544
15.13.1.3 Burst settings.............................................................................................................. 546
15.13.1.4 Modulation settings..................................................................................................... 547
15.13.1.5 Sweep settings............................................................................................................550
15.13.2 Pattern generator........................................................................................................ 551
15.13.2.2 Square wave............................................................................................................... 553
15.13.2.3 Counter pattern........................................................................................................... 554
15.13.2.4 Arbitrary pattern.......................................................................................................... 555
15.13.2.5 Manual pattern............................................................................................................ 558
15.14 Status reporting........................................................................................................ 558
15.14.1 STATus:OPERation register........................................................................................ 558
15.14.2 STATus:QUEStionable registers................................................................................. 559
16 Maintenance and support..................................................................564

16.1 Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 564
16.2 Changing fuses......................................................................................................... 564
16.3 Contacting customer support..................................................................................564
16.4 Data security..............................................................................................................565
16.5 Storage.......................................................................................................................565
16.6 Disposal..................................................................................................................... 565
Annex.................................................................................................. 567
A Remote control basics.......................................................................567

A.1 SCPI command structure......................................................................................... 567
A.1.1 Syntax for common commands...................................................................................567
A.1.2 Syntax for instrument-specific commands.................................................................. 568
A.1.2.1 Long and short form.................................................................................................... 568
A.1.2.2 Numeric suffixes..........................................................................................................568
A.1.2.3 Optional mnemonics................................................................................................... 569
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 15

A.1.3 SCPI parameters.........................................................................................................569

A.1.3.1 Numeric values........................................................................................................... 570
A.1.3.2 Special numeric values............................................................................................... 570
A.1.3.3 Boolean parameters....................................................................................................571
A.1.3.4 Text parameters.......................................................................................................... 571
A.1.3.5 Character strings.........................................................................................................571
A.1.3.6 Block data................................................................................................................... 572
A.1.4 Overview of syntax elements...................................................................................... 572
A.1.5 Structure of a command line....................................................................................... 573
A.1.6 Responses to queries................................................................................................. 574
A.2 Command sequence and synchronization............................................................. 575
A.2.1 Preventing overlapping execution............................................................................... 575
A.3 Messages................................................................................................................... 577
A.3.1 Instrument messages..................................................................................................577
A.3.2 LAN interface messages............................................................................................. 578
B Remote control - status reporting system.......................................579

B.1 Structure of a SCPI status register..........................................................................579
B.2 Hierarchy of status registers................................................................................... 580
B.3 Contents of the status registers.............................................................................. 582
B.3.1 Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)....................................582
B.3.2 Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)..........................583
B.3.3 STATus:OPERation register........................................................................................ 584
B.3.4 STATus:QUEStionable register................................................................................... 584
B.3.4.1 STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload register.................................................................586
B.3.4.2 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register.............................................................586
B.3.4.3 STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState register.................................................................. 587
B.3.4.4 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register.......................................................................... 587
B.3.4.5 STATus:QUEStionable:MASK register........................................................................ 587
B.4 Application of the status reporting system............................................................ 588
B.4.1 Service request........................................................................................................... 588
B.4.2 Serial poll.................................................................................................................... 588
B.4.3 Query of an instrument status..................................................................................... 588
B.4.3.1 Decimal representation of a bit pattern....................................................................... 589
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 16

B.4.4 Error queue................................................................................................................. 589

B.5 Reset values of the status reporting system..........................................................589
List of commands.............................................................................. 591
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 17

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 18

R&S®RTB2000 Preface
Safety and regulatory information
1 Preface
1.1 Safety and regulatory information

The product documentation helps you to use the product safely and efficiently. Follow
the instructions provided here and in the Chapter 1.1.1, "Safety instructions",
on page 19.
Intended use
The R&S RTB2000 oscilloscope is designed for measurements on circuits that are only
indirectly connected to the mains or not connected at all. It is not rated for any mea-
surement category.
The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic
components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and
performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Where do I find safety information?

Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dan-
gers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by
dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
● In Chapter 1.1.1, "Safety instructions", on page 19. The same information is provi-
ded in many languages as printed "Safety Instructions". The printed "Safety
Instructions" are delivered with the product.
● Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation.
1.1.1 Safety instructions
Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according
to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions
provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation
nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended
use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the data sheet,
manuals and the printed "Safety Instructions". If you are unsure about the appropriate
use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also
need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces
and the product documentation are available.
Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by
Rohde & Schwarz are allowed to repair the product. If any part of the product is dam-
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 19

aged or broken, stop using the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service at
http://www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com.
In these safety instructions, the term "product" covers instruments (oscilloscopes),
probes and their accessories.
Lifting and carrying the instrument

Check the data sheet for the maximum weight of the instrument. A single person can
only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical condi-
tion. If your instrument is heavier than 18 kg, do not move or carry it by yourself.
Use the instrument handles to move or carry the instrument. Do not use the mounted
accessories instead of the handles. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight
of the instrument.
To move the instrument safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift
trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Choosing the operating site

Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters
can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock,
serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing. If Rohde & Schwarz provides
accessories designed for your product, e.g. a carrying bag, you can use the product
outdoors.
You can operate the product up to the altitude specified in the data sheet. The lowest
specified altitude for a product of the measurement setup defines the altitude for the
complete setup.
The product is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where nonconductive con-
tamination can occur. For more information on environmental conditions such as ambi-
ent temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
Setting up the product

Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the prod-
uct facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so
that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure sta-
bility. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is
moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the prod-
uct, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause
injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and
stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the prod-
ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the
product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 20

Connecting to power and grounding

The mains power supply input of the instrument complies with overvoltage category II.
It has to be connected to a fixed installation used to supply energy-consuming equip-
ment such as household appliances and similar loads. Be aware that electrically pow-
ered products have risks, such as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Take the following measures for your safety:
● Do not use an isolating transformer to connect the instrument to the mains power
supply.
● Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not
adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse.
● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe-
cific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conduc-
tor terminal.
● If a product has an exchangeable fuse, its type and characteristics are indicated
next to the fuse holder. Before changing the fuse, switch off the instrument and dis-
connect it from the power source. How to change the fuse is described in the prod-
uct documentation.
● Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged.
Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure
that nobody can trip over loose cables.
● If the product needs an external power supply, use the power supply that is deliv-
ered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a
power supply that conforms to the country-specific regulations.
● Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time.
Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily
accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these
requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.
Performing measurements
Take the following measures for your safety:
● To ascertain voltage-free state, use an appropriate voltage tester. Any measure-
ment setup including an oscilloscope is not suitable for this purpose.
● The maximum input voltage on channel inputs and the external trigger input must
not exceed the value specified in the data sheet.
● Observe all voltage and current ratings of the instrument, the probes, and the
accessories. Limits and ratings are marked on the products and listed in the data
sheets.
Consider that the rated voltage depends on the frequency. The voltage limitation
curves or values are provided in the data sheet. Do not exceed the maximum mea-
surement voltage from the probe tip to the probe reference lead.
● Never cause any short circuits when measuring sources with high output currents.
● Use only probes and accessories that comply with the measurement category
(CAT) of your measurement task. The measurement category of the products is
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 21

defined in the data sheet. If you use other than Rohde & Schwarz accessories,
make sure that they are suitable for the instrument and the measurement task.
● Set the correct attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level,
and you might misjudge the actual risk.
● When working with high voltages and current probes, observe the additional oper-
ating conditions specified in this safety instructions.
● The probe pins are extremely pointed and can easily penetrate clothes and the
skin. Handle the probe pins with great care. To exchange a probe pin, use tweez-
ers or pliers to avoid injuries. When transporting the accessories, always use the
box supplied with the probe.
● Prevent the probe from receiving mechanical shock. Avoid putting excessive strain
on the probe cable or exposing it to sharp bends. Touching a broken cable during
measurements can cause injuries.
● Set up all probe connections to the instrument before applying power.
Working with hazardous voltages

Voltages higher than 30 V RMS, or 42 V peak, or 60 V DC are regarded as hazardous
contact voltages. Direct contact with them can cause serious injuries.
Make sure that only electrically skilled persons use the products for measurements on
hazardous contact voltages. These working conditions require special education and
experience to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity can create.
When working with hazardous contact voltages, use protective measures to preclude
direct contact with the measurement setup:
● Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is applied.
● Switch off the test circuit while connecting and disconnecting probe leads.
● Use only insulated voltage probes, test leads and adapters.
● Make sure that the input leads fulfill the safety requirements for your measurement.
The delivered input leads might have a jacket wear indicator that indicates a worn
jacket by different jacket color. In this case, do not use the input lead. Replace it
with a new one.
● Do not use 4 mm banana plugs without protection against contact.
Working with current probes

When working with current probes, you can measure high-frequency currents or cur-
rents that contain high-frequency components.
● Switch off the test circuit while connecting the probe.
● Do not attach the clamp to bare unisolated conductors. To avoid injury from a short
circuit, measure at a location on an insulated wire where the insulation is sufficient
for the circuit voltage.
● Connect the probe only to the secondary side of a breaker. With this measure, you
avoid injury, if a short circuit occurs.
● The following effects can cause burns and fire or damage to the measurement site:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 22

– Eddy current loss can cause heating of the sensor head.

– Dielectric heating can cause heating of cord insulation and other materials.
Measurement categories
IEC 61010-2-030 defines measurement categories that rate instruments on their ability
to resist short transient overvoltages that occur in addition to the working voltage. Use
the measurement setup only in electrical environments for which they are rated.
● 0 - Instruments without rated measurement category
For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to mains, for exam-
ple, electronics, circuits powered by batteries, and specially protected secondary
circuits. This measurement category is also known as CAT I.
● CAT II:
For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low-voltage
installation by a standard socket outlet, for example, household appliances and
portable tools.
● CAT III:
For measurements performed in the building installation, such as junction boxes,
circuit breakers, distribution boards, and equipment with permanent connection to
the fixed installation.
● CAT IV:
For measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation, such as
electricity meters and primary overcurrent protection devices.
Cleaning the product

Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the
casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.
Meaning of safety labels

Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 23

Potential hazard
Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.
Electrical hazard
Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Protective conductor terminal

Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This protects
you against electric shock should an electric problem occur.
1.1.2 Labels on the product
Labels on the casing inform about:

● Personal safety, see "Meaning of safety labels" on page 23
● Product and environment safety, see Table 1-1
● Identification of the product
Table 1-1: Labels regarding product and environment safety
Chassis grounding terminal
Take care when handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the prod-
uct has come to the end of its service life.
For more information, see "Disposing electrical and electronic equipment" on page 565.
1.1.3 Warning messages in the documentation
A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig-
nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do
not follow the safety precautions.
WARNING
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided.
NOTICE
Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other
property.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 24

1.1.4 CE declaration of conformity
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 25

1.1.5 UKCA declaration of conformity
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 26

Documentation overview
1.1.6 Korea certification class A
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기

바라며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
1.2 Documentation overview

This section provides an overview of the R&S RTB2000 user documentation.
1.2.1 Manuals and instrument help
You find the manuals on the product page at:

www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/rtb2000
Getting started manual

Introduces the R&S RTB2000 and describes how to set up the product. A printed Eng-
lish version is included in the delivery.
User manual
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control commands
with programming examples, and information on maintenance and instrument interfa-
ces. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
The online version of the user manual provides the complete contents for immediate
display on the internet.
Instrument help
The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the functional description directly on
the instrument.
Safety instructions
Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with
the product.
Instrument security procedures manual

Deals with security issues when working with the R&S RTB2000 in secure areas.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 27

Conventions used in the documentation
Service manual
Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace-
ment and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists. The service manual is available for regis-
tered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS, https://
gloris.rohde-schwarz.com).
1.2.2 Data sheet and brochure
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S RTB2000. It also lists
the options with their order numbers and optional accessories. The brochure provides
an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific characteristics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/rtb2000
1.2.3 Calibration certificate
The document is available on https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com/calcert. You need the

device ID of your instrument, which you can find on a label on the rear panel.
1.2.4 Release notes and open source acknowledgment
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
firmware version, and describe the firmware installation. The open source acknowledg-
ment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/rtb2000. The open source acknowledgment
documant can also be read directly on the instrument.
1.3 Conventions used in the documentation
1.3.1 Typographical conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention Description
"Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as
ments" dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by
quotation marks.
[Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets.
Filenames, commands, Filenames, commands, coding samples and screen output are distin-
program code guished by their font.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 28

Conventions used in the documentation
Convention Description
Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota-

tion marks.
1.3.2 Conventions for procedure descriptions
When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per-
form the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen is described.
Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition-
ally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or
the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro-
cedures.
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the
touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a key-
board.
1.3.3 Notes on screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These
screenshots are meant to illustrate as many as possible of the provided functions and
possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent
realistic usage scenarios.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options instal-
led. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par-
ticular product configuration.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 29

R&S®RTB2000 Getting started
Preparing for use
2 Getting started
2.1 Preparing for use

Here, you can find basic information about setting up the instrument for the first time or
when changing the operating site.
2.1.1 Lifting and carrying
See: "Lifting and carrying the instrument" on page 20.
2.1.2 Unpacking and checking
1. Unpack the product carefully.
2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the prod-
uct later.
3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness.
4. Check the equipment for damage.

If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.
Delivery contents
The delivery package contains the following items:
● R&S RTB2000 oscilloscope
● R&S RT-ZP03S probes (2x for R&S RTB2002; 4x for R&S RTB2004)
● Country-specific power cable
● Printed "Getting Started" manual
● Printed Rohde & Schwarz Oscilloscopes and Accessories Safety Instructions (Mul-
tilingual) brochure
2.1.3 Choosing the operating site
Specific operating conditions ensure proper operation and avoid damage to the prod-
uct and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as ambi-
ent temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
See also "Choosing the operating site" on page 20.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 30

Preparing for use
Electromagnetic compatibility classes

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the
product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet.
● Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
– Residential environments
– Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that
supplies residential buildings
● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause
radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi-
ated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments.
If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to
eliminate them.
2.1.4 Setting up the product
When setting up the instrument, follow the safety instructions:

● "Setting up the product" on page 20
● "Intended use" on page 19
2.1.4.1 Placing the product on a bench top
For standalone operation, place the instrument on a horizontal bench with even, flat
surface. The instrument can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with
the support feet on the bottom extended.
To place the product on a bench top

1. Place the product on a stable, flat and level surface.
2. CAUTION! The top surface of the product is too small for stacking. If you stack
another product on top of the product, the stack can fall over and cause injury.
If you want to save space, mount several products in a rack.
3. CAUTION! Foldable feet can collapse. See "Setting up the product" on page 20.
Always fold the feet completely in or out. With folded-out feet, do not place any-
thing on top or underneath.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 31

Preparing for use
4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product.

Prevent overheating as follows:
● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product
and any object in the vicinity.
● Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators
or other products.
2.1.4.2 Mounting the product in a rack
The instrument can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit. The order number is
given in the data sheet. The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit.
To prepare the rack

1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 20.
2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product.
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.
To mount the R&S RTB2000 in a rack

1. Use an adapter kit that fits the dimensions of the R&S RTB2000 to prepare the
instrument for rack mounting. For information on the dimensions, see data sheet.
a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R&S RTB2000. For the order num-
ber, see data sheet.
b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the
adapter kit.
2. Push the product onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit closely to the rack.
3. Tighten all screws at the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure
the product at the rack.
To unmount the product from a rack

1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets.
2. Remove the product from the rack.
3. If placing the product on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the prod-
uct. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.
2.1.5 Considerations for test setup
Observe safety instructions, see "Performing measurements" on page 21.
Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 32

Preparing for use
To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation:

● Use high-quality shielded cables, for example, double-shielded RF and LAN
cables.
● Always terminate open cable ends.
● Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations.
Measuring accessories
Use only probes and measuring accessories that comply with IEC 61010-031.
Signal input and output levels

Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet. Keep the signal levels within
the specified ranges to avoid damage to the product and connected devices.
Preventing electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT.
► NOTICE! Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the

product and the device under test (DUT).
Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage:
a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground.
b) Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
During operation, if the firmware observes a serious unexpected disturbance (e.g. due
to ESD), it resets some hardware components and initiates a new alignment to ensure
proper instrument functioning. Then it restores the user settings to the state before the
disturbance.
2.1.6 Connecting to power
For safety information, see "Connecting to power and grounding" on page 21.
The R&S RTB2000 can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself
automatically to it.
The nominal ranges are:
● 100 V to 240 V AC at 50 Hz to 60 Hz, with maximal 10% voltage fluctuation on line
● 0.95 A to 0.5 A
● max. 60 W
1. Plug the AC power cable into the AC power connector on the rear panel of the
product. Only use the AC power cable delivered with the product.
2. Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact.
The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data
sheet.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 33

Preparing for use
2.1.7 Switching on or off
The instrument is switched on or off with the power switch and the [Standby] key.
Table 2-1: Overview of power states
Status LED Power switch
Off (unlighted) [0] (off)
Standby yellow [I] (on)
Ready green [I] (on)
To switch on the product

The product is off but connected to power.
1. Set the switch on the power supply at the rear panel of the instrument to position
[I].
The power key lights up. The key is located in the bottom left corner of the front
panel.
2. Press the [Standby] key.

The instrument performs a system check and then starts the firmware.
The [Standby] key turns green and the illuminated keys on the front panel light up.
If the previous session was terminated regularly, the oscilloscope uses the last set-
tings.
Before you start measurements, be sure to comply with the warm-up phase specified
in the data sheet.
To shut down the product

The product is in the ready state.
► Press the [Standby] key.
All current settings are saved, and the software shuts down. The [Standby] key
turns yellow. The standby power supplies only the power switch circuits.
To disconnect from power

The product is in the standby state.
1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in
the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first.
Set the switch on the power supply to position [0].
The LED of the [Standby] key is switched off.
2. Disconnect the product from the power source.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 34

Instrument tour
2.2 Instrument tour
2.2.1 Front panel
Figure 2-1 shows the front panel of the R&S RTB2000. The function keys are grouped
in functional blocks to the right of the display.
Figure 2-1: Front panel of R&S RTB2004 with 4 input channels
1 = Display
2 = Horizontal and vertical setup controls
3 = Trigger settings, action and analysis controls
4 = Analog input channels (2 channels at R&S RTB2002, 4 channels at R&S RTB2004)
5 = External trigger input
6 = Logic probe connectors (option R&S RTB-B1)
7 = Connectors for probe compensation and optional pattern generator (R&S RTB-B6)
8 = USB connector
9 = Aux Out connector
10 = [Standby] key
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 35

Instrument tour
2.2.1.1 Input connectors
BNC inputs (4 and 5)

The R&S RTB2000 has two or four channel inputs (4) to connect the input signals. The
external trigger input (5) is used to control the measurement by an external signal. The
trigger level can be set from -5 V to 5 V.
The input impedance of all BNC inputs is 1 MΩ. For probes that require 50 Ω input
impedance, use the 50 Ω feedthrough termination adapter R&S HZ22.
Follow the safety instructions:
● "Performing measurements" on page 21
● "Working with hazardous voltages" on page 22
The maximum input voltage on channel inputs must not exceed 400 V (peak) and
300 V (RMS).
For the external trigger input, the maximum input voltage is 400 V (peak) and
300 V (RMS).
Transient overvoltages must not exceed 400 V (peak).
Logic probe (6)

The connectors for logic channels can be used if the Mixed Signal Option R&S RTB-B1
is installed. The option provides connectors for two logical probes with 8 digital chan-
nels each (D0 to D7 and D8 to D15).
The maximum input voltage is 40 V (peak) at 100 kΩ input impedance. The maximum
input frequency for a signal with the minimum input voltage swing and medium hystere-
sis of 800 mV (Vpp) is 300 MHz.
2.2.1.2 Other connectors on the front panel
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 36

Instrument tour
[Pattern Generator] (7)

Connectors for the pattern generator P0, P1, P2, P3.
The "Demo 1" signal is intended for demonstration purposes.
[Probe Comp.] (7)

Probe compensation terminal to support adjustment of passive probes to the oscillo-
scope channel.
Square wave signal for probe compensation.
Ground connector for probes.
[USB] type A (8)

USB 2.0 type A interface to connect a mouse or a keyboard, or a USB flash drive for
storing and reloading instrument settings and measurement data, and to update the
firmware.
[Aux Out] (9)

Multi-purpose BNC output that can function as pass/fail and trigger output, output of
10 MHz reference frequency, and as waveform generator (with option R&S RTB-B6).
2.2.2 Rear panel
Figure 2-2 shows the rear panel of the R&S RTB2000 with its connectors.
Figure 2-2: Rear panel view of R&S RTB2000
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 37

Instrument tour
1 = LAN connector
2 = USB connector, type B
3 = AC power supply connector and main power switch
4 = Kensington lock slot to secure the instrument against theft
5 = Loop for lock to secure the instrument against theft
6 = not used
[LAN] (1)
8-pin connector RJ-45 used to connect the instrument to a Local Area Network (LAN).
It supports up to 1 Gbit/s.
[USB] type B (2)

USB 2.0 interface of type B (device USB) for remote control of the instrument.
AC supply: mains connector and main power switch (3)

The instrument supports a wide range power supply. It automatically adjusts to the cor-
rect range for the applied voltage. There is no line voltage selector.
The AC main power switch disconnects the instrument from the AC power line.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 38

R&S®RTB2000 Operating basics
Display overview
3 Operating basics
3.1 Display overview

The touchscreen display of the instrument shows the waveforms and measurement
results, and also information and everything that you need to control the instrument.
Figure 3-1: Display of the R&S RTB2000 with 4 channels
1 = Toolbar
2 = Trigger source, main trigger parameter (here: slope for edge trigger), trigger level
3 = Trigger mode and sample rate
4 = Horizontal scale (time scale) and horizontal position
5 = Acquisition status and acquisition mode
6 = Date, time, education mode if active (here: off), LAN connection status (green = connected, grey = not
connected, yellow = connecting)
7 = Trigger level marker, has the color of the trigger source
8 = Trigger position marker, has the color of the trigger source
9 = Channel markers indicate the ground levels; channel C2S is selected, i.e. it has the focus
10 = Measurement results (here: automatic measurements on the left, cursor measurements on the right)
11 = Vertical settings of active analog channels: vertical scale, bandwidth limitation (no indicator = full band-
width, BW= limited frequency), coupling (AC, DC, ground), probe attenuation. Channel 2 is selected.
12 = Waveform generator settings (requires option R&S RTB-B6)
13 = Menu button
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 39

Using the touchscreen
3.2 Selecting the application

The "Apps Selection" dialog provides fast access to all available applications.
► There are several ways to open the "Apps Selection" dialog:

● Press the [Apps Selection] key.
● Tap the "Menu" rhomb icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
– Scroll down.
– Select "Apps".
3.3 Using the touchscreen
3.3.1 Accessing functionality using the main menu
Using the touchscreen of the R&S RTB2000 is as easy as using your mobile phone. To
open the main menu, tap the "Menu" button - that is the R&S logo in the right bottom
corner of the display.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 40

1
Figure 3-2: Open the main menu and select a menu item
1
1
2
Figure 3-3: Switch on or off (left) and select a parameter value (right)
► To close the menu:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 41

Tap "Back", or tap into the diagram outside the menu.
3.3.2 Accessing functionality using shortcuts
The labels in information bar at the top of the display, the channel labels and also the
results at the bottom provide shortcuts to the most important settings. If you tap a label,
a short menu opens, the keypad for numerical entry, the setting toggles, or the corre-
sponding menu opens. The response depends on the selected parameter.
Figure 3-4: Short menus for channel (left) and trigger slope (right)
From the short menu, you can also open the corresponding comprehensive menu.
You can also switch off the channels.
3.3.3 Entering data
To enter exact numerical values, the instrument provides an on-screen keypad. For
text input, the on-screen keyboard works in the same way.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 42

3
2
1
Figure 3-5: Enter numerical value and unit
3.3.4 Using gestures
Drag one finger

Drag horizontally in the diagram to change the horizontal position of all waveforms. In
frequency domain, the center frequency is changed.
Drag vertically in the diagram to change the vertical position of the selected waveform.
To adjust the vertical position of each waveform, the trigger level, and the trigger posi-
tion, drag the corresponding marker on the display.
To drag a cursor line, tap the line and drag it to the required position.
Swipe one finger
Swipe in the menu to scroll it.
Spread and pinch two fingers

Spread or pinch two fingers in vertical direction to change the vertical scale of the
selected waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 43

Front panel keys
Spread or pinch two fingers in horizontal direction to change the horizontal scale of all
waveforms. In frequency domain, the frequency span is changed.
Swipe two fingers

If the history option R&S RTB-K15 is installed, swipe two fingers in the diagram to
scrolls through the history segments.
3.4 Front panel keys

For an overview of the front panel keys, see figure 2-1 on page 35.
The keys and knobs at the front panel are grouped in functional blocks:
● Horizontal section: see Chapter 4.2.1, "HORIZONTAL controls", on page 53.
● Vertical section: see Chapter 4.3.1, "VERTICAL controls", on page 56.
● Trigger section: see Chapter 5.1, "Trigger controls", on page 72
● Action section, see Chapter 3.4.1, "Action controls", on page 44.
● Analysis section, see Chapter 3.4.2, "Analysis controls", on page 45.
3.4.1 Action controls
The Action keys set the instrument to a defined state, and provide save and load func-
tions.
[Camera]
Saves screenshots, waveforms and/or settings according to the configuration in [Save
Load] > "onetouch".
[Save Load]
Opens the "File" menu, where you can:
● Save instrument settings, waveforms, reference waveforms, and screenshots
● Restore (load) data which were saved before
● Import and export settings and reference waveforms
● Configure the screenshot output
● Configure the behavior of the [Camera] key
[Touch Lock]
Locks the touchscreen to prevent unintended use. When the touchscreen is off, the
key is illuminated. Press again to unlock the touchscreen.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 44

Front panel keys
[Clear Screen]
Deletes all waveforms, annotations and the measurement results of deleted wave-
forms. All settings remain unchanged.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CLEar[:SCReen] on page 450
3.4.2 Analysis controls
The controls in the [Analysis] functional block open various menus for signal analysis.
[Navigation]
The function of this universal rotary knob depends on the usage context:
● If selection menu is open: turn the knob to select a value.
● If a numerical value is selected in the menu, and the keypad is closed: turn the
knob to set a value.
● If the cursors are selected, press the key to select a cursor line. Turn the knob to
change the position of the selected cursor line.
● If an on-screen keypad or on-screen keyboard is open: turn the knob until the
required character is highlighted, then press the knob to apply the selection.
● Otherwise: turn the knob to set the waveform intensity, or press the knob to set the
intensity to 50%.
[Cursor]
Enables the cursor with the last configured cursor setup. The second keypress opens
the "Cursor" menu. If the menu is open, pressing the key turns off the cursor and
closes the menu.
[Meas]
Opens the "Measure" menu, where you can configure up to 6 parallel measurements.
Available measurement types depend on the type of the selected waveform.
[Intensity]
Opens the "Intensities" menu to adjust the luminosity of display elements and the per-
sistence.
[QuickMeas]
Displays the results of basic automatic measurements for the selected channel below
the grid and directly on the waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 45

Using the toolbar
Press the key to stop quick measurements.

Note: Channels other than the selected one are switched off in quick measurement
mode. When you activate quick measurements, cursor measurements are automati-
cally deactivated. Deactivate quick measurements before selecting the cursors.
[Search]
Enables the search with the last configured setup. The second keypress opens the
"Search" menu, where you can perform a search for various events in an acquisition -
for example, peaks or specific width conditions - and analyze the search results.
[FFT]
Activates the spectrum analysis functions with the last configured setup. The second
keypress opens the "FFT" menu.
To deactivate spectrum analysis, press the [FFT] key until the time domain waveform is
displayed.
[Protocol]
Opens the "Bus" menu, which contains the configuration of serial and parallel buses
and the settings for decoding the signals. Key function requires at least the MSO
option R&S RTB-B1 or one of the serial protocol options. See data sheet for available
options.
[Gen]
Opens the "Function Generator" menu, where you can create various waveforms. Key
function requires option R&S RTB-B6.
[Apps Selection]
Opens the "Apps Selection" dialog where you can select the required application or
protocol for your task, for example, mask testing or CAN protocol.
3.5 Using the toolbar

The toolbar at the top of the display provides direct access to important control and
measurement functions. The selected function is highlighted. By default, the toolbar
shows the most frequently used functions. You can configure the content of the toolbar
so that only the required functions are displayed..
Some of the toolbar functions are one-click actions. These actions are performed
immediately when you tap the icon. Other toolbar functions are interactive actions.
When you tap an interactive action, a message informs you what to do next.
Configuring the Toolbar

1. Tap the "Toolbar Setup" icon.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 46

Quick access
2. Disable the functions that you do not need.
3. Tap the functions that you need. You can select maximum 8 functions.
4. Close the dialog box.
3.6 Quick access

If the measurement task requires to change the settings from different menus repeat-
edly, you can use the "QuickAccess". The "QuickAccess" is a user-defined menu,
which can be added to the toolbar.
To configure the "QuickAccess" menu:

1. Add the "QuickAccess" icon to the toolbar as described in "Configuring the Toolbar"
on page 46.
2. Add the required settings and functions to the "QuickAccess" menu:

a) Open the menu that contains the setting.
b) Drag the setting from the menu and drop it on the diagram.
The setting is added to the "QuickAccess".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 47

Menu history
c) Repeat steps a) and b) for each setting and function that you need for the mea-
surement task.
3. To remove unwanted settings and functions:

a) Tap the "Settings" icon of the function.
b) To delete the selected setting or function, tap "Delete".
c) To delete the complete "QuickAccess" menu, tap "Delete All".
► To show or hide the "QuickAccess" menu, tap the "QuickAccess" icon on the tool-
bar.
3.7 Menu history

The menu history is another way to speed up and simplify the usage of the
R&S RTB2000. The menu history is also a user-defined menu, which can be added to
the toolbar. It logs all menus that you used during the current session.
1. Add the "Menu Hist." icon to the toolbar as described in "Configuring the Toolbar"
on page 46.
2. Open some menus and set up parameters.
3. Tap the "Menu Hist." icon on the toolbar.
4. Tap the menu that you want to open.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 48

Getting help
3.8 Getting help

In most menus and dialogs, graphics explain the meaning of the selected setting. For
further information, you can open the help, which provides functional description of
selected setting.
To open the help window

1. Tap the "Menu" icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
2. Tap "Help" on the top of the main menu.
3. Tap the setting for which you need information.
To close the help window

► Tap "Help" on the top of the main menu, or tap the "Close" icon in the upper right
corner of the help window.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 49

R&S®RTB2000 Waveform setup
Connecting probes and displaying a signal
4 Waveform setup
This chapter describes how to connect and set up probes, to adjust the horizontal and
vertical settings, and to control the acquisition.
4.1 Connecting probes and displaying a signal
Risk of instrument damage

Make sure to set the attenuation factor on the instrument according to the probe being
used. Otherwise, the measurement results do not reflect the actual voltage level, and
you might misjudge the actual risk.
The attenuation of the probes that are delivered with the instrument, and the default
attenuation factor of the instrument are 10:1. If you use only the delivered probes and
did not change the attenuation factor, no attenuation adjustment is required.
1. Connect the probes first to the channel inputs, and then to the DUT.
2. Tap the label of the used channel in the bottom line of the display.
3. Tap "Probe".
4. Select the attenuation factor of the probe.

The probe's attenuation factor is indicated on the probe.
No attenuation of passive probes with AC coupling:

If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect, and voltage is
applied to the instrument with factor 1:1. Observe the voltage limits, otherwise you
can damage the instrument.
Current measurements:
If you measure current using a shunt resistor as a current sensor, you have to mul-
tiply the V/A-value of the resistor by the attenuation of the probe. For example, if a
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 50

Horizontal setup
1 Ω resistor and a 10:1 probe is used, the V/A-value of the resistor is 1 V/A. The
attenuation factor of the probe is 0.1, and the resulting current probe attenuation is
100 mV/A.
5. If you connect several probes, repeat steps 2 to 4 for the remaining channels.
6. Press the [Autoset] key.
[Autoset]
Analyzes the enabled analog channel signals, and adjusts the horizontal, vertical, and
trigger settings to display stable waveforms.
In particular, autoset adjusts the following settings:
● Vertical settings of analog channels: vertical scale, offset, and position
● Horizontal settings: time scale (also in Zoom, Quickmeas, FFT, and XY mode), hor-
izontal position of the trigger
● Trigger: set to automatic trigger mode and edge trigger type (except for pattern trig-
ger), trigger source to active existing signal, automatic hysteresis, trigger coupling
to DC, switch off HF / noise reject and hold off
● Reference and math waveforms are switched off
● Annotations are deleted
● Menus are closed
Autoset does not switch off analog and vertical channels, and it does not change the
instrument mode, cursor, measurement, and waveform generator settings.
To adjust only vertical settings of one channel, use the "Auto Scale" function in the
channel short menu, see Chapter 4.3.2, "Short menu for analog channels",
on page 58.
Remote command:
AUToscale on page 313
[Preset]
Resets the instrument to the scope mode and to default state, without analyzing the
signal. The user-defined configuration, measurements and other settings are removed
and all channels and waveforms, except for channel 1, are disabled.
Preset does not change the display settings.
See also: Chapter 10.3, "Reset", on page 195.
Remote command:
*RST on page 311
4.2 Horizontal setup

Horizontal settings, also known as timebase settings, adjust the waveforms in horizon-
tal direction.
Typically, the trigger is the determining point of the waveform record. In many scenar-
ios, you want to analyze the waveform some time before or after the trigger. To adjust
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 51

Horizontal setup
the horizontal acquisition window to the waveform section of interest, you can use the
following parameters:
● The horizontal position defines the time distance of the trigger point (the zero
point of the diagram) to the reference point. Changing the horizontal position, you
can move the trigger point, even outside the screen.
● The reference point is the rescaling center of the time scale on the screen. If you
modify the time scale, the reference point remains fixed on the screen, and the
scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
Unlike vertical settings, which are waveform-specific, the horizontal settings apply to all
active waveforms.
There are several ways to adjust horizontal settings:
● Use the controls in the Horizontal functional block of the front panel to scale the
waveforms, and to set the position.
● Drag one finger horizontally on the screen to change the horizontal position.
Spread or pinch two fingers to change the horizontal scale.
● Use shortcuts to adjust scale and position.
● Use the comprehensive menu to adjust all horizontal settings.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 52

Horizontal setup
4.2.1 HORIZONTAL controls
[Position]
Changes the trigger position, the time distance from the trigger point to the reference
point (trigger offset). The trigger point is the zero point of the diagram. Thus, you can
set the trigger point even outside the diagram and analyze the signal some time before
or after the trigger.
Turn clockwise to move the position to the right, and press the knob to reset the value
to zero. The current value is shown in the information bar.
In zoom and FFT, the knob sets the position in the active diagram. Tap the diagram
that you want to adjust. If a zoom is active, either the position of the zoom window or
the trigger position is changed. In an FFT diagram, the knob changes the center fre-
quency in frequency domain, or the trigger position in time domain.
Remote command:
TIMebase:POSition on page 323
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:POSition on page 353
TIMebase:ZOOM:TIME on page 345
[Scale]
Adjusts the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals, also known as timebase.
Turn clockwise to stretch the waveforms - the scale value time/div decreases. Press
the knob to toggle between coarse and fine scale adjustment. The current value is
shown in the information bar.
In a zoom diagram, the knob changes the zoom scale. In an FFT diagram, the knob
changes the span. Tap the diagram that you want to adjust.
Remote command:
TIMebase:SCALe on page 322
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:SCALe on page 353
TIMebase:ZOOM:SCALe on page 345
[Zoom]
Enables or disables the zoom with the last configuration.
See also: Chapter 6.1, "Zoom", on page 89.
Remote command:
TIMebase:ZOOM:STATe on page 345
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 53

Horizontal setup
[Horizontal]
Opens the menu to configure horizontal scale, position, and reference point. The cur-
rent scale and position is shown in the top information bar.
If zoom is active, you can find also the zoom scale and zoom position in this menu.
[Acquisition]
Opens the "Acquisition" menu. Here you control the data processing - how the wave-
form is built from the captured samples. The current acquisition mode is shown in the
top information bar.
See also: Chapter 4.5, "Acquisition setup", on page 66.
4.2.2 Shortcuts for horizontal settings
To adjust the horizontal scale and the position, you can use the shortcuts on the top of
the display. The labels show the current values.
1 = adjust horizontal scale

2 = adjust horizontal position
4.2.3 Horizontal settings
The comprehensive "Horizontal" menu contains all horizontal settings. In zoom mode,
also zoom settings are listed in the menu.
► To open the menu, press the [Horizontal] key.
Reference Point
Defines the time reference point in the diagram. It is indicated by a gray triangle outline
at the bottom of the diagram.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 54

Vertical setup
The reference point defines which part of the waveform is shown. By default, the refer-
ence point is displayed in the center of the window, and you can move it to the left or
right.
The reference point is the rescaling center of the time scale on the screen. If you mod-
ify the time scale using the [Scale] knob, the reference point remains fixed on the
screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
If you spread and pinch two fingers on the touchscreen to change the time scale, then
the reference point is set between the fingers.
Remote command:
TIMebase:REFerence on page 323
Time Scale
Defines the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals, also known as timebase.
The scaling is indicated in the information bar above the grid.
Remote command:
TIMebase:SCALe on page 322
Horizontal Position
Defines the trigger position, the time distance from the trigger point to the reference
point (trigger offset). The trigger point is the zero point of the diagram. Changing the
horizontal position, you can move the trigger, even outside the screen.
If you want to see a section of the waveform some time before or after the trigger, enter
this time as horizontal position. The requested waveform section is shown around the
reference point. Use positive values to see waveform sections after the trigger - the
waveform and the diagram origin move to the left.
The value is indicated in the information bar above the grid.
Remote command:
TIMebase:POSition on page 323
4.3 Vertical setup

The controls and parameters of the vertical system adjust the vertical scale and posi-
tion of the waveform, and the waveform display. The probe settings also belong to the
vertical setup.
The channel labels at the bottom of the display show the basic vertical settings: vertical
scale (for example, channel 3 in the figure below: 500 mV/div), coupling (AC), probe
attenuation (10:1), and bandwidth (if limited). Clipping of a waveform is indicated by
orange arrows. The label of the selected channel has a brighter colored line on the top.
Figure 4-1: Channel labels. Channel 3 is selected. Channel 1 waveform is clipped.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 55

Vertical setup
There are several ways to adjust vertical settings:

● Use the controls in the Vertical functional block of the front panel to select the
channel, to scale the waveform, and to set the position.
● Drag one finger vertically on the screen to change the position of the selected
channel waveform.
● Spread or pinch two fingers in vertical direction to change the vertical scale of the
selected waveform.
● Use the short menu to adjust coupling and the probe, and to set the vertical scale
automatically.
● Use the comprehensive menu to adjust all vertical settings.
4.3.1 VERTICAL controls
[Ch <n>]
For each analog channel, a channel key is available. The key is illuminated in the
channel color, if the channel is on.
The effect of the keypress depends on state of the channel:
● If channel is off: Turns on the channel and selects it. The rotary knobs alongside
light up in the channel color.
● If the channel is on and in focus (selected): Opens the corresponding channel
menu.
● If the channel is on but not in focus (not selected): Selects the channel waveform.
● If the channel is selected, and the menu is open: Pressing the key turns off the
channel.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:STATe on page 315
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 56

Vertical setup
[Offset/Position (upper knob)]

The upper vertical knob adjusts the following, depending on the selected waveform:
● Offset or position of an analog channel (adjustable: main menu > "Vertical"). The
visual effect is the same. While the offset sets a voltage, position is a graphical set-
ting given in divisions.
● Vertical position of a math or reference waveform, serial bus, or logic pod
The knob lights up in the color of the selected waveform. Turn clockwise to move up
the waveform. Pressing the key has the following effects:
● Analog channels, math waveforms, and buses: sets the value to zero.
● Reference waveforms: sets to original position or to 0 divisions.
● FFT and single bits of a pod: set to default value.
● Pods: set to the center of the display.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:POSition on page 316
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet on page 316
CALCulate:MATH<m>:POSition on page 348
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:POSition on page 353
[Scale]
Sets the vertical scale in Volts per division to change the displayed amplitude of the
selected waveform. For analog waveforms, the scale value is shown in the waveform
label at the bottom. The knob lights up in the color of the selected waveform.
Turn [Scale] clockwise to stretch the waveform. Doing so, the scale value V/div decrea-
ses. Press the knob to toggle between fine and coarse adjustment.
To get the maximum resolution of the waveform amplitude, make sure that the wave-
forms cover most of the screen's height.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:SCALe on page 315
CALCulate:MATH<m>:SCALe on page 349
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:SCALe on page 354
[Logic]
Enables the logic channels. The second keypress opens the menu, where you can
select and configure digital channels for analysis. If the menu is open, pressing the key
disables the logic channels.
Key function requires MSO option R&S RTB-B1.
Logic analyzer functions are described in Chapter 13, "Logic analyzer (option
R&S RTB-B1, MSO)", on page 272.
[Ref]
Displays the reference waveforms with their last configuration. The second keypress
opens the menu, where you can select, create, save and load reference waveforms. If
the menu is open, pressing the key disables the reference waveforms.
Reference waveforms are described in Chapter 6.3, "Reference waveforms",
on page 102.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 57

Vertical setup
[Math]
Displays the math waveforms with their last configuration. A math waveform is a wave-
form that is calculated from the captured data. The second keypress opens the menu,
where you can activate and configure math waveforms, and save and load equation
sets. If the menu is open, pressing the key disables the math waveforms.
Mathematics is described in Chapter 6.2, "Mathematics", on page 93.
4.3.2 Short menu for analog channels
To adjust the probe and the coupling, you can use the short menu. Here you can also
open the comprehensive menu, and switch off the channel.
► To open the short menu for a channel, tap the channel label in the bottom line of
the display.
If the channel was not selected, tap twice: Once to select the waveform, and next
to open the short menu.
Functions in the short menu:

● "AC | DC": see "Coupling" on page 60.
● "<current bandwidth>" ("20MHz" in the above example): see "Bandwidth"
on page 60.
● "Probe": opens the "Probe" menu, see Chapter 4.4.2, "Probe settings",
on page 65.
● "Auto Scale": analyzes the selected channel signal and adjusts the vertical scale.
This function is only available in the channel short menu.
● "Off": turns off the channel.
● "Menu": opens the channel menu.
4.3.3 Vertical settings
The comprehensive "Vertical" menu contains all vertical settings.
1. To open the "Vertical" menu:

a) Open the main menu.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 58

Vertical setup
b) Select "Vertical".
2. Select the parameter that is assigned to the upper vertical knob: "Offset" or "Posi-
tion".
3. Open the channel menu.
► To open the channel menu directly, press the corresponding channel key.
If the channel was active but not selected, press twice: Once to select the wave-
form, and next to open the short menu.
Figure 4-2: Channel menu, split into two halves
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 59

Vertical setup
Vert. Position Knob

Selects the parameter to be changed with the [Offset/Position (upper knob)]: "Offset" or
"Position". By default, position is set. [Preset] does not affect the assignment.
Channel <n>
Opens the channel menu.
State
Switches the selected channel on or off.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:STATe on page 315
Coupling
Selects the input coupling, which influences the signal path between input connector
and the following internal signal stage. The current coupling of each channel is shown
in the waveform labels below the grid.
"AC" AC coupling is useful if the DC component of a signal is of no inter-
est. AC coupling blocks the DC component of the signal so that the
waveform is centered on zero volts.
If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect,
and voltage is applied to the instrument with factor 1:1. Observe the
voltage limits, otherwise you can damage the instrument.
"DC" With DC coupling, the input signal passes unchanged, all signal com-
ponents are shown.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:COUPling on page 317
Bandwidth
Selects the bandwidth limit. At full bandwidth, all frequencies in the specified range of
the instrument are acquired and displayed accurately with less than 3 dB attenuation.
Full bandwidth is used for most applications.
To reduce noise, you can set a frequency limit. Higher frequencies are removed from
the signal. Limited bandwidth is indicated by "BW" in the waveform label.
For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo-
scope bandwidth. The oscilloscope bandwidth should be at least 3 times higher than
the maximum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude
without aliasing.
Most test signals are more complex than a simple sine wave and include several spec-
tral components. A digital signal, for example, is built up of several odd harmonics. For
digital signals, the oscilloscope bandwidth should be at least 5 times higher than the
clock frequency to be measured.
The oscilloscope is not an autonomous system. You need a probe to measure the sig-
nal, and the probe has a limited bandwidth, too. The combination of oscilloscope and
probe creates a system bandwidth. To reduce the effect of the probe on the system
bandwidth, the probe bandwidth should exceed the bandwidth of the oscilloscope, the
recommended factor is 1.5 x oscilloscope bandwidth.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 60

Vertical setup
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth on page 317
Vertical Scale
Sets the vertical scale in Volts per division to change the displayed amplitude of the
selected waveform. The current value is shown in the waveform label below the grid.
Vertical scale directly affects the resolution of the waveform amplitude. To get the full
resolution of the ADC, set up the waveforms to cover most of the height of the dia-
gram.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:SCALe on page 315
Offset
Sets the offset voltage, which corrects an offset-affected signal. The vertical center of
the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is repositioned within
the diagram area. To set the offset automatically, use [Autoset].
Use the offset to measure small AC voltages that are overlaid by higher DC voltages.
Unlike AC coupling, the DC part of the signal is not lost with offset setting.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet on page 316
Position
Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram. While the offset sets a voltage,
position is a graphical setting given in divisions. The visual effect is the same as for off-
set.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:POSition on page 316
Ground
Connects the input to a virtual ground. All channel data is set to 0 V. Ground connec-
tion is labeled with . The coupling is not affected by the ground setting.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:COUPling on page 317
Invert
Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off. To invert means to reflect the volt-
age values of all signal components against the ground level. Inversion affects only the
display of the signal but not the trigger.
For example: if the oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge, the trigger is not changed
by inversion, but the actually rising edge is displayed as falling edge.
Inversion is indicated in the waveform labels by line above the channel name.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:POLarity on page 318
Deskew
Sets a time delay for the selected channel.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 61

Vertical setup
Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different

length of cables, probes, and other sources. Correct deskew values are important for
accurate triggering. Signals that are routed over lines with different lengths have a dif-
ferent propagation delay. This delay can lead to a non-synchronous waveform display.
For example, a coax cable with a length of 1 meter has a propagation delay of typically
5.3 ns.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:SKEW on page 318
Zero Adjust
Differences in DUT and oscilloscope ground levels can cause larger zero errors, which
affect the waveform. If the DUT is ground-referenced, the "Zero Adjust" corrects the
zero error and sets the probe to the zero level.
You can assess the zero error by measuring the mean value of a signal that returns
zero.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:ZOFFset[:VALue] on page 318
Waveform Color
Selects the color scale for the waveform color. Each scale comprises a set of colors,
where each color represents a certain frequency of occurrence.
"Temperature" Display in temperature colors. Blue corresponds to rare occurrences
of the samples, while white indicates frequent ones.
"Rainbow" Display in rainbow colors. Blue corresponds to rare occurrences of
the samples, while red indicates frequent ones.
"Fire" Display in fire colors. Yellow corresponds to rare occurrences of the
samples, while red indicates frequent ones.
"Default" Displays the waveform in its default monochrome color.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:WCOLor on page 319
Probe
See Chapter 4.4.2, "Probe settings", on page 65.
Threshold
See Chapter 4.3.4, "Threshold settings", on page 62.
Label
See Chapter 4.3.5, "Label settings", on page 63.
4.3.4 Threshold settings
A threshold is used for digitization of analog signals. If the signal value is higher than
the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic). Otherwise, the
signal state is considered low (0 or false) if the signal value is below the threshold.
Access: [Ch <n>] > "Threshold" (scroll down).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 62

Vertical setup
Threshold
A threshold is used for digitization of analog signals. If the signal value is higher than
the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic). Otherwise, the
signal state is considered low (0 or false) if the signal value is below the threshold.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:THReshold on page 319
Hysteresis
To avoid the change of signal states due to noise, set the hysteresis. If the signal oscil-
lates inside the hysteresis range and crosses the threshold, no state transition occurs.
Threshold
Hysteresis
Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0
The numerical values of "Small", "Medium", and "Large" hysteresis correspond to the
vertical scale.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis on page 320
Find Threshold
The instrument analyzes the channel and sets the threshold for digitization. If no level
can be found, the existing value remains unchanged, and you can set the thresholds
manually.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:FINDlevel on page 320
4.3.5 Label settings
In the "Label" menu, you can define a name label for the selected waveform.
Access: [Ch <n>] > "Label" (scroll down).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 63

Probes
Label
Activates or deactivates the label display. The label is shown at the waveform on the
right edge of the display.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:LABel:STATe on page 321
CHANnel<m>:LABel on page 320
Predefined Label
Selects a predefined label text. You can edit the text with "Edit Label".
Edit Label
Opens on-screen keypad to enter a label text. If you previously have selected a prede-
fined label, it is already written in the entry line, and you can modify it.
The maximum name length is 8 characters, and only ASCII characters provided on the
on-screen keypad can be used.
4.4 Probes
With R&S RTB2000, you can use voltage and current probes that have a BNC connec-
tor. To get correct measurement results, always set the appropriate attenuation factor
and the unit in the "Probe" menu.
4.4.1 Adjusting passive probes
When using a passive probe, you have to compensate it when you connect it to the
instrument the first time. Compensation matches the probe cable capacitance to the
oscilloscope input capacitance to assure good amplitude accuracy from DC to upper
bandwidth limit frequencies. A poorly compensated probe reduces the performance of
the probe-oscilloscope system and introduces measurement errors resulting in distor-
ted waveforms and inaccurate results.
Two connector pins for compensation are at the front panel. The left pin is on ground
level. The next pin supplies a square wave signal for the adjustment.
1. Press the [Apps Selection] key.
2. Tap "Probe Adjust".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 64

Probes
3. Follow the instructions of the wizard. It guides you through the compensation proc-
ess.
Use the compensation trimmer of the probe to get optimum square wave response.
For details, refer to the documentation of your probe.
4.4.2 Probe settings
For passive probes, which are connected with a BNC connector, you set the probe
attenuation and the unit, and you can start an adjustment procedure for the probe. All
settings are channel-specific. When you set the attenuation, you can select a prede-
fined factor, for example "10:1", or enter a user-defined value.
If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect, and voltage is
applied to the instrument with factor 1:1. Observe the voltage limits, otherwise you can
damage the instrument.
Access: [Ch <n>] > "Probe" (scroll down). Or: short menu > "Probe"
User
If default values do not fit, you can enter an arbitrary attenuation factor. The vertical
scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the displayed values
are equal to the undivided measured signal values.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 65

Acquisition setup
Remote command:
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual on page 321
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:MANual on page 322
Unit
Selects the unit that the probe can measure.
● V - for voltage measurements
● A - for current measurements
Remote command:
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:UNIT on page 321
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:UNIT on page 322
Probe Adjust
Starts the probe adjustment procedure. A wizard explains the adjustment step by step.
4.5 Acquisition setup

During an acquisition, the R&S RTB2000 captures the signal and converts it to digital
samples. The digital samples are processed according to the acquisition settings. The
result is a waveform record that is displayed on the screen and stored in memory.
The number of waveform samples in one waveform record is called the record length.
The rate of recording waveform samples - the number of waveform samples per sec-
ond - is the sample rate. The higher the sample rate, the better is the resolution and
the more details of the waveform are visible.
A sufficient resolution is essential for correct reconstruction of the waveform. If the sig-
nal is undersampled, aliasing occurs - a false waveform is displayed. To avoid aliasing
and accurately reconstruct a signal, the sample rate must be at least 3 to 5 times the
fastest frequency component of the signal.
There are several ways to adjust and control acquisition:
● Use the controls in the Trigger functional block of the front panel to start and stop
acquisition. See Chapter 5.1, "Trigger controls", on page 72.
● Use shortcuts to adjust the acquisition mode, and to perform a single acquisition.
● Use the comprehensive menu to adjust all acquisition settings.
► To start or stop acquisition, use the [Run Stop] and [ Single] keys in the Trigger
section at the front panel.
4.5.1 Shortcuts for acquisition settings
To adjust the acquisition mode, and to perform a single acquisition, you can use the
shortcuts on the top of the display. The labels show the current values.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 66

Acquisition setup
1 = start or stop a continuous acquisition, or start a single acquisition if [Single] is active

2 = adjust the acquisition mode
3 = shows the current sample rate for information
4.5.2 Acquisition settings
Acquisition settings define the processing of the captured samples in the instrument.
The current acquisition mode and sample rate are shown in the top information bar.
► To adjust acquisition settings, press the [Acquisition] key.
The history is described in Chapter 6.4.3, "History settings", on page 108.
Record Length
Sets the record length, the number of waveform samples that are stored in one wave-
form record.
If you use the history, you can disable the "Auto" record length and enter a value in the
"History" menu. In this case, the defined record length is shown in the "Acquisition"
menu.
Remote command:
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic on page 325
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue] on page 325
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 67

Acquisition setup
Acquire Mode
Defines how the waveform is built from the captured samples. There are two general
methods to build the waveform record: sample decimation and waveform arithmetic.
Sample decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform
points with lower sample rate and a less precise time resolution. The R&S RTB2000
uses decimation, if the waveform sample rate is less than the ADC sample rate. The
acquisition modes "Peak Detect" and "High Resolution" are decimation methods.
Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisi-
tions of the signal. The acquisition modes "Average" and "Envelope" are arithmetic
methods.
"Sample" Usually, most signals are displayed optimally with this acquisition
mode but very short glitches might remain undiscovered by this
method.
If the sample rate of the waveform is less than the ADC sample rate,
the instrument reduces the number of samples: one of n samples in a
sample interval is recorded as waveform point, the other samples are
discarded (decimation). Conversely, if the sample rate of the wave-
form is higher than the ADC sample rate, the instrument adds wave-
form points to the captured samples using an interpolation method.
"Peak Detect" The minimum and the maximum of n samples are recorded as wave-
form points, the other samples are discarded. Thus the instrument
can detect fast signal peaks at slow time scale settings that would be
missed with other acquisition modes.
"High Resolu- The average of n captured sample points is recorded as one wave-
tion" form sample. Averaging reduces the noise, the result is a more pre-
cise waveform with higher vertical resolution.
"Average" The average is calculated from the data of the current acquisition and
a number of consecutive acquisitions before. The method reduces
random noise. It requires a stable, triggered and repetitive signal.
The number of acquisitions for average calculation is defined with
"No. of Averages" on page 69.
If the waveform is clipped, the instrument shows a distorted average
waveform to indicate the clipping. Adjust the vertical scale to avoid
the clipping.
"Envelope" Each acquisition is done in sample mode, and the minimum and max-
imum values over some consecutive acquisitions build the envelope.
The resulting diagram shows two envelope waveforms below and
above the normal waveform: the minimums (floor) and maximums
(roof), representing the borders in which the signal occurs. this
method is useful, for example, if the waveform is noisy but the noise
is not relevant for the measurement.
"Enve- Each acquisition is done in peak detect mode, and the most extreme
lope + PD" values of all consecutive acquisitions build the envelope. This method
is more precise than "Envelope".
Remote command:
ACQuire:TYPE on page 326
CHANnel<m>:ARIThmetics on page 327
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 68

Acquisition setup
CHANnel<m>:TYPE on page 326

ACQuire:PEAKdetect on page 327
ACQuire:HRESolution on page 327
No. of Averages
Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform. The higher
the number, the better the noise is reduced.
To restart the average calculation, press the [Clear Screen] key.
Remote command:
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt on page 328
ACQuire:AVERage:RESet on page 328
Nx Single
Sets the number of waveforms that are acquired with a [Single] acquisition.
The setting is available if the history option is installed.
Remote command:
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt on page 313
Roll
Enables the automatic roll mode. The instrument switches to roll mode if the Time
Scale is equal or slower than Start Roll Time.
The roll mode displays the untriggered, continuous signal, and moves the captured
input data on the display from the left to the right. The instrument shows the waveform
immediately, without waiting for the complete acquisition of the waveform record. The
record length is set automatically ("Auto" mode). Some math functions are non-calcula-
ble if roll mode is active.
You can use the horizontal and vertical zoom in roll mode if the acquisition is stopped.
Remote command:
TIMebase:ROLL:AUTomatic on page 328
Start Roll Time

Sets the limit timebase for the roll mode. The instrument switches automatically to roll
mode if:
● the Time Scale exceeds the value given here.
● the roll mode is activated (Roll).
Remote command:
TIMebase:ROLL:MTIMe on page 329
Interpolation
Selects the interpolation method if interpolation is required to get the defined record
length.
"Sin(x)/x" Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a sin(x)/x curve,
and also the adjoining sample points are considered by this curve.
The interpolated points are placed on the resulting curve. This inter-
polation method is the default method. It is precise and shows the
best signal curve.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 69

Acquisition setup
"Linear" Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a straight line, the
interpolated points are placed on the line. You see a polygonal wave-
form similar to the real signal, and also the ADC sample points as
vertexes.
"Sample-Hold" The ADC sample points are displayed like a histogram. For each
sample interval, the voltage is taken from the sample point and con-
sidered as constant, and the intervals are connected with vertical
lines. Thus, you see the discrete values of the ADC.
Remote command:
ACQuire:INTerpolate on page 329
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 70

R&S®RTB2000 Trigger
5 Trigger
Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms. Choosing
the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect
various incidents in signals.
A trigger occurs if the trigger conditions are fulfilled. The instrument acquires continu-
ously and keeps the sample points to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record.
When the trigger occurs, the instrument continues acquisition until the posttrigger part
of the waveform record is filled. Then it stops acquiring and displays the waveform.
When a trigger is recognized, the instrument does not accept another trigger until the
acquisition is complete.
Trigger conditions include:
● Source of the trigger signal (channel)
● Trigger type and its setup
● Trigger mode
In addition, the horizontal position of the trigger point and the reference point are
important to display the interesting part of the signal. See Chapter 4.2, "Horizontal
setup", on page 51.
The trigger level and position are marked in the grid. The markers have the color of the
trigger source. Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the upper
information bar.
There are several ways to set up the trigger:
● Use the controls in the Trigger functional block of the front panel.
● Use shortcuts to adjust the trigger source, trigger mode, and main parameters of
the trigger type.
● Use the comprehensive menu to select the trigger type and to adjust all trigger set-
tings.
The R&S RTB2000 can output a pulse at the Aux Out connector when the instrument
triggers. See "Pulse" on page 87.
● Trigger controls....................................................................................................... 72
● Shortcuts for trigger settings................................................................................... 73
● General trigger settings...........................................................................................74
● Edge trigger.............................................................................................................76
● Width trigger............................................................................................................78
● Video trigger............................................................................................................80
● Pattern trigger......................................................................................................... 82
● Timeout trigger........................................................................................................ 85
● Actions on trigger.................................................................................................... 86
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 71

Trigger controls
5.1 Trigger controls

The keys and the rotary knob in the Trigger functional block adjust the trigger and start
or stop acquisition.
The green LED above the [Levels] knob lights up when the instrument triggers.
[Trigger]
Opens the "Trigger" menu.
[Source]
Changes the analog trigger source. Press the key repeatedly until the required analog
source is selected. If a digital source or serial bus was selected in the "Trigger" menu,
or if the "Trigger Type" is set to "Pattern", the key opens the menu.
The key lights up in the color of the selected channel, and the selected source is
shown in the information bar.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SOURce on page 331
[Auto Norm]
Toggles the trigger mode between "Auto" and "Norm". The key lights up in white if the
trigger mode is "Norm". The current mode is also shown in the information bar.
"Auto" The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger
conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes prece-
dence. This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger
is set. The waveform on the screen is not synchronized, and succes-
sive waveforms are not triggered at the same point of the waveform.
"Norm" The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs, that is, if
all trigger conditions are fulfilled. If no trigger occurs, no waveform is
acquired and the last acquired waveform is displayed. If no waveform
was captured before, nothing is displayed.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:MODE on page 331
[Levels]
The rotary knob changes the trigger level. Turn clockwise to move up the trigger level.
Pressing the knob sets the level to 50% of the signal amplitude.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 72

Shortcuts for trigger settings
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue] on page 333
TRIGger:A:FINDlevel on page 333
[Force Trigger]
Provokes an immediate single acquisition. Use this key if the acquisition is running in
normal mode and no valid trigger occurs. Thus, you can confirm that a signal is availa-
ble and use the waveform display to determine how to trigger on it.
Remote command:
*TRG on page 312
[Run Stop]
Starts and stops the continuous acquisition. A green light indicates a running acquisi-
tion. A red light shows that acquisition is stopped.
The status is shown also at the right end of the information bar: "Run", "Complete",
"Trig?" (waiting for trigger, in normal trigger mode) or "Not ready" (working). For slow
timebases, the status "Pre" or "Post" is shown together with an indicator that shows the
filling level of the buffer.
Remote command:
RUN on page 313
RUNContinous on page 313
STOP on page 314
ACQuire:STATe on page 314
[ Single]
Starts a specified number of acquisitions. A white light indicates that the instrument is
in single mode. The information bar shows "Complete" if the acquisition has been fin-
ished.
If the history option R&S RTB-K15 is available, you can set the number of acquisitions:
press the [Acquisition] key and enter "Nx Single".
Remote command:
SINGle on page 313
RUNSingle on page 313
5.2 Shortcuts for trigger settings

To adjust the trigger source, mode, and trigger type specific settings, you can use the
shortcuts on the top of the display. The labels show the current values.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 73

General trigger settings
1 = adjust the trigger source

2 = open the keypad to enter the value of the trigger level or threshold
3 = adjust slope or polarity
4 = adjust the trigger mode
5 = start or stop a continuous acquisition, or start a single acquisition if [Single] is active
6 = available settings depend on the trigger type
5.3 General trigger settings
General trigger settings are independent of the trigger type. They are highlighted in the
above figure and described in the current section. The other trigger settings are spe-
cific for individual trigger types, and they are described in the following sections.
Trigger Mode
Toggles the trigger mode between "Auto" and "Norm". The trigger mode determines the
behavior of the instrument if no trigger occurs. The current setting is shown in the infor-
mation bar.
"Auto" The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger
conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes prece-
dence. This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger
is set. The waveform on the screen is not synchronized, and succes-
sive waveforms are not triggered at the same point of the waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 74

General trigger settings
"Norm" The instrument acquires a normal waveform only, if a trigger occurs,

that is, if all trigger conditions are fulfilled. If no trigger occurs, no
waveform is acquired and the last acquired waveform is displayed. If
no waveform was captured before, nothing is displayed.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:MODE on page 331
Trigger Type
Selects the trigger type.
"Edge" Triggers on signal edges.
See Chapter 5.4, "Edge trigger", on page 76.
"Width" Triggers on pulse width.
See Chapter 5.5, "Width trigger", on page 78.
"Video" Triggers on various PAL, NTSC and HDTV standard video signals.
See Chapter 5.6, "Video trigger", on page 80.
"Pattern" Triggers on logical combinations of the input channels.
See Chapter 5.7, "Pattern trigger", on page 82.
"Timeout" Triggers on signal level timeout.
See Chapter 5.8, "Timeout trigger", on page 85.
"Line" The line trigger uses the waveform of the power supply's alternating
line voltage (typically 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC) as the trigger signal source.
Use this trigger to detect issues related to the frequency of the power
grid.
The line trigger does not have any settings.
"Serial Bus" Triggers on a serial bus. Requires that at least one protocol option
R&S RTB-K1, K2, or K3 is installed, a serial bus is configured, and a
decoded signal is available.
See Chapter 12.1.1, "Protocol - common settings", on page 212.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TYPE on page 332
Source
Selects the trigger source.
"C1, C2, C3, Select one of the analog input channels as trigger source.
C4"
"D0 to D15" Select one of the digital channels as trigger source if MSO option
R&S RTB-B1 is installed.
Not available for video trigger.
"Extern" Sets the external trigger input on the front panel as trigger source.
Available for edge and video trigger.
"B1 or B2" Serial bus that is used for triggering on protocols. Only available, if
the trigger type "Serial Bus" is selected.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SOURce on page 331
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 75

Edge trigger
Hold Off, Hold Off Time

Enables the hold off and defines the "Hold Off Time". The next trigger occurs only after
the hold off time has passed.
The trigger "Hold Off" defines when the next trigger event is recognized after the cur-
rent trigger event. Thus, it affects the next trigger to occur after the current one. Hold
off helps to obtain stable triggering when the oscilloscope is triggering on undesired
events.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:MODE on page 332
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME on page 332
Actions on Trigger, Configuration

Enables and select the actions to be done on trigger event. for details, see Chap-
ter 5.9, "Actions on trigger", on page 86.
5.4 Edge trigger

The edge trigger is the most common trigger type. The trigger occurs when the signal
from the trigger source passes the trigger level in the specified direction (slope).
Figure 5-1: Edge trigger event with positive slope (rising edge)
► [Trigger] > "Trigger Type" = "Edge"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 76

Edge trigger
Slope............................................................................................................................. 77
Trigger Level, Threshold............................................................................................... 77
Coupling........................................................................................................................ 77
HF Reject...................................................................................................................... 77
Noise Reject..................................................................................................................77
Slope
Sets the edge direction for the trigger. You can trigger on:
● rising edge, that is a positive voltage change
● falling edge, that is a negative voltage change
● rising and falling edge. After starting an acquisition, the instrument triggers on
the first identified edge.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOPe on page 333
Trigger Level, Threshold

Sets the voltage level or threshold for the trigger.
You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display, or turn the Levels knob. To
set the trigger level to 50% of the signal amplitude, press the Levels knob.
For width and timeout trigger, the trigger level is the threshold of the trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:FINDlevel on page 333
Coupling
Sets the coupling for the trigger source.
"AC" Alternating current coupling. A highpass filter removes the DC offset
voltage from the trigger signal.
"DC" Direct current coupling. The trigger signal remains unchanged.
"LF Reject" Sets the trigger coupling to high frequency. A 15 kHz highpass filter
removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal. Use this mode
only with very high frequency signals.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling on page 334
HF Reject
Enables or disables an additional 5 kHz lowpass filter in the trigger path. This filter
removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling.
You can use either "HF Reject" or "Noise Reject".
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:HFReject on page 334
Noise Reject
Extends the hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation
around the trigger level.
You can use either "HF Reject" or "Noise Reject".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 77

Width trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:NREJect on page 335
5.5 Width trigger

The width trigger compares the pulse width (duration) with given time limits. It detects
pulses with an exact pulse width, pulses shorter or longer than a given time, and also
pulses inside or outside the allowable time range. The pulse width is measured at the
trigger level.
You can use the width trigger, for example, to trigger on glitches.
Figure 5-2: Pulse width is shorter (left) or longer (right) than a given duration (also known as glitch
trigger)
min min
max 1 max 2
Figure 5-3: Pulse width is inside or outside an allowable time range
1 = Inside: min width < pulse < max width

2 = Outside: pulse < min width OR pulse > max width
±Δ ±Δ
1 2
Figure 5-4: Pulse width is equal or unequal to a given duration, with optional variation (Δ)
1 = Equal: (width - variation) < pulse < (width + variation)

2 = Unequal: pulse < (width - variation) OR pulse > (width + variation)
► [Trigger] > "Trigger Type" = "Width"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 78

Width trigger
Polarity.......................................................................................................................... 79
Comparison...................................................................................................................79
Time t............................................................................................................................ 80
Variation........................................................................................................................ 80
Time t1, Time t2.............................................................................................................80
Threshold...................................................................................................................... 80
Hysteresis..................................................................................................................... 80
Polarity
Sets the polarity of the pulse. You can trigger on:
● positive going pulse, the width is defined from the rising to the falling slopes.
● negative going pulse, the width is defined from the falling to the rising slopes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:POLarity on page 335
Comparison
Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limits.
"Width >" Triggers on pulse width longer than the reference "Time t".
"Width <" Triggers on pulse width shorter than the reference "Time t".
"Width =" Triggers on pulse width equal to the reference "Time t" if "Variation"
Δt = 0.
If "Variation" ≠ 0, this setting triggers on pulses within the range t±Δt.
"Width ≠" Triggers on pulses unequal to the reference "Time t", if "Variation"
Δt = 0.
If "Variation" ≠ 0, this setting triggers on pulses outside a range t ± Δt.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 79

Video trigger
"Inside"[, ]"Out- Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range specified with "Time t1"
side" and "Time t2".
This method is an alternative setting to the range definition with
"Time t" and "Variation". The values are interdependent. "Variation"
and "Time t" are adjusted, if you change t1 and t2, and vice versa.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe on page 335
Time t
Sets the reference time, the nominal value for comparison settings "Width >",
"Width <", "Width =", and "Width ≠".
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh on page 336
Variation
Sets a range Δt to the reference "Time t", if comparison is set to "Width =" or "Width ≠".
The instrument triggers on pulses inside or outside the range t±Δt.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa on page 336
Time t1, Time t2

Set the lower and upper time limits defining the time range if "Width =" or "Width ≠" is
set for comparison. "Time t" and "Variation" are adjusted accordingly.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe on page 335
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa on page 336
Threshold
Threshold of the trigger source channel, used as trigger level for the width trigger.
See also "Threshold" on page 63 and "Trigger Level, Threshold" on page 77.
Remote command:
Hysteresis
Hysteresis of the trigger source channel, see "Hysteresis" on page 63.
Remote command:
5.6 Video trigger

The video or TV trigger is used to analyze analog baseband video signals. You can
trigger on baseband video signals from standard definition and high definition stand-
ards connected to an analog channel input or to the external trigger input.
The instrument triggers on the sync pulses.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 80

Video trigger
First select the standard and the signal polarity, then decide to trigger on lines or fields
and enter the specific settings.
► [Trigger] > "Trigger Type" = "Video"
Figure 5-5: Video trigger menu
Standard........................................................................................................................81
Signal............................................................................................................................ 82
Mode............................................................................................................................. 82
Line............................................................................................................................... 82
Standard
Selects the color television standard.
You can trigger on various standard-definition television (SDTV) signals:
● "PAL"
● "NTSC"
● "SECAM"
● "PAL-M"
● "SDTV 576i" (PAL and SECAM)
High-definition television (HDTV) standards are indicated by the number of active lines
and the scanning system:
● "HDTV 720p"
● "HDTV 1080p" (p for progressive scanning)
● "HDTV 1080i" (i for interlaced scanning)
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TV:STANdard on page 337
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 81

Pattern trigger
Signal
Selects the polarity of the signal. Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity. If
the video modulation is positive, the sync pulses are negative. If the modulation is neg-
ative, sync pulses are positive. The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering,
therefore incorrect polarity setting causes a sporadic triggering by the video informa-
tion.
T T
Figure 5-6: Positive video signal with negative bi-level sync pulse (SDTV, left) and negative signal
with positive tri-level sync pulse (HDTV, right)
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TV:POLarity on page 337
Mode
Selects from the following the trigger conditions:
"All Frames" The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of all video signal frames.
"Odd Frames" The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of video signal frames with
an odd frame number.
"Even Frames" The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of video signal frames with
an even frame number.
"All Lines" The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines.
"Line Number" Triggers on an exact "Line" number.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TV:FIELd on page 337
Line
Sets an exact line number if "Mode" is "Line Number". The oscilloscope triggers exactly
on the beginning of the selected line in any field.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TV:LINE on page 338
5.7 Pattern trigger

The pattern trigger is a logic trigger. It provides any logical combination of the input
channels and supports you in verifying the operation of digital logic. Additionally, you
can set a time limitation to the pattern. Thus you can also trigger on bus patterns of
parallel buses.
The channel pattern is configured in the "Logic Editor" dialog box.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 82

Pattern trigger
► [Trigger] > "Trigger Type" = "Pattern" > "Edit Pattern"
Figure 5-7: Pattern trigger with logic editor
Thresholds
At the bottom of the "Logic Editor", you see the current threshold settings of all chan-
nels. Here, you can directly activate the channels, and change the threshold values.
The thresholds of analog channels are also set in the "Channel <n>" > "Threshold"
menu, see also Chapter 4.3.4, "Threshold settings", on page 62.
The thresholds of logic channels are set in the "Logic" menu, see Chapter 13.2, "Logic
analyzer settings", on page 274.
Logic settings
H | L | X, Set All............................................................................................................. 83
And | Or.........................................................................................................................84
Duration.........................................................................................................................84
True | False................................................................................................................... 84
Time limitation............................................................................................................... 84
H | L | X, Set All
Defines the pattern by selecting the state "H" (high), "L" (low) or "X" (do not care) for
each active analog and digital channel.
The word length of the pattern depends on the number of available analog and digital
channels.
Analog channels: 2 bit for 2-channel instruments, 4 bit for 4-channel instruments.
Digital (16 bit): the logic channels D0, D1,...,D15 are only available with MSO option
R&S RTB-B1.
Thus the pattern can have 2, 4, 18, or 20 bits.
Use "Set All" to set all channels to the same state.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 83

Pattern trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:PATTern:SOURce on page 338
And | Or
Sets the logical combination of the channel states.
"AND" All defined states must be true.
"OR" At least one of the defined states must be true.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:PATTern:FUNCtion on page 339
Duration
The switch has the following two effects:
● Selects the mode of the True | False comparison.
● Enables or disables the Time limitation.
True | False
Defines whether the instrument triggers on fulfillment of the logical condition, or on vio-
lation.
● If Duration = on, the instrument triggers when the logic combination "Is True" or
"Is False" for a specified time duration.
● If Duration = off, the instrument triggers when the logic combination is found in the
signal ("Goes True"), or if it disappears ("Goes False").
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:PATTern:CONDition on page 339
Time limitation
To set a time limitation for the pattern, you have several possibilities. They are similar
to the setting of a pulse width, see Chapter 5.5, "Width trigger", on page 78.
● "Timeout" and "Time t"
Define a minimum time during which the signals match the pattern condition.
● "Width >" or "Width <" and "Time t"
Triggers if the pattern condition changes before or after the specified time.
● "Width =", "Time t1" and "Variation"
Triggers if the pattern condition is fulfilled for a duration "Time t1" ± "Variation".
● "Width ≠", "Time t1" and "Variation"
Triggers if the pattern condition is fulfilled for a duration shorter than "Time t1" -
"Variation", or longer than "Time t1" + "Variation".
● "Inside", "Time t1" and "Time t2"
Triggers if the pattern condition is fulfilled for a duration between "Time t1" and
"Time t2". These settings are an alternative setting to the definition with "Width =".
The time values are interdependent and adjusted accordingly.
● "Outside", "Time t1" and "Time t2"
Triggers if the pattern condition is fulfilled for a duration shorter than "Time t1", or
longer than "Time t2". These settings are an alternative setting to the definition with
"Width ≠". The time values are interdependent and adjusted accordingly.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 84

Timeout trigger
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:PATTern:MODE on page 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] on page 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 341
5.8 Timeout trigger

The timeout trigger checks if the signal stays above or below the threshold voltage for
a specified time lapse. In other words, the trigger occurs if the trigger source signal
does not cross the threshold during the specified time.
time
Figure 5-8: Timeout trigger with range Stays High
► [Trigger] > "Trigger Type" = "Timeout"
Figure 5-9: Timeout trigger menu
Range
Selects the relation of the signal level to the threshold:
Stays High The signal level stays above the trigger level.
Stays Low The signal level stays below the trigger level.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:RANGe on page 341
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 85

Actions on trigger
Time
Defines the time limit for the timeout at which the instrument triggers.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:TIME on page 341
Threshold
Threshold of the trigger source channel, used as trigger level for the timeout trigger.
See also "Threshold" on page 63 and "Trigger Level, Threshold" on page 77.
Remote command:
Hysteresis
Hysteresis of the trigger source channel, see "Hysteresis" on page 63.
Remote command:
5.9 Actions on trigger

A trigger event can be used to initiate one or several actions. All available actions can
be initiated at the same time, and for all trigger types.
Actions on trigger are not available if the following applications are active:
● Mask test
● Power analysis
● Bode plot
To set up trigger actions

1. Stop the acquisition.
2. Press the [Trigger] key.
3. In the "Trigger" menu, activate "Actions on Trigger".
4. Select "Configuration".
5. Select the actions.
6. If "Screenshot" is selected, configure the screenshot settings in "File" menu >

"Screenshots".
7. If "Save Wavef." is selected, configure the export (waveform, target, file name and
format) in "File" menu > "Waveforms".
8. Start the acquisition with [Run Stop] or [Single].
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 86

Actions on trigger
Actions on Trigger
Activates the selected actions on trigger event.
Remote command:
TRIGger:EVENt[:ENABle] on page 342
Configuration
Opens a menu to select the actions that are initiated on trigger event.
Pulse
Generates a pulse on the Aux Out connector on trigger event. The acquisition is not
delayed, the pulse generation runs asynchronously.
Enabling "Pulse" sets the "Setup" > "Aux Out" selection to "Trigger Out", and vice
versa. Selecting another item in the "Aux Out" menu disables the pulse action.
Using remote commands, you can set the pulse width and polarity of the trigger out
pulse.
Remote command:
TRIGger:OUT:MODE on page 461 (TRIGger:OUT:MODE TRIGger)
TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth on page 461
TRIGger:OUT:POLarity on page 462
Sound
Generates a beep on trigger event. The acquisition is not delayed, the sound genera-
tion runs asynchronously. The minimum time between two beeps is 1 s. If the instru-
ment triggers faster, not all events are notified by a beep.
Remote command:
TRIGger:EVENt:SOUNd on page 342
Screenshot
Saves a screenshot on each trigger event. The screenshot is saved when the acquisi-
tion is complete. During saving, the acquisition stops, and restarts when saving is fin-
ished. Thus, the waveform update rate decreases significantly.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 87

Actions on trigger
Set up the target directory, color, file name and file format in "File" menu > "Screen-
shots" before you start acquisition.
If fast segmentation is active, only the last acquisition is saved.
Remote command:
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave on page 343
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave:DESTination on page 343
Save Wavef.
Saves the data of a selected waveform on each trigger event. The waveform is saved
when the acquisition is complete. During saving, the acquisition stops, and restarts
when saving is finished. Thus, the waveform update rate decreases significantly.
Before you start acquisition, select the waveform and set up the target directory, file
name and file format in "File" menu > "Waveforms".
Remote command:
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave on page 344
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave:DESTination, 1, en_US
References
Saves reference waveforms of all active channels, and activates the references. This
action works only with single acquisition.
The channels are assigned to the references: C1 to R1, C2 to R2 and so on. If a chan-
nel is off, the assigned reference is also not active.
If the history option is installed, and "Nx Single" > 1, the waveforms of the last acquisi-
tion are saved as reference waveforms.
Remote command:
TRIGger:EVENt:REFSave on page 343
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 88

R&S®RTB2000 Waveform analysis
Zoom
6 Waveform analysis
● Zoom.......................................................................................................................89
● Mathematics............................................................................................................93
● Reference waveforms........................................................................................... 102
● History and segmented memory (option R&S RTB-K15)......................................107
● Search................................................................................................................... 115
6.1 Zoom
The zoom magnifies a part of the waveform to view more details. The zoom is applied
to all active analog and digital channels and math waveforms.
The following zoom types are available:
● Horizontal zoom: the waveforms are displayed with a shorter time scale while the
vertical scale remains unchanged.
● Vertical zoom: the zoom waveforms are enlarged in vertical and horizontal direc-
tion.
6.1.1 Zooming in
When you activate the zoom, two windows are displayed: the original waveform dia-
gram at the top, and the zoom window at the bottom.
If zoom is active, the time scale of the original waveform diagram is at least 80 ns/div.
When you activate the zoom at a smaller time scale, the instrument changes the time
scale to the minimum value.
► To activate the horizontal zoom, press the [Zoom] key.
► To activate the vertical zoom:

a) Tap the "Zoom" icon on the toolbar.
b) Drag you finger on the screen to draw the diagonal of the zoom area. You can
draw the zoom area on the original waveform, or on an existing zoom wave-
form. A rectangle indicates the zoom area.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 89

Zoom
Figure 6-1: Display of horizontal zoom: zoom in bottom window, normal waveform in upper window
1 = Tap to activate zoom settings

2 = Tap to activate normal waveform settings
3 (blue) = Horizontal zoom scale and width of the zoom area
4 (red) = Horizontal zoom position
5 = Acquire mode, can be set in zoom window or in the upper status bar
6 = Horizontal scale and position of the normal waveform
7 = Close zoom window
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 90

Zoom
Figure 6-2: Display of vertical zoom
6.1.2 Modifying the zoom
There are several ways to adjust the zoom:

● Use finger gestures on the screen.
● Use the [Scale] and [Position] knobs.
● Tap the zoom scale or zoom position label in the zoom window and enter a value
on the keypad. These settings are horizontal values, which take effect in horizontal
and vertical zoom windows. See number 3 and 4 in Figure 6-1.
● Use the menu to enter exact numerical values. See Chapter 6.1.3, "Zoom settings",
on page 92.
To adjust the zoom using gestures

1. For horizontal and vertical zoom:
a) To change the horizontal zoom position, drag one finger horizontally in the
zoom window.
b) To change the horizontal zoom scale and width of the zoom area, spread or
pinch two fingers in horizontal direction.
2. For vertical zoom only:

a) To change the vertical zoom position, drag one finger vertically in the zoom
window.
b) To change the vertical zoom scale and height of the zoom area, spread or
pinch two fingers in vertical direction.
3. To change the position of the zoom area in vertical zoom:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 91

Zoom
Drag the zoom area on the original waveform in the upper window.
To adjust the zoom using the horizontal rotary knobs

1. To set the focus to the zoom window (lower window), tap in the zoom window.
2. For horizontal and vertical zoom:

a) To change the horizontal zoom scale and width of the zoom area, turn the hori-
zontal [Scale] scale knob.
b) To change the horizontal zoom position, turn the horizontal [Position] knob.
3. For vertical zoom only:

a) To change the vertical zoom scale and height of the zoom area, turn the verti-
cal [Scale] scale knob.
b) To change the vertical zoom position, turn the [Offset/Position] knob (upper
knob in Vertical section).
4. To set the focus to the normal waveform, tap the upper window.
Now the knobs are applied to the normal waveform and adjust time scale and hori-
zontal position of the waveform.
6.1.3 Zoom settings
Zoom settings are listed in the "Horizontal" menu if the zoom is active.
1. If the zoom is off, activate the zoom.
2. Press the [Horizontal] key.
Zoom Scale
Defines the horizontal scale for the zoom window in seconds per division. The scaling
determines the width of the zoom area (12 divisions * scaling per division), the time-
base of the zoom window. The zoom area is indicated in the original waveform window.
"Zoom Scale" has effect only in horizontal zoom.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 92

Mathematics
Remote command:
TIMebase:ZOOM:SCALe on page 345
Zoom Position
Defines the distance of the trigger point to the reference point in the zoom window. The
value determines the position of the zoom area in the upper window.
"Zoom Position" has effect in horizontal and vertical zoom.
Remote command:
TIMebase:ZOOM:TIME on page 345
6.2 Mathematics
A math waveform is a calculated waveform. It is calculated out of one or two analog
channels, a constant, or another math waveform using several predefined operations.
You can define up to 5 equations. The complete configuration is called equation set
and can be saved for later use.
You can analyze math waveforms in the same way as channel waveforms: use zoom,
perform automatic and cursor measurements, and save as reference waveform.
When the instrument is in roll mode, some math functions are non-calculable.
6.2.1 Short menu for math waveforms
The math waveform label at the bottom of the screen shows the main settings of the
math waveform: sources, operation, unit, and vertical scale. The short menu shows the
status of all math waveforms.
1 = open short menu

2 = display a math waveform
3 = select a math waveform for scaling and positioning
Menu = open the "Mathematics" menu and "Equation Set Editor"
Off = disable mathematics
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 93

Mathematics
6.2.2 Configuring math waveforms
1. Press the [Math] key.

The math waveforms are activated, using the latest settings.
2. Press the [Math] key again.

The "Mathematics" menu and the "Equation Set Editor" are shown.
3. Configure the equations of the math waveforms in the "Equation Set Editor". You
can define up to 5 equations. The complete configuration is called equation set and
can be saved for later use.
a) Tap the row of the math waveform that you want to configure.
b) To activate the math waveform, set its "State".
c) Select the "Operation".
d) Select the "Source(s)", the operands of the mathematical equation: 1 or 2 ana-
log channels, constant values or math waveforms. Only math waveforms of
lower order are available, for example, M2 can be a source for M3, M4, and
M5. For M1, math waveform sources are not available.
e) Select the "Unit".
f) Optionally, add label to the math waveform. The label is shown at the right
edge of the grid.
4. Close the "Equation Set Editor".
5. To adjust vertical scale and position using vertical knobs:

a) Select a math waveform in the short menu.
b) Use the rotary knobs in the Vertical section of the front panel. See: Chap-
ter 4.3.1, "VERTICAL controls", on page 56.
6. To enter exact values for vertical scale and position:

a) Open the "Mathematics" menu.
b) In the "Equation Set Editor", select a math waveform.
c) In the menu, enter "Vertical Scale" and "Position".
6.2.3 Settings for math waveforms
In the "Mathematics" menu, you find the general settings for math waveforms. You can:
● Switch mathematics on and off.
● Save configured equations in an equations set file, see Chapter 6.2.7, "Saving and
loading formularies", on page 101.
● Load a previously saved equation set.
● Adjust the display of the math waveform that is selected in the "Equation Set Edi-
tor":
– Vertical position
– Vertical scale
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 94

Mathematics
– Waveform color
Remote commands:
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe on page 347
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:POSition on page 348
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:SCALe on page 349
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:WCOLor on page 349
● Waveform transfer: see Chapter 15.9.1.3, "Math waveforms", on page 433
● History data: see Chapter 15.6.5.2, "Displaying history segments", on page 373
and Chapter 15.6.5.3, "Timestamps", on page 376
6.2.4 Mathematic functions
When you open the "Mathematics" menu, the "Equation Set Editor" opens in parallel.
Figure 6-3: Mathematics menu and Equation Set Editor
The "Mathematics" menu is described in Chapter 6.2.3, "Settings for math waveforms",
on page 94.
In the "Equation Set Editor", you configure up to 5 math waveforms, set their visibility,
and define a label for each waveform. Each equation consists of one or two operands
and an operator. An operand (source) can be an input channel, a constant value, or a
math waveform with lower number.
The following operations are available:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 95

Mathematics
Addition Source1 + Source2

Adds the values of 2 sources (channel or math waveform, or con-
stant).
Subtraction Source1 - Source2

Subtracts the second source from the first source.
Multiplication Source1 * Source2

Multiplies the two sources.
Division Source1 / Source2

Divides the first source by the second source.
For small amplitudes of the second source, the result increases
quickly. If the second source crosses zero, the result would be a
range of +∞ to -∞. In this case, instead of 0 V, the calculation func-
tion uses the value that the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the sec-
ond source represents. (For an 8-bit value, for example, 1/256).
Square Source1 * Source1

Squares the source. If the source contains negative values that
have been clipped, then the result contains positive clipping.
Square Root Square Root (Source)

Calculates the square root of the source. Note that the square root
of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped.
Abs. Value |Source|

Calculates the absolute value of the source. All negative values
are inverted to positive values. The positive values remain unmodi-
fied. If the source has negative values that have been clipped, the
result contains positive clipping.
Reciprocal 1V / Source
Divides 1V by the source values.
For small source amplitudes the result increases quickly. If the
source crosses zero, the result would be a range of +∞ to -∞. In this
case, instead of 0 V, the calculation function uses the value that
the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the operand represents. (For an
8-bit value, for example, 1/256).
Inverse Inverts all voltage values of the source, i.e. all values are mirrored
at the ground level. Thus, a positive voltage offset becomes nega-
tive. If the amplitude of the source is clipped, the result is the inver-
ted limitation.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 96

Mathematics
Common Log. log(Source)

Calculates the logarithm to the basis 10 of the source. Note that
the logarithm of a negative number is undefined and the result is
clipped.
Natural Log. ln(Source)

Calculates the logarithm to the basis e (Euler number) of the
source. Note that the logarithm of a negative number is undefined
and the result is clipped.
Derivative f'(Source), see Chapter 6.2.4.1, "Derivative", on page 97.
Integral Calculates the definite integral of the source.

The calculation is displayed in the illustration. The integration
starts at point "a" and adds the area beneath the waveform. Point
"b" indicates the currently calculated value. At the end of the posi-
tive alternation, the integral function reaches its maximum. Due to
the homopolar operand used in this example, the waveform of the
area reaches zero after the negative alternation.
Use a "V-Marker" cursor to measure the area for an extract of the
waveform.
Low pass Low pass filter and high pass filter, see Chapter 6.2.5, "Filters",
on page 98.
High pass
Track ... Track functions, see Chapter 6.2.6, "Tracks", on page 98.
Remote command:
● CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] on page 347
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel on page 348
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel:STATe on page 348
6.2.4.1 Derivative
The derivative corresponds to the rise of the tangent through a function point and indi-
cates the dimension of the change in quantity of the source in time. The larger the
quantity change of the operand per time becomes, the larger the result of the derivative
is.
The calculation is approximated using the secant based on the current calculated value
and a value with a distance of 0.1 DIV. Thus, the time axis has a finitely small resolu-
tion. Therefore, scale the input signal to display the required area appropriately. The
formula is:
DERI(Source,dx) in <unit>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 97

Mathematics
The constant dx defines how many samples are averaged before using the average in
derivative calculation. The optimal value depends on the signal's frequency, the sig-
nal's noise and the configured record length and time scale (timebase). Recommended
values are between 50 and 5000. Select a smaller value for smaller timebases or
smaller record lengths.
6.2.5 Filters
The R&S RTB2000 provides several ways to filter the input signal:
● Lowpass filter by selecting a bandwidth limit in the acquisition path (vertical chan-
nel settings), see Chapter 4.3.3, "Vertical settings", on page 58.
● Create a filtered math waveform (lowpass or highpass). Filtered math waveforms
are described below.
To create a lowpass or highpass, the infinite impulse response filter (IIR) is used. The
filter require an additional setting: the cut-off frequency "BW".
Table 6-1: Available math filters
Low pass LP(Source,BW)

Calculates a low-pass filtered waveform of the source waveform using 2nd order
IIR. The cut-off frequency BW is set as a const value. Signal components with fre-
quencies higher than the cut-off frequency are attenuated significantly.
High pass HP(Source,BW)

Calculates a high-pass filtered waveform of the source waveform using 1st order
IIR. The cut-off frequency BW is set as a constant value. Signal components with
frequencies below the cut-off frequency are attenuated significantly.
IIR filter need a settling time. During settling time, the filtered waveform is not shown
on the screen, thus the filtered waveform is shorter than the source waveform. The
duration of the settling time depends on the cut-off frequency "BW". The lower the limit,
the longer the settling time, an the shorter the filtered waveform.
The cut-off frequency is limited and depends on the horizontal resolution of the display
data. If the selected cut-off frequency exceeds the limit, the limit frequency is shown in
red in the math waveform label.
6.2.6 Tracks
The track is a waveform that shows measurement values in time-correlation to the

measured signal. It is the graphical interpretation of measurement values of a single
acquisition. The R&S RTB2000 can track frequency, period, pulse width, and duty
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 98

Mathematics
cycle of pulse width modulated waveforms (PWM) and pulse density modulated wave-
forms (PDM). Math tracks are independent of the measurement functions.
Tracks are used, for example, in power analysis, or for analysis of motor controls,
which use PWM signals to control speed. PDM signals are used, for example, for
model flight control.
Table 6-2: Available track waveforms
Track period TPER(Source) in s

Tracks the period values of the source waveform, the time between the cross-
ing points of two subsequent on or off edges with the threshold.
See Figure 6-6.
Track frequency TFREQ(Source) in Hz

Tracks the frequency values of the source waveform.
Track pulse width TPW(Source) in s

Tracks the pulse width of the source waveform. For a PWM source signal, the
result is the demodulated waveform.
See Figure 6-5.
Track duty cycle TDCY(Source) in %

Tracks the duty cycle of the source waveform. For a PWM source signal, the
result is the demodulated waveform.
See Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4: Unipolar PWM signal with duty cycle track M1, which is the demodulated waveform
Figure 6-5: Unipolar PWM signal with pulse width track M2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 99

Mathematics
Figure 6-6: Unipolar PDM waveform with pulse width track M1 in green and period track M2 in blue
6.2.6.1 Settings for tracks
The determination of track values requires a threshold. When the pulse crosses the
threshold, the pulse width is measured and displayed as track value. To detect the real
transitions of the pulse signal, the hysteresis is used. The unit is set automatically.
UL
Sets the threshold for unipolar track sources. The signal is measured at the crossing
points of the signal with the threshold.
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold[:UPPer] on page 350
Hyst
Sets the hysteresis for correct edge detection.
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold:HYSTeresis on page 350
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 100

Mathematics
Edge
Sets the rising or falling edge as a reference for each measurement. The setting helps
to determine values in terms of the power stage switching state.
For unipolar sources, the on edge is the rising edge, and the off edge is the falling
edge.
Remote command:
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:EDGE on page 349
6.2.6.2 Demo for tracks
Short demo tutorials explain PWM signals and the track function.
To show a demo:
2. Select the "Applications" tab.
3. Select "Demo".
4. Select the "Track" tab.
5. Select the signal.
6. Connect the demo signal to the input channel as shown in the wizard.
7. Tap "Start".
6.2.6.3 Example signals for tracks
To get familiar with track functions, the R&S RTB2000 provides several pre-configured
signals with track waveforms. These example waveforms require option R&S RTB-B6.
To display an example signal:

2. Select the "Track" tab.
3. Select the signal.
4. Connect the input channels. The required connection is shown in the upper left cor-
ner of the display.
6.2.7 Saving and loading formularies
You can save equation sets with up to 5 formularies in the internal storage of the instru-
ment, or to USB flash drive, and load them later. Furthermore, you can move or copy
saved equation sets from internal storage to USB flash drive, and vice versa, see
Chapter 9.6, "Export and import", on page 186.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 101

Reference waveforms
To save an equation set

1. In the "Mathematics" menu, tap "Save".
2. Select the "Destination": internal storage or USB, and the directory.

The destination /USB_FRONT is only active, if a USB flash drive is connected to the
front USB port.
3. Enter the filename.
4. Optionally, enter a comment.
5. Tap "Save".
6.3 Reference waveforms

To compare waveforms and analyze differences between them, you can display refer-
ence waveforms.
Reference waveforms are waveform data stored in the internal reference storages.
Four reference waveforms are available and can be displayed: R1 to R4.
The display of a reference waveform is independent from the display of the source
waveform; you can change the vertical and also horizontal scales and positions. The
current scale values are shown in the waveform label of the reference waveform.
Short menu
The short menu shows the status of all reference waveforms.
1 = select a reference waveform

2 = display a reference waveform
3 = Reference waveform label with vertical and horizontal scale, reference number and source waveform
File format
Waveforms can be saved as reference waveforms. The file format is TRF. Files can be
saved to and loaded from internal memory or external USB flash device.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 102

Reference waveforms
TRF is the specific binary format for reference waveforms of the R&S RTB2000. It con-
tains the amplitude value of each sample that is displayed on the screen (8 bit or 16 bit
long). For peak-detect waveforms, 2 values per sample are saved. The file contains
also time information (time of the first sample and the sample interval) and current
instrument settings.
The data can be loaded as reference waveform for further use on the instrument. It is
not intended for analysis outside the R&S RTB2000.
6.3.1 Using references
To create and display a reference waveform

1. To activate the reference waveform and open the "References" menu, press the
[Ref] key twice.
2. To create a reference waveform from an active waveform:

a) Select the "Source" waveform.
b) Select the target "Reference".
c) Tap "Copy"
The new reference waveform is created on top of its origin, and it has the focus.
3. To change the scaling and position, use the horizontal and vertical [Position] and
[Scale] knobs.
See also:
● Chapter 4.3.1, "VERTICAL controls", on page 56
● Chapter 4.2.1, "HORIZONTAL controls", on page 53
To save a waveform as reference waveform

You can save any active waveform directly as reference waveform to a file.
1. To open the "References" menu, tap the menu icon and select "References".
2. Tap "Save Reference".
3. Select the waveform that you want to save: "Source".
4. Tap "Destination".
5. Select the "Location" (internal or USB).
6. If you save the file on USB flash device, you can set a target folder.
a) Double-tap the target folder. If the folder does not exist, you can create a new
one.
The folder opens.
b) Tap "Accept Dir." .
7. If necessary, change the "File Name".
8. Optionally, add a comment.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 103

Reference waveforms
9. Tap "Save"
To load a reference waveform

1. To open the "References" menu, tap the menu icon and select "References".
2. Select the target "Reference" waveform.
3. Tap "Load Reference".
4. Select the "Location", the folder, and the reference file.
5. Tap "Load".
The instrument writes the waveform data to the selected reference waveform and
displays it.
6.3.2 Settings for reference waveforms
► To open the "References" menu:

a) Tap the menu icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
b) Scroll down. Select "References".
Source.........................................................................................................................105
Reference....................................................................................................................105
Copy............................................................................................................................105
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 104

Reference waveforms
State............................................................................................................................105
Load Reference...........................................................................................................105
Load Setup..................................................................................................................105
Save Reference.......................................................................................................... 106
Waveform Color.......................................................................................................... 106
Label........................................................................................................................... 106
└ Bit..................................................................................................................106
└ Label............................................................................................................. 106
└ Predefined Label...........................................................................................106
└ Edit Label...................................................................................................... 106
Source
Defines the source of the reference waveform. Any active channel, math or reference
waveform can be selected.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:SOURce on page 351
REFCurve<m>:SOURce:CATalog? on page 351
Reference
Selects one of the four possible reference waveforms.
Copy
Copies the "Source" waveform to the selected reference waveform. The reference
waveform is kept until you update it or load another waveform to the reference.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:UPDate on page 352
State
Activates the reference waveform and displays it.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:STATe on page 351
Load Reference
Provides functions to load a reference waveform. You can load CSV and TRF files.
Select the "Location" of the waveform file (internal or USB), and the file. Tap "Load Ref-
erence".
You can also delete obsolete files in the dialog box.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:LOAD on page 352
Load Setup
Loads the device settings that were used to obtain the stored reference waveform. The
settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage and never written
to a USB flash device.
Load the reference waveform first, and then the settings. If settings were not stored,
"Load Setup" is not active.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 105

Reference waveforms
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:LOAD:STATe on page 353
Save Reference
Opens a dialog box to save a waveform as reference waveform:
"Source" Select the waveform to be saved. You can save any active analog
channel, math or reference waveform, or logic pod.
"Destination" Select the "Location" (internal directory or USB flash device), and the
target directory.
"File Name" Enter the filename. If a file with the same filename already exists in
the destination directory, it will be overwritten without notification. The
file format is TRF.
"Comment" Optionally, enter text to describe the waveform.
"Save" Saves the data.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:SAVE on page 352
Waveform Color
Selects a color for the reference waveform. The default color is white. You can select
another monochrome color, or a color scale.
The color scales are described in "Waveform Color" on page 62.
Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:WCOLor on page 354
Label
Opens a menu to specify user-defined text labels for the individual reference wave-
forms.
Bit ← Label
Selects the reference waveform for labeling.
Label ← Label
Enables or disables the user-defined label for the selected reference waveform.
Predefined Label ← Label

Edit Label ← Label

Remote command:
REFCurve<m>:LABel on page 354
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 106

History and segmented memory (option R&S RTB-K15)
6.4 History and segmented memory (option R&S RTB-

K15)
Using the history and segmented memory, you can access the data of previously
acquired waveforms and analyze them. For example, you can analyze signals that
occur in short bursts with long idle times, packet communication on serial buses, radar
pulses, and laser pulses. The segmented memory is used to store the waveforms and
provides a segment table to analyze the stored waveforms.
You can analyze history segments in the same way as the waveform of the latest
acquisition. All R&S RTB2000 measurement and analysis tools are available: zoom,
cursor measurements, quick and automatic measurements, mask test, serial protocol
analysis, mixed-signal functions and so on.
The segment table and the waveform data of history segments can be saved to file.
The fast segmentation mode reduces the blind time of the acquisition.
6.4.1 Segmented memory
If an acquisition runs, the instrument stores the captured data in the memory, pro-
cesses the data and displays the waveform. The segmented memory keeps the data of
the displayed waveform and also the data of the waveforms that have been captured
before. Each stored waveform is called a segment. The record length of the segments
can be defined. The number of segments depends on the record length. The shorter
the record length, the more segments can be saved.
Total memory 10 segments
4 waveforms acquired 4 segments

-3 -2 -1 0
Segmented
memory at
time = t5
Discarded
earlier
waveforms t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
12 waveforms acquired 10 segments
-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
Segmented
memory at
time = t13
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 t 10 t 11 t 12 t 13
Figure 6-7: Segmented memory. In this example, the memory can store 10 segments.
Each segment has a timestamp time to identify when the events took place.
The history can access the stored segments and display them. When you start a new
acquisition, the memory is cleared and the segments are written anew.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 107

The history stores the following data during acquisition:

● All active analog channels.
● All logic channels if at least one logic is active (with option R&S RTB-B1).
● Decoded bus data if the bus is active (with at least one serial protocol option, for
example, R&S RTB-K1 or K2).
Fast segmentation
During normal acquisitions, only a short time of the acquisition cycle is used for sam-
pling; processing and display take most of the time. The processing and display time is
blind time causing a gap in the recorded signal. Usual acquisitions can miss very short-
time and infrequent events occurring during the dead time.
To reduce the dead time and thus the probability of missed events, fast segmentation
is provided. Fast segmentation takes effect for [Single] acquisitions if "Nx Single" > 1.
With fast segmentation, subsequent triggered acquisitions are captured very fast, with
hardly any dead time between the acquisitions. After the acquisition of all segments
has been completed, the data is processed and the latest waveform is displayed.
Using the history viewer, you can view and analyze all stored waveform segments.
6.4.2 Activating the history
To activate the history

1. Tap the "Menu" icon.
2. Select "History".
3. Enable "Show History".

The segment table and the history player are shown.

The captured segments are listed in the segment table, and the buttons in the his-
tory player are active.
To disable the history

► In the history player, tap "Exit".
If you close only the segment table, you can use the history player and see the
waveform segments in greater detail. To open the segment table again, open the
"History" menu, and tap "Show History".
6.4.3 History settings
History and segmentation settings are located in the "History" menu. The "Acquisition"
provides an additional setting: "Nx Single".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 108

1. Activate the history.
2. If you want to set an individual record length or segment number, disable "Auto".
If "Auto" is enabled, the record length is selected in the "Acquisition" menu.
3. Set the "Record Length", or "No. of Segments".

The record length and the number of segments are interdependent, if one parame-
ter is set, the other is adjusted by the instrument.
4. If necessary, enable Fast Segmentation.
5. Set the number of waveforms to be captured by a [Single] acquisition:

a) Press the [Acquisition] key.
b) Set Nx Single.
The "History" menu has the following settings:
Auto
Defines how the record length and number of segments are set: automatically by the
instrument, or by setting the record length or number of segments manually.
In automatic mode, you can adjust the record length in the "Acquisition" menu. Auto-
matic setting of the number of segments takes effect only if auto trigger is set. When
you change from auto to normal trigger mode, the current segment size remains.
Remote command:
ACQuire:MEMory[:MODE] on page 370
Record Length
Shows or sets the record length, depending on the selected "Auto" mode. Record
length is the number of waveform samples that are stored in one waveform record. The
number of available history segments is adjusted automatically.
Remote command:
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic on page 325
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue] on page 325
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 109

No. of Segments
Shows or sets the number of history segments in the memory, depending on the
selected "Auto" mode. The record length is adjusted accordingly. When you change the
number of segments, the history is deleted.
See also: Chapter 6.4.1, "Segmented memory", on page 107
Fast Segmentation
If enabled, the acquisitions are performed as fast as possible, without processing and
displaying the waveforms. When acquisition has been stopped, the data is processed
and the latest waveform is displayed. Older waveforms are stored in segments. You
can display and analyze the segments using the history.
Fast segmentation takes effect for [Single] acquisitions if "Nx Single" > 1.
See also: Chapter 6.4.1, "Segmented memory", on page 107
Remote command:
ACQuire:SEGMented:STATe on page 372
Show History
Enables or disables the history.
6.4.4 Segment table and history player
The memory segments are continuously written when an acquisition is running. When
you activate the history, the segment table opens but it is empty when the acquisition is
running. When you stop the acquisition, the captured segments are listed in the seg-
ment table, and the history player becomes active.
The segment table shows the index and timestamp of all history segments, and
whether the segment was captured on a trigger event or in auto mode. Below the table,
you find the history player with functions to view the segments that are stored in the
memory.
The history segments store the data of the currently active channels. You can acquire
several channels at once, and display and analyze the channels individually.
You can show all history segments in sequence, or display a single segment.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 110

To display history segments

1. Activate the history.
3. Set the "Time Format" to be shown in the table: absolute or relative time.
4. Set the "Speed".
5. To play all segments once, tap "Run".
6. To play all segments repeatedly:

a) Enable the "Repeat" button.
b) Tap "Run".
7. To access a particular segment, you can:

● Tap the segment in the segment table.
● Drag the slider until the required segment number is shown.
● Tap "Number" and enter the segment number. The newest segment has always
the number "0". Older segments have a negative number.
● Use "Prev." and "Next" to show the adjacent segment.
8. If the history segments contain the data of several channels and you want to ana-
lyze only one or several channels, disable all channels that you do not need.
Functions in the segment table and history player
Time Format
Sets the format of the timestamp. The timestamp shows the time of the currently dis-
played history segment. Thus, the time relation between acquisitions is always availa-
ble. More precisely, the timestamp is the time of the trigger event.
The timestamp can be absolute or relative:
● Absolute: Date and daytime of the trigger event of the displayed segment.
Depending on the horizontal position, the waveform can be captured up to 100,000
seconds after the trigger event, and thus after the displayed timestamp. The instru-
ment considers this delay automatically, all measurements are related to the trigger
event.
● Relative: time difference of the current segment to the newest segment (index = 0).
Remote command:
Chapter 15.6.5.3, "Timestamps", on page 376
Save
Saves the segment table to a CSV file on a connected USB flash drive. The file con-
tains all timestamps: relative time, time to previous, and absolute time. To save the
waveform segments, use [Save Load] key > "Waveforms".
See also: Chapter 6.4.5, "Exporting history data", on page 113.
Remote command:
EXPort:ATABle:NAME on page 380
EXPort:ATABle:SAVE on page 381
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 111

Play
Starts and stops the playback of the history segments.
Remote command:
...:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe
Prev.
Steps back to the next older segment.
Next
Steps forward to the next newer segment.
Repeat
If selected, the playback of the selected history segments repeats automatically.
Remote command:
...:HISTory:REPLay
Speed
Sets the speed of the history playback: automatic, slow, middle, or fast.
Remote command:
...:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed
Number
Accesses a particular history segment in the memory to display it. The newest acquisi-
tion segment has always the index "0". Older segments have a negative index. You
can also drag the slider, which is above the icons. The current segment is shown in the
index bar.
Remote command:
...:HISTory:CURRent
Overlay
Displays the segments with infinite persistence. Thus, you can see all data points of all
displayed segments of a player cycle.
Average
Calculates and displays the average of the current segment and the segments before.
At the newest segment, the average of all segments is shown. Player restart resets the
average calculation. Average requires a stable, triggered and repetitive signal.
Envelope
Displays the envelope that is built from the maximum and minimum values of the cur-
rent segments and the segments before. At the newest segment, the envelope of all
segments is shown. Player restart resets the envelope calculation.
Exit
Disables the history, and closes the segment table and the history player.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 112

6.4.5 Exporting history data
Data of history segments can be saved to files on a USB flash drive even if the history
is not active ("Show History" is disabled). You can select to save all visible channels, or
one channel. In addition, you can save the complete time information of the segment
table.
6.4.5.1 Saving history to file
Before you can save history data, acquire the waveform and activate the history, so
that the segment table is visible.
To save the waveform history segments

1. Connect a USB flash drive to the instrument.
2. Press the [Save Load] key.
3. Select "Waveforms" in the menu.
4. Under "Points", select "History Data".
5. Under "Source", select whether you want to store all visible channels, or one of
them.
6. Enter the "File Name". This name is the name of the folder that contains the seg-
ment files.
The file format is CSV.
7. To select the target folder, tap the "Destination" field.

The location is always "/USB_FRONT", saving to internal storage is not possible.
8. Tap "Save".
A message shows the progress of the saving process.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 113

To save the segment table

1. Connect a USB flash drive to the instrument.
2. In the segment table window, tap "Save".
3. To select the target folder, double-tap it.
4. Tap "New File".
5. Enter the filename.
6. Tap "Enter".
The file is saved immediately, and the window is closed.
6.4.5.2 File organization and content
The segment table and history segments are saved to CSV files.
Segment table
The segment table file contains all information that is shown in the table, and also all
timestamps: relative time, time to previous, and absolute time.
Figure 6-8: Content of a segment table file
Waveforms
Each history segment is saved to a separate file, and all segment files are written to a
folder that contains only the files of the saved acquisition. You can specify the name of
the folder. The names of the data files include the segment index.
Figure 6-9: Content of a history waveform folder
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 114

Search
The data files contain the time and voltage data of the samples. If you save all visible
channels, the voltages of all channels are written into one file.
Figure 6-10: Content of a history segment file, two channels are saved
In addition to the data files, an index file is written. The index file delivers information
on the files and the segments. For each segment, the segment index, save date and
time, and the filename is listed.
Figure 6-11: Content of a history index file
6.5 Search
6.5.1 Search conditions and results
The search functions of R&S RTB2000 can find all edges, pulse widths, peaks, or
other events in an acquisition that match the search conditions. For each search type,
specific settings are available. Searches can be performed on channel, math or refer-
ence waveforms, available sources depend on the search type.
To configure the search

1. Press the [Search] key.
2. Select the waveform that you want to search for events: "Source".
3. Select the event type that you want to find: "Search Type".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 115

Search
4. Configure the search conditions: "Setup".
The found events and the search conditions are shown in the result table at the bottom
of the display. The table shows the following result values: result number, time value,
and optional value depending on the search type (voltage, width).
During running acquisition, the results in the table are updated continuously, and the
events are marked at the top of the diagram by a brown triangle outline.
Figure 6-12: Search results and settings during running acquisition
Remote commands to get search results:

● SEARch:RCOunt? on page 369
● SEARch:RESult:ALL? on page 368
● SEARch:RESult<n>? on page 369
● SEARch:RESDiagram:SHOW on page 368
● SEARch:RESult:BCOunt? on page 368
To display search results

When the acquisition is stopped, you can browse the search results.
2. Tap the search result that you want to analyze. If necessary, scroll the list.
The selected event is marked by a filled triangle and a magnifying glass.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 116

Search
3. In the "Search" menu, select "Track event".

The selected event is moved to the reference point. If you select another event, it is
shown at the same position.
To save search results

1. In the upper right corner of the search result table, tap the "Save" symbol.
2. Connect a USB flash drive if you want to save the data outside the instrument.
3. Select the correct "Destination" and the path.

You can also store the data on the instrument. Therefore, select the "Destination"
"/INT/SEARCH".
4. If necessary, change the filename and enter a comment.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 117

Search
5. Tap "Save".
The data is saved to a CSV file.
6.5.2 General search settings
General search settings are independent of the search type. They are described in the
current section. The specific settings for individual search types are described in the
following sections.
► To open the "Search" menu, press the [Search] key.
Search
Enables and disables the search mode.
Remote command:
SEARch:STATe on page 355
Search Type
Selects the event type you want to search for.
"Edge" Similar to the edge trigger, an edge search result is found when the
waveform passes the given level in the specified direction.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.3, "Edge search", on page 119.
"Width" The width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width, or pulses
shorter or longer than a given time, or pulses inside or outside the
given time range. It is similar to the width trigger.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.4, "Width search", on page 120.
"Peak" The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given peak-to peak value.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.5, "Peak search", on page 122.
"Rise/Fall time" The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time,
or rise/fall times shorter or longer than a given limit, or rise/fall times
inside or outside a given time range.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.6, "Rise/fall time search", on page 122.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 118

Search
"Runt" The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude. In addi-
tion, you can define a time limit for the runt.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.7, "Runt setup", on page 124.
"Data2Clock" The Data2Clock search - also known as setup/hold - finds violation of
setup and hold times. It analyzes the relative timing between two sig-
nals: a data signal and the synchronous clock signal.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.8, "Data2Clock", on page 125.
"Pattern" The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states inside
or outside a specified time range. For each channel, its state and
threshold level is defined. The states are combined logically, and the
time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range.
For settings, see Chapter 6.5.9, "Pattern search", on page 127.
"Protocol" The protocol search finds various events in decoded data serial sig-
nals. The events are protocol-specific and correspond to the trigger
settings of the serial protocol.
Remote command:
SEARch:CONDition on page 355
Source
Selects the waveform to be analyzed by search. Available sources depend on the
selected search type.
Edge, width and pattern search you can perform on analog and logic channels. Peak,
rise/fall and runt search are possible on active analog channels, math and reference
waveforms. For Data2Clock search, you need two active analog channels.
For protocol search, select the configured bus.
Remote command:
SEARch:SOURce on page 356
Setup
Opens a menu to define the search parameters for the selected search type.
Track event
If enabled, the selected result is moved to the reference point. Thus you can always
see the selected event in the diagram.
Save
Opens a dialog box to save the search results. The file format is CSV.
Remote command:
EXPort:SEARch:NAME on page 370
EXPort:SEARch:SAVE on page 370
6.5.3 Edge search
Similar to the edge trigger, an edge search result is found when the waveform passes
the given level in the specified direction.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 119

Search
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Edge" > "Setup"
Slope
Sets the slope to be found: rising, falling, or both slopes.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe on page 357
Level
Sets the voltage level for the search. To let the instrument set the level, tap "Find
Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel on page 357
Hysteresis
Sets a hysteresis range to the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused
by noise oscillation around the level. To let the instrument set the hysteresis, tap "Find
Threshold".
For a rising edge, the hysteresis is below the search level. Otherwise, for a falling edge
the hysteresis is above the level.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel:DELTa on page 357
Find Threshold
Analyzes the signal, sets the level to 50% of the signal amplitude, and also sets the
hysteresis.
6.5.4 Width search
The width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width, or pulses shorter or longer
than a given time, or pulses inside or outside the allowable time range. It is similar to
the width trigger.
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Width" > "Setup"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 120

Search
Polarity
Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity on page 358
Level
Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured. To let the instrument set
the level, tap "Find Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel on page 358
Hysteresis
Sets a hysteresis range to the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused
by noise oscillation around the level. To let the instrument set the hysteresis, tap "Find
Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel:DELTa on page 358
Comparison
Sets the condition how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limits.
The comparison works like the comparison of the width trigger, see Chapter 5.5, "Width
trigger", on page 78.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe on page 358
Width
Sets the reference pulse width, the nominal value for comparisons.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 121

Search
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh on page 359
Variation
Sets a range Δt to the reference "Width" if comparison is set to "Equal" or "Not equal".
The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width ± Δt.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa on page 359
6.5.5 Peak search
The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given peak-to-peak value (magnitude).
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Peak" > "Setup"
Polarity
Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for a peak.
Remote command:
SEARch:MEASure:PEAK:POLarity on page 359
Magnitude
Sets the peak-to-peak limit. If the signal exceeds this limit, a search event is listed.
Remote command:
SEARch:MEASure:LEVel:PEAK:MAGNitude on page 359
6.5.6 Rise/fall time search
The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time, or rise/fall times
shorter or longer than a given limit, or rise/fall times inside or outside the allowable time
range.
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Rise/Fall Time" > "Setup"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 122

Search
Edge
Sets the slope to be found:
● "Rising" to search for rise time
● "Falling" to search for fall time
● "Both" to search for rise and fall time
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:SLOPe on page 360
Upper Level, Lower Level

Set the upper and lower voltage thresholds. When the signal crosses the first level, the
rise/fall time measurement starts. It stops when the signal crosses the second level. To
let the instrument set the levels, tap "Find Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:LOWer on page 360
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:UPPer on page 360
Comparison
Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limits.
"Greater than" Finds rise/fall times longer than the given "Rise/Fall Time".
"Lower than" Finds rise/fall times shorter than the given "Rise/Fall Time".
"Equal" Finds rise/fall times equal to the reference "Rise/Fall Time" if "Varia-
tion" Δt = 0.
If "Variation" ≠ 0, the setting finds rise/fall times within the range time
± Δt.
"Not equal" Finds rise/fall times unequal to the reference value if "Variation" Δt =
0.
If "Variation" ≠ 0, the setting finds rise/fall times outside the range
time ± Δt.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:RANGe on page 361
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 123

Search
Rise/Fall Time
Sets the reference rise or fall time, the nominal value for comparisons.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:TIME on page 361
Variation
Sets a range Δt to the reference "Rise/Fall Time" if comparison is set to "Equal" or "Not
equal". The instrument finds rise/fall times inside or outside the range width ± Δt.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:DELTa on page 361
6.5.7 Runt setup
The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude. The amplitude crosses
the first threshold twice without crossing the second one. In addition to the threshold
amplitudes, you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width search:
runts with exact width, shorter or longer than a given time, or runts inside or outside the
allowable time range.
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Runt" > "Setup"
Polarity
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity on page 362
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 124

Search
Upper Level
Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection. A negative runt crosses the upper
level twice without crossing the lower level.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:UPPer on page 362
Lower Level
Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection. A positive runt crosses the lower
level twice without crossing the upper level.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:LOWer on page 362
Comparison
Sets the condition how the measured runt width is compared with the given limits.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe on page 362
Width
Sets the reference runt pulse width, the nominal value for comparisons.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh on page 363
Variation
The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width ± Δt.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa on page 363
6.5.8 Data2Clock
The Data2Clock search - also known as setup/hold search - finds violation of setup
and hold times. It analyzes the relative timing between two signals: a data signal and
the synchronous clock signal.
Many systems require, that the data signal must be steady for some time before and
after the clock edge. Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock
edge. Hold time is the time that the data signal is steady after clock edge.
► [Search] > "Search Type" = "Data2Clock" > "Setup"
The settings for Data2Clock search are provided in two menus. In the "Setup" menu,
you define the clock polarity, setup and hold times; and in the "Source Setup" menu
you define the waveforms to be used, and the levels and hysteresis for each source.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 125

Search
Clock
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce on page 364
Data
Selects the input channel of the data signal.
Remote command:
SEARch:SOURce on page 356
Level
Set the voltage levels for clock and data signals. The crossing of clock level and clock
edge defines the start point for setup and hold time. The data level defines the thresh-
old for data transition. To let the instrument set the level, tap "Find Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel on page 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel on page 364
Hysteresis
Sets a hysteresis range to the search level of the selected signal to avoid unwanted
search results caused by noise oscillation around the level. To let the instrument set
the hysteresis, tap "Find Threshold".
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel:DELTa on page 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel:DELTa on page 364
Polarity
Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the start point for the setup and hold time.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 126

Search
"Rising" Only positive clock edges are considered.

"Falling" Only negative clock edges are considered.
"Either" The clock edges next to the data edge are considered regardless of
the clock slope. Use this setting, for example, for signals with double
data rate.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe on page 364
Setup Time
Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady
above or below the data level.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe on page 365
Hold Time
Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady
above or below the data level.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe on page 365
6.5.9 Pattern search
For pattern search, up to four analog channels can be used as source. If MSO option
R&S RTB-B1 is installed, also digital channels can be included in the pattern. For each
channel, you define the state. The states are combined logically, and the time of true
pattern results is compared with a specified time range. Thus you can find state transi-
tions inside or outside this time range.
► Select [Search] > "Search Type" = "Pattern" > "Setup".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 127

Search
Threshold, Hysteresis
Sets the search threshold value for each analog channel. If the signal value is higher
than the threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, the signal state is considered
low.
For each analog channel, set a hysteresis to avoid unwanted search results caused by
noise oscillation of the signal.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n> on page 366
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>:DELTa on page 367
H | L | X, Set All
Defines the pattern by selecting the state "H" (high), "L" (low) or "X" (do not care, the
channel does not affect the search) for each active analog and digital channel.
The word length of the pattern depends on the number of available analog and digital
channels. Logic channels are only available with MSO option R&S RTB-B1. Use "Set
All" to set all channels to the same state.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce on page 365
AND, OR, NAND, NOR

"AND" The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at
the same time.
"OR" At least one of the channels must have the required state.
"NAND" "Not and" operator, at least one of the channels does not have the
required state.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 128

Search
"NOR" "Not or" operator, no channel has the required state.

Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:FUNCtion on page 366
Comparison
Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given
limit. The three settings "Width" "Variation" and "Comparison" define the time range
how long the true result of the state pattern must be valid.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 367
Width
Sets the limit time of a steady pattern, the nominal value for comparisons.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] on page 367
Variation
The instrument finds true results of the state pattern inside or outside the range width ±
Δt.
Remote command:
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 368
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 129

R&S®RTB2000 Measurements
Quick measurements
7 Measurements
7.1 Quick measurements

Quick measurement performs a set of automatic measurements on the selected input
channel. The measurements cannot be configured. The results are displayed directly
at the waveform (WF) or in the bottom result line (L) and are updated continuously.
If the instrument detects a period in the signal, the quick measurement measures the
first cycle and displays the results. If no period is detected, it measures the complete
waveform.
► Press the [QuickMeas] key to activate quick measurement.
Table 7-1: Results of quick measurement
Label Description Display
Vp+ Positive peak value WF
Vp- Negative peak value WF
tr Rising time of the first rising edge WF
tf Falling time of the first falling edge WF
MeanCyc Mean value WF
RMS-Cyc RMS L
T Period length L
f Frequency L
Vpp Peak to peak value L
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 130

Automatic measurements
Quick measurement is not available on math and reference waveforms. Channels

other than the selected one are switched off in quick measurement mode. When quick
measurement is active, cursor measurements are not possible, but you can use auto-
matic measurements in parallel.
► Press the [QuickMeas] key again to deactivate quick measurement.

The results are deleted on the display.
Remote commands:
● MEASurement<m>:AON on page 382
● MEASurement<m>:AOFF on page 382
● MEASurement<m>:ALL[:STATe] on page 382
● MEASurement<m>:ARESult? on page 382
7.2 Automatic measurements

You can perform up to 6 different measurements simultaneously.
To configure automatic measurements in the Measure menu

1. Press the [Meas] key.
2. In the menu, select the "Meas. Place", the number of the measurement that you
want to configure.
3. If the measurement is off, enable "Measure <n>".
4. Select the measurement type:

a) Tap "Type"
b) Select the tab of the required measurement category.
c) Select the measurement type.
The measurement types are described in Chapter 7.2.2, "Measurement types",
on page 134.
5. Select the "Source".

The selection list shows all possible sources. If the waveform is not active, it is acti-
vated automatically when selected as measurement source.
6. Some measurement types require additional settings. Scroll down the menu, and
adjust the additional settings if necessary.
See also: Chapter 7.2.3, "Settings for automatic measurements", on page 138.
7.2.1 Measurement results
The measurement results are shown in a line below the grid.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 131

Figure 7-1: Results of four active measurements
Measurement errors are indicated as follows:
? A result cannot be determined. Adjust the horizontal and vertical settings if

the instrument cannot measure.
"clipping+" or "clipping-" The measurement result is outside the measurement range and clipping
occurs. Adjust the vertical scale to get valid results.
n/a No valid waveform is available, for example, if the source waveform is off.
Remote commands are described in:

● Chapter 15.7.2.2, "Measurements results", on page 386
7.2.1.1 Statistics
In addition to the current measurement results, you can enable a statistic evaluation. It
returns the current, minimum and maximum measurement values, the average and
standard deviation, and the number of measured waveforms. The results are shown in
a separate tab below the grid. If the cursor measurement is active simultaneously, its
results are shown beside the statistic results.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 132

Figure 7-2: Statistic results of four active measurements
1. To delete all measurement results, and to restart statistical evaluation, tap the
"Reset" button.
2. To write statistic and measurement results to CSV file, tap the "Save" button.
You can save the statistic results to CSV file for further evaluation. The file contains the
statistic values shown on the screen, and also the measurement results of each mea-
sured waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 133

Figure 7-3: Exported statistic results, converted to columns with comma delimiter
7.2.2 Measurement types
The R&S RTB2000 provides many measurement types to measure time and amplitude
characteristics, and to count pulses and edges.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 134

7.2.2.1 Horizontal measurements (Time)
Meas. type Symbol Description Graphic / formula
Frequency f Frequency of the signal, reciprocal value of the measured f=1/T

first period. T
in Hz
ML
Period T Time of the first period, measured on the middle reference T

level. The measurement requires at least one complete
in s
period of the signal.
ML
Duty Cycle + Dty+ Width of the first positive pulse in relation to the period in %. Dty+ = t+ / T * 100%
The measurement requires at least one complete period of 0% T 100%
in %
the signal. t+
Duty Cycle - Dty- Width of the first negative pulse in relation to the period in Dty- = t- / T * 100%
%. The measurement requires at least one complete period 0% T 100%
in %
of the signal. t-
Rise Time tr Rise time of the first rising edge, the time it takes the signal Rise
to rise from the lower reference level to the upper reference UL
in s
level.
LL
Fall Time tf Fall time of the first falling edge, the time it takes the signal Fall
to fall from the upper reference level to the lower reference UL
in s
level.
LL
Pulse Width + PW+ Duration of the first positive pulse: time between a rising t+
edge and the following falling edge measured on the middle
in s
reference level.
ML
Pulse Width - PW- Duration of the first negative pulse: time between a falling t-
edge and the following rising edge measured on the middle
in s
reference level.
ML
Delay to Trigger Dly Trg Time between the trigger point and a selectable edge, mea-
sured on the middle reference level. If the edge is to the left
in s
of the trigger (before trigger), the result is negative.
t
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 135

Delay Dly Time difference between two slopes of the same or different
in s waveforms, measured on the middle reference level. The S1
settings of slope selection are described in Chapter 7.2.4,
t
"Delay setup", on page 141.
A negative result indicates that the slope of the second S2
source comes before the slope of the first source.
Phase Phs Phase difference between two waveforms, measured on the Phase = Δt / T * 360°
middle reference level.
in °
S1
0° 360°
t
S2
Slew rate+ Slewrt+ Steepness of the first rising edge, measured between the Slewrt = ΔV / Δt
lower and the upper reference levels. Δt
UL
ΔV
LL
Slew rate- Slewrt- Steepness of the first falling edge, measured between the Slewrt = ΔV / Δt
upper and the lower reference levels. Δt
UL
ΔV
LL
Burst Width Bst Duration of one burst, measured on the middle reference
level from the first edge to the last edge.
7.2.2.2 Vertical measurements (Amplitude)
The unit of most amplitude measurement results depends on the measured source.
Amplitude VAmp Difference between the top level and the base level of the Top
signal. The measurement requires at least one complete
period of the signal. Amplitude
Base
Top Level Vtop High level of the displayed waveform - the upper maximum Top
of the sample distribution, or the mean value of the high
level of a square wave without overshoot. The measure-
ment requires at least one complete period of the signal.
Base Level Vbase Low level of the displayed waveform - the lower maximum
of the sample distribution, or the mean value of the low level
of a square wave without overshoot. The measurement
requires at least one complete period of the signal.
Base
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 136

Mean Cycle MeanCyc Mean value of the left-most signal period.

in V
DC
N T
RMS Cycle RMS-Cyc RMS (root mean square) value of the voltage of the left-
most signal period.
in V AC
DC
N T
Peak Peak Vpp Difference of maximum and minimum values. Max
Pk-Pk
Min
Peak+ Vp+ Maximum value within the displayed waveform. Max
Peak- Vp- Minimum value within the displayed waveform.
Min
Pos. Overshoot +Ovr Overshoot of a square wave after a rising or falling edge. It Max local  Top
is calculated from measurement values top level, base level, Over    100 %
Neg. Overshoot -Ovr Amplitude
local maximum, local minimum, and amplitude.
in % Base  Minlocal
Over    100 %
Amplitude
Top Over+
Amplitude
Base
Over-
Mean Value Mean Arithmetic average of the complete displayed waveform. N

1
Mean 
N  xk
k 1
RMS Value RMS RMS (root mean square) value of the voltage of the com-
N
1
xk 2
plete displayed waveform.
RMS 
N k 1
σ-Std. Deviation σ Standard deviation of the displayed waveform.

N
1
σ
N  1 k 1
x k  Mean2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 137

σ-Std. Dev. Cycle σ-Cyc Standard deviation of one cycle, usually of the first, left-most
signal period.
σ
N T
Crest Factor Crest The crest factor is also known as peak-to-average ratio. It is Max | x k |
the maximum value divided by the RMS value of the dis- Crest 
played waveform. RMS
7.2.2.3 Counting
Positive Pulse CntP+ Number of positive pulses on the display. The mean value of 1 2 3 N
the signal is determined. If the signal passes the mean
value, an edge is counted. A positive pulse is counted if a
rising edge and a following falling edge are detected.
Negative Pulse CntP- Number of negative pulses on the display. The mean value 1 2 3 N
of the signal is determined. If the signal passes the mean
value, an edge is counted. A negative pulse is counted if a
falling edge and a following rising edge are detected.
Positive Slope CntS+ Number of rising edges on the display. The instrument 1 2 3 N
determines the mean value of the signal and counts an
edge every time the signal passes the mean value in the
specified direction.
Negative Slope CntS- Number of falling edges on the display. The instrument 1 2 3 N
determines the mean value of the signal and counts an
edge every time the signal passes the mean value in the
specified direction.
7.2.3 Settings for automatic measurements
► To open the "Measure" menu, press the [Meas] key.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 138

In the measurement menu, you can configure up to 6 parallel measurements (also

called measurement places). Available measurement types depend on the type of the
selected waveform.
Meas. Place
Selects one of the 6 available measurement places to be configured or activated.
Measure <n>
Activates or deactivates the selected measurement.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>[:ENABle] on page 383
Type
Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source. Depending on
the type, different results are displayed in the result line.
Select the tab of the required measurement category, and then the measurement type.
The "Basic" tab provides the most common measurements: peak to peak, period, fre-
quency, rise time, fall time, mean cycle, and RMS cycle.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:MAIN on page 383
Source
Selects an analog channel, reference or math waveform as the source of the selected
measurement. If MSO option R&S RTB-B1 is installed, active digital channels are
available as measurement sources.
If the waveform is not active, it is activated automatically when selected as measure-
ment source.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 139

Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:SOURce on page 385
Measure Source, Measure Source 2

Set the source waveforms for delay and phase measurement, where two sources are
required.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:SOURce on page 385
Delay Setup
Opens a menu to configure the delay measurement or the delay to trigger measure-
ment.
See: Chapter 7.2.4, "Delay setup", on page 141
Statistics
Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for the selected measurement.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle] on page 386
Reset Statistics
Deletes the statistical results for all measurements, and starts a new statistical evalua-
tion if the acquisition is running.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RESet on page 386
Delete all Measurements

Deactivates all active measurements.
Reference Level
Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time measurements. Sets also
the middle reference level used for phase and delay measurements. The levels are
defined as percentages of the high signal level. The settings are valid for all measure-
ment places.
Remote command:
REFLevel:RELative:MODE on page 393
REFLevel:RELative:LOWer on page 393
REFLevel:RELative:MIDDle on page 393
REFLevel:RELative:UPPer on page 393
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 140

Cursor measurements
7.2.4 Delay setup
Access: [Meas] > "Type" = "Delay" or "Delay to Trigger" > "Delay Setup"
In the "Delay Setup" menu, you configure the delay measurement or delay to trigger
measurement.
Figure 7-4: Left: menu for delay measurement, right: menu for delay to trigger measurement
Measure Source
Selects the rising or falling edge for the indicated source.
Remote command:
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe on page 386
7.3 Cursor measurements

The cursor measurement determines the results at the current cursor positions. You
can set the cursor lines manually at fixed positions, or they can follow the waveform.
Cursors are available in time and frequency domain. You can measure on one wave-
form, or on two different waveforms (sources) if the sources are in the same domain
(time domain or frequency domain).
If the measured source is an envelope waveform, and you move the cursor slowly, the
minimum and maximum values are measured alternating. Zoom and measurement on
second source behave in the same way.
Available results depend on the cursor type and the type of the waveform. They are
displayed below the grid.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 141

Cursor measurements
Figure 7-5: Cursor measurement with vertical and horizontal cursors and Set To Trace
Results = below the grid

Cursor lines 1, 2, 3 = no focus
Cursor line 4 = has focus, can be moved by turning the [Navigation] knob
To configure cursor measurements

1. Press the [Cursor] key.
The cursors are activated with the latest setting.
2. Press the [Cursor] key again.

The "Cursor" menu opens.
3. Select the cursor "Type".
4. Select the "Source", the waveform you want to measure.
5. If you want to measure different sources:

a) Enable "Second Source".
b) Select the second waveform.
6. Set additional settings if necessary: Track Scaling, Coupling, or Set To Trace.
7. To change the position of a cursor line, you can use several methods:
● Drag the cursor line on the screen.
● Press the [Navigation] knob repeatedly until the required cursor line is active
(marked with a solid line).
Turn the knob to move the line.
● Tap the corresponding result value in the result line at the bottom.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 142

Cursor measurements
The keypad opens, and you can enter an exact value.
7.3.1 Cursor settings
► To open the "Cursor" menu:

a) Tap the "Menu" icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
b) Scroll down. Select "Cursor".
Figure 7-6: Cursor menu, cursor on one source (left), cursor on two sources (right)
Cursor
Activates or deactivates the cursor measurement.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:STATe on page 394
Type
Selects the cursor type. Depending on the type, different results are displayed in the
result line at the bottom of the display.
The cursor lines can be set to the required position using the "Navigation" rotary knob,
or by dragging a cursor line on the screen.
"Horizontal" Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the voltage values at
the cursor positions, and the difference between the cursor lines.
Results: V1, V2, ΔV (for current measurements: A1, A2, ΔA, for FFT
measurements: L in dBm)
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 143

Cursor measurements
"Vertical" Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the time from the trigger
point to each cursor line, the time between the cursor lines and the
frequency calculated from that time.
Results: t1, t2, Δt, 1/Δt (for FFT measurements: frequencies)
"Vertical & Combines the "Horizontal" cursor and "Vertical" cursor measure-
Horiz." ments. Two horizontal and two vertical cursor lines are set. The vol-
tages and times are measured at the cursor positions, as well as the
delta of the voltage and time values.
Results: t1, t2, Δt, V1, V2, ΔV
"V-Marker" Sets two vertical cursors and measures the values of the waveform at
the crossing points of the cursor lines and the waveform. Also, the dif-
ferences of the two values in x- and y-direction are displayed.
Results: t1, V1, t2, V2, Δt, ΔV
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:FUNCtion on page 394
CURSor<m>:TRACking[:STATe] on page 396 (V-Marker)
Source
Defines the source of the cursor measurement as one of the active waveforms.
You can use cursors on analog input signals, math waveform, reference waveforms,
XY-diagram, and FFT waveform.
If option R&S RTB- B1 is installed, you can use the vertical cursor to measure individ-
ual logic channels, and the V-Marker to measure pods.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:SOURce on page 395
Second Source
Enables and selects a second source for the cursor measurements. If enabled, the
second cursor measures on the second source. Using a second source, you can mea-
sure differences between two waveforms with cursors. Both sources must be in the
same domain (time domain or frequency domain). In FFT, for example, you can mea-
sure the difference between min hold and max hold waveforms.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 144

Cursor measurements
Figure 7-7: Cursor on one source
Figure 7-8: Cursor on two sources. Sources are indicated with the measurement results.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:USSOURce on page 396
CURSor<m>:SSOURce on page 396
Track Scaling
If enabled, the cursor lines are adjusted when the vertical or horizontal scales are
changed. The cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform.
If disabled, the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is
changed.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:TRACking:SCALe[:STATe] on page 398
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 145

Cursor measurements
Coupling
If enabled, the cursors lines are coupled and moved together.
Press the [Navigation] key to select whether both cursors or one cursor is moved. If
coupling is disabled, pressing the [Navigation] key toggles the single cursor lines.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:XCOupling on page 397
CURSor<m>:YCOupling on page 397
Set To Trace
Autoset for cursor lines, sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depend-
ing on the selected cursor type. For example, for voltage measurement ("Horizontal"),
the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform. For time mea-
surement ("Vertical"), the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive
or two consecutive negative pulses.
Remote command:
CURSor<m>:SWAVe on page 398
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 146

R&S®RTB2000 Applications
Mask testing
8 Applications
All available applications are provided in the "Apps Selection" dialog.
► To select an application, press the [Apps Selection] key.
See also: Chapter 3.2, "Selecting the application", on page 40.

Applications are grouped on several tabs:
● Applications, see below
● Protocol
Protocol applications are described in Chapter 12, "Serial bus analysis",
on page 211.
On the "Applications" tab, the following applications are available:
● "QuickMeas": see Chapter 7.1, "Quick measurements", on page 130
● "Probe Adjust": see Chapter 4.4.1, "Adjusting passive probes", on page 64
● "Function Gen.": see Chapter 14.1, "Function generator", on page 281
● "Pattern Gen.": see Chapter 14.2, "Pattern generator", on page 294
● Mask testing.......................................................................................................... 147
● FFT analysis..........................................................................................................155
● XY-Diagram...........................................................................................................163
● Digital voltmeter.................................................................................................... 164
● Trigger counter......................................................................................................167
● Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36)..........................................................................168
8.1 Mask testing

Masks are used to determine whether the amplitude of a signal remains within speci-
fied limits, e.g. to detect errors or test compliance of digital signals.
8.1.1 About masks and mask testing
Masks
A mask is specified by an upper and a lower limit line. The signal must run inside these
limit lines, otherwise a mask violation occurs.
A new mask is created from an existing signal: Mask limits are created by copying the
envelope waveform, and the limits are moved and stretched. The result is a tolerance
tube around the signal that is used as mask.
The mask is displayed in the color used for reference waveforms.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 147

Mask testing
Once a mask has been defined, the copied envelope is kept in the instrument until the
next mask is defined or loaded. If you need more than one mask, you can save the
mask to internal storage and load it at a later time.
Mask testing results

The mask testing analyzes whether tested signal runs inside the mask. The overall test
result is shown in the mask window:
left column = absolute number and percentage of acquisitions that passed the test
middle column = absolute number and percentage of acquisitions that violated the mask
right column = number of tested acquisitions and test duration
During a mask test, various actions can be executed when mask violations occur: noti-
fication by a sound, stop of acquisition, saving a screenshot, saving the waveform
data, sending a pulse.
Remote commands:
● MASK:STATe on page 400 to start the mask application
● MASK:COUNt? on page 406
● MASK:VCOunt? on page 406
File format for masks: MSK

MSK is the specific binary format for masks of the R&S RTB2000. It contains pairs of
amplitude values (in divisions) , their sample indexes and current instrument settings.
Thus, the amplitude values are not related to time and voltage. The mask data is saved
in the internal storage and can be loaded back when needed. The format is not inten-
ded for analysis outside the R&S RTB2000.
8.1.2 Using masks
Starting the mask application

2. Tap "Mask".
You can also add the mask icon to the toolbar and start the application from the
toolbar. See "Configuring the Toolbar" on page 46.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 148

Mask testing
To create and set up a mask

You create a mask based on a channel waveform, then optimize it by changing its posi-
tion and proportions, and save it.
1. Select and adjust the channel waveform that you want to use as basis for the
mask.
2. Run continuous acquisition.
3. Start the mask application.
4. In the mask window, tap "New".
5. Adjust the size of the mask:

● For simple setup, use "Size+" and "Size-" to change the mask dimensions in x-
and y-direction.
● For detailed setup:
– Tap "Setup" to open the "Mask" menu.
– Change "Width Y", "Width X" and/or "Stretch Y".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 149

Mask testing
6. To save the mask for later use, tap "Save".
To load a mask
2. Tap "Mask".
3. Tap "Load".
4. Select the mask file.
5. Tap "Load".
To perform a mask testing

1. Set up the waveform that you want to test.
2. Create or load a mask. See:

● "To create and set up a mask" on page 149
● "To load a mask" on page 150
3. If necessary, tap "Setup" and adjust the y-position of the mask.
4. Set the "Actions" to be performed on violation.
5. In the mask window, tap "Run".

If the mask limits are violated, the specified action is taken. The overall result is
shown in the mask window.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 150

Mask testing
6. Tap "Reset" to delete the results.
7. To finish the test, tap "Stop".
8.1.3 Mask window
The mask window provides the most important function to set up a mask, and to run
the test.
Reset
Deletes all test results.
Remote command:
MASK:RESet:COUNter on page 405
Run, Stop
Starts or finishes the mask test.
Remote command:
MASK:TEST on page 405
New
Creates a mask from the envelope of the selected channel waveform.
Remote command:
MASK:SOURce on page 401
MASK:CHCopy on page 401
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 151

Mask testing
Size+, Size-
Enlarges or decreases the mask in x- and y-direction.
Save, Load
Saves the created mask to file, or loads a previously saved mask. The file format is
MSK.
Remote command:
MASK:SAVE on page 402
MASK:LOAD on page 402
Capt. Fails
If selected, only failed acquisitions are saved in memory segments.
Only available with history option R&S RTB-K15.
Remote command:
MASK:CAPTure[:MODE] on page 406
Setup
Opens the "Setup" menu to define exact mask dimensions and the actions to be exe-
cuted on violation of the mask.
8.1.4 Mask menu
► To open the "Mask" setup menu:

● Tap the "Setup" button in the mask window.
● Tap the "Menu" icon. Select "Mask".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 152

Mask testing
Test
Performs a mask test for the selected signal, i.e. the signal amplitudes are compared
with the specified mask. If the amplitude exceeds the limits of the mask, a violation is
detected.
Remote command:
MASK:TEST on page 405
Copy Channel
Creates a mask from the envelope waveform of the selected channel and stores it in
the instrument.
Remote command:
MASK:SOURce on page 401
MASK:CHCopy on page 401
Y-Position
Moves the mask vertically within the display. The current position is given in divisions.
Remote command:
MASK:YPOSition on page 401
Stretch Y
Changes the vertical scaling to stretch or compress the mask in y-direction.
Remote command:
MASK:YSCale on page 401
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 153

Mask testing
Width X
Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction. The specified factor in divisions
is added to the positive x-values and subtracted from the negative x-values of the
mask limits in relation to the mask center. Thus, the left half of the mask is pulled to the
left, the right half is pulled to the right.
Remote command:
MASK:XWIDth on page 401
Width Y
Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction. The specified number of divisions
is added to the y-values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y-values of the
lower mask limit. Thus, the upper half of the mask is pulled upwards, the lower half is
pulled down, and the overall height of the mask is twice the "Width Y".
Remote command:
MASK:YWIDth on page 402
Save
Saves the mask in an instrument-specific format (MSK). The complete mask definition
- envelope waveform with width, stretch and position settings - is stored.
Remote command:
MASK:SAVE on page 402 and commands described in Chapter 15.9.1.5, "Masks",
on page 435.
Load Mask
Opens a file explorer to select a previously stored mask. The selected mask is loaded
and can be used for a subsequent test.
Remote command:
MASK:LOAD on page 402
Actions
Opens a submenu to select the actions to be taken when a violation against the mask
limits occurs.
"Sound" Generates a beep sound at each violation.
"Stop" Stops the waveform acquisition. Set the number of the stop violation.
Thus, you can ignore a number of violations before stop.
"Pulse" Creates a pulse on the [Aux Out] connector. This selection sets the
configuration of the [Aux Out] connector to "Mask Violation".
"Screenshot" Saves a screenshot according to the settings in "File" > "Screen-
shots".
"Save Wave- Saves the waveform data according to the settings in "File" > "Wave-
form" forms".
Remote command:
MASK:ACTion:SOUNd:EVENt:MODE on page 403
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:MODE on page 403
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt on page 404
MASK:ACTion:PULSe:EVENt:MODE on page 403
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 154

FFT analysis
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:EVENt:MODE on page 403

MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:EVENt:MODE on page 403
Capture Segments
Selects whether all acquisitions are stored in segments, or only failed acquisition. You
can use the hostiry to analyze the segments.
Only available with history option R&S RTB-K15.
Remote command:
MASK:CAPTure[:MODE] on page 406
8.2 FFT analysis

The R&S RTB2000 provides basic FFT calculation, which is included in the firmware.
During FFT analysis, a time-based waveform is converted to a spectrum of frequen-
cies. As a result, the magnitude of the determined frequencies is displayed: the power
vs. frequency diagram (spectrum). FFT results are useful to obtain an overview of the
input signal in the frequency domain and to detect unusual signal effects (such as
spurs or distortions) visually.
To enable FFT analysis

► Press the [ FFT] key.
Alternatively, tap the "FFT" icon in the toolbar.
The instrument adjusts the time scale of the waveform and sets appropriate center
frequency and span.
To disable FFT analysis

► There are several ways to exit FFT analysis:
● Press the [ FFT] key repeatedly until FFT is off.
● Tap the "FFT" icon in the toolbar.
● In the short menu, tap "FFT Off".
8.2.1 FFT display
When FFT is active, two diagrams are displayed: the signal vs. time at the top, the
result of the FFT analysis (spectrum) at the bottom. Between the diagrams, FFT-spe-
cific parameters are shown and can be set directly.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 155

FFT analysis
1 = Enable FFT
2 = Signal vs. time display
3 = FFT parameters
4 = Spectrum, result of the FFT analysis
5 = FFT label with vertical scale (range per division). Color indicates the source waveform of FFT calcula-
tion.
Data source
FFT analysis is performed on the data captured from one of the active input channels,
or one of the active math or reference waveforms. Analysis can only be performed on
one channel at a time.
Timebase
FFT is performed on the captured data of a complete acquisition. To reduce calculation
time, the instrument automatically sets the time scale (and thus the acquisition time),
and an extract of the timebase for which the FFT is calculated. This time gate is indica-
ted by white lines in the time diagram.
Frequency range
The results of the FFT analysis are restricted to a specified frequency range. There-
fore, you define a center frequency and a frequency span, or the start and stop fre-
quencies. Alternatively, you can manually set the resolution bandwidth (RBW). When
you change the frequency parameters, the timebase and time gate on the waveform is
adapted automatically. Changing the RBW affects the time gate.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 156

FFT analysis
Vertical position and size of the FFT waveform

To set the position and the vertical scaling, select the FFT window and use the vertical
[Scale] and [Offset/Position] knobs.
Remote commands:
● SPECtrum:FREQuency:SCALe on page 409
● SPECtrum:FREQuency:POSition on page 408
Zoom
You can use the vertical zoom ("Zoom" icon on the toolbar) on the FFT waveform. If
you draw the zoom area in the FFT diagram, center, span and vertical scale are adjus-
ted, and the zoomed section of the FFT is displayed in the FFT diagram.
8.2.2 Performing FFT analysis
1. Press the [FFT] key to start FFT analysis.
2. Press the [FFT] key again to open the FFT menu.
3. Select the "FFT Window" type according to the signal characteristics that are most
relevant for your measurement task (see "FFT Window" on page 160).
4. In the "Waveform" menu, select the waveform types you want to display (see
"Waveform" on page 161).
5. If you want to adjust the resolution bandwidth manually, disable "Automatic RBW".
6. On top of the FFT window, define the frequency range to be displayed in the spec-
trum window. You can set the start and stop frequencies, or the center frequency
and span, where the range is defined as (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2).
For details, see Span and Center.
7. To start and stop FFT analysis, press the [Run Stop] key.
If "Automatic RBW" is disabled, you can also set the time gate by changing its width
"W" and position "P", or by changing the resolution bandwidth "RBW".
8.2.3 FFT setup
You can set the parameters for the FFT analysis in the spectrum window and in the
FFT menu. In addition, the short menu provides frequently used settings.
8.2.3.1 Short menu for FFT
Frequently used settings are available in the short menu. You can select the waveform
type, set full span, open the comprehensive menu and disable the FFT analysis.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 157

FFT analysis
► To open the short menu, tap the FFT label in the bottom line of the display. The
label is only available, if the FFT analysis is active.
8.2.3.2 Settings in the FFT window
Typical FFT parameters can be set directly in the FFT window, above the diagram.
1 = Start frequency
2 = Stop frequency
3 = Center
4 = Span
5 = Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
6 = Width of the timebase extract
7 = Position of timebase extract
Start
Defines the start frequency of the FFT waveform. The instrument adjusts the span and
the center frequency, and optimizes the time gate.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STARt on page 410
Stop
Defines the stop frequency of the displayed frequency span. The instrument adjusts
the span and the center frequency, and optimizes the time gate and the acquisition
time (timebase).
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STOP on page 410
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 158

FFT analysis
Center
Defines the frequency in the center of the displayed span. The instrument adjusts the
start and stop frequencies.
To set the center frequency, you can also use the horizontal [Position] knob if the focus
is on the spectrum window.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:CENTer on page 409
Span
The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range,
which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2). The instrument adjusts the start and
stop frequencies.
To set the frequency span, you can also use the horizontal [Scale] knob if the focus is
on the frequency window.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SPAN on page 409
RBW
The resolution bandwidth (RBW) determines the resolution of the spectrum, that is: the
minimum distance between two distinguishable peaks. The higher the resolution (the
smaller the ratio), the more peaks are detected, but the longer the measurement
requires to finish.
If "Automatic RBW" is selected, the RBW value is adjusted automatically and the value
is shown for information. When you set the RBW manually, the instrument adjusts the
time gate.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue] on page 410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio on page 410
W
Width of the time gate for which FFT is calculated. The value can be changed if "Auto-
matic RBW" is disabled, and the RBW value is adjusted automatically.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:TIME:RANGe on page 411
P
Shows the position of time gate for which FFT analysis is performed. The position is an
offset of the time gate center to the 0 s reference point. The value can be changed if
"Automatic RBW" is disabled, and the RBW value is adjusted automatically.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:TIME:POSition on page 411
8.2.3.3 FFT menu
► Press the [ FFT] key.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 159

FFT analysis
If the menu does not open, tap twice: Once to enable FFT, and next to open the
menu.
Source
Selects the channel for which the captured data is analyzed with FFT. You can select
one of the active input channels, math or reference waveforms.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:SOURce on page 407
FFT Window
Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured signal inter-
val and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage, increasing the frequency resolu-
tion.
The R&S RTB2000 provides various window functions to suit different input signals.
Each window function has specific characteristics, including some advantages and
some trade-offs. Consider these characteristics to find the optimum solution for the
measurement task.
"Hanning" The Hanning window is bell shaped. Unlike the Hamming window, its
value is zero at the borders of the measuring interval. Thus, the noise
level within the spectrum is reduced and the width of the spectral
lines enlarges.
Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal pre-
cisely.
"Hamming" The Hamming window is bell shaped. Its value is not zero at the bor-
ders of the measuring interval. Thus, the noise level inside the spec-
trum is higher than Hanning or Blackman, but smaller than the rectan-
gular window. The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other
bell-shaped functions.
Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal pre-
cisely.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 160

FFT analysis
"Blackman" The Blackman window is bell shaped and has the steepest fall in its
wave shape of all other available functions. Its value is zero at both
borders of the measuring interval. In the Blackman window, the ampli-
tudes can be measured very precisely. However, determining the fre-
quency is more difficult.
Use this window to measure signals with single frequencies to detect
harmonics and accurate single-tone measurements.
"Flat Top" The flat top window has low amplitude measurement errors but a
poor frequency resolution.
Use this window for accurate single-tone measurements and for mea-
surement of amplitudes of sinusoidal frequency components.
"Rectangle" The rectangular window multiplies all points by one. The result is a
high frequency accuracy with thin spectral lines, but also with
increased noise.
Use this function for measurements of separation of two tones with
almost equal amplitudes and a small frequency distance.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:WINDow:TYPE on page 407
Automatic RBW
If enabled, the resolution bandwidth is set automatically. If disabled, you can adjust the
"RBW" parameter in the FFT window.
See also: "RBW" on page 159.
Waveform
Selects the waveform type to be displayed. Several types of waveforms can be dis-
played in parallel, but at least one waveform type must be selected. By default, the
"Spectrum" waveform is selected. From each waveform type, you can also create a
reference waveform for further analysis, and perform cursor measurements.
When the waveform selection is changed, statistical evaluation is restarted.
To clear the results of previous measurements used for statistical evaluation, select
"Reset".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 161

FFT analysis
"Spectrum" The current value for each frequency is displayed.

"Min Hold" The minimum value for each frequency over all FFTs is displayed.
Using the "Min Hold" waveform type is a good way to highlight signals
within noise or suppress intermittent signals.
"Max Hold" The maximum value for each frequency over all FFTs is displayed.
Using the "Max Hold" waveform type is a good way to detect intermit-
tent signals or the maximum values of fluctuating signals, for exam-
ple.
"Average" The average value for each frequency in the waveform over the
specified "# Averages" is calculated.
Averaging reduces the effects of noise, but has no effects on sine sig-
nals. Therefore, averaging is a good way to detect signals near noise.
"Reset" Clears the selected waveforms and restarts calculation.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum[:ENABle] on page 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum[:ENABle] on page 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum[:ENABle] on page 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage[:ENABle] on page 411
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COUNt on page 411
SPECtrum:FREQuency:RESet on page 412
Vertical Scale
Defines the scaling unit for the vertical scale.
The displayed values refer to a 50 Ohm terminating resistor. You can use an external
terminating resistor parallel to the high impedance input, or the 50 Ohm input directly.
"dBm" Logarithmic scaling; related to 1 mW
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 162

XY-Diagram
"dBV" Logarithmic scaling; related to 1 Veff.

"dBμV" Logarithmic scaling; related to 1 μVeff.
"Veff" Linear scaling; displays the RMS value of the voltage.
Remote command:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:MAGNitude:SCALe on page 408
8.3 XY-Diagram
XY-diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram. They use
the amplitude of a second waveform as the x-axis, rather than a timebase. Thus, you
can measure phase shift, for example. With harmonically related signals, the resulting
XY-diagrams are Lissajous patterns. XY-diagrams can also be used to display the IQ
representation of a signal.
Together with the XY-diagram, the time diagrams of the source signals are displayed in
separate grids. It is also possible to define two source signals in y-direction for compar-
ison.
The XY-diagram is provided in a dedicated application on the R&S RTB2000. If the XY-
application is active, reference waveforms are not available in all diagrams.
2. Select "XY".
3. Make sure that the signals, the trigger, and the acquisition are set up correctly. The
required menus are available in XY-mode.
Remote command: DISPlay:MODE on page 415
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 163

Digital voltmeter
To analyze the signal in the XY-diagram, you can use cursor measurements. You can
select specific cursor measurement types:" Voltage X", "Voltage Y1", "Voltage Y2" use
2 cursor lines, "Voltage X-Y1" and "Voltage X-Y2" use 4 cursor lines.
Source X
Defines the source to be displayed in x-direction in an XY-diagram, replacing the usual
timebase. The source can be any of the analog channels.
Remote command:
DISPlay:XY:XSOurce on page 415
Source Y1
Defines the first signal to be displayed in y-direction in an XY-diagram. The source can
be any of the active analog channels.
Remote command:
DISPlay:XY:Y1Source on page 415
Source Y2
Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y-direction in an XY-diagram. The
source can be any of the analog channels. The setting is only relevant for 4-channel
R&S RTB2000 instruments.
Remote command:
DISPlay:XY:Y2Source on page 416
8.4 Digital voltmeter

The integrated three-digit digital voltmeter simplifies measurements, in particular for
service personnel. You can measure up to four parameters on different sources at the
same time and define the position of the measurement results.
The following DVM measurements are available:
● DC: mean value of the signal
● AC+DC RMS: RMS value of the signal
● AC RMS: RMS value of the signal's AC component
The digital voltmeter captures input data with the selected vertical sensitivity and the
basic accuracy of the ADC. It is independent from the capture settings and the post
processing. All measurements are based on a measurement interval, which ensures
reliable results over the defined frequency range.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 164

Digital voltmeter
Figure 8-1: Results of 4 meter measurements. The measurement source is indicated by the channel
color. The source of meter 1 is channel 1, and it is clipped.
Remote commands to read meter results:

● DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]? on page 417
● DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]:STATus? on page 417
8.4.1 Using the meter
To activate meter measurements

► Use one of the following ways:
● Tap the "Meter" icon on the toolbar.
● Press the [Apps Selection] key.

Tap "Meter".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 165

Digital voltmeter
To deactivate meter measurements

► Use one of the following ways:
● Tap the "Meter" icon on the toolbar again.
● Close the "Meter" result box.
8.4.2 Meter settings
► To open the "Meter" configuration menu, tap inside the "Meter" result box.
Meter (on/off)
Activates or deactivates the digital voltmeter with the last configuration. Preset deletes
the voltmeter configuration.
Remote command:
DVM<m>:ENABle on page 416
Meter
Selects one of the four available meter measurements. The configuration of the
selected meter is displayed in the menu.
Source
Selects an analog channel as the source of the selected meter measurement.
Remote command:
DVM<m>:SOURce on page 416
Type
Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source:
● DC: mean value of the signal
● AC+DC RMS: RMS value of the signal
● AC RMS: RMS value of the signal's AC component
Select "Off" to disable the selected meter measurement.
Remote command:
DVM<m>:TYPE on page 416
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 166

Trigger counter
8.5 Trigger counter

The counter shows two basic parameters of the trigger source: frequency and period.
2. Tap "Trigger Counter".
By default, the result box shows the frequency and period of the trigger source.
1. To toggle frequency and period results, tap inside the box.
2. To show the counter results of active waveforms, tap the source icon ("Trg") and
select a waveform.
3. To move the result box to the best position, can drag the box on the screen.
Remote commands:
● TCOunter:ENABle on page 418
● TCOunter:SOURce on page 418
● TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:FREQuency? on page 418
● TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:PERiod? on page 418
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 167

Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36)
8.6 Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36)

A Bode plot displays the frequency response of an electrical system. It is divided in two
parts, a magnitude plot and a phase shift plot.
8.6.1 About the bode plot
Bode plot display

The Bode plot display is divided into several sections, see fig. 8-2.
Figure 8-2: Bode plot display
1 = Bode plot parameters

2 = Bode plot diagram, gain: blue color; phase: orange color
3 = Save
4 = Bode result table
5 = Marker value table
6 = Bode plot window controls
7 = Vertical settings of active analog channels
8 = Vertical settings of gain waveform
9 = Vertical settings of phase waveform
Bode plot diagram

The Bode plot diagram has the frequency presented on the x-axis. The gain (blue color
waveform) and phase (orange color waveform) scales are on the y-axis. The magni-
tude plot represents the gain of a system between input and output. The phase plot
shows the phase shift between input and output.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 168

Bode plot result table

In the Bode plot result table, all sample points are displayed with the respective value
for the frequency, gain, phase and amplitude. If you select a sample in the table, the
respective points in the Bode plot are highlighted by a white line on the gain and the
phase curve.
Marker value table

There are two markers available for the Bode plot. They are highlighted on the Bode
plot diagram by a white line and the respective marker number 1 or 2. You can move
the markers as needed.
In the marker table you can see the frequency, gain and phase values for both of them
and also the delta values between the two markers.
Remote commands:
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:FREQ? on page 425
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:GAIN? on page 425
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:PHASe? on page 426
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:FREQuency on page 426
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:GAIN? on page 426
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:INDex on page 426
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:PHASe? on page 426
● BPLot:MARKer<m>:SSCReen on page 427
Vertical position and size of the waveforms

To set the position and the vertical scaling of the gain, phase or amplitude waveforms,
select the waveform and use the vertical [Scale] and [Offset/Position] (upper knob)
knobs.
Remote commands:
● BPLot:AMPLitude:SCALe on page 425
● BPLot:AMPLitude:POSition on page 425
● BPLot:GAIN:SCALe on page 423
● BPLot:GAIN:POSition on page 423
● BPLot:PHASe:SCALe? on page 424
● BPLot:PHASe:POSition? on page 424
8.6.2 Using a bode plot
To run a Bode plot measurement

1. Prepare the measurement setup. See "Connecting the test setup" on page 170
2. Start the Bode plot option. See "Starting the Bode plot" on page 170
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 169

3. Set the required parameters. See "Setting up the Bode plot" on page 170.
Connecting the test setup
Figure 8-3: Bode Plot Test Setup
1. Connect the DUT input to the generator output of the oscilloscope.
2. Connect the input of your DUT to a channel input of the oscilloscope.
3. Connect the output of your DUT to another channel input of the oscilloscope.
4. Align the probes.
To avoid measurement uncertainties, make sure that the cables connecting the input
and the output of your DUT to the oscilloscope are from similar length.
Starting the Bode plot

2. Tap "Bode Plot" .

The Bode plot window opens.
Setting up the Bode plot

1. In the Bode window, select the channels for the "Input" and "Output" signal.
2. Set the "Start" and "Stop" frequency for the frequency sweep range. Alternatively,
press [Autoset].
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 170

3. Select the number of "Points" to be shown per decade.
4. Set the amplitude for the measurement.
5. If necessary, open the "Setup" dialog to refine the settings:

a) Set an "Amplitude Profile" for systems with sensitive circuits.
b) Set the "Maximum Phase" of the system.
c) Set a "Meas. Delay" for systems that need more time to adapt to a new fre-
quency.
6. Press "Run" to start the measurement.
7. If necessary, press "Save" to save the measurement results to a file.
8.6.3 Bode plot window controls
The Bode plot window provides the most important function to set up the plot and to
run the test.
Start
Sets the start frequency of the sweep for the Bode plot.
Remote command:
BPLot:FREQuency:STARt on page 421
BPLot:AUToscale on page 419
Stop
Sets the stop frequency of the sweep for the Bode plot.
Remote command:
BPLot:FREQuency:STOP on page 421
BPLot:AUToscale on page 419
Points
Selects the number of points per decade that are measured from a predefined list. You
can also set a different value from the predefined ones in the "Setup" menu.
Gen
Enables the in-build generator to start a frequency sweep for a defined frequency
range.
Ampl.
Sets a fixed amplitude.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 171

Input
Selects the channel for the input signal of the DUT.
Remote command:
BPLot:INPut[:SOURce] on page 421
Output
Selects the channel for the output signal of the DUT.
Remote command:
BPLot:OUTPut[:SOURce] on page 422
Gain
Enables the gain waveform for the Bode plot.
Remote command:
BPLot:GAIN:ENABle on page 423
Phase
Enables the phase waveform for the Bode plot.
Remote command:
BPLot:PHASe:ENABle? on page 424
Run
Starts the Bode plot measurement.
Remote command:
BPLot:STATe on page 422
Repeat
Repeats the measurement, using the same parameters.
Remote command:
BPLot:REPeat on page 422
Reset
Remote command:
BPLot:RESet on page 422
Setup
Opens the "Setup" menu to define the Bode plot settings.
Save
Saves the created Bode plot to a file. The file format is CSV.
You can find the "Save" icon in the upper right corner of the Bode plot result table, see
Figure 8-2.
Remote command:
BPLot:EXPort:NAME on page 380
BPLot:EXPort:SAVE on page 380
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 172

8.6.4 Bode plot settings
► To open the "Bode Plot" configuration menu, tap the "Setup" icon inside the "Bode
Plot" result box.
Amplitude Profile
Enables the amplitude profile. You can then define different amplitudes for different fre-
quency in the "Configuration" dialog. This is useful when testing sensitive circuits,
where the amplitude gets too high. In this case distortion might occur.
If this function is enabled, a diagram of the amplitudes for the different frequencies can
be displayed on the screen. To do that, press at the bottom of the Bode plot window.
You can configure the value curve through the touchscreen.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 173

Remote command:
BPLot:AMPLitude:MODE on page 420
BPLot:AMPLitude:ENABle on page 424
Configuration
Opens a dialog to set the amplitude profile. For each point, you can set an amplitude
and frequency pairs.
Remote command:
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:AMPLitude on page 420
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:FREQuency on page 420
Ampl.
Sets a fixed amplitude.
Points
If the "Amplitude Profile" is enabled, select the number of different points that you can
define for the amplitude profile.
Remote command:
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:COUNt on page 419
Load
Selects the generator voltage display for 50Ω or high impedance load.
Points per Decade

Sets the number of points per decade that are measured.
Remote command:
BPLot:POINts:LOGarithmic on page 422
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 174

Maximum Phase
Sets the upper boundary of the vertical phase window.
The lower boundary is given by "Maximum Phase" - 360°. By default, the "Maximum
Phase" is set to 180° for a phase window ranging from -180° to 180° accordingly.
Display Meas. Points

Enables the display of the measurement points in the bode plot.
"Display Meas. Points" > On "Display Meas. Points" > Off
Remote command:
BPLot:MEASurement:POINt[:DISPLAY] on page 421
Meas. Delay
Sets a time delay, that the system waits before measuring the next point of the bode
plot. This is helpful in systems that need more time to adapt to the new frequency, for
example if filters with significant time group delays are present.
Remote command:
BPLot:MEASurement:DELay on page 421
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 175

R&S®RTB2000 Documenting results
9 Documenting results
The R&S RTB2000 can store various data to files for further usage, analysis and
reporting:
● Instrument settings: Chapter 9.1, "Saving and loading instrument settings",
on page 177
● Waveforms: Chapter 9.2, "Saving waveform data", on page 178
● Screenshots: Chapter 9.4, "Screenshots", on page 183
● Reference waveforms
– Chapter 6.3, "Reference waveforms", on page 102
– Export and import: Chapter 9.6, "Export and import", on page 186
● Measurement statistics: Chapter 7.2.1.1, "Statistics", on page 132
● Equation sets (formularies): Chapter 6.2.7, "Saving and loading formularies",
on page 101
● Search results: "To save search results" on page 117
● Bus table with decode results: "To save the bus table" on page 216
You can also combine these data and save it to a compressed file using the key,
see Chapter 9.5, "Quick save with onetouch", on page 185
► To save and load data, press the [Save Load] key.
Storage locations
Waveform data, screenshots and results, which are intended for analysis outside the
oscilloscope, are saved by default to a USB flash drive. The USB flash drive is the
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 176

Saving and loading instrument settings
external storage location (USB_FRONT). This location is only available if the USB
flash drive is connected. Using a USB hub is not supported.
Reference waveforms and instrument settings, which are intended for further use on
the instrument, are usually saved to the internal storage (/INT). You can also store
them to the external storage, or move them to the other location using the export and
import function.
The supported file system in all storage locations is FAT.
9.1 Saving and loading instrument settings

To repeat measurements or tests at different times or perform similar measurements
with different test data, you can save the used configuration settings. Furthermore, it
can be helpful to refer to the configuration settings of a particular measurement when
analyzing the results. Therefore, you can easily save the complete measurement con-
figuration including the display settings. The settings are saved together with a small
screenshot of the display for better identification of the setup files.
By default, instrument settings are saved to the internal storage /INT/SETTINGS, but
you can also save them to USB flash drive.
If you often save and load instrument settings, try the following shortcuts:
● The "Save Setup" toolbar icon saves the current settings to a file according to the
settings in "File" menu > "Setup". The "Load Setup" toolbar icon opens a dialog to
select and load a setup. See also "Configuring the Toolbar" on page 46.
● Configure OneTouch to save instrument settings. See Chapter 9.5, "Quick save
with onetouch", on page 185.
To save, load, reset, export and import instrument settings

2. Select "Setup"
3. Select the required function.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 177

Saving waveform data
Save
Opens a dialog box to save the current instrument setup to file.
To change the storage location, select "Destination" > "Location".
Change the filename if the auto name does not fit. The file extension SET is set auto-
matically. You can enter an optional comment that describes the setup.
Tap "Save" to start writing the data.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe:STATe on page 448
Load
Opens a file explorer to select an instrument setup file to be loaded to the instrument.
To change the storage location, select "Destination" > "Location".
Tap "Load" to change the settings.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 449
Import Export
Opens a menu to copy data between the instrument's internal storage "/INT/
SETTINGS" and a USB flash drive.
Make sure that the USB flash drive is connected.
See Chapter 9.6, "Export and import", on page 186 for a procedure description.
Memory Usage
Shows free memory space (absolute and relative) in the instrument's internal storage "/
INT" and used space per subdirectory in kbyte.
If a USB flash drive is detected, the free memory space in this device is also shown.
Factory Default
Resets the instrument to the factory settings.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet
9.2 Saving waveform data

Waveform data is always saved to USB flash drive. The waveform export provides the
following possibilities:
● Store either one waveform or all active waveforms.
● Option R&S RTB-K15: Save history data.
● Option R&S RTB-B1: Save logic channels.
To save waveforms:
1. Activate the waveforms that you want to export.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 178

3. Select "Waveforms".
4. Adjust the settings in the dialog box.
5. Tap "Save".
9.2.1 Waveform export settings
Destination
front USB port.
Tap and select the target folder. Tap "Accept Dir." to confirm selection. Existing files in
the selected folder are listed and can be deleted here.
Remote command:
EXPort:WFMSave:DESTination on page 439
File Name
Specifies the name of the file to be saved. The default is TRACE01 or a higher number,
depending on existing files in the target directory.
Remote command:
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME on page 440
Format
Selects the file format.
● "BIN - MSB": Binary data, most significant byte first
● "BIN - LSB": Binary data, least significant byte first
● "FLT - MSB": Floating point format, most significant byte first
● "FLT - LSB": Floating point format, least significant byte first
● "CSV": Comma-separated values (= default)
● "TXT": Text file format
To reload waveform data as a reference waveform, it must be stored in CSV format.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 179

For a description of the file formats, see Chapter 9.2.2, "Waveform file formats",
on page 180.
Source
Select the channels to be saved: either one active channel, or all active channels
together.
Remote command:
EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce on page 439
Points
Selects the number of data points to be saved in the waveform file.
● "Display Data": Saves all currently displayed waveform samples.
● "Acq. Memory": Saves all data samples that are stored in the acquisition memory.
This setting takes effect only for stopped acquisitions. For running acquisitions,
only always display data can be saved.
● "History Data": Saves the waveform data of the history segments.
See also Chapter 6.4.5, "Exporting history data", on page 113.
Remote command:
CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts on page 430
Save
Saves the data to the selected storage directory. The used path and filename are dis-
played when the storage is completed.
Saving is not possible if "Points" is set to "Acq. Memory" or "History Data" and the
acquisition is running.
Remote command:
EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE on page 440
9.2.2 Waveform file formats
Data of all waveforms is saved as a succession of values or pairs of values. Pairs of

values are written as two consecutive single values. Depending on the file format, only
amplitude values are stored, or the amplitude values are stored together with their time
value, or frequency value in FFT mode.
To reload waveform data as a reference waveform, it must be stored in format TRF

(save reference) or CSV (save waveform).
9.2.2.1 CSV format
In a Comma Separated Values text file, the waveform is stored in a two-columned

table. Columns are separated by a comma, and the lines are separated by line breaks
\r\n (0x0D 0x0A). Values are listed in scientific notation.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 180

The first column contains the time values of the samples in relation to the trigger point,
and the second column contains the associated amplitude values. The first line indi-
cates the units of the values in each column, and the name of the waveform. Pairs of
values are listed as two single values with the same time value (minimum and maxi-
mum).
The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use.
Example CSV1: Waveform of channel 1, single values
in s,CH1 in V
-1.1996E-02,1.000E-02
-1.1992E-02,1.000E-02
-1.1988E-02,1.000E-02
-1.1984E-02,1.000E-02
Example CSV2: Waveform of channel 1, pairs of values

in s,CH1 in V
-2.9980E+00,2.000E-05
-2.9980E+00,1.400E-04
-2.9960E+00,-1.800E-04
-2.9960E+00,1.400E-04
-2.9940E+00,-1.800E-04
-2.9940E+00,1.400E-04
Example CSV3: FFT

in Hz,FFT in dBm
0.000000E+00,1.03746E+01
1.525879E+02,7.49460E+00
3.051758E+02,-1.19854E+01
4.577637E+02,-1.56854E+01
Import of CSV files: If you import a CSV file as reference waveform from a USB flash
drive to the instrument, the import converts the data to TRF format. The instrument
reads the first and the last time value and calculates the total time of the waveform,
and it counts the number of values. Then all amplitude values are read one by one and
written with an equidistant time distribution to the TRF file. If the first two time values
are identical, the waveform is considered to consist of pairs of values.
9.2.2.2 TXT format
TXT files are ASCII files that contain only amplitude values but no time values. Ampli-
tude values are separated by commas. Pairs of values are listed as two subsequent
single values, without any identification. Amplitude values are given in scientific nota-
tion. There is no comma at the end of the file.
Amplitude values are given in scientific notation.
Example: TXT file
1.000E-02,1.000E-02,1.000E-02,1.000E-02,3.000E-02
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 181

Annotations
9.2.2.3 BIN format
BIN files contain only binary amplitude values but no time values. Each value has a
word size of 8, or 16, or 32 bit, the word size is the same throughout the file.
You can set the word order: BIN MSBF saves data in Big Endian order - beginning with
the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and ending with the LSB (Least Significant Byte). BIN
LSBF saves data beginning with the LSB and ending with the MSB. Pairs of values are
listed as two subsequent single values, without any identification.
9.2.2.4 FLT format
FLT files contain amplitude values in float format, where a 32-bit float value is saved in
4 successive bytes.
You can set the word order: FLT MSBF saves data in big endian order - beginning with
the MSB (most significant byte) and ending with the LSB (least significant byte). FLT
LSBF saves data beginning with the LSB and ending with the MSB.
9.2.2.5 TRF format
TRF is the specific binary format for reference waveforms of the R&S RTB2000. It con-
tains the amplitude value of each sample that is displayed on the screen (8 bit or 16 bit
long). For peak-detect waveforms, 2 values per sample are saved. The file contains
also time information (time of the first sample and the sample interval) and current
instrument settings.
The data can be loaded as reference waveform for further use on the instrument. It is
not intended for analysis outside the R&S RTB2000.
9.3 Annotations
Using the annotation tool, you can mark important places in the diagram and add text.
Then you can save the annotated diagram in a screenshot.
To create annotations
1. Tap the "Annotation" icon in the toolbar.
2. Use the annotation tools to draw and write on the screen.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 182

Screenshots
1 = Annotations on / off
2 = Drawing tools
3 = Text tool
4 = Eraser to delete single lines
5 = Remover to delete all annotations
3. To finish, tap the "Annotation" icon in the toolbar again.

To change the tool, switch the "Annotation" tool off and on again.
9.4 Screenshots
You can create and save screenshots of the current display of your waveforms and
measurement results. The R&S RTB2000 saves screenshots to USB flash drive or
internal memory. To save screenshots quickly, you can use the "Screenshot" toolbar
icon or the [Camera] key.
You can configure the [Camera] key to save screenshots by a single keypress. See
also Chapter 9.5, "Quick save with onetouch", on page 185.
The "Screenshot" toolbar icon saves the current display to a file according to the set-
tings in "File" menu > "Screenshots". See also "Configuring the Toolbar" on page 46.
To save screenshots:
2. Disable "OneTouch"
3. Press the key each time when you want to save a screenshot.
Alternatively, tap the "Screenshot" toolbar icon. To see the icon, add it to the tool-
bar.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 183

Screenshots
To configure screenshots:
2. Select "Screenshots".
3. Adjust the target directory ("Destination"), filename, format, and color mode.
See Chapter 9.4.1, "Screenshot settings", on page 184.
You can save the current display with "Save", or close the dialog box. The screen-
shot settings are saved and applied when you create screenshots with the key.
If you have saved the screenshots to the internal memory and want to display, copy or
transfer the screenshots, use the USB MTP interface of the instrument. See Chap-
ter 11.2.3, "USB MTP", on page 205 for connection details.
9.4.1 Screenshot settings
Access: [Save Load] > "Screenshots"
Destination
Tap and select the target folder. Tap "Accept Dir." to confirm selection. Existing files in
the selected folder are listed and can be deleted here.
front USB port.
Remote command:
EXPort:WFMSave:DESTination on page 439
File Name
Specifies the name of the file to be saved. The default is SCR01 or a higher number,
depending on existing files in the target directory.
Remote command:
MMEMory:NAME on page 441
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 184

Quick save with onetouch
Format
Selects the file format.
● "BMP": Bitmap is an uncompressed format, files are large and saving can take
some time.
● "PNG": Portable Network Graphics is a graphic format with lossless data compres-
sion.
Remote command:
HCOPy:FORMat on page 442
Color Mode
Selects the color settings for the screenshot to be saved.
● "Grayscale": Converts the display colors to a monochrome image
● "Color": Keeps the original display colors in the screenshot.
● "Inverted": Inverts the colors of the output, so that a dark waveform is printed on a
white background.
● "Inverted (gray)": Inverts the colors of the output, and converts to a monochrome
image.
Remote command:
HCOPy:COLor:SCHeme on page 442
Close window & menu

If enabled, open dialog boxes and menus are closed before the screenshot is saved.
Thus, the waveforms and results are always visible on the screenshot.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CWINdow on page 441
Device logo in screenshot

If enabled, the Rohde & Schwarz logo is printed on the screenshot.
Save
Saves the screenshot to the specified file. The used path and filename are displayed
when the storage is completed.
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 441
9.5 Quick save with onetouch

The key initiates one or more assigned saving actions. By default, the key saves a
screenshot.
If OneTouch is enabled, you can assign the following actions to the key:
● Save instrument settings.
● Save a screenshot using the settings in [Save Load] > "Screenshots".
● Save waveforms using the settings in [Save Load] > "Waveforms". If "History Data"
is selected under "Points", this setting is ignored, and the acquired data of the new-
est segment is saved.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 185

Export and import
● Save reference waveforms.

● Save search results.
● Decoded bus data ("Bus Table", requires at least one protocol option for serial bus.
● Statistical results. OneTouch is the only way to save statistical results.
All data is saved to a ZIP file on the connected USB flash drive.
To configure and use OneTouch:

1. Connect the USB flash drive.
3. Enable "OneTouch".
4. Tap "onetouch".
5. Select the target directory ("Destination"), filename, and data you want to save.
6. To save the data now, tap "Save".
7. Close the dialog.
8. Press the key each time when you want to save the data.
9.6 Export and import

To copy reference waveforms, formularies (equation sets), and instrument settings
from the internal storage to USB flash drive or vice versa, the "Import Export" functions
are used.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 186

Export and import
The name of the target file can be changed, so you can copy and rename in one oper-
ation. For reference waveforms, you can also change the target file format and convert
the data during export/import.
1. Connect the USB flash drive.
3. To copy setup files, select "Setup" > "Import Export".

To copy reference waveforms, select "References".
Import/export menu for

instrument settings and
equations
Import/export menu for
reference waveforms
4. Define the source file for the copy operation:

a) Tap "Source File".
b) If necessary, change the storage location with "Location".
c) Select the folder that contains the source file.
d) Select the file. A small screenshot helps to identify the file.
e) Tap "Load".
The source file is selected, but not loaded to the R&S RTB2000.
5. Define the target directory.

a) Tap "Dest. Path".
b) If necessary, change the storage location with "Location".
c) Select the target folder. You can also create a folder here.
d) Tap "Accept Dir.".
6. If necessary, change the name of the target file in "Dest. Name".

Note: If a file with the same filename already exists in the destination directory, it
will be overwritten without notification.
7. For reference waveforms, you can change the file format in "Dest. Format".
8. Tap "Import Export".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 187

Export and import
The source file is copied to the destination directory with the specified name and
format.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 188

R&S®RTB2000 General instrument setup
Instrument settings
10 General instrument setup

The general instrument settings are available in all operating modes.
10.1 Instrument settings

► To open the "Setup" menu:
a) Tap the "Menu" rhomb icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
b) Scroll down. Select "Setup".
Device Information
Displays information on the instrument, such as its serial number, the installed firm-
ware version and hardware information. This information is required if you have a sup-
port request. The dialog also contains a link to the "Open Source Acknowledgment".
Language
See Chapter 10.6, "Setting the date, time and language", on page 197.
Self Alignment
See Chapter 10.5, "Performing a self-alignment", on page 196.
Probe Adjust
Opens the wizard for probe compensation. You can find this function also when you
press the [Apps Selection] key.
See: Chapter 4.4.1, "Adjusting passive probes", on page 64.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 189

Instrument settings
Interface
Activates or deactivates additional instrument interfaces. Use these interfaces to com-
municate with the instrument, for example to read out data or automate the measuring
station. USB and Ethernet (LAN) interfaces are installed in the rear panel. After select-
ing an interface, tap "Parameter" to define additional parameters.
USB ← Interface
Activates the type B USB interface on the rear panel for remote control. This USB
interface provides a simple way to connect the instrument to a PC. The USB 2.0 stan-
dard is supported. Use a connection cable that is suitable for a type B USB interface.
See also: Chapter 11.2, "USB connection", on page 204.
Ethernet ← Interface
Activates the Ethernet interface on the rear panel, which allows connecting the instru-
ment to various other devices. Access to the instrument is controlled via its IP address.
By default, the instrument is set to use DHCP. If the instrument cannot find a DHCP
server, it takes about two minutes until the Ethernet parameters are available.
See also: Chapter 11.1, "LAN connection", on page 201.
Parameter ← Interface
Opens a dialog to configure Ethernet parameters, or to select the USB connection
depending on the selected interface.
Aux Out
Opens the "Aux Out" menu to define which signals are generated at the [Aux Out] con-
nector.
"Off" Disables the auxiliary output.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 190

Instrument settings
"Trigger Out" Outputs a pulse when the instrument triggers.

"10 MHz" Outputs a 10 MHz reference frequency.
"Function Generator"
Outputs the waveform specified in the "Function Generator" dialog.
"Mask Violation"
Outputs a pulse when a mask is violated.
This setting is only available if the "Mask" application is selected in
the "Apps Selection" dialog.
Remote command:
TRIGger:OUT:MODE on page 461
Firmware Update
See Chapter 10.8, "Updating the firmware", on page 200.
Options
See Chapter 10.7, "Options", on page 199.
Date & Time

See Chapter 10.6, "Setting the date, time and language", on page 197.
Device Name
Sets a name of the instrument to simplify the instrument identification. The name is
shown, for example, on screenshots and in the device information.
Education Mode
Disables several functions for educational purposes or enables these functions for nor-
mal usage.
"Education Mode"
If enabled, the autoset, quick measurement and automatic measure-
ment are disabled and not available. The active education mode is
indicated in the upper right corner by a doctoral cap icon.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 191

Display settings
"Set Password"
You can enter a password to prevent unauthorized activation or deac-
tivation of the education mode.
"Clear Password"
Deletes the password and allows all users enabling or disabling the
education mode. You have to enter the password first before you can
delete it.
Using the remote command, you can clear the education mode pass-
word without using the password.
Remote command:
SYSTem:EDUCation:PRESet on page 458
Secure Erase
Deletes current instrument configuration data and user data from the internal storage
(for example, reference files, equation sets, masks). Calibration data remains in the
storage.
Use this function before you send the instrument to the service. If the instrument is
used in a secured environment, the function ensures that all sensitive data is removed
before the instrument leaves the secured area.
Unintended "Secure Erase" is prevented by a notification that explains what happens if
you proceed. To start "Secure Erase", select "Yes", otherwise select "No". Do not turn
off the instrument before the erasing process has been completed.
10.2 Display settings
► To delete all waveforms and measurement results from the display, press the
[Clear Screen] key.
► To open the "Display" menu:

a) Tap the "Menu" icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
b) Scroll down. Select "Display".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 192

Display settings
► To remove all waveforms and results from the display, press the [Clear Screen] key
at the front panel.
Persistence
Defines the persistence (afterglow effect) of the waveform on the display.
"Off" Deactivates persistence.
"Manual" User-defined persistence according to "Time" setting.
"Infinite" Activates persistence with infinite duration. Each new data point
remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the
persistence is cleared
Remote command:
DISPlay:PERSistence:TYPE on page 450
Time ← Persistence
Specifies the afterglow duration if "Persistence" is set to "Manual". Each new data
point remains on the screen for the time defined here. Values range from 50 ms (=
default) to 12.8 s.
Remote command:
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME on page 451
Intensities
Provides functions to define the brightness (relative luminous intensity) of display ele-
ments and control LEDs.
You can also open this menu directly using the [Intensity] key.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 193

Display settings
Waveform ← Intensities
Defines the brightness of the waveform lines in the diagram. Enter a percentage
between 0 (barely visible) and 100% or turn the [Navigation] knob to adjust the wave-
form brightness directly. The default value is 50%.
Remote command:
DISPlay:INTensity:WAVeform on page 453
Grid ← Intensities
Defines the brightness of the grid lines in the diagram. Enter a percentage between 0
(barely visible) and 100% or turn the [Navigation] knob to adjust the grid brightness
directly. The default value is 50%.
Remote command:
DISPlay:INTensity:GRID on page 452
LED Brightness ← Intensities

Defines the intensity of illuminated front panel keys and rotary knobs in percent.
Dots Only
If activated, only the individual data points are displayed. If deactivated, the individual
data points are connected by a line.
Remote command:
DISPlay:STYLe on page 453
Inverse Brightness
Inverts the brightness level of the signals. Normally, values that occur frequently are
brighter than rare values. This setting inverts this behavior: Rare values are brighter
than frequent values. Use this setting in combination with persistence to detect rare
values within the waveform.
Remote command:
DISPlay:PALette on page 453
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 194

Reset
Grid
Defines how the grid is displayed.

"Lines" Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines.
"Reticle" Displays crosshairs instead of a grid.
"Off" Removes the grid from the display.
Remote command:
DISPlay:GRID:STYLe on page 452
Annotation ← Grid
Enables or disables the display of scale values and units for the x-axis and y-axis at
the grid lines. Per default, grid labels are enabled.
Remote command:
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation[:ENABle] on page 454
Track Grid ← Grid

If enabled, the grid moves with the waveforms if you change the waveform's position in
horizontal or vertical direction.
If disabled (= default), the grid remains centered on the display if you change the wave-
form's position.
Remote command:
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation:TRACk on page 454
10.3 Reset
Reset is helpful if the instrument is in undefined condition and cannot be operated.
To reset all waveform and measurement settings:

► Press [Preset].
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 195

Performing a self-alignment
Preset does not change the display settings, for example, intensities and brightness.
To reset these settings, restore the factory settings.
To restore the factory settings:

1. Press [Save Load].
2. Tap "Setup".
3. Tap "Factory Default".
If it is not possible to reset the instrument using the keys and the touchscreen, proceed
as follows:
1. Shut down the instrument: press the [Standby] key.
2. Start the instrument: press the [Standby] key.
3. As soon as the message "Press Autoset to restore English language" is shown on

the start screen: Press and hold the Preset key until the "Update firmware" dialog is
shown.
4. Tap "Exit" to close the dialog box.

All instrument settings are reset to factory defaults, and you can use the instrument
as usual.
10.4 Locking the touchscreen

The Touch Lock key locks the touchscreen to prevent unintended use. When the
touchscreen is off, the key is illuminated. Press again to unlock the touchscreen.
10.5 Performing a self-alignment

The self-alignment aligns the data from several input channels vertically and horizon-
tally to synchronize the timebases, amplitudes and positions.
Recommendation on performing the self-alignment:
● When putting the instrument into operation for the first time
● After a firmware update
● Once a week
● When major temperature changes occur (> 5°)
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 196

Setting the date, time and language
Preparing the instrument for self-alignment

Make sure that the instrument has been running and warming up before you start the
self-alignment. The minimum warm-up time is indicated in the data sheet.
Before the self-alignment, remove all probes, leads, and other connected lines from the
instrument input.
1. Remove all probes, leads, and other connected lines from the instrument inputs.
2. Open the "Setup" menu.
3. Tap "Self Alignment"
4. Tap "Start".
The alignment can take up to 15 minutes. You can stop the process with "Abort".
5. When finished, tap "OK" to close the message box.
6. Tap "Exit".
Description of settings
Start
Starts the internal self-calibration of the instrument. Status information is displayed on
the screen.
Remote command:
CALibration on page 455
Save Alignment Log file

The log file records the results of the self-alignment. You save the log file.
Remote command:
CALibration:STATe? on page 455
10.6 Setting the date, time and language

The instrument has a date and time clock. You can adjust the clock to the local time,
and you can select the display language. Supported languages are listed in the data
sheet. The help is provided in English. A reboot of the instrument is not necessary.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 197

Setting the date, time and language
To set date and time

2. Scroll down the menu. Tap "Date & Time".
3. Select the date: Scroll the year, month, and day columns until the required date is
displayed.
4. Select the time: Scroll the hour and minute columns until the required time is dis-
played.
5. If you do not want to see date and time on the display, disable "Display Date &
Time".
6. Tap "Save".
To set the language

2. Tap "Language".
3. Select the language.

The language is changed immediately.
Description of settings
Language
Selects the language in which the button labels and other screen information is dis-
played. The help is available only in English.
Remote command:
DISPlay:LANGuage on page 450
Date & Time

Provides a dialog to set the current date and time in the instrument.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DATE on page 455
SYSTem:TIME on page 456
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 198

Options
Display Date & Time

Switches the date and time display in the upper right corner of the screen on or off.
Remote command:
DISPlay:DTIMe on page 450
10.7 Options
All options (except for R&S RTB-B1) are activated by license keys. No additional instal-
lation or hardware change is required.
Unregistered licenses
Unregistered licenses are not assigned to a particular instrument. The instrument
accepts only registered licenses. If your license is delivered unregistered, use the
online tool R&S License Manager to register the license for your instrument. The regis-
tration of a permanent license is irreversible, so ensure that you register it for the cor-
rect instrument. The address of the tool is https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service.
You need the device ID of the instrument on which the option will be installed for regis-
tration.
The "Active Options" tab provides information on installed software options. Here you
can install new options or deactivate existing options using license keys.
The "Inactive Options" tab lists all deactivated and expired options.
The "Deactivated Options" tab shows all deactivated options with their deactivation
information and provides a function to export the deactivation response. The response
is required by the R&S License Manager.
10.7.1 Activating options
Consult your sales representative and provide the material number, serial number, and
the device ID of your instrument to get a license key. You find this information in
"Setup" menu > "Device Information".
The license key is provided in written form or in a file. Unregistered licenses must be
registered in the R&S License Manager before they can be activated on the instru-
ment.
1. If you received the option key in a file, save the file to a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the drive to the R&S RTB2000.
4. Scroll down the menu. Tap "Setup".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 199

Updating the firmware
5. Select "Options".
6. If you received a key in written form, tap "Input option key manually". Enter the key.
If you received a key in digital form as a file, tap "Read option key from file". Select
path /USB_FRONT and the option key file.
7. If you want to activate several options, repeat step 5 for each option.
8. Restart the instrument.
10.8 Updating the firmware

Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version. Firmware updates are
provided on the Internet at
www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/rtb2000.
Along with the firmware file, you find the Release Notes describing the improvements
and modifications.
Make sure to update the firmware if a new version is available.
1. Download the firmware installation file *.fwu to a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector at the front of the instrument.
4. Scroll down the menu. Tap "Setup".
5. Select "Firmware Update"

Now you can see an info window with information about the installed and new firm-
ware and front controller firmware. If you have no newer firmware than the installed
one, a message appears.
6. Tap "Execute" to start the firmware update.

Wait until the update has finished. After installation, the instrument restarts auto-
matically.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 200

R&S®RTB2000 Network connections and remote operation
LAN connection
11 Network connections and remote operation
11.1 LAN connection

The R&S RTB2000 is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an
Ethernet LAN (local area network). A LAN connection is necessary for remote control
of the instrument, and for access from a computer using a web browser.
Network environment
When connected to LAN, the instrument is potentially accessible from the internet,
which constitutes a potential security risk. For example, attackers can misuse or dam-
age the instrument.
To reduce security risks, install the latest firmware. Ensure that the network settings
comply with the security policies of your company. Contact your local system adminis-
trator or IT department before connecting your instrument to the company LAN.
Connecting the instrument to the LAN

1. Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector at the rear panel of the instrument.
3. Tap "Interface".
If the menu items are grayed, the connection failed. Check the connection of the
LAN cable and the network availability.
4. Tap "Ethernet" to select LAN connection.
5. Tap "Parameter".
You see all connection details on the display, and you can save them to a file.
11.1.1 LAN settings
Access: see "Connecting the instrument to the LAN" on page 201.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 201

LAN connection
Figure 11-1: Example of the Ethernet setup dialog and menu
IP Mode
Selects the Internet protocol mode:
● "Manual": To be used if the network does not support dynamic host configuration
protocol (DHCP). The addresses must be set manually.
● "DHCP/Auto IP" enables DHCP for automatic network parameter distribution and
shows the values of these parameters. By default, the instrument is configured to
use dynamic configuration and obtain all address information automatically. Thus, it
is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instru-
ment configuration.
Note that refreshing the values (for example after disconnecting the LAN cable and
reconnecting it) can take a while, depending on the network responsiveness.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:DHCP on page 459
IP, Subnet mask, Gateway, DNS Server

Show or specify:
● The instrument's IP address.
● The IP subnet mask used by the instrument.
● The IP gateway used by the instrument.
● The address of the domain name server.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPADdress on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:SUBNet on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:GATeway on page 459
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 202

LAN connection
IP Port, VXI-11 Port

Specify the IP port number (default = 5025) and the VXI-11 port number (default =
1024).
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPPort on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:VXIPort on page 460
Link
"Yes", if the instrument is connected to a local area network via the LAN interface on
the rear panel.
"No", if no LAN connection is detected.
Transfer
Enables automatic transfer speed selection and shows the currently selected value.
Alternatively, you can select one of the predefined settings that corresponds to your
network data rate.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:TRANsfer on page 460
MAC, VISA
Show the instrument's media access control address, and the virtual instrument soft-
ware architecture (VISA) address that is used to address the instrument in remote con-
trol.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:MACaddress? on page 460
Host name
Shows or specifies the name of the instrument, which the instrument can use to con-
nect to the DHCP server.
Status
Shows the connection status, for example "Allocating network address" or "DHCP, IP
address received".
Password
Specifies an optional password for remote access to the instrument.
Reset
Deletes all IP address settings, and removes the address from the VISA string. All
other settings are set to default values.
Save
Retrieves a DHCP address from the DHCP server or checks the manual IP address,
updates the VISA string, checks connection and saves all settings in the instrument.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 203

USB connection
11.2 USB connection

Alternatively to a LAN connection, you can use the USB type B (device USB) connec-
tor at the rear panel to access the instrument via USB.
Connecting the instrument using USB

1. Connect the USB cable to the USB type B connector at the rear panel of the instru-
ment, and to the computer.
3. Tap "Interface".
4. Tap "USB" to select USB connection.
5. Tap "Parameter".
6. Select the USB mode.

● USB TMC (Test & Measurement Class)
● USB VCP (Virtual Com Port)
● USB MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)
11.2.1 USB TMC
USB TMC means USB Test & Measurement Class. You can use this interface for
remote control of the instrument using SCPI commands. USB TMC does not need a
driver installation but requires a VISA installation on the controlling computer. VISA is
used to access the instrument, to send remote commands, and to read status informa-
tion.
Rohde & Schwarz provides the standardized I/O software library R&S VISA for com-
munication via TCP/IP (LAN: HiSlip, VXI-11) or USB (USBTMC) interfaces. R&S VISA
is available for download at the Rohde & Schwarz website www.rohde-schwarz.com/
rsvisa.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 204

Remote access using a web browser
11.2.2 USB VCP
USB VCP uses the virtual COM port (VCP) to communicate with the measuring instru-
ment. You can use any terminal program to send SCPI commands. USB VCP requires
a USB VCP driver on the controlling computer. If the computer requests a driver instal-
lation, you can download the driver at the Rohde & Schwarz website (www.rohde-
schwarz.com/de/treiber/hmo/, HO732). You need administrator rights to install the
driver.
11.2.3 USB MTP
USB MTP is the USB media transfer protocol. It is a solution to load data from the
oscilloscope to the computer. Remote control using SCPI commands is not possible.
USB MTP does not need a driver installation. Connect a USB cable to the USB type B
connector at the instrument and to the computer (USB type A). Select USB MTP as
interface, and you can access the oscilloscope data from the computer. You see the
oscilloscope in the computer's Device Manager and in the file explorer as portable
instrument.
11.3 Remote access using a web browser

The R&S RTB2000 firmware contains a web server. If a LAN connection is established,
you can access the instrument remotely using a web browser on the control computer.
The browser access allows you to:
● Check instrument data
● Save and print screenshots
● Send remote commands
● Save waveform and instrument data
● Check network settings
● Change the password
● See a live view of the display
● Control the instrument remotely
11.3.1 Accessing the instrument using a web browser
To access the R&S RTB2000, you need a LAN connection and the IP address of the
instrument.
1. Obtain the IP address of the R&S RTB2000:

● Tap the green network icon in the top right corner of the screen.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 205

● "Setup" menu > "Interface" > "Ethernet" > "Parameter" > "IP".
2. Open an Internet browser on the control computer.
3. Enter the IP address of the R&S RTB2000 in the address line: http://
xxx.yyy.zzz.xxx.
The "Instrument Home" page opens.
If already another user is using the instrument via web access, connection is not possi-
ble, and you get an information about that.
11.3.2 Instrument home
The "Instrument Home" page provides information on the instrument and the LAN con-
nection.
11.3.3 Screenshot
The "Screenshot" page shows a copy of the instrument's display. It also provides
instrument control functions and screenshot settings.
Instrument control
● "Run" and "Stop" = start and stop continuous acquisition, same as [Run Stop] key
on the instrument.
● "Single" = Single key on the instrument
● "Autoset" = [Autoset] key on the instrument
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 206

● "Preset" = [Preset] key on the instrument
Screenshots
● "Auto refresh" and "Update"
Get the current screen content from the instrument. With "Auto refresh", you can
set the interval of automatic updates.
● "Format" and "Color mode":
● Set the file format and color mode of the screenshot.
► To save the screenshot, right-click the picture and select "Save image as".
11.3.4 SCPI device control
On the "SCPI Device Control" page, you can check how the transfer of remote com-
mands is working.
You can enter a single command, for example; *IDN?, and transmit it with "Send". Do
not press the [Enter] key.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 207

If the sent command has an error, an error message is created in the background, and
you do not get any response. You can see the error messages using "Last Error Mes-
sage" and "All Error Messages"
11.3.5 Save/load
On the "Save/Load" page, you can save waveform data and instrument settings to a
file - either on the computer (local host) or on the instrument. On the computer, the
default storage directory is the download folder, but you can change the directory using
the download functions of your browser. On the instrument, the files are saved in the
internal storage.
You can also load reference waveforms and instrument settings from file to the instru-
ment ("Load from local host").
To save data to a file on the computer

1. Under "Save to local file", select the waveform or the device settings in the
"Source" list.
2. Select the file "Format".

See also:
● Chapter 9.2.2, "Waveform file formats", on page 180
● Chapter 6.3, "Reference waveforms", on page 102
3. For analog and digital channels, select whether you want to read out the display
memory ("Display Data") or the entire acquisition memory ("Acq. Memory").
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 208

4. Click "Save".
11.3.6 Network settings
On the "Network Setting" page, you can change the port settings, switch off DHCP
address and enter an IP address in a more comfortable way than directly on the instru-
ment. To take effect of the changes, "Submit" them to the instrument.
"Reset" removes all modified values that were not yet sent to the instrument.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 209

11.3.7 Change password
On the "Change Password" page, you can change or remove the password to protect
remote access to the instrument. Alternatively, you can change the password in the
Ethernet settings dialog on the instrument.
11.3.8 Livescreen
You see a live view of the instrument's display. Controlling the instrument is not possi-
ble, and only one remote connection to the livescreen is allowed at a time. Use this
page for demo purposes, for example.
To close the livescreen, select "Instrument Home".
11.3.9 Remote front panel
On the "Remote Front Panel" page, you can remotely operate the instrument using the
emulated front panel. A live view of the instrument's front panel is shown. You can use
the keys, the knobs and the menus in the same way as directly on the instrument. Only
one remote connection to the remote front panel is allowed at a time.
To close the "Remote Front Panel", select "Instrument Home".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 210

R&S®RTB2000 Serial bus analysis
Basics of protocol analysis
12 Serial bus analysis

Using the R&S RTB2000 and additional options, you can analyze the following serial
protocols:
● SPI no CS (Serial Peripheral Interface with 2 lines) and SPI with CS (Serial Periph-
eral Interface with 3 lines) - requires option R&S RTB-K1
See Chapter 12.2, "SPI bus (option R&S RTB-K1)", on page 221.
● I²C (Inter-Integrated Circuit bus) - requires option R&S RTB-K1
See Chapter 12.3, "I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)", on page 229.
● UART/RS232 (EIA-232 serial interface) - requires option R&S RTB-K2
See Chapter 12.4, "UART / RS232 (option R&S RTB-K2)", on page 238.
● CAN (Controller Area Network) - requires option R&S RTB-K3
See Chapter 12.5, "CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)", on page 244.
● LIN (Local Interconnect Network) - requires option R&S RTB-K3
See Chapter 12.6, "LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)", on page 258.
To analyze parallel buses, you need MSO option R&S RTB-B1 to get the logic chan-
nels. See Chapter 13, "Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO)", on page 272.
12.1 Basics of protocol analysis

The analysis of serial data consists of the following main steps:
● Protocol configuration:
Select the protocol type, configure the input lines and the protocol-specific settings.
● Decoding:
Select the display format of the decoded data. The digitized signal is displayed on
the screen together with the decoded content of the messages in combs. You can
scale the signal display and zoom into it to see it in more detail.
You can also list the decoded results in tabular form in the bus table.
● Triggering:
You can trigger on various events that are typical for the configured bus type. For
example, trigger on start or stop of messages, or on serial patterns.
● Search:
On CAN and LIN buses, you can search for events. The search events are similar
to the trigger events. The search finds all matching events in an acquisition, while
the trigger finds only the trigger event.
Analysis can be performed on analog and digital input channels. Digital channels
require if MSO option R&S RTB-B1.
You can configure 2 protocol buses and select one of the configured buses for analy-
sis.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 211

● Protocol - common settings...................................................................................212

● Displaying decode results..................................................................................... 214
● Bus table: decode results......................................................................................215
● Bus labels..............................................................................................................217
● Label list................................................................................................................218
12.1.1 Protocol - common settings
► To open the protocol setup, press the [Protocol] key.
The common settings in the "Protocol" menu define the bus type and open further
menus to adjust the display of the decoded bus signal.
Figure 12-1: Protocol menu with bus types expanded
Bus
Selects the bus to be configured and analyzed.
Bus Type
Defines the bus or interface type for analysis. Available buses depend on the installed
options.
Remote command:
BUS:TYPE on page 463
Decode
Enables protocol decoding for the selected bus.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 212

Remote command:
BUS:STATe on page 464
Configuration
Opens or closes the dialog box with configuration settings of the selected bus.
The following chapters describe manual protocol configuration:
● Chapter 13.5, "Parallel buses", on page 276
● Chapter 12.2.2, "SPI configuration", on page 221
● Chapter 12.3.2, "I²C configuration", on page 231
● Chapter 12.4.2, "UART configuration", on page 238
● Chapter 12.5.2, "CAN configuration", on page 246
● Chapter 12.6.2, "LIN configuration", on page 260
Trigger
Opens the trigger setup for the selected protocol.
The following chapters describe protocol triggering:
● Chapter 12.2.3, "SPI trigger", on page 225
● Chapter 12.3.3, "I²C trigger", on page 232
● Chapter 12.4.3, "UART trigger", on page 241
● Chapter 12.5.3, "CAN trigger", on page 248
● Chapter 12.6.3, "LIN trigger", on page 262
Triggering on parallel buses is not possible.
Note: Selecting "Trigger" in the protocol menu automatically enables protocol decod-
ing.
Display Setup
Opens a menu to define display settings, e.g. data formats. Display settings are valid
for all protocol types.
See Chapter 12.1.2, "Displaying decode results", on page 214.
Label List
Opens a menu to load and apply a list with symbolic names of addresses or identifiers.
Only available for CAN and LIN.
See Chapter 12.1.5, "Label list", on page 218.
Bus Table
Opens a menu to define bus table settings for the decoded frames of the acquisition.
See Chapter 12.1.3, "Bus table: decode results", on page 215.
Label
Opens a menu to define a label for the selected bus.
See Chapter 12.1.4, "Bus labels", on page 217.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 213

12.1.2 Displaying decode results
When the configuration of a serial bus is complete, the instrument can decode the sig-
nal. The decode results are displayed in two ways:
● Bus signal with combs, time-correlated to the input signals. The combs show the
values of the frames or words.
● Bus table. The table lists data values and time information of the frames or words.
For details, see Chapter 12.1.3, "Bus table: decode results", on page 215.
To decode a serial bus

► In the "Bus" menu, enable "Decode".
The bus signal with combs is shown. The colors of the combs are protocol-specific
and described in the "Decode Results" chapters of the protocol description.
To adjust scaling and position of the decoded bus signal

1. The horizontal size of the combs is defined by the horizontal time scale, which is
the same for input signals and the bus signal. Turn the horizontal [Scale] knob to
change the time scale.
2. To adjust the trigger position, turn the horizontal [Position] knob.
3. The vertical size and position are specific for the selected bus signal.
a) Tap the bus signal to set the focus to it.
b) Turn the vertical [Scale] knob to set the height of the combs.
c) Turn the upper knob in the Vertical section to move the bus signal vertically on
the screen.
d) To set the signal to the center of the display, press the upper knob in the Verti-
cal section.
Remote commands
● BUS:DSIZe on page 465
● BUS:POSition on page 465
To set the data format and bit display

1. Press the [Protocol] key.
2. Select "Display Setup".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 214

Display
Selects the decoding format of the data: binary, hexadecimal, decimal, octal or ASCII.
The setting applies to the data in the combs of the decoded bus line, and to the bus
table.
Remote command:
BUS:FORMat on page 464
Bits
Enables the display of the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line.
Remote command:
BUS:DSIGnals on page 465
12.1.3 Bus table: decode results
The bus table shows the detailed decoded data for each frame of the acquisition. At
running acquisition, the table results are updated continuously. In stop mode, you can
access the individual frames and analyze them. If the data of a frame is long, several
lines per frame are shown. Scrolling and selecting is frame-based, i.e. if you scroll the
table, you always select a complete frame, not a single line of the frame.
You can also save the results to CSV file.
Figure 12-2: Example of a bus table: decode results of an I2C bus
To open the bus table

1. In the "Bus" menu, select "Bus Table".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 215

2. Select "Bus Table".

The menu entry gets highlighted, and the bus table is shown below the diagram.
To navigate in the bus table

1. To adjust the table size, drag up or down one of the arrow buttons on the left or
right.
3. In the "Bus Table" menu, select "Track Frame".
4. Tap a frame in the bus table.

The start of the selected frame is marked by a line and a rhomb. This marker is
moved to the center of the diagram, followed by the decoded data.
To save the bus table

1. If you want to save the data outside the instrument, connect a USB flash drive.
2. Tap the "Save" symbol in the upper right corner of the bus table.
3. Select the correct "Destination" and the path.

You can also store the data on the instrument. Therefore, select the "Destination"
"/INT/BUSTABLE".
4. If necessary, change the filename and enter a comment.
5. Tap "Save".
The data is saved to a CSV file.
Bus table menu
Bus Table
Displays or hides a table of decoded signal data.
Remote command:
BUS:RESult on page 465
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 216

Track Frame
If enabled, the selected frame in the bus table is automatically synchronized with the
waveform display.
The function is only available if the acquisition has been stopped.
Frame time difference

If selected, the time column in the bus table shows the frame's time difference to the
previous frame. The column is indicated with "Time diff.". If the setting is disabled, the
absolute time in relation to the trigger point is shown in the "Start Time" column.
Save
Opens the "Save" menu to save the decoded data in a CSV file (comma-separated
list).
12.1.4 Bus labels
A bus label is a name of a bus. The bus label is shown on the right side of the display
at the bus signal, and in the bus table.
Do not confuse "Label" and "Label List". The "Label" names the bus, while the "Label
List" contains the names of bus nodes identified by addresses or identifiers.
Access: [Protocol] > "Label"
Label
Displays or hides the bus label. The bus label is shown on the right side of the display
at the bus signal, and in the bus table. The bus and its label are only visible, if
"Decode" is enabled.
You can enter a label text in several ways:
● Select a string from the library list with "Predefined Label".
● Enter a user-defined text using "Edit Label".
Remote command:
BUS:LABel:STATe on page 464
Predefined Label
Edit Label
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 217

Remote command:
BUS:LABel on page 464
12.1.5 Label list
For all protocols using ID or address identification, it is possible to create label lists
containing addresses or IDs, a symbolic name for each node (symbolic label), and
some protocol-specific information.
You can load label lists, and activate its usage for decoding. As a result, the decoded
signal shows the symbolic label instead of the ID or address values, so it is easy to
identify the messages of the different bus nodes.
You can also use the label list to trigger on an identifier or address. Instead of entering
the value, you select the name, which is defined in the label list.
The format of label list files is PTT.
Label lists are protocol-specific. They are described in the corresponding protocol
chapters:
● Chapter 12.5.6, "CAN label list", on page 256
● Chapter 12.6.6, "LIN label list", on page 269
12.1.5.1 Using label lists
To load a label list and display the labels

1. Save the label list file on a USB flash drive.
2. Press the [Protocol] key.
3. Configure the protocol.
4. In the "Bus" menu, select "Label List".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 218

5. Select "Load".
6. Navigate to the label list file, select it, and tap "Load".
7. To read the label list, tap "Show Label List".
8. To see the node labels in the display of the decoded data, tap "Apply".
To trigger on an identifier or address using the label

Prerequisites: The bus is configured, decoding is enabled, and a decoded signal is visi-
ble.
1. Open the "Bus" menu.
2. Select "Trigger".
3. Set the following trigger settings:

a) "<Protocol> Trigger" = "Identifier", or "Identifier + Data", or "Address", or
"Address and Data".
b) Tap "Symbolic ID".
c) Select the label. The list provides all symbolic names that are defined in the
loaded file.
4. Close the dialog.
5. Set the trigger mode to "Normal".
12.1.5.2 Content and format of the PTT file
Label lists are stored as PTT (protocol translation table) files. The PTT file format is an
extension of the CSV format (comma-separated values). You can edit it with standard
editors, for example, with MS Excel or a text editor.
The PTT file has three types of lines:
● Comment lines begin with a hash character #. A hash character at any other posi-
tion in the line is treated like a standard character.
● Command lines begin with a commercial at character @. An @ character at any
other position in the line is treated like a standard character.
● Standard lines are the lines that not qualify as comment or command lines. They
build the core of the label list.
Command lines
Command lines define the version of the PTT file and the protocol name:
● @FILE_VERSION: must appear exactly once in the file
● @PROTOCOL_NAME: must appear at least once in the file. Thus, one file can
contain several label lists for different protocols.
# --- Start of PTT file
@FILE_VERSION = 1.0
@PROTOCOL_NAME = i2c
[... Label list for I2C]
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 219

@PROTOCOL_NAME = can
[... Label list for CAN]
# --- End of PTT file
Standard lines
Standard lines define the contents of the label list. The rules for standard lines follow
the csv convention, they are:
● Values are separated by commas
● Space characters following a delimiter are ignored
● Values with a special character (comma, newline, or double quote) must be
enclosed in double quotes
● Text in double quotes must be escaped by double quote characters
The format of the numeric value is indicated by a suffix. The following formats are sup-
ported:
Format Suffix Example
Decimal <empty> 106, DeviceName

d 106d, DeviceName
Hexadecimal h 6Ah, DeviceName

or prefix: 0x6A, DeviceName
Octal o 152o, DeviceName
Binary b 01101010b, DeviceName
The maximum supported word size for (unsigned) integers is 64 bits.

# --- Start of PTT file
@FILE_VERSION = 1.0
# Following two lines are equal:
7,01h,Temperature
7,01h, Temperature
# A comma must be enclosed in double quotes:
7,01h,"Temperature, Pressure, and Volume"
# A double quote must also be enclosed in double quotes:
7,7Fh,"Highspeed ""Master"" 01"
# Following lines yield the same result:
7d,0x11,Pressure
7h,11h,Pressure
0x7,17d,Pressure
7,17,Pressure
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 220

SPI bus (option R&S RTB-K1)
12.2 SPI bus (option R&S RTB-K1)

● The SPI protocol................................................................................................... 221
● SPI configuration...................................................................................................221
● SPI trigger............................................................................................................. 225
● SPI decode results................................................................................................228
12.2.1 The SPI protocol
A 4-channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol, or the MSO
option R&S RTB-B1.
The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral
devices, in particular, for transmission of data streams.
Main characteristics of SPI are:
● Master-slave communication
● No device addressing; The slave is accessed by a chip select, or slave select line.
● No acknowledgement mechanism to confirm receipt of data
● Duplex capability
Most SPI buses have four lines, two data and two control lines:
● Clock line to all slaves (SCLK)
● Slave Select or Chip Select line (SS or CS)
● Master data output, slave data input (MOSI or SDI)
● Master data input, slave data output (MISO or SDO)
When the master generates a clock and selects a slave device, data may be transfer-
red in either or both directions simultaneously.
Figure 12-3: Simple configuration of SPI bus
The data bits of a message are grouped by following criteria:

● A word contains a number of successive bits. The word length is defined in the pro-
tocol configuration.
● A frame contains a number of successive words, at least one word.
12.2.2 SPI configuration
The correct setup of the protocol parameters and the threshold is the condition for
decoding the signal.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 221

To set up and decode an SPI signal (with or without CS)

1. Press the [Protocol] key in the Analysis area of the front panel.
2. Select the bus that you want to use: B1 or B2.
3. Select the "Bus Type" = "SPI (no CS)" or "SPI (with CS)".
5. Select the sources of the signal lines, the channels to which the lines are connec-
ted.
6. Set the threshold. Use one of the following methods:

● Tap "Find Threshold". The instrument evaluates the signal and sets the thresh-
old.
● Enter the threshold value in the numeric field.
7. Set the other signal parameters according to the signal characteristics. For details
on settings, see SPI configuration settings below.
8. In the "Bus" menu, enable "Decode".
SPI configuration settings
Figure 12-4: SPI (no CS) setup
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 222

Figure 12-5: SPI (with CS) setup
Chip Select..................................................................................................................223
Clock........................................................................................................................... 223
Slope........................................................................................................................... 223
MOSI / MISO...............................................................................................................223
Polarity........................................................................................................................ 224
Threshold, Find Threshold.......................................................................................... 224
Word Size....................................................................................................................224
Idle Time......................................................................................................................224
Chip Select
Selects the input channel of the chip select (CS) line. Only available in the "SPI (with
CS)" setup.
If the MSO option R&S RTB-B1 is installed, you can use logic channels as source.
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:CS:SOURce on page 466
Clock
Selects the input channel of the clock line.
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:SOURce on page 467
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:SOURce on page 470
Slope
Selects if data is sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock. The clock slope
marks the begin of a new bit.
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity on page 467
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:POLarity on page 470
MOSI / MISO
Select the input channel of the data lines. MOSI is mandatory, the MISO line is
optional.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 223

Note: MISO is available only on bus 1. On bus 2, you can set only one "Data" line. The
MISO line occupies a second bus line. Thus, if MISO is used on bus 1, bus 2 is not
available.
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce = BUS:SPI:DATA:SOURce on page 467
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce on page 468
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:SOURce = BUS:SSPI:DATA:SOURce on page 470
BUS:SSPI:MISO:SOURce on page 471
Polarity
Selects if the transmitted signal is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1).
For CS, the default is low active.
For MOSI / MISO, the default is high active.
For data, the default is high active.
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:MOSI:POLarity = BUS:SPI:DATA:POLarity on page 468
BUS:SPI:MISO:POLarity on page 469
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:POLarity = BUS:SSPI:DATA:POLarity on page 471
BUS:SSPI:MISO:POLarity on page 472
Threshold, Find Threshold

Set the signal threshold for the source channel. Enter a value, or use "Find Threshold"
to set the threshold to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude.
For analog channels, you can find the value also in the "Vertical" menu > "Chan-
nel <n>" > "Threshold"
For logic channels, you can find the value also in the "Logic" menu > "Threshold".
Remote command:
DIGital<m>:THReshold on page 532
Word Size
Sets the word length (or symbol size), which is the number of bits in a message. The
maximum word length is 32 bit.
You can also define the bit order, which determines if the data of the messages starts
with "MSB" (most significant bit) or "LSB" (least significant bit).
Remote command:
BUS:SPI:SSIZe on page 469
BUS:SSPI:SSIZe on page 472
BUS:SPI:BORDer on page 469
BUS:SSPI:BORDer on page 472
Idle Time
Sets the burst idle time, during which the data and clock lines are low. Only available in
the "SPI (no CS)" setup.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 224

A new frame begins when the idle time has expired and the clock line has been inac-
tive during that time. If the time interval between the data words is shorter than the idle
time, the words are part of the same frame.
Remote command:
BUS:SSPI:BITime on page 472
12.2.3 SPI trigger
Before you set up the trigger, make sure that the bus is configured correctly. See
Chapter 12.2.2, "SPI configuration", on page 221.
To trigger on SPI signals:

2. Select the bus that is configured for SPI.
This selection has several effects:
● Enables decoding, if necessary.
● Sets the "Trigger Type" to "Serial Bus" and the trigger source to the selected
bus.
● Displays the "SPI Trigger" condition in the dialog box, below the protocol setup.
4. Check the "Source". Change it if necessary.
5. At "SPI Trigger", select the required trigger type:

● "Frame Start": beginning of the message
● "Frame End": end of the message
● "Bit <x>": a specified bit inside the message
● "Serial Pattern": a bit pattern in the message
6. If "Serial Pattern" is selected, the SPI trigger setup dialog expands to define the
serial pattern.
SPI trigger settings

The trigger settings are shown in the dialog below the bus configuration settings. In the
trigger menu, you select the trigger source, and open or close the setup dialog box.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 225

Figure 12-6: SPI trigger menu
Figure 12-7: SPI trigger settings with an example of an SPI serial pattern
9 = Hex value of the 1st nibble, with the binary value 1001
$ (blue) = Hex value of the 3rd nibble, which includes some "X" bits. The blue color indicates that the key-
pad is active for this nibble.
X (white) = The 6th nibble is a "don't care" nibble, as it consists of "X" bits, only
$ (white) = The 7th nibble is only half contained in the specified pattern length of 26 bits
X (gray) = The 8th nibble is not contained in the specified pattern
Source.........................................................................................................................226
SPI Trigger.................................................................................................................. 226
Bit Offset......................................................................................................................227
Number of Bits............................................................................................................ 227
Data.............................................................................................................................227
Source
If both MOSI and MISO lines are configured for analysis, select which line is the trigger
source.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SOURce:SPI on page 473
SPI Trigger
Selects the trigger condition.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 226

"Frame Start" Sets the trigger to the start of the message:

● For SPI with CS, the frame starts when the chip select signal CS
changes to the active state.
● For SPI without CS, the frame starts when the idle time has
expired.
"Frame End" Sets the trigger to the end of the message.
● For SPI with CS, the frame ends when the chip select signal CS
changes to the inactive state.
● For SPI without CS, the frame ends when the idle time has
expired after the last clock and no new clock appeared during that
time.
"Bit <x>" Sets the trigger to the bit number specified with "Bit Offset"
on page 227.
"Serial Pattern" Expands the trigger setup dialog to configure the bit pattern to be trig-
gered at. Set "Number of Bits" on page 227 and "Data" on page 227
to define the pattern, and "Bit Offset" on page 227 to define the pat-
tern position.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SPI:MODE on page 473
Bit Offset
Specifies the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern. These bits are ignored.
The first bit after frame start is Bit 1. For example, with bit offset = 2, Bit 1 and Bit 2 are
ignored, and the pattern starts with Bit 3.
If "SPI Trigger" is set to "Bit <x>", the trigger is set to the next bit that follows the offset
bits. For example, if the bit offset is 4, the instrument triggers on the start of the 5th bit.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SPI:POFFset on page 474
Number of Bits
Defines the length of the serial pattern in bits.
Note: Entering data bits beyond the specified length of the pattern automatically
adjusts the "Number of Bits" to include all entered bits.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SPI:PLENgth on page 474
Data
Specifies the data pattern if "SPI Trigger" is set to "Serial Pattern". When the instru-
ment detects the specified data pattern, it sets the trigger to the first bit of this pattern.
An example of pattern definition is shown in Figure 12-7.
To enter the binary value of any bit, tap this bit. To enter the hexadecimal value, tap
one of the nibbles (half byte) in the lower data line.
If a nibble (half byte) contains 1, 2 or 3 "X" bits (don't care), the nibble value is repre-
sented by the character "$". If all 4 bits of a nibble are "X", the nibble itself is "don't
care", represented by the character "X".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 227

Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SPI:PATTern on page 474
12.2.4 SPI decode results
When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded:
2. In the "Display" menu, select the result display settings.

3. In the "Bus Table" menu, enable the "Bus Table". Adjust the table settings.
See also: Chapter 12.1.3, "Bus table: decode results", on page 215
The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the protocol definition
and the configuration settings.
The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation
of the visual display. The decode information condenses or expands, depending on the
horizontal scale. Various data formats are available to show the result values.
Figure 12-8: Decoded SPI (no CS) signal with Bus Table. The first frame has 14 words and the second
has 8 words.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 228

I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)
Table 12-1: Content of the SPI bus table
Column Description
Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point
Length Number of words in the frame
Data Hexadecimal values of the data words
State Overall state of the frame
Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.11.2.4, "SPI - decode results",

on page 475.
12.3 I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)

The Inter-Integrated Circuit is a simple, low-bandwidth, low-speed protocol used for
communication between on-board devices, for example, in LCD and LED drivers,
RAM, EEPROM, and others.
● The I²C protocol.................................................................................................... 229
● I²C configuration....................................................................................................231
● I²C trigger.............................................................................................................. 232
● I²C decode results................................................................................................. 235
● I²C label list........................................................................................................... 236
12.3.1 The I²C protocol
This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics, data format, address

types and trigger possibilities. For detailed information, read the "I2C-bus specification
and user manual" available on the NXP manuals webpage at http://www.nxp.com/.
I²C characteristics
Main characteristics of I²C are:
● Two-wire design: serial clock (SCL) and serial data (SDA) lines
● Master-slave communication: the master generates the clock and addresses the
slaves. Slaves receive the address and the clock. Both master and slaves can
transmit and receive data.
● Addressing scheme: each slave device is addressable by a unique address. Multi-
ple slave devices can be linked together and can be addressed by the same mas-
ter.
● Read/write bit: specifies if the master reads (=1) or writes (=0) the data.
● Acknowledge: takes place after every byte. The receiver of the address or data
sends the acknowledge bit to the transmitter.
The R&S RTB2000 supports all operating speed modes: high-speed, fast mode plus,
fast mode, and standard mode.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 229

Data transfer
The format of a simple I²C message (frame) with 7-bit addressing consists of the fol-
lowing parts:
● Start condition: a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high
● 7-bit address of the slave device that either is written to or read from
● R/W bit: specifies if the data is written to or read from the slave
● ACKnowledge bits: is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was
successful
Exception: At read access, the master terminates the data transmission with a
NACK bit after the last byte.
● Data: several data bytes with an ACK bit after every byte
● Stop condition: a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high
Figure 12-9: I2C writes access with 7-bit address
Address types: 7-bit and 10-bit

Slave addresses can be 7 bits or 10 bits long. A 7-bit address requires 1 byte, 7 bits for
the address followed by the R/W bit.
A 10-bit address for write access requires 2 bytes: the first byte starts with the reserved
sequence 11110, followed by the two MSB of the address and the write bit. The second
byte contains the remaining 8 LSB of the address. The slave acknowledges each
address byte.
Figure 12-10: 10-bit address, write access
A 10-bit address for read access requires 3 bytes. The first 2 bytes are identical to the
write access address. The third byte repeats the address bits of the first byte and sets
the read bit.
Figure 12-11: 10-bit address, read access
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 230

Trigger
The R&S RTB2000 can trigger on various parts of I²C messages. The data and clock
lines must be connected to the input channels, triggering on math and reference wave-
forms is not possible.
You can trigger on:
● Start or stop condition
● Repeated start condition
● Transfer direction (read or write)
● Bytes with missing acknowledge bit
● Specific slave address
● Specific data pattern in the message
12.3.2 I²C configuration
To set up and decode an I²C signal

3. Select the "Bus Type" = I2C.
5. Select the "SCL", the channel to which the clock line is connected.
6. Select the "SDA", the channel to which the data line is connected.
7. Set the threshold. Use one of these methods:

old.
I²C configuration settings
Figure 12-12: I2C setup dialog
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 231

SCL............................................................................................................................. 232
SDA.............................................................................................................................232
SCL
Selects the source channel to which the clock line is connected.
Remote command:
BUS:I2C:CLOCk:SOURce on page 479
SDA
Selects the source channel to which the data line is connected.
Remote command:
BUS:I2C:DATA:SOURce on page 479

Remote command:
12.3.3 I²C trigger
Chapter 12.3.2, "I²C configuration", on page 231.
To trigger on I²C signals:

2. Select the bus that is configured for I2C.
bus.
● Displays the trigger conditions in the dialog box, below the protocol setup.
4. At "I2C Trigger", select the required trigger type:

● "Start": beginning of the message
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 232

● "Stop": end of the message

● "Restart": repeated start condition
● "No Ack (Missing Ack)": transfer of data bits is not acknowledged
● "Address and Data": address pattern and/or up to 3 data bytes
5. If "Address and Data" is selected, the I2C trigger setup dialog expands to define the
serial patterns.
I2C trigger settings
Figure 12-13: Trigger setup dialog to trigger on a combination of address and data
A5 = Hex value of the 1st byte, with the binary value 10100101
5$ = Hex value of the 2nd byte. The 1st nibble has the binary value 0101 and the 2nd nibble is repre-
sented by the "$" character, as it includes one "X" bit (don't care)
XX (gray) = The 3rd byte is not contained in the specified pattern
I2C Trigger.................................................................................................................. 233

Slave Address............................................................................................................. 234
Symbolic ID................................................................................................................. 234
Data condition............................................................................................................. 234
└ Byte Offset.................................................................................................... 234
└ Number of Bytes........................................................................................... 234
└ Data: Bin / Hex pattern..................................................................................235
I2C Trigger
"Start" Sets the trigger to the start of the message. The start condition is a
falling slope on SDA while SCL is high.
"Stop" Sets the trigger to the end of the message. The stop condition is a ris-
ing slope on SDA while SCL is high.
"Restart" Sets the trigger to a repeated start - when the start condition occurs
without previous stop condition. This can happen when a master
sends multiple messages without releasing the bus.
"No Ack (Miss- Missing acknowledgement: the instrument triggers, if the slave does
ing Ack)" not send the acknowledge bit. Acknowledging takes place after every
byte. If the transfer failed, at the moment of the acknowledge bit, the
SDA line is on high level during the high period of the clock pulse.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 233

"Address and Sets the trigger to an address or data pattern, or a combination of

Data" both.
See "Slave Address" on page 234 and "Data condition" on page 234.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:I2C:MODE on page 480
Slave Address
Sets the slave address to be triggered on. If you want to trigger only on a data pattern
and the address is not relevant, enable "Any Address".
To specify the slave address, set the following properties:
● Set the length of the slave address: "7Bit" or "10Bit".
● Toggle the trigger condition between "Read" and "Write" access of the master. The
read/write bit is the 8th bit of the first address byte of a frame.
● Set the address of the slave device: enter the binary or hexadecimal address
value. You need an exact address, "X" bits (don't care) are not allowed.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:I2C:AMODe on page 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:ACCess on page 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess on page 481
Symbolic ID
If a label list with symbolic names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration, you
can select a symbolic name from the list instead of specifying the address. When you
select a name, the address fields are update with its address value.
Data condition
The data condition consists of the following settings:
● Byte offset (position of the data pattern)
● Length of the data pattern
● Data pattern, see "Bin / Hex pattern" on page 252
If you want to trigger only on an address, and the data is not relevant, set all data bits
to "X".
Byte Offset ← Data condition

Sets the number of offset bytes to be ignored after the end of the address bytes. The
first byte of interest is the first byte after the offset bytes.
The minimum offset is 0 Bytes, the maximum offset is 4,095 Bytes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:I2C:POFFset on page 482
Number of Bytes ← Data condition

Sets the number of full bytes you want to trigger on. Maximum 3 bytes are possible.
adjusts the "Number of Bytes" to include defined bytes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth on page 482
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 234

Data: Bin / Hex pattern ← Data condition

Defines the data pattern in binary and hexadecimal format. To set an individual binary
bit or hex nibble (half byte), tap it and enter the value on the on-screen keypad. The
maximum pattern length is 3 bytes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern on page 482
12.3.4 I²C decode results

Figure 12-14: Decoded I2C signal with bus table, trigger on frame start
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 235

Gray brackets = start and end of the frame

Violet = address
Blue = correct data words
Green = acknowledge bit, ok
Table 12-2: Content of the I2C frame table
Column Description
Type Value of the R/W bit, read or write access
ID Hexadecimal value of the address
Length Number of words in the frame
Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.11.3.3, "I²C - decode results",

on page 483.
12.3.5 I²C label list
Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for I2C are available in CSV and PTT for-
mat.
An I2C label file contains three values for each address:
● Address type, 7-bit or 10-bit long
● Address value
● Symbolic label: name of the address, specifying its function in the bus network.
Example: I2C PTT file
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@FILE_VERSION = 1.00
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Labels for I2C protocol
# Column order: Identifier type, Identifier value, Label
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7,0x1E,Voltage
7,38h,Pressure
7,2Ah,Temperature
7,16h,Speed
7,118,Acceleration
7,07h,HighSpeed_Master_0x3
7,51h,EEPROM
10,3A2h,DeviceSetup
10,1A3h,GatewayStatus
10,06Eh,LeftSensor
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 236

For general information on label lists, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Label list", on page 218.
Figure 12-15: Label list for I2C
Figure 12-16: Decoded I2C signal with applied label list and zoom on second frame
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 237

UART / RS232 (option R&S RTB-K2)
12.4 UART / RS232 (option R&S RTB-K2)

● The UART / RS232 interface................................................................................ 238
● UART configuration...............................................................................................238
● UART trigger......................................................................................................... 241
● UART decode results............................................................................................ 243
12.4.1 The UART / RS232 interface
The Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UART converts a word of data into

serial data, and vice versa. It is the base of many serial protocols like of RS-232. The
UART uses only one line, or two lines for transmitter and receiver.
Data transfer
The data is transmitted in symbols, also referred to as words or characters. Each sym-
bol consists of a start bit, several data bits, an optional parity bit, and one or more stop
bits. Several symbols can form a frame, or package. The end of a frame is marked by
a pause between two symbols.
Start Data0 Data1 Data2 Data3 Data4 [Data5] [Data6] [Data7] [Data8] [Parity] Stop
Figure 12-17: Bit order in a UART word (symbol)
● The start bit is a logic 0.

● The stop bits and the idle state are always logic 1.
The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization. The receiver synchronizes by
means of the start and stop bits, and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver.
Trigger
The R&S RTB2000 can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals:
● Start bit
● Frame start
● A specified symbol
● Parity errors, and breaks
● Frame errors
● A serial pattern at any or a specified position
12.4.2 UART configuration
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 238

To set up and decode a UART signal

2. Select the "Bus Type" = UART.

Bus B2 is only available if the TX line is set to "None" in the "Configuration" dialog.
5. Select the "RX / TX", the channel to which the input signal is connected.

old.
7. Set the other signal parameters according to the signal characteristics.
UART configuration settings
Figure 12-18: UART setup dialog
RX / TX........................................................................................................................239
Polarity........................................................................................................................ 240
Parity........................................................................................................................... 240
Stop Bits......................................................................................................................240
Bit Rate....................................................................................................................... 240
Data Size.....................................................................................................................241
Idle Time......................................................................................................................241
RX / TX
Select the input channel of the UART lines. Input channels are the receive line (RX),
and the optional transmit line (TX).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 239

Note: TX is available only on bus 1, and bus 2 is not available if TX is used. On bus 2,
you can set only the RX line. The TX line occupies a second bus line.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:RX:SOURce = BUS:UART:DATA:SOURce on page 490
BUS:UART:TX:SOURce on page 490
Polarity
Selects if the transmitted data is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1). If RX and
TX are used, the setting affects both lines.
High active is used, for example, for control signals, while low active is defined for data
lines (RS-232).
Remote command:
BUS:UART:DATA:POLarity on page 491
BUS:UART:POLarity on page 491

Remote command:
Parity
Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection.
"None" No parity bit is used.
"Even" The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is odd.
Adding the parity bit makes the data word's parity even.
"Odd" The parity bit is set to "1" if the number of data bits set to "1" is even.
Adding the parity bit makes the data word's parity odd.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:PARity on page 492
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits: 1 or 1.5 or 2 stop bits are possible.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:SBIT on page 492
Bit Rate
Sets the number of transmitted bits per second.
"Predefined" Selects from a list of predefined bit rates between 300 Bit/s and
1 MBit/s.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 240

"User" Specifies an individual bit rate with values between 150 and
39,062,500.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:BAUDrate on page 492
Data Size
Sets the number of data bits of a word in a range from 5 bits to 9 bits.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:SSIZe on page 491
Idle Time
Sets the minimal time between two data frames (packets), that is, between the last
stop bit and the start bit of the next frame.
Remote command:
BUS:UART:BITime on page 493
12.4.3 UART trigger
Chapter 12.4.2, "UART configuration", on page 238.
To trigger on UART signals:

2. Select the bus that is configured for UART.
bus.
● Displays the "UART Trigger" condition in the dialog box, below the protocol
setup.
4. In the menu, select the "Source".
5. At "UART Trigger", select the required trigger condition:

● "Start Bit" or "Frame Start": next start bit or first start bit after idle time
● "Frame Start"
● "Frame Error"
● "Symbol <n>": frame number in a data stream
● "Break": a start bit not followed by a stop bit
● "Parity Error"
● "Pattern": serial pattern of 1, 2, 3 or 4 symbols at a defined position in the data
stream
● "Any Symbol": pattern of data bits anywhere in a data stream
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 241

6. If "Pattern" or "Any Symbol" is selected, the UART trigger setup dialog expands to
define the serial pattern or the symbol.
UART trigger settings
Figure 12-19: Trigger setup dialog with an example of a UART serial pattern
55 = Hex value of the 1st symbol, with the binary value 01010101
E6 = Hex value of the 2nd symbol, with the binary value 11100110
E (blue) = Selected nibble in the 2nd symbol. The blue color indicates that the keypad is active for this nib-
ble.
8$ = Hex value of the 3rd symbol. The 1st nibble has the binary value 1000 and the 2nd nibble is repre-
sented by the "$" character, as it includes one "X" bit (don't care)
AX (gray) = The 4th symbol is not contained in the specified pattern
Source.........................................................................................................................242
UART Trigger.............................................................................................................. 242
Symbol Offset..............................................................................................................243
Numb. of Symb........................................................................................................... 243
Data.............................................................................................................................243
Source
Selects the transmitter or receiver line as trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:SOURce:UART on page 493
UART Trigger
"Start Bit" Sets the trigger to the start bit. The start bit is the first logical 0 after a
stop bit.
"Frame Start" Sets the trigger to the beginning of a frame. The frame start is the first
start bit after the idle time.
"Frame Error" The instrument triggers, if a frame error occurs.
"Symbol <n>" Sets the trigger to the specified symbol - the n-th word - in a frame
(package). Specify the "Symbol Offset" on page 243.
"Break" Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit, the data line
remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART word.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 242

"Parity Error" Triggers on a parity error indicating a transmission error.

"Pattern" Triggers on a data pattern at a specified position.
The pattern setup consists of the "Symbol Offset" on page 243, the
"Numb. of Symb." on page 243, and the "Data" on page 243.
"Any Symbol" Triggers on a pattern that occurs in one symbol at any position in a
frame.
See "Data" on page 243.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:UART:MODE on page 493
Symbol Offset
Sets the number of symbols at the beginning of the package to be ignored before the
serial pattern. The first symbol of interest is the first byte after the offset symbols.
The minimum offset is 0 symbols, the maximum offset is 4,095 symbols.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:UART:POFFset on page 494
Numb. of Symb.
Sets the number of symbols (full bytes) you want to trigger on. The minimum is 1 sym-
bol, a maximum of 4 symbols is possible.
adjusts the "Number of Bytes" to include all specified bytes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:UART:PLENgth on page 494
Data
Specifies the data pattern if "UART Trigger" is set to "Pattern" or "Any Symbol".
An example of pattern definition is shown in Figure 12-19.
To enter the binary value of any bit, tap this bit. To enter the hexadecimal value, tap
one of the nibbles (half byte) in the lower data line.
If a nibble (half byte) contains 1, 2 or 3 "X" bits (don't care), the nibble value is repre-
sented by the character "$". If all 4 bits of a nibble are "X", the nibble itself is "don't
care", represented by the character "X".
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:UART:PATTern on page 494
12.4.4 UART decode results

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 243

CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)
Figure 12-20: Decoded UART signal
The figure above shows two frames of a UART signal and the "Bus Table".
Table 12-3: Content of the UART frame table
Column Description
Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.11.4.3, "UART - decode results",

on page 495.
12.5 CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)

CAN is the Controller Area Network, a bus system designed by Bosch for use within
automotive network architecture, for example, for brake, power train and engine man-
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 244

agement. Today, it is also used in many other systems, for example, in industrial
machines, aerospace, subsea, merchant marine.
● The CAN protocol..................................................................................................245
● CAN configuration................................................................................................. 246
● CAN trigger........................................................................................................... 248
● CAN decode results.............................................................................................. 252
● Search on decoded CAN data.............................................................................. 254
● CAN label list.........................................................................................................256
12.5.1 The CAN protocol
This chapter provides an overview of the protocol characteristics, frame types, informa-
tion transfer and message formats.
The CAN 2.0 specification defines two formats: the base CAN (version 2.0A) with an
11-bit identifier and the extended CAN (version 2.0B ) with a 29-bit identifier. Based on
theses specifications the CAN standard ISO 11898-1 was released, in 1993.
CAN characteristics
Main characteristics of CAN are:
● Differential signaling.
● Transmission over two wires, high and low.
● Multi-master, which means that any node can begin to transmit a message, when a
bus is free.
● Bitwise arbitration.
Arbitration
Information transfer is done by carrier sense multiple access/bitwise arbitration (CSMA/
BA). Each node waits for a certain inactive period before it tries to send a message.
Collisions are resolved through a bitwise arbitration that is non-destructive.
Each message has a priority which is implied in the identifer value - the lower the
value, the higher the priority. A dominant bit from the message with highest priority
overwrites the recessive bits on the bus. If a node detects that the bus is already
receiving a message that has a higher priority, it stops the transmission and waits for
the current transmission to end before retransmitting.
Frame types
The CAN protocol defines the following types of frames:
● Data: used for information transmission.
● Remote: used for information request. The destination node sends this frame to the
source to request data. This type of frame is only used by CAN.
● Error: indicates that a bus node has detected transmission error.
● Overload: used from a bus node to request a transmission delay.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 245

CAN data message format

The CAN protocol defines two formats for the data frame: the base frame format and
the extended frame format. The data frames are built as follows:
Figure 12-21: CAN basic frame
Figure 12-22: CAN extended frame
The following fields, compose the base/extended frame format:

● SOF: start of frame. 1 dominant bit that marks the beginning of the message.
● Identifier: 11/18-bit identifier. Contains information about the priority of the mes-
sage. CAN base frames have an 11-bit identifier while CAN extended frames have
a total of 29 bits identifier.
● RTR: remote transmission request bit. Differentiates between base and extended
frames. It is dominant for base data frames and recessive for extended data
frames.
● SRR: substitute remote request. Only present in extended CAN frames at the posi-
tion of the RTR bit in base frames.
● IDE: identifier extension bit. It helps to distinguish between a base and extended
data frame. It is dominant for data frames and recessive for remote frames
● r0/r1: reserved bits for possible future use.
● DLC: data length code. Defines how many bytes of data follow.
● Data: up to 8 bytes of data can be transmitted for CAN.
● CRC: cyclic redundancy check. Checks the integrity of the frame contents.
● ACK: acknowledgement. This is a recessive bit that is overwritten by the node, if
the message was transmitted correctly.
● EOF: end-of-frame: marks the end of the message.
● IFS: interframe space. Separates a data or remote frame from the preceding
frames.
12.5.2 CAN configuration
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 246

To set up and decode a CAN signal

3. Select the "Bus Type" = CAN.
5. Select the "Source", the channel to which the input signal is connected.

old.
on settings, see "CAN configuration settings" on page 247 below.
CAN configuration settings
Source.........................................................................................................................247
Type............................................................................................................................ 248
Bit Rate....................................................................................................................... 248
Sample Point...............................................................................................................248
Source
Sets the source of the data line. All channel waveforms can be used.
Remote command:
BUS:CAN:DATA:SOURce on page 500

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 247

Remote command:
Type
Selects the CAN-High or CAN-Low line. CAN uses both lines for differential signal
transmission.
If you measure with a differential probe, connect the probe to both CAN-H and CAN-L
lines and select "High".
If you use a single-ended probe, connect the probe to either CAN_L or CAN_H and
select "High" or "Low" accordingly.
Remote command:
BUS:CAN:TYPE on page 500
Bit Rate
Sets the number of transmitted bits per second. The maximum bit rate for High Speed
CAN is 1 Mbit/s. The bit rate is uniform and fixed for a given CAN bus.
"Predefined" To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values, set "Bit rate" to
"Predefined" and select a value from the list.
"User" To set another value, set "Bit rate" to "User" and enter a bit/s value.
Remote command:
BUS:CAN:BITRate on page 501
Sample Point
Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time.
The sample point divides the nominal bit period into two distinct time segments, which
are used for resynchronization of the clock.
The CAN bus interface uses an asynchronous transmission scheme. The standard
specifies a set of rules to resynchronize the local clock of a CAN node to the message.
Remote command:
BUS:CAN:SAMPlepoint on page 501
12.5.3 CAN trigger
Chapter 12.5.2, "CAN configuration", on page 246.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 248

To trigger on CAN signals:

2. Select the bus that is configured for CAN.
bus.
● Displays the "CAN Trigger" condition in the dialog box, below the protocol
setup.
4. At "CAN Trigger", select the required trigger type:

● "Start of Frame": first edge of synchronization bit
● "End of Frame": frame number in a data stream
● "Frame": error, overload, data or remote frame
● "Error": stuff bit, form, acknowledgment, CRC
● "Identifier": specific message identifier or identifier range
● "Identifier and Data": combination of identifier and data condition
5. If "Identifier" or "Identifier and Data" is selected, the CAN trigger setup dialog
expands to define the serial pattern.
CAN trigger settings
Figure 12-23: Trigger setup dialog with an example of CAN identifier and data patterns
"CAN Trigger" = trigger on "Identifier and Data"

"Identifier" = trigger on 29-bit identifiers greater than the specified identifier
"Data" = trigger on the specified 6-byte data pattern
0 (blue) = Selected nibble in the 2ndbyte of the data pattern, where the blue color indicates that the
keypad is active for this nibble
CAN Trigger
Selects the trigger mode.
"Start of Triggers on the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization
Frame" bit).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 249

"End of Frame" Triggers on the end of the frame (7 recessive bits).

"Frame" Triggers on the frame type that is selected with "Frame"
See: "Frame" on page 250.
"Error" Triggers on a frame error. An error frame is sent by a node that has
detected an error.
See: "Error" on page 250.
"Identifier" Triggers on a specific message identifier or an identifier range.
If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus con-
figuration, you can select simply the "Symbolic ID" instead of entering
the numeric identifier.
See: "Identifier condition" on page 251.
"Identifier and Triggers on a combination of identifier and data condition. The instru-
Data" ment triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern.
See: "Identifier condition" on page 251 and "Data condition"
on page 252.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE on page 502
Frame
Select the frame type to be triggered on.
"Data" Frame for data transmission.
The identifier format ("ID Type") is also considered.
"Remote" A remote frame initiates the transmission of data by another node.
The frame format is the same as of data frames, but without the data
field.
The identifier format ("ID Type") is also considered.
"Data or Triggers on remote frames and on data frames.
Remote" The identifier format ("ID Type") is also considered.
"Error" Triggers on any error frame.
"Overload" An overload frame is sent by a node that needs a delay between data
and/or remote frames.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:FTYPe on page 502
ID Type
Selects the length of the identifier: 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN
extended frames. Select "Any" if the identifier type is not relevant.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:ITYPe on page 503
Error
Identifies various errors in the frame. You can select one or more error types as trigger
condition.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE on page 502
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 250

Stuff Bit ← Error

The following frame segments are coded by the bit stuffing method:
● Start of frame
● Arbitration field
● Control field
● Data field
● CRC sequence
The transmitter automatically inserts a complementary bit into the bitstream when it
detects five consecutive bits of identical value in the bitstream to be transmitted. A stuff
error occurs when the 6th consecutive equal bit level in the mentioned fields is detec-
ted.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:BITSterror on page 504
Form ← Error
A form error occurs when a fixed-form bit field contains one or more illegal bits.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:FORMerror on page 505
Acknowledge ← Error
An acknowledgment error occurs when the transmitter does not receive an acknowl-
edgment - a dominant bit during the "Ack" slot.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:ACKerror on page 504
CRC ← Error
CAN uses the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), which is a complex checksum calcu-
lation method. The transmitter calculates the CRC and sends the result in the CRC
sequence. The receiver calculates the CRC in the same way. A CRC error occurs
when the calculated result differs from the received value in the CRC sequence.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:CRCerror on page 505
Identifier condition
The identifier condition consists of the following settings:
● ID Type
● Comparison
● Identifier value
Compare ← Identifier condition

Sets the identifier comparison condition: If the identifier pattern contains at least one X
(do not care), you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the
pattern contains only 0 and 1, you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower
than the specified value.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:ICONdition on page 503
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 251

Bin / Hex pattern ← Identifier condition

Defines the identifier or data pattern in binary and hexadecimal format. To set an indi-
vidual binary bit or hex nibble (half byte), tap it and enter it via the on-screen keypad.
"Bin" String containing the binary pattern with a maximum of 64 bits. Char-
acters 0, 1 and X are allowed.
"Hex" String containing the hexadecimal pattern with a maximum of 8 bytes.
Characters 0 to F and X are allowed.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENtifier on page 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:DATA on page 504
Symbolic ID ← Identifier condition

can select a symbolic name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier. The
instrument triggers on the identifier of the selected node.
Data condition
● Comparison
● Data pattern, see "Bin / Hex pattern" on page 252
Data ← Data condition

Defines the length of the data pattern - the number of bytes in the pattern.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:DLC on page 504
Compare ← Data condition

Sets the data comparison condition. If the pattern contains at least one X (do not care),
you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the pattern con-
tains only 0 and 1, you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the speci-
fied value.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:CAN:DCONdition on page 503
12.5.4 CAN decode results

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 252

Figure 12-24: Decoded CAN signal with bus table, trigger on frame start
violet = identifier
gray = DLC, data length code
blue = data words
red = error occurred, error frame
The figure above shows a decoded CAN signal and the "Bus Table".
Table 12-4: Content of the CAN frame table
Column Description
Time Diff. Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point
Type Frame type: Data, Remote, Error, or Overload
ID Identifier value, hexadecimal value
DLC Data length code, number of data bytes
Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes
CRC Hexadecimal value of the Cyclic Redundance Check (checksum)
State Overall state of the frame.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 253

Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.11.5.3, "CAN - decode results",

on page 505.
12.5.5 Search on decoded CAN data
Using the search functionality, you can find the same events in the decoded data which
you also can trigger on. Unlike trigger, the search finds all events in an acquisition that
fulfill the search condition. The results are listed in a table and and can be saved to file.
Figure 12-25: Search on a CAN bus for data frames with 29-bit ID
To search for events in a CAN signal

1. Configure and decode the bus correctly.
2. Acquire decoded data.
3. Press the Search key.
4. Select the "Search Type" = "Protocol".
5. Select the "Source": the bus that is configured for CAN protocol.
6. Select the "Event" you want to search for.
7. Enter additional settings, depending on the event.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 254

CAN search settings
Figure 12-26: Settings for search on CAN bus for frames with identifier 567 (hex) that have an error
Event
Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for. For example, you can
search for frames, errors, data, or IDs. Depending on the selected event, additional
settings are displayed.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition on page 512
Frame Setup
Selects the frame type to be searched for.
If you search for remote or data frames, the search considers also the ID type, the
length of the identifier. The setting is only available if "Event" = "Frame" is selected.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe on page 512
Error
Selects the error type to be searched for. You can select one or more error types as
search condition. The error types are the same as in the CAN trigger setup, see Chap-
ter 12.5.3, "CAN trigger", on page 248.
The setting is only available if "Event" = "Error" or "Error & ID" is selected.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ACKerror on page 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:BITSterror on page 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CRCerror on page 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FORMerror on page 513
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 255

Frame Type
Selects the frame type to be searched for, if "Event" = "Identifier" is selected. You can
search for data and/or remote frames.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FTYPe on page 514
Settings to define the identifier pattern, if "Event" = "Identifier" or "Id & Error" or "Id &
Data" is selected.
After setting the "ID Type" and the "Compare" condition, you can enter the identifier
value by setting the state high, low, or X (do not care) for each single bit. Alternatively,
you can enter a hexadecimal value for each half byte. The settings are the same as for
the setup of the identifier trigger, see also "Identifier condition" on page 251.
If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration, you
can select the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier. The
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ITYPe on page 514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ICONdition on page 514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:IDENtifier on page 515
Data condition
Settings to define the data pattern to be searched, if "Event" = "Id & Error" is selected.
After setting the "Data" length and the "Compare" condition, you can enter the data
you can enter a hexadecimal value for each half byte. The settings are the same as for
the setup of the data trigger, see also "Data condition" on page 252.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DLENgth on page 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DCONdition on page 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DATA on page 515
12.5.6 CAN label list
For general information on label lists and how to trigger on symbolic IDs, see Chap-
ter 12.1.5, "Label list", on page 218.
Label list files are protocol-specific. A PTT label file for CAN protocols contains three
values for each identifier:
● Identifier type, 11-bit or 29-bit long
● Label, symbolic name of the identifier, specifying its function in the bus network.
Example: CAN PTT file
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@FILE_VERSION = 1.00
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 256

@PROTOCOL_NAME = can
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Labels for CAN protocol
# Column order: Identifier type, Identifier value, Label
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
11,064h,Diag_Response
11,1E5h,EngineData
11,0A2h,Ignition_Info
11,1BCh,TP_Console
11,333h,ABSdata
11,313h,Door_Left
11,314h,Door_Right
29,01A54321h,Throttle
29,13A00FA2h,LightState
29,0630ABCDh,Engine_Status
29,03B1C002h,Airbag_Status
29,01234ABCh,NM_Gateway
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 12-27: Label list for CAN
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 257

LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)
Figure 12-28: Decoded CAN signal with bus table and applied label list
12.6 LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)

The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is a simple, low-cost bus system used within
automotive network architectures. LIN is usually a subnetwork of a CAN bus. The pri-
mary purpose of LIN is the integration of uncritical sensors and actuators with low-
bandwidth requirements. Common applications in a motor vehicle are the control of
doors, windows, wing mirrors, and wipers.
● The LIN protocol....................................................................................................258
● LIN configuration...................................................................................................260
● LIN trigger............................................................................................................. 262
● LIN decode results................................................................................................ 265
● Search on decoded LIN data................................................................................ 266
● LIN label list...........................................................................................................269
12.6.1 The LIN protocol
This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics, frame format, identifiers

and trigger possibilities. For detailed information, order the LIN specification on http://
www.lin-subbus.org/ (free of charge).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 258

LIN characteristics
Main characteristics of LIN are:
● Single-wire serial communications protocol, based on the UART byte-word inter-
face
● Single primary, multiple secondaries - usually up to 12 nodes
● Primary-controlled communication: primary coordinates communication with the
LIN schedule and sends identifier to the secondaries
● Synchronization mechanism for clock recovery by secondary nodes without crystal
or ceramics resonator
The R&S RTB2000 supports several versions of the LIN standard: v1.3, v2.0, v2.1 and
the American SAE J2602.
Data transfer
Basic communication concept of LIN:
● Communication in an active LIN network is always initiated by the primary.
● The primary sends a message header including the synchronization break, the
synchronization byte, and the message identifier.
● The identified node sends the message response: one to eight data bytes and one
checksum byte.
● Header and response form the message frame.
Figure 12-29: LIN frame with header and response
The data is transmitted in bytes using the UART byte-word interface without the parity
bit. Each byte consists of a start bit, 8 bits and a stop bit.
Figure 12-30: Structure of a byte field
Data bytes are transmitted LSB first.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 259

The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits. This
combination is known as protected identifier.
Trigger
The R&S RTB2000 can trigger on various parts of LIN frames. The data line must be
connected to an input channel, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not pos-
sible.
You can trigger on:
● Frame start (synchronization field)
● Specific identifier or identifier range
● Data pattern in the message
● Wake up signal
● Checksum error (error in data), parity error (error in identifier)
12.6.2 LIN configuration
To set up and decode a LIN signal

3. Select the "Bus Type" = LIN.
5. Select the "Source", the channel to which the input signal is connected.
6. Set the threshold:

old.
on settings, see "LIN Configuration Settings" on page 261 below.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 260

LIN Configuration Settings
Figure 12-31: LIN setup dialog
Source.........................................................................................................................261
Idle.............................................................................................................................. 261
Version........................................................................................................................ 261
Bit Rate....................................................................................................................... 262
Source
Remote command:
BUS:LIN:DATA:SOURce on page 516
Idle
Defines the idle state of the bus. The idle state is the recessive state and corresponds
to a logic 1.
Remote command:
BUS:LIN:POLarity on page 516

Remote command:
Version
Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT. The setting mainly
defines the checksum version used during decoding.
The most common version is LIN 2.x. For mixed networks, or if the standard is
unknown, set the LIN standard to "Any".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 261

Remote command:
BUS:LIN:STANdard on page 517
Bit Rate
Sets the number of transmitted bits per second. The LIN standard defines a maximum
bit rate of 20 kbit/s.
"Predefined" To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values, set "Bit Rate" to
"Predefined" and select a value from the list.
"User" To set another value, set "Bit Rate" to "User" and enter a bit/s value.
Remote command:
BUS:LIN:BITRate on page 517
12.6.3 LIN trigger
Chapter 12.6.2, "LIN configuration", on page 260.
To trigger on LIN signals:

2. Select the bus that is configured for LIN.
bus.
● Displays the "LIN Trigger" condition in the dialog box, below the protocol setup.
4. At "LIN Trigger", select the required trigger type:

● "Start of Frame": stop bit of the sync field
● "Wake Up": after a wakeup frame
● "Error": checksum, parity or synchronization
● "Identifier": specific message identifier or identifier range
● "Identifier and Data": combination of identifier and data condition
5. If "Identifier" or "Identifier and Data" is selected, the LIN trigger setup dialog
expands to define the serial pattern.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 262

LIN Trigger Settings
Figure 12-32: Trigger setup to trigger on identifier and data patterns
o (blue) = Selected bit in the 2nd byte of the data pattern, where the blue color indicates that the keypad is
active for this bit
LIN Trigger.................................................................................................................. 263

Error............................................................................................................................ 264
└ Checksum..................................................................................................... 264
└ Parity.............................................................................................................264
└ Synchronization............................................................................................ 264
Identifier condition....................................................................................................... 264
└ Identifier........................................................................................................ 264
└ Compare....................................................................................................... 264
└ Symbolic ID...................................................................................................265
Data condition............................................................................................................. 265
└ Data.............................................................................................................. 265
└ Compare....................................................................................................... 265
└ Bin / Hex....................................................................................................... 265
LIN Trigger
Selects the trigger mode.
"Start of Triggers on the stop bit of the synchronization field.
Frame"
"Wake Up" Triggers after a wakeup frame.
"Error" Identifies various errors in the frame. You can select one or more
error types as trigger condition.
See "Error" on page 264.
"Identifier" Sets the trigger to a specific message identifier or an identifier range.
Only the 6 bit identifier without parity bits is considered, not the pro-
tected identifier.
See "Identifier condition" on page 264.
"Identifier and Triggers on a combination of identifier and data condition. The instru-
Data" ment triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern.
An example is shown in Figure 12-32.
See "Identifier condition" on page 264 and "Data condition"
on page 265.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 263

Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE on page 518
Error
Select one or more error types as trigger condition.
Checksum ← Error
Checksum error. The checksum verifies the correct data transmission. It is the last byte
of the frame response. The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected
identifier (PID).
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:CHKSerror on page 518
Parity ← Error
Parity error. Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier. They verify the correct
transmission of the identifier.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:IPERror on page 518
Synchronization ← Error
Error during synchronization.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:SYERror on page 519
The identifier condition consists of the following settings:
● Comparison
Identifier ← Identifier condition

Defines the identifier pattern in binary and hexadecimal format. To set an individual
binary bit or hex nibble (half byte), tap it and enter it via the on-screen keypad.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:IDENtifier on page 519
Compare ← Identifier condition

Sets the identifier comparison condition: If the identifier pattern contains at least one X
(don't care), you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:ICONdition on page 519
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 264

Symbolic ID ← Identifier condition

can select a symbolic name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier. The
Data condition
● Comparison
● Data pattern
Data ← Data condition

Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:DLENgth on page 520
Compare ← Data condition

Sets the comparison condition: If the pattern contains at least one X (don't care), you
can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the pattern contains
only 0 and 1, you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified
value.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:DCONdition on page 520
Bin / Hex ← Data condition

Specifies the data pattern to be triggered. To set an individual binary bit or hexadecimal
nibble (half byte), tap it and enter it via the on-screen keypad. Make sure to specify
complete bytes.
Remote command:
TRIGger:A:LIN:DATA on page 519
12.6.4 LIN decode results

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 265

Figure 12-33: Decoded LIN signal with bus table, trigger on frame start
Table 12-5: Content of the LIN frame table
Column Description
Start time Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point
ID Identifier value, hexadecimal value
Length Number of data bytes
Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes
Chks Checksum value
State Overall state of the frame.
Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.11.6.3, "LIN - decode results",

on page 520.
12.6.5 Search on decoded LIN data
Using the search functionality, you can find the same events in the decoded data which
you also can trigger on. Unlike trigger, the search finds all events in an acquisition that
fulfill the search condition. The results are listed in a table and and can be saved to file.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 266

Figure 12-34: Search on a LIN bus for errors
To search for events in a LIN signal

1. Configure and decode the bus correctly.
2. Acquire decoded data.
3. Press the Search key.
4. Select the "Search Type" = "Protocol".
5. Select the "Source": the bus that is configured for LIN protocol.
6. Select the "Event" you want to search for.
7. Enter additional settings, depending on the event.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 267

LIN Search Settings
Figure 12-35: Search on LIN bus for frames with identifier 2C (hex) that have an error
Event........................................................................................................................... 268
Frame Setup............................................................................................................... 268
Error............................................................................................................................ 268
Identifier condition....................................................................................................... 268
Data condition............................................................................................................. 269
Event
Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for. Depending on the selected
event, additional settings are displayed.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition on page 526
Frame Setup
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe on page 512
Error
Selects the error type to be searched for. You can select one or more error types as
search condition. The error types are the same as in the LIN trigger setup.
See also "Error" on page 264.
The setting is only available if "Event" = "Error" or "ID & Error" is selected.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CHKSerror on page 527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IPERror on page 527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:SYERror on page 527
Settings to define the identifier pattern, if "Event" = "Identifier" or "Id & Error" or "Id &
Data" is selected.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 268

After setting the "Compare" condition, you can enter the identifier value by setting the
state high, low, or X (do not care) for each single bit. Alternatively, you can enter a hex-
adecimal value for each half byte.
The settings are the same as for the setup of the identifier trigger, see also "Identifier
condition" on page 264.
If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration, you
can select the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier. The
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:ICONdition on page 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IDENtifier on page 528
Data condition
Settings to define the data pattern to be searched, if "Event" = "Id & Error" is selected.
After setting the "Data" length and the "Compare" condition, you can enter the data
you can enter a hexadecimal value for each half byte.
The settings are the same as for the setup of the data trigger, see also "Data condition"
on page 265.
Remote command:
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DLENgth on page 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DCONdition on page 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DATA on page 529
12.6.6 LIN label list
For general information on label lists, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Label list", on page 218.
Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for LIN are available in CSV and PTT for-
mat.
A LIN label file contains two values for each identifier:
● Symbolic name for the identifier
Example of a LIN PTT file
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@FILE_VERSION = 1.0
@PROTOCOL_NAME = lin
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Labels for LIN protocol
# Column order: Identifier, Label
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Labels for standard addresses
0x3F,Temperature
1Ch,Left brake
20h,Right brake
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 269

# Following ID is provided as integer

33,Mirror
0x37,Indoor lights
# Labels for reserved addresses
0x3C,Master_Request_Frame
0x3D,Slave_Response_Frame
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 12-36: Label list for LIN
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 270

Figure 12-37: Decoded LIN signal with frame table and applied label list
gray = synchronization break, synchronization byte, correct checksum

yellow = identifier
green = parity bits
blue = data words (UART words)
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 271

R&S®RTB2000 Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO)
Short menu for logic channels
13 Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO)

The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTB- B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical
oscilloscope functions. Using the logic analyzer, you can analyze and debug embed-
ded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and time-correlated
digital signals simultaneously. The option provides 16 logic channels grouped in two
logic probes (pods) with 8 channels each. The instrument ensures that analog and digi-
tal waveforms are time-aligned and synchronized so that critical timing interactions
between analog and digital signals can be displayed and tested.
Ensuring accurate measurement results

The logic analyzer option R&S RTB-B1 with connected probe leads is considered as a
test probe, according to EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101. Therefore, the measure-
ments are sensitive to electromagnetic interference. Consider additional shielding
methods to avoid interference.
Consider the following guidelines for good probing practices:
● Attach the ground lead from each pod to the ground of the device under test if any
logic channel of the pod is used for data capture. The ground lead improves signal
fidelity to the oscilloscope, ensuring accurate measurements.
● For high-speed timing measurements (rise time < 3 ns), use an own ground for
each pod.
To activate logic analysis

► Press the [Logic] key.
13.1 Short menu for logic channels

There are two short menus that show the status of the logic channels, one for the pod
"D7...D0" and one for the pod "D15...D8".
► To open the short menu for logic channels, tap the pod label in the bottom line of
the display.
If the pod was not selected, tap twice: once to select the pod, and next to open the
short menu.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 272

Short menu for logic channels
1 = selects all/one logic channel

2 = displays the logic channel
3 = scales all visible channels to a minimum
4 = scales all visible channels to a maximum
5 = shows the threshold of the channels
6 = shows the activity of the logic channel
Logic channels - activity display

The activity symbols of the logic channel show the current status of all logic channels
and can have the following values:
● : logic channel is low
● : logic channel is high
● : a change in the state of the logic channel has occurred during the measuring
interval
Remote commands:
● LOGic:PROBe[:ENABle]? on page 530
● DIGital<m>:PROBe[:ENABle]? on page 531
● DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MINimum? on page 530
● DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum? on page 530
● LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MINimum? on page 530
● LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum? on page 530
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 273

Logic analyzer settings
13.2 Logic analyzer settings

Prerequisite: a logic probe is connected to the instrument.
1. If logic analysis is not active, press the [Logic] key to activate it.
2. Press the [Logic] key again.

The "Logic" menu opens.
3. Select the "Logic Probe" that you want to use.
4. Enable the "State".
5. Set the "Threshold", and the "Hysteresis".
Logic Probe
Selects the logic probe (pod) to be configured: "D7...D0" or "D15...D8".
State
Switches the selected logic pod on or off.
You can also set the state of each logic channel separately in the short menu, see
Chapter 13, "Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO)", on page 272.
Remote command:
LOGic:STATe on page 531
DIGital<m>:PROBe[:ENABle]? on page 531
Threshold
Selects the threshold level: 3 predefined threshold levels and user-defined threshold
are available.
"TTL: 1.4V" Sets the threshold to 1.4 V, which is typically used in transistor–tran-
sistor logic (TTL).
"CMOS: 2.5V" Sets the threshold to 2.5 V, which is typically used in complementary
metal-oxide–semiconductor technology (CMOS).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 274

Logic analyzer settings
"ECL: -1.3V" Sets the threshold to -1.3 V, which is typically used in emitter-coupled
logic (ECL).
"User Level" Selects the user-defined threshold.
Enter the value in User Level.
Remote command:
DIGital<m>:TECHnology on page 531
LOGic:THReshold on page 532
LOGic:THReshold:UDLevel on page 532
User Level
Sets the threshold level value between -2 V and +8 V in steps of 10 mV, or shows the
value of the selected technology.
Remote command:
LOGic:THReshold:UDLevel on page 532
Hysteresis
Defines the size of the hysteresis to avoid the change of signal states due to noise.
Remote command:
LOGic:HYSTeresis on page 533
DIGital<m>:HYSTeresis on page 533
Label
Opens a menu to specify user-defined text labels for the individual logic channels.
Bit ← Label
Selects the logic channel or "Bit" for labeling.
● For the pod "D7...D0", you can select bit "D0", "D1", "D2", ... or "D7".
● For the pod "D15...D8", you can select bit "D8", "D9", "D10", ... or "D15".
Label ← Label
Enables or disables the user-defined label for the selected logic channel.
Remote command:
DIGital<m>:LABel:STATe on page 534
Predefined Label ← Label

Edit Label ← Label

Remote command:
DIGital<m>:LABel on page 534
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 275

Parallel buses
13.3 Triggering on logic channels

Each logic channel can be used as trigger source. Using the pattern trigger, you can
trigger on logical combinations of analog and digital channels. Also, you can define a
trigger holdoff time.
If you trigger on logic channels, the threshold is used as trigger level.
The following trigger types are available if the trigger source is a logic channel:
● Edge
● Width
● Pattern: the pattern can use all active logic channels
● Timeout
For analysis of serial protocols, you configure the protocol using logic channels as
sources, and trigger on trigger type "Serial Bus". For details, see the chapter describ-
ing the relevant bus.
13.4 Analyzing logic channels

The main analysis tools for logic channels are serial protocol analysis ([Protocol]) and
the pattern triggers.
Furthermore, you can display all logic channels and change the vertical scale position.
You can also zoom into the display ([Zoom]).
To measure logic channels, you can use automatic and cursor measurements as
usual.
See also Chapter 7.2, "Automatic measurements", on page 131 and Chapter 7.3, "Cur-
sor measurements", on page 141.
You can also export the waveform data: [Save Load] key > "Waveforms"
13.5 Parallel buses

The R&S RTB2000 can display and decode up to 16 lines of a parallel bus. You can
assign the logic channels to the bus bits individually.
To trigger on parallel buses, use the pattern trigger, see Chapter 5.7, "Pattern trigger",
on page 82.
● Parallel bus configuration......................................................................................277
● Decode results...................................................................................................... 279
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 276

Parallel buses
13.5.1 Parallel bus configuration
You can configure a parallel bus or a parallel clocked bus. For the parallel clocked bus,
a clock line and an optional chip select line are defined in addition to the other settings.
Access: [Protocol] > "Bus Type" = "Parallel" / "Parallel Clocked" > "Configuration"
The following configuration menu opens:
Figure 13-1: Configuration menu Parallel bus
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 277

Parallel buses
Figure 13-2: Configuration menu Parallel clocked bus
The menus offer the following settings:

Bus Width....................................................................................................................278
Thresholds.................................................................................................................. 278
Source.........................................................................................................................279
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 279
Chip Select..................................................................................................................279
Polarity........................................................................................................................ 279
Slope........................................................................................................................... 279
Bus Width
Sets the number of lines (bits) of the logic channels D0 to D15 to be analyzed in the
parallel or clocked parallel bus. The maximum number is the number of logic input
lines.
Remote command:
BUS:PARallel:WIDTh on page 537
BUS:CPARallel:WIDTh on page 537
Thresholds
Separately sets the thresholds for the source lines D0 to D7 and for the source lines
D8 to D15 of the parallel or clocked parallel bus.
The setting is also available in the "Logic" configuration.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 278

Parallel buses
Remote command:
Source
Selects the input line for each bit of the parallel or clocked parallel bus.
If you use a clocked parallel bus, in the last two lines you can select the source for the
"Clock" and "CS".
Remote command:
BUS:PARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce on page 537
BUS:CPARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce on page 537
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCk:SOURce on page 538
BUS:CPARallel:CS:SOURce on page 539
Set to Default
Resets the data lines of the parallel bus to the default order D0...D15.
Chip Select
Enables the chip select line for the parallel clocked bus.
Remote command:
BUS:CPARallel:CS:ENABle on page 539
Polarity
For the parallel clocked bus, selects if the chip select signal is high active ( high =
1) or low active ( low = 1).
Remote command:
BUS:CPARallel:CS:POLarity on page 539
Slope
For the parallel clocked bus, selects if the data is sampled on the rising ( ) or falling
( ) slope of the clock, or on both edges ( ) of a double data rate clock. The clock
slope marks the begin of a new bit.
Remote command:
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCK:SLOPe on page 538
13.5.2 Decode results
When the configuration of the parallel bus is complete, the signal can be decoded:

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 279

Parallel buses
Figure 13-3: Decoded Parallel bus signal with bus table
Figure 13-4: Decoded Parallel clocked bus signal
The bus table shows the data of decoded frames and the corresponding start time.
Remote commands are described in Chapter 15.12.2.3, "Parallel buses - decode
results", on page 539.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 280

R&S®RTB2000 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)
Function generator
14 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)

The R&S RTB2000 has an integrated function and pattern generator which can gener-
ate signals while testing circuits, for instance.
The waveform generator can output simple functions, modulated sine waveform, arbi-
trary waveforms and sweep waveforms. The integrated pattern generator can generate
individual or cycle patterns and simple bus signal patterns.
14.1 Function generator

The waveform generator can output simple functions, modulated sine waveform, arbi-
trary waveforms and sweep waveforms. The signal is output at the [Aux Out] connector
on the front panel.
Short Menu
In the short menu for the function generator, you can open the comprehensive menu,
and turn off the function generator.
You can also create an arbitrary waveform by copying a waveform and display or hide
the arbitrary waveform. For description of the functions in the short menu, see Chap-
ter 14.1.6, "Arbitrary setup settings", on page 291.
Figure 14-1: Short menu to create arbitrary waveform
14.1.1 Using the function generator
To configure a function waveform

1. Press the [Gen] key on the front panel.
2. Select the "Function" that you want to generate, e.g. "Sine".
3. Depending on the selected "Function", configure the settings of the waveform like
"Frequency" and "Amplitude".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 281

Function generator
4. Activate "Output" to output the waveform at the [Aux Out] connector at the front
panel.
To generate a modulated waveform

Modulation settings are described in Chapter 14.1.4, "Modulation settings",
on page 288.
2. Configure the carrier waveform as described above.
3. Tap "Modulation".
4. In the "Modulation" menu, tap "Modulation Type" and select the modulation type,
e.g. "AM".
5. Depending on the selected "Modulation Type", configure the settings of the wave-
form.
6. Enable "Modulation" to activate the modulation.
7. Tap "Back".
panel.
To generate an arbitrary waveform using the comprehensive menu

Settings are described in Chapter 14.1.6, "Arbitrary setup settings", on page 291.
1. Capture and display the waveform that is the basis for the arbitrary waveform.
3. Select "Function" > "Arbitrary".
4. Set the frequency, amplitude, and offset of the generated waveform.
5. Tap "Arbitrary Setup".
6. Select the "Source" waveform.
7. To select a sector of the existing waveform, tap "Cut Waveform". Do one of the fol-
lowing:
a) Set the "Start" and "Stop" time to select an area.
b) Drag the limit lines of the area to change the start and stop time.
c) Tap "Set Period" to set the copy to the first period of the waveform.
d) Tap "Set To Screen", to set the copy area within the screen around the trigger
point.
e) Tap "Select All" the use the complete waveform.
8. Press "Copy" to create the arbitrary waveform from the selected "Source" and the
"Cut Waveform" limits.
The arbitrary waveform is automatically saved.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 282

Function generator
9. Tap "Visible" to enable the arbitrary waveform.

The arbitrary waveform is shown in magenta color. If the arbitrary waveform was
created from a part of the displayed channel waveform, this part is stretched in hor-
izontal direction to fill all divisions.
10. To load an existing arbitrary waveform or a saved reference waveform, tap "Load".
Select the waveform file.
11. Tap "Back".
panel.
The created arbitrary waveform is output at the [Aux Out] connector at the front
panel, with the frequency, amplitude and offset that are set in the "Function Gener-
ator" menu.
To generate an arbitrary waveform using the short menu

Settings are described in Chapter 14.1.6, "Arbitrary setup settings", on page 291.
1. Capture and display the waveform that is the basis for the arbitrary waveform.
3. Select "Function" > "Arbitrary".
4. Set the frequency, amplitude, and offset of the generated waveform.
5. Activate "Output".
6. Open the short menu of the function generator in the bottom menu.
7. Tap "Copy Waveform".
8. To select a sector of the existing waveform, tap "Cut Waveform". Do one of the fol-
lowing:
a) Drag the limit lines of the area to change the start and stop time.
A time edit field is shown, where you also can set the "Start" and "Stop" time.
b) Tap "Set Period" to set the copy to the first period of the waveform.
c) Tap "Set To Screen", to set the copy area within the screen around the trigger
point.
d) Tap "Select All" the use the complete waveform.
9. Press "Copy" to create the arbitrary waveform the "Cut Waveform" limits.
The arbitrary waveform is shown in magenta color. If the arbitrary waveform was
created from a part of the displayed channel waveform, this part is stretched in hor-
izontal direction to fill all divisions. The arbitrary waveform is automatically saved.
The created arbitrary waveform is output at the [Aux Out] connector at the front
panel, with the frequency, amplitude and offset that are set in the "Function Gener-
ator" menu.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 283

Function generator
To configure a burst
Burst settings are described in Chapter 14.1.5, "Burst settings", on page 290.
2. Configure the signal waveform as described above.
3. Select the "Burst" tab.
4. Set the "N-Cycle", the "Idle Time" and the "Start Phase".
5. Set the "Trigger" to "Cont." or "Manual".
6. Tap "Back".
panel.
To configure a sweep waveform

Weep settings are described in Chapter 14.1.3, "Sweep settings", on page 287.
2. Configure the signal waveform as described above.
3. Select the "Sweep" tab.
4. Set the "Start Frequency", the "Stop Frequency" and the "Sweep Time".
5. Press "Sweep" to enable the sweep.
6. Tap "Back".
panel.
14.1.2 Basic settings of the function generator
Access: [Gen] key

For a step-by-step description, see "To configure a function waveform" on page 281.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 284

Function generator
Output
Enables the function generator.
Remote command:
WGENerator:OUTPut[:ENABle] on page 544
Function
Selects the type of waveform to be generated. For all waveforms, you can set the Fre-
quency, Amplitude, Offset, and Noise.
"DC" Generates a direct current (DC) signal.
"Sine" Generates a sine wave.
"SinC" Generates a cardinal sine wave.
"Rectangle" Generates a square wave.
"Pulse" Generates a pulse signal. Additional settings are the Duty Cycle and
the Edge Time.
"Triangle" Generates a triangle signal.
"Ramp" Generates a ramp signal. You can set the Polarity.
"Arbitrary" Generates an arbitrary waveform, which is copied from an existing
waveform, or loaded from file. See Chapter 14.1.6, "Arbitrary setup
settings", on page 291.
"Exponential" Generates an exponential rise signal. You can set the Polarity.
Remote command:
WGENerator:FUNCtion on page 542
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the waveform. The available frequency range depends on the
selected function. The frequency ranges are provided the datasheet.
Remote command:
WGENerator:FREQuency on page 542
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 285

Function generator
Amplitude
Sets the amplitude of the waveform.
Remote command:
WGENerator:VOLTage on page 542
Offset
Sets the vertical offset of the generated waveform.
Remote command:
WGENerator:VOLTage:OFFSet on page 542
Noise
Sets the noise of the generated waveform.
Remote command:
WGENerator:NOISe:ABSolute on page 544
WGENerator:NOISe:RELative on page 544
Polarity
Sets the polarity for ramp and exponential functions.
For the "Exponential" function, you can choose between a rising or falling exponential.
For the "Ramp" function, you can set a positive or negative polarity.
Remote command:
WGENerator:FUNCtion:EXPonential:POLarity on page 543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:RAMP:POLarity on page 543
Edge Time
Sets the pulse edge time.
Remote command:
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:ETIMe on page 543
Duty Cycle
Sets the duty cycle for the pulse function. The duty cycle expresses for what percent-
age of the period, the signal state is high.
Remote command:
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle on page 543
Symmetriy
Sets the symmetry for the triangle waveform. 50% defines symmetric triangles. Values
<50% define triangles with steeper rising edge leaned to the left. Values >50% define
triangles with steeper falling edge leaned to the right.
Remote command:
WGENerator:TRIangle:SYMMetry on page 543
Arbitrary Setup
Opens a menu to configure the arbitrary waveform.
See Chapter 14.1.6, "Arbitrary setup settings", on page 291.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 286

Function generator
Sweep
Opens a menu to configure the sweep.
See Chapter 14.1.3, "Sweep settings", on page 287.
Modulation
Opens a menu to configure the modulation.
See Chapter 14.1.4, "Modulation settings", on page 288.
Invert
Inverts the waveform at the offset level.
Load
Select the user load, the load of the DUT at its connection. You can select either a
"50Ω" or a "High-Z" (high input impedance) load.
Remote command:
WGENerator:OUTPut:LOAD on page 544
14.1.3 Sweep settings
Access: [Gen] key > "Sweep"

In the sweep mode, the R&S RTB2000 generates a signal whose frequency gradually
changes from the Start Frequency to the Stop Frequency for a certain Sweep Time.
For a step-by-step description of the sweep setup, see "To configure a sweep wave-
form" on page 284.
Sweep
Enables or disables the sweeping.
Remote command:
WGENerator:SWEep[:ENABle] on page 551
Start Frequency
Sets the start frequency of the sweep signal.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 287

Function generator
Remote command:
WGENerator:SWEep:FSTart on page 550
Stop Frequency
Sets the stop frequency of the sweep signal.
Remote command:
WGENerator:SWEep:FEND on page 550
Sweep Time
Sets the duration of the sweep.
Remote command:
WGENerator:SWEep:TIME on page 551
Sweep
Sets the type of the sweep, a linear, logarithmic or triangle-shaped change of the fre-
quency. The triangle-shaped sweep runs from the "Start Frequency" to the "Stop Fre-
quency" and then from the "Stop Frequency" back to the "Start Frequency".
Remote command:
WGENerator:SWEep:TYPE on page 551
14.1.4 Modulation settings
Access: [Gen] key > "Modulation"

Modulation is the variation of properties of an original periodic waveform according to a
second modulating signal. The type of modulation determines which properties are
changed.
For a step-by-step description of the modulation setup, see "To generate a modulated
waveform" on page 282.
Modulation
Enables or disables modulation.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 288

Function generator
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation[:ENABLE] on page 548
Modulation Type
Selects the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified.
"AM" Amplitude modulation. The amplitude of the carrier signal is varied
according to the modulation signal.
"FM" Frequency modulation. The frequency of the carrier signal is varied
according to the modulation signal.
"ASK" Amplitude shift keying (ASK) modulation. The amplitude switches
between 100% and the "ASK Depth" amplitude with a defined modu-
lating "Frequency".
"FSK" Frequency shift keying (FSK) modulation. The signal frequency
switches between the carrier "Frequency" and the "Hop. Frequency"
at a "FSK Rate".
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:TYPE on page 548
Function
Selects the type of the modulating signal for AM or FM modulation.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:FUNCtion on page 548
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the modulating waveform for AM/FM/ASK modulation.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:FREQuency on page 548
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:FREQuency on page 549
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:FREQuency on page 549
AM Depth
Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the amplitude range that is used for AM
modulation.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:DEPTh on page 549
Deviation
Sets the frequency deviation, the maximum difference between the FM modulated sig-
nal and the carrier signal.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:DEViation on page 549
ASK Depth
Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the amplitude range that is used for ASK
modulation.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 289

Function generator
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:DEPTh on page 549
Polarity
Sets the polarity of the ramp function for AM and FM modulation.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:RAMP:POLarity on page 550
Hop. Frequency
Sets the second frequency of the FSK-modulated signal.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:HFREquency on page 550
FSK Rate
Sets the rate at which signal switches between the carrier frequency and the hopping
frequency.
Remote command:
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:RATE on page 550
14.1.5 Burst settings
Access: [Gen] key > "Burst"

With the burst mode, you can output a waveform for a set number of times.
For a step-by-step description of the modulation setup, see "To configure a burst"
on page 284.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 290

Function generator
Burst
Enables or disables the burst.
Remote command:
WGENerator:BURSt[:STATe] on page 547
N-Cycle
Sets the number of times the generator outputs one cycle of the waveform per burst.
Remote command:
WGENerator:BURSt:NCYCle on page 546
Idle Time
Sets the idle time between two burst cycles.
Remote command:
WGENerator:BURSt:ITIMe on page 546
Start Phase
Sets the start phase of the burst.
Remote command:
WGENerator:BURSt:PHASe on page 547
Trigger
Selects the trigger mode. Each time the generator receives a trigger, it outputs a burst
with the number of cycles defined with "N-Cycle".
In the continuous mode, the oscilloscope outputs continuously when the burst is
enabled.
In the manual mode, you have to press "Manual" to output a burst.
Remote command:
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger[:MODE] on page 546
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger:SINGle on page 547
14.1.6 Arbitrary setup settings
Access: [Gen] key > "Arbitrary Setup"

An arbitrary waveform is copied from an existing waveform on the instrument, or loa-
ded from file. You can display the arbitrary waveform on the screen.
For a step-by-step description of the modulation setup, see "To generate an arbitrary
waveform using the comprehensive menu" on page 282.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 291

Function generator
Visible
Enables the display of the arbitrary waveform.
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:VISible on page 546
Source
Selects the source of the arbitrary waveform. You can load an existing file or load the
current oscilloscope waveform.
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:SOURce on page 544
Copy
Loads the waveform from the selected "Signal source" or the waveform part selected
with "Cut Waveform".
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:UPDate on page 545
Cut Waveform
Provides the settings to refine the part of the waveform to be copied.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 292

Function generator
Set Period ← Cut Waveform

Sets the copy area to the first period of the waveform.
Set To Screen ← Cut Waveform

Sets the copy area within the screen.
Select All ← Cut Waveform

Selects the whole waveform.
Start ← Cut Waveform

Sets the start time of the copy area.
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:START on page 545
Stop ← Cut Waveform

Sets the stop time of the copy area.
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:STOP on page 545
Load
Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the selected file. The instrument sup-
ports .trf and .csv file formats, the same formats as for reference waveforms.
Remote command:
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:NAME on page 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:OPEN on page 545
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 293

Pattern generator
14.2 Pattern generator

The pattern generator outputs parallel patterns on the four pins P0 to P3 on the front
panel of the instrument.
2. Tap "Pattern Gen.".
A dialog box shows the pins, on which the pattern is output, depending on the selected
pattern.
14.2.1 Pattern selection
Pattern State
Enables or disables the pattern output at the pins P0 to P3.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:STATe on page 552
Pattern
Selects the pattern type.
"Square Wave" Generates a square wave pattern at pin P0.
"Counter" Generates a 4-bit wide counter pattern at pins P0 to P3.
"Arbitrary" Creates, saves or loads an arbitrary 4-bit wide pattern and outputs it
at pins P0 to P3.
"Manual" Sets the high or low state for each pin.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 294

Pattern generator
"UART, SPI, I2C, CAN, LIN, Audio-I2S, Audio-TDM"

Generate a bus signal for measurements without measurement
object.
Remote command:
PGENerator:FUNCtion on page 552
14.2.2 Settings for square wave pattern
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "Square Wave"
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the square wave.
The values of the "Frequency" and "Period" depend on each other, as:
Period = 1 / Frequency
If you change the value, the "Period" is adjusted accordingly.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:FREQuency on page 554
Period
Sets the period of the square wave. If you change the value, the "Frequency" is adjus-
ted accordingly.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:PERiod on page 553
Polarity
Sets normal or inverted polarity.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:POLarity on page 553
Duty Cycle
Sets the duty cycle of the square wave from 1% to 99%.The duty cycle expresses for
what percentage of the period, the signal state is high.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 295

Pattern generator
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:DCYCle on page 553
14.2.3 Settings for counter pattern
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "Counter"
Frequency
Sets the switching frequency, how fast the pattern condition changes. The square
waveforms at the pins have the following resulting frequencies:
● P0: f/2
● P1: f/4
● P2: f/8
● P3: f/16
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:FREQuency on page 554
Direction
Changes the counting direction.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:DIRection on page 554
14.2.4 Settings for arbitrary pattern
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "Arbitrary"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 296

Pattern generator
● General settings....................................................................................................297
● Pattern setup.........................................................................................................298
● Timing setup..........................................................................................................299
14.2.4.1 General settings
Pattern Setup
Opens the menu to define the individual bit values of the pattern.
See Chapter 14.2.4.2, "Pattern setup", on page 298.
Timing Setup
Opens the menu to define the timing parameters.
See Chapter 14.2.4.3, "Timing setup", on page 299.
Save
Opens a dialog box to save a waveform as an ARB pattern. The text files contatining
remote commands are saved in *.scp format.
You can select the "Location" to which the waveform file (internal or USB) is saved.
Tap "Save" to save the file under the current name.
Tap "New File" and enter the name of the new file you want to save.
Load
Provides functions to load an ARB waveform.
Select the "Location" of the waveform file (internal or USB), and the file. Tap "Load".
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 297

Pattern generator
Pattern trigger
Selects the mode for the trigger for the ARB signal. You can select an automatic con-
tinuous trigger or a manual one time trigger. If "1x" is selected, tap "Manual" to initiate
the trigger.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:MODE on page 555
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:SINGle on page 557
14.2.4.2 Pattern setup
Pattern Length
Sets the pattern length, the number of samples for the pattern.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:LENGth on page 555
Index
Selects a sample. The selected sample is shown in the information box as a light blue
line. Around the index, ±8 bits are displayed.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:INDex on page 556
Value
Sets the value of the currently selected "Index".
Draw
If enabled, you can draw large sample amounts with the same value.
Delete All
Deletes the pattern. Also, resets the "Pattern Length" to 1 and the "Value" to 0.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 298

Pattern generator
14.2.4.3 Timing setup
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "Arbitrary"
Bit Time
Sets the time at which each sample is applied. The time is identical for all samples.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:STIMe on page 557
Period
Sets the period of the sample. It applies to the whole pattern. Period= Pattern Length *
Bit Time
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:PERiod on page 553
Burst
If activated, the instrument pauses after each issued pattern for the duration of the "Idle
Time".
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:STATe on page 557
Idle Time
Sets the idle time, the time for which the instrument pauses after each issued pattern.
The "Idle Time" between the patterns can be set from 20 ns to 42 s in increments of 10
ns.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:ITIMe on page 557
N-Cycle
Sets the number of times the pattern is generated.
Remote command:
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:NCYCle on page 557
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 299

Pattern generator
14.2.5 Settings for manual pattern
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "Manual"
P0/P1/P2/P3
Sets the states to high or low for the respective pin of the manual pattern.
Remote command:
PGENerator:MANual:STATe<s> on page 558
14.2.6 Settings for serial buses
You can use the pattern generator to generate signals according to serial protocols
(bus signals).
The genrated serial protocol signals are pseudo random pattern and are not adaptable.
Only the protocol type and the data rate can be selected.
The contact at the upper left is always ground and the signal levels are about 1 V. The
following table shows how the four outputs P0, P1, P2 and P3 are used, depending on
the signal.
Signal P0 P1 P2 P3
UART Tx Rx Unused Unused
SPI Clock Mosi Miso Chip Select
I2C Clock SCL Data SDA Unused Unused
CAN CAN H CAN L Unused Unused
LIN High Low Unused Unused
Access: "Menu" > "Pattern Gen." > "Pattern" = "UART | SPI | I2C | CAN | LIN"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 300

Pattern generator
Data Rate
Select the data rate of the bus signal.
The following values are available for the specific bus:
● UART: 9600 Bit/s, 115.2 kBit/s, 1 MBit/s
● SPI: 100 kBit/s, 250 kBit/s, 1 MBit/s
● I2C: 100 kBit/s, 400 kBit/s, 1000 kBit/s, 3400 kBit/s
● CAN: 50 kBit/s, 100 kBit/s, 1 MBit/s
● LIN: 9.6 kBit/s, 10.417 kBit/s, 19.200 kBit/s
Active
Sets the polarity for the UART bus.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 301

R&S®RTB2000 Remote control commands
Conventions used in command description
15 Remote control commands

This chapter provides the description of all remote commands available for
R&S RTB2000. The commands are sorted according to the menu structure of the
instrument. A list of commands in alphabetical order ist given in the "List of Com-
mands" at the end of this documentation.
Processing of remote control commands

The response time on remote commands depends on several factors:
● Number of active channels
● Number of active measurements
● Size of the acquisition memory
● Timebase
● Trigger frequency
The R&S RTB2000 processes measurement queries in the following way:
● In stop mode or with slow trigger frequency if no new data since last value calcula-
tion is available, the oscilloscope sends the measured value in the response.
● Otherwise, if new data since last value calculation is available, the oscilloscope cal-
culates and sends the response.
● Conventions used in command description.......................................................... 302
● Programming examples........................................................................................ 303
● Common commands............................................................................................. 309
● Waveform setup.................................................................................................... 312
● Trigger...................................................................................................................330
● Waveform analysis................................................................................................345
● Measurements...................................................................................................... 381
● Applications...........................................................................................................400
● Documenting results............................................................................................. 427
● General instrument setup......................................................................................449
● Serial bus analysis................................................................................................ 463
● Mixed signal option (option R&S RTB-B1)............................................................ 529
● Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)...............................................................541
● Status reporting.....................................................................................................558
15.1 Conventions used in command description

The following conventions are used in the remote command descriptions:
● Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
● Parameter usage
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 302

Programming examples
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters.
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters.
Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return
values.
● Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con-
firmed. All commands used by the R&S RTB2000 follow the SCPI syntax rules.
● Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com-
mand starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous
command.
● Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
● Default unit
The default unit is used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the
parameter.
15.2 Programming examples

● Documenting results............................................................................................. 303
● Firmware update................................................................................................... 307
● Search...................................................................................................................308
● Function generator................................................................................................309
15.2.1 Documenting results
● Saving screenshots to file..................................................................................... 303

● Saving, copying, and loading setup data.............................................................. 304
● Reading waveform data in real format.................................................................. 305
● Reading waveform data in unsigned integer format............................................. 305
15.2.1.1 Saving screenshots to file
Save two display images in png format to the PIX folder on a USB flash drive that is
connected to the front panel. One screenshot is colored and the other is grayscaled.
Finally, the data of the gray screenshot is read for further user on the control computer.
Command description in: Chapter 15.9.3, "Screenshots", on page 440.
*RST
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT"
MMEM:MDIR "/USB_FRONT/PIX"
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/PIX/"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 303

HCOP:LANG PNG
HCOP:COL:SCH COL
MMEM:NAME "COLORED"
HCOP:IMM
HCOP:COL:SCH GRAY
MMEM:NAME "GRAY"
HCOP:IMM
MMEM:CAT? "*.PNG"
MMEM:DATA? "GRAY.PNG"
15.2.1.2 Saving, copying, and loading setup data
Save instrument settings to a file on internal storage device, duplicate this file and save
it to a USB stick attached to the front panel. Finally, there are three setup files on the
internal storage /INT/SETTINGS, and one file on the USB flash device.
Command description in: Chapter 15.9.4, "Instrument settings: mass MEMomory sub-
system", on page 443.
CHAN1:STAT ON // Turn channel 1 on
CHAN2:STAT ON // Turn channel 2 on
TIM:ZOOM:STAT ON // Show zoom diagram
MMEM:CDIR "/INT/SETTINGS" // Set storage device and directory
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,"ZOOM_A.SET" // Save settings to internal storage
MMEM:CAT? "*.SET" // Check
<-- 332112,8633856,"ZOOM_A.SET,,2759"
MMEM:COPY "ZOOM_A.SET","ZOOM_B.SET" // Copy file
<-- 332112,8633856,"ZOOM_A.SET,,2759","ZOOM_B.SET,,2759"
MMEM:COPY "/INT/SETTINGS/ZOOM_B.SET","/USB_FRONT/ZOOM_B.SET"
// Save copied file to USB stick
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT" // Check
MMEM:CAT? "*.SET"
<-- 4890624,-641765376,"ZOOM_B.SET,,2759"
MMEM:COPY "/USB_FRONT/ZOOM_B.SET","/USB_FRONT/ZOOM_USB.SET"
// Duplicate file on USB stick
<-- 4890624,-641765376,"ZOOM_B.SET,,2759","ZOOM_USB.SET,,2759"
MMEM:DEL "ZOOM_B.SET" // Delete original file
<-- 4886528,-641765376,"ZOOM_USB.SET,,2759"
MMEM:COPY "/USB_FRONT/ZOOM_USB.SET","/INT/SETTINGS/"
// Copy new file to the instrument
MMEM:CDIR "/INT/SETTINGS" // Check
MMEM:CAT? "*.SET"
<-- 332112,8633856,"ZOOM_A.SET,,2759","ZOOM_B.SET,,2759","ZOOM_USB.SET,,2759"
*RST;*OPC?
<-- 1
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 304

MMEM:CDIR "/INT/SETTINGS"
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,"ZOOM_USB.SET" // Load settings
15.2.1.3 Reading waveform data in real format
Set data format and sample range, read channel header and data.
Command description in Chapter 15.9.1, "Transfer of waveform data", on page 427.
Return values are example data.
// Check instrument connection (example)
* Connected to: TCPIP0::192.168.1.1::inst0::INSTR

SYST:ERR:ALL?
<-- 0,"No error" // if error queue is empty
*IDN?
<-- Rohde&Schwarz,RTB2004,1333.1005K04/101489,02.002
// Read waveform data

*RST
CHAN:TYPE HRES // Set high resolution mode (16 bit data)
TIM:SCAL 1E-7 // Set time base
FORM REAL // Set REAL data format
FORM:BORD LSBF // Set little endian byte order
CHAN:DATA:POIN DMAX // Set sample range to memory data in displayed time range
SING;*OPC? // Start single acquisition
<-- 1
CHAN:DATA:HEAD? // Read header
<-- -4.9980E-07,5.0000E-07,5000,1 // Xstart, Xstop, record length in samples
CHAN:DATA? // Read channel data
<-- #520000>??[>??[>??[>??[>??[>??... // Binary block data,
// 4-byte floating point number/sample
15.2.1.4 Reading waveform data in unsigned integer format
Read the channel header, the waveform conversion data, set the UINT binary data for-
mat and read the channel data.
Command description in: Chapter 15.9.1, "Transfer of waveform data", on page 427.
Return values are example data.
*RST
TIM:SCAL 1E-7
CHAN:DATA:POIN DMAX // Set data range
SING;*OPC?
<-- 1
CHAN:DATA:HEAD? // Read header
<-- -4.9980E-07,5.0000E-07,5000,1 // Xstart, Xstop, record length in samples
CHAN:DATA:YRES? // Read vertical resolution
<-- 8
CHAN:DATA:YOR? // Read voltage value for binary value 0
<-- -2.549999943E-2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 305

CHAN:DATA:XOR? // Read time of the first sample

<-- -4.998000058E-7
CHAN:DATA:XINC? // Read time between two adjacent samples
<-- 2.000000023E-10
FORM UINT,8;FORM? // Set data format to unsigned integer, 8 bit
<-- UINT,8
CHAN:DATA:YINC? // Read voltage value per bit
<-- 1.999999949E-4
<-- 128,125,120... // 5000 bytes total
FORM UINT,16;FORM? // Change data format to unsigned integer, 16 bit
<-- UINT,16
CHAN:DATA:YINC? // Read voltage value per bit
<-- 7.812499803E-7
<-- 32768,32000,30720... // 10000 bytes total
Note the following correlations:

● The number of received data values matches the number of samples indicated in
the header.
● The time of the first sample (XORigin) matches the start time Xstart indicated in the
header.
● The Y-increment adjusts to the data length defined in the data format (8 or 16 bit).
Data conversion
Definition: the sample numbers start with 0 and end with record length - 1.
Sample time
tn = n * xIncrement + xOrigin
First sample: t0 = -4.998000058E-7 (= Xstart)
Last sample: t4999 = 4999 * 2E−10 − 4.998E−7 = 5.0 E−7 (= Xstop)
Sample value
Yn = yOrigin + (yIncrement * byteValuen)
The format UINT,8 has the data range 0 to 255. The voltage value for byte value 128
is:
Yn = −2.55E-2 + (2E−4 * 128) = 0.0001
The center of the display at position 0 div always has the byte value 127.5. The corre-
sponding voltage value is:
Yn = −2.55E-2 + (2E−4 * 127.5) = 0
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 306

8-bit and 16-bit data

At the end of the above example, the 8-bit waveform is read as 16-bit data, for exam-
ple, 0xFF is read 0xFF00, or 0x1A is read 0x1A00. The yOrigin value is the same in
both cases, but the yIncrement differs.
8-bit data 16-bit data Result
2e-4 * 128 7,8125E-7 * 32768 0,0256 V

yIncrement * byteValuen
2e-4 * 125 7,8125E-7 * 32000 0,025 V
In the reverse case, if a 16-bit waveform is read with 8-bit data format, data precision
may be reduced. Data values ar truncated, and only the more significiant bits remain.
For example, the 16-bit data 0xabcd is read 0xab in 8-bit format, and cd is lost.
15.2.2 Firmware update
There are two ways to update the firmware on the instrument remotely. The web
browser does not yet include firmware update functionality.
To prepare the remote update, configure the instrument's interface to Ethernet, USB
TMC or USB VCP. Connect to the R&S RTB2000 using a socket connection, Visa or a
terminal program.
15.2.2.1 Using MMEM:DATA + DIAGnostic:UPDate:LOAD
1. Send the firmware update file data to the internal storage of the instrument, for
example:
:MMEM:DATA "/INT/RTB2004.FWU",blockdata\n
In SCPI, block data is composed of a header #nm containing the length of the data
followed by the data in raw binary format. Here, m is the length of the data in byte,
and n is the number of digits in m. The firmware update file has to be sent in a sin-
gle transfer.
2. Start the firmware update:

:DIAG:UPD:LOAD "/INT/RTB2004.FWU"\n
The instrument loads, checks and executes the firmware update, and restarts.
3. After restart, delete the firmware update file in the internal storage:
:MMEM:DEL "/INT/RTB2004.FWU"\n
15.2.2.2 Using DIAGnostic:UPDdate:TRANsfer
1. Open a data transfer for the firmware update file, and check for errors:
:DIAG:UPD:TRAN:OPEN FIRM\n
:SYST:ERR:ALL?
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 307

2. Send the firmware update file data to the internal RAM of the instrument:
:DIAG:UPD:TRAN:DATA offset,checksum,blockdata\n
The offset parameter specifies the byte offset of the blockdata in the file. The
checksum parameter is a CRC-16-CCITT type checksum calculated for the raw
binary data in blockdata. In SCPI, block data is composed of a header #nm con-
taining the length of the data followed by the data in raw binary format. Here, m is
the length of the data in byte, and n is the number of digits in m.
The firmware update file can be split into multiple blocks, where each block has to
be transferred with the above command. You can also transfer the file in a single
block.
Example to send all data at once, without CRC:
DUT#sendRAW DIAG:UPD:TRAN:DATA 0,0,#822393104
DUT#sendFileContent "W:\RTB2004.FWU"
DUT#sendByte 10 //end of command '\n'
3. Close the transfer:

:DIAG:UPD:TRAN:CLOSE\n
4. Start the firmware update:

:DIAG:UPD:INST ""\n
The instrument checks and executes the firmware update.
15.2.3 Search
15.2.3.1 Searching for a pulse of specified width
Search for positive pulses with pulse width 12 ± 10 µs (2 µs to 22 µs).

Command description in: Chapter 15.6.4, "Search", on page 355.
Prerequisite: A pulse signal is connected to channel 2.
SEAR:STAT ON // Turn on search
SEAR:COND WIDTH // Select search condition
SEAR:SOUR CH2 // Configure search source
SEAR:TRIG:WIDT:POL POS // Configure search parameters: Polarity
SEAR:TRIG:WIDT:RANG WITH // Configure search parameters: Condition = within
SEAR:TRIG:WIDT:WIDT 12e-6 // Configure search parameters: Pulse width
SEAR:TRIG:WIDT:DELT 10e-6 // Configure search parameters: +/- delta
SEAR:RESD:SHOW ON // Show result table
SEAR:RCO? // Get number of search events found
<-- 1.400E+01
SEAR:RES:ALL? // Get all search results
<-- 1,5.201200e-06,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,1.220160e-05,2,4.120040e-05,0,WIDTH,
POSITIVE,3.076800e-06,3,4.732480e-05,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,9.127200e-06,4,
6.499960e-05,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,1.835160e-05,5,8.634920e-05,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,
3.052000e-06,6,1.293984e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,9.176800e-06,7,1.477228e-04,0,
WIDTH,POSITIVE,3.052000e-06,8,1.623224e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,3.102000e-06,9,
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 308

Common commands
1.684724e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,1.215160e-05,10,1.953216e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,
3.027200e-06,11,2.044716e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,6.052000e-06,12,2.252212e-04,0,
WIDTH,POSITIVE,3.052000e-06,13,2.435456e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,3.027200e-06,14,
2.496456e-04,0,WIDTH,POSITIVE,6.702000e-06
15.2.4 Function generator
Configure and output a sine waveform.

Command description in: Chapter 15.13.1, "Function generator", on page 541.
Prerequesite: To see the generated waveform on the oscilloscope, connect the "Gen"
output to "Ch1" input.
*RST
WGEN:FUNC SIN // Selects sine function
WGEN:VOLT 700E-3 // Sets the amplitude
WGEN:FREQ 1.00E+06 // Sets the frequency
WGEN:OUTP:LOAD R50 // Sets the user load
WGEN:OUTP 1 // Outputs the sine waveform
AUT // Autoscale to see the waveform
15.3 Common commands

Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi-
ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?...........................................................................................................................309
*CLS.............................................................................................................................310
*ESE.............................................................................................................................310
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................310
*IDN?............................................................................................................................310
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 310
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................311
*PSC.............................................................................................................................311
*RST.............................................................................................................................311
*SRE.............................................................................................................................311
*STB?...........................................................................................................................312
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 312
*WAI............................................................................................................................. 312
*CAL?
Performs a self-alignment of the instrument and then generates a status response.
Return values ≠ 0 indicate an error.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 309

Common commands
Usage: Query only
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage: Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the con-
tents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255
*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg-
ister to zero.
Return values:
<Contents> Range: 0 to 255
Usage: Query only
*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values:
<ID> "Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<serial number>,<firmware ver-
sion>"
Example: Rohde&Schwarz,RTB2004,1333.1005k04/900012,
01.203
Usage: Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 310

Common commands
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu-
ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query writes a "1" into the
output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed, which is useful for
command synchronization.
*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description, refer to the data sheet.
Return values:
<Options> The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at
fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned
for options that are not installed.
Usage: Query only
*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru-
ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action> 0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "[Preset]" on page 51
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter-
mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 311

Waveform setup
Parameters:
<Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage: Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "[Force Trigger]" on page 73
*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage: Event
15.4 Waveform setup

● Automatic setup.................................................................................................... 313
● Starting and stopping acquisition.......................................................................... 313
● Vertical settings..................................................................................................... 314
● Passive probes......................................................................................................321
● Horizontal settings.................................................................................................322
● Acquisition settings............................................................................................... 324
● Waveform data......................................................................................................330
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 312

Waveform setup
15.4.1 Automatic setup
AUToscale
Performs an autoset process for analog channels: analyzes the enabled analog chan-
nel signals, and adjusts the horizontal, vertical, and trigger settings to display stable
waveforms
Usage: Event
Asynchronous command
Manual operation: See "[Autoset]" on page 51
15.4.2 Starting and stopping acquisition
RUN............................................................................................................................. 313
RUNContinous...............................................................................................................313
SINGle..........................................................................................................................313
RUNSingle.................................................................................................................... 313
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt................................................................................................313
STOP........................................................................................................................... 314
ACQuire:STATe..............................................................................................................314
RUN
RUNContinous
Starts the continuous acquisition.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "[Run Stop]" on page 73
SINGle
RUNSingle
Starts a defined number of acquisitions. The number of acquisitions is set with
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "[ Single]" on page 73
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt <NSingleCount>
Sets the number of waveforms acquired with RUNSingle.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 313

Waveform setup
Parameters:
<NSingleCount> Number of waveforms.
Range: 1 to maximum number that depends on the record
length.
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Nx Single" on page 69
STOP
Stops the running acquistion.
Usage: Event
ACQuire:STATe
Sets or queries the acquisition state of the instrument.
Parameters:
<AcquisitionState> RUN | STOPping | COMPlete | BREak
RUN
Set: Starts the acquisition.
Read: The acquisition is running.
STOPping
Set: Stops the acquisition when it is finished.
Read: Acquisition is stopped.
COMPlete
Set: Not available.
Read: The current acquisition is finished and completed.
BREak
Set: Immediate interrupt of current acquisition.
Read: acquisition is finished but interrupted.
15.4.3 Vertical settings
CHANnel<m>:STATe...................................................................................................... 315
CHANnel<m>:AON........................................................................................................ 315
CHANnel<m>:AOFF.......................................................................................................315
CHANnel<m>:SCALe..................................................................................................... 315
CHANnel<m>:RANGe.................................................................................................... 316
CHANnel<m>:POSition...................................................................................................316
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet.................................................................................................... 316
CHANnel<m>:COUPling................................................................................................. 317
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth...............................................................................................317
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 314

Waveform setup
CHANnel<m>:POLarity...................................................................................................318
CHANnel<m>:SKEW......................................................................................................318
CHANnel<m>:ZOFFset[:VALue]...................................................................................... 318
CHANnel<m>:WCOLor...................................................................................................319
CHANnel<m>:THReshold............................................................................................... 319
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:FINDlevel................................................................................ 320
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis............................................................................. 320
CHANnel<m>:LABel.......................................................................................................320
CHANnel<m>:LABel:STATe.............................................................................................321
CHANnel<m>:STATe <State>
Switches the channel signal on or off.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Selects the input channel. The number of channels depends on
the instrument.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "[Ch <n>]" on page 56
See "State" on page 60
CHANnel<m>:AON
Switches all analog channels on.
Suffix: .
<m> The suffix is irrelevant.
Usage: Event
CHANnel<m>:AOFF
Switches all analog channels off.
Suffix: .
Usage: Event
CHANnel<m>:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the vertical scale for the indicated channel.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 315

Waveform setup
Parameters:
<Scale> Scale value, given in Volts per division.
Range: 1e-3 to 10 (without probe attenuation)
*RST: 5e-3
Default unit: V/div
Manual operation: See "[Scale]" on page 57
See "Vertical Scale" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:RANGe <Range>
Sets the voltage range across the all vertical divisions of the diagram. Use the com-
mand alternatively instead of CHANnel<m>:SCALe.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Range> Voltage range value
Range: 8e-3 to 80 (without probe attenuation)
*RST: 40e-3
Default unit: V
CHANnel<m>:POSition <Position>
Sets the vertical position of the waveform in divisions. While the offset sets a voltage,
position is a graphical setting given in divisions.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Position> Graphical position
Range: -5 to 5
*RST: 0
Default unit: div
Manual operation: See "[Offset/Position (upper knob)]" on page 57
See "Position" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the offset voltage, which is subtracted to correct an offset-affected signal.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 316

Waveform setup
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Offset> Offset value
Range: Depend on vertical scale and probe attenuation.
Increment: Depends on vertical scale and probe attenuation.
*RST: 0
Default unit: V
See "Offset" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects the connection of the indicated channel signal - coupling and termination.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Coupling> DCLimit | ACLimit | GND
DCLimit
DC coupling passes the input signal unchanged.
ACLimit
Removes the DC offset voltage from the input signal.
GND
Connection to a virtual ground. All channel data is set to o V.
Manual operation: See "Coupling" on page 60
See "Ground" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth <BandwidthLimit>
Selects the bandwidth limit for the indicated channel.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<BandwidthLimit> FULL | B20
FULL
Use full bandwidth.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 317

Waveform setup
B20
Limit to 20 MHz. Higher frequencies are removed to reduce
noise.
*RST: FULL
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 60
CHANnel<m>:POLarity <Polarity>
Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off. To invert means to reflect the volt-
age values of all signal components against the ground level. Inversion affects only the
display of the signal but not the trigger.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Polarity> NORMal | INVerted
*RST: NORM
Manual operation: See "Invert" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:SKEW <Skew>
Sets a delay for the selected channel.
Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different
length of cables, probes, and other sources. Correct deskew values are important for
accurate triggering.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Skew> Deskew value
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Deskew" on page 61
CHANnel<m>:ZOFFset[:VALue] <ZeroOffset>
Sets the zero offset.
Differences in DUT and oscilloscope ground levels may cause larger zero errors affect-
ing the waveform. If the DUT is ground-referenced, the "Zero Offset" corrects the zero
error and sets the probe to the zero level.
You can assess the zero error by measuring the mean value of a signal that should
return zero.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 318

Waveform setup
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<ZeroOffset> *RST: 0
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Zero Adjust" on page 62
CHANnel<m>:WCOLor <WaveformColor>
Selects the color scale for the waveform color. Each scale comprises a set of colors,
where each color represents a certain frequency of occurrence.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<WaveformColor> TEMPerature | RAINbow | FIRE | DEFault
TEMPerature
Temperature colors. Blue corresponds to rare occurrences of the
samples, while white indicates frequent ones.
RAINbow
Rainbow colors. Blue corresponds to rare occurrences of the
samples, while red indicates frequent ones.
FIRE
Fire colors. Yellow corresponds to rare occurrences of the sam-
ples, while red indicates frequent ones.
DEFault
Default monochrome color.
*RST: DEF
Manual operation: See "Waveform Color" on page 62
CHANnel<m>:THReshold <Threshold>
Threshold value for digitization of analog signals. If the signal value is higher than the
threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic). Otherwise, the signal
state is considered low (0 or false) if the signal value is below the threshold.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Threshold> Often used values are:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 319

Waveform setup
TTL: 1.4 V
ECL: -1.3 V
CMOS: 2.5 V
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 63
See "Threshold" on page 80
See "Threshold, Find Threshold" on page 224
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:FINDlevel
The instrument analyzes the channel and sets the threshold for digitization.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<FindLevel>
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Find Threshold" on page 63
See "Threshold, Find Threshold" on page 224
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis <ThresholdHysteresis>
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<ThresholdHysteresis>SMALl | MEDium | LARGe
Values correspond to the vertical scale
*RST: SMAL
Manual operation: See "Hysteresis" on page 63
See "Hysteresis" on page 80
See "Hysteresis" on page 86
CHANnel<m>:LABel <Label>
Specifies a name for the selected channel.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 320

Waveform setup
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Label> String value
String with max. 8 characters, only ASCII characters can be
used
Manual operation: See "Label" on page 64
CHANnel<m>:LABel:STATe
Shows or hides the channel name.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
15.4.4 Passive probes
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:UNIT.............................................................................321
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual.........................................................................321
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:UNIT.......................................................................................322
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:MANual...................................................................................322
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:UNIT <Unit>
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Unit> V|A
Manual operation: See "Unit" on page 66
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual <ManualAttenuation>
Sets the attenuation of the probe.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 321

Waveform setup
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<ManualAttenuation> Range: 0.0001 to 10e6
Manual operation: See "User" on page 65
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:UNIT <Unit>
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<Unit> V|A
Manual operation: See "Unit" on page 66
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:MANual <ManualGain>
Sets the gain of the probe. The gain the the reciprocal of the attenuation (PROBe<m>:
SETup:ATTenuation:MANual)
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<ManualGain> Range: 0.0001 to 10000
Manual operation: See "User" on page 65
15.4.5 Horizontal settings
TIMebase:SCALe...........................................................................................................322
TIMebase:POSition........................................................................................................ 323
TIMebase:REFerence.....................................................................................................323
TIMebase:ACQTime.......................................................................................................324
TIMebase:RANGe..........................................................................................................324
TIMebase:DIVisions?......................................................................................................324
TIMebase:RATime?........................................................................................................324
TIMebase:SCALe <TimeScale>
Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 322

Waveform setup
Parameters:
<TimeScale> Range: 1e-9 to 50; lower limits are possible if zoom or
FFT is enabled.
Increment: 1e-9
*RST: 100e-6
Default unit: s/div
See "Time Scale" on page 55
TIMebase:POSition <Offset>
Defines the trigger position, the time distance from the trigger point to the reference
point (trigger offset). The trigger point is the zero point of the diagram. Changing the
horizontal position, you can move the trigger, even outside the screen.
See also: TIMebase:REFerence on page 323
Parameters:
<Offset> Range: Depends on time base setting
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "[Position]" on page 53
See "Horizontal Position" on page 55
TIMebase:REFerence <ReferencePoint>
Defines the time reference point in the diagram. The reference point is the rescaling
center of the time scale on the screen. If you modify the time scale, the reference point
remains fixed on the screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of
the reference point.
The reference point defines which part of the waveform is shown. By default, the refer-
ence point is displayed in the center of the window, and you can move it to the left or
right.
See also: TIMebase:POSition on page 323
Parameters:
<ReferencePoint> 8.33 | 50 | 91.67
8.33 = left position (1 div); 50 = middle position; 91.67 = right
position (11 div).
*RST: 50
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Reference Point" on page 54
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 323

Waveform setup
TIMebase:ACQTime <AcquisitionTime>
TIMebase:RANGe <AcquisitionTime>
Defines the time of one acquisition, that is the time across the 12 divisions of the dia-
gram: Horizontal scale*12.
Parameters:
<AcquisitionTime> Range and increment depend on time base (horizontal scale)
and other settings
Range: 250e-12 to 500
Increment: 1e-12
Default unit: s
TIMebase:DIVisions?
Queries the number of horizontal divisions on the screen.
Return values:
<HorizDivCount> Returns 12 divisions.
Usage: Query only
TIMebase:RATime?
Queries the real acquisition time used in the hardware. If FFT analysis is performed,
the value can differ from the adjusted acquisition time (TIMebase:ACQTime).
Return values:
<HWAcqTime> Range: Depends on various settings
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
15.4.6 Acquisition settings
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic............................................................................................ 325
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]................................................................................................ 325
CHANnel<m>:TYPE.......................................................................................................326
ACQuire:TYPE.............................................................................................................. 326
CHANnel<m>:ARIThmetics.............................................................................................327
ACQuire:PEAKdetect..................................................................................................... 327
ACQuire:HRESolution.................................................................................................... 327
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt................................................................................................328
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt..............................................................................................328
ACQuire:AVERage:RESet...............................................................................................328
ACQuire:AVERage:COMPlete?....................................................................................... 328
TIMebase:ROLL:AUTomatic............................................................................................ 328
TIMebase:ROLL:MTIMe..................................................................................................329
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 324

Waveform setup
ACQuire:INTerpolate...................................................................................................... 329
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?................................................................................................ 329
ACQuire:SRATe?........................................................................................................... 330
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic <AutoRecordLength>
Enables or disables the automatic record length. The instrument sets a value that fits
to the selected timebase.
If you set a specific value with ACQuire:POINts[:VALue], the automatic assign-
ment of a record length is turned off.
Parameters:
<AutoRecordLength> ON | OFF
Example: ACQ:POIN:AUT ON
TIM:SCAL 1e-9
ACQ:POIN?;:SYST:ERR:ALL?
-> received 10000;0,"No error"
TIM:SCAL 5e-3
Manual operation: See "Record Length" on page 67

See "Record Length" on page 109
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]
Defines a record length value, the number of recorded waveform points in a segment.
The command turns ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic OFF.
If ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic is turned ON, the query ACQuire:POINts? returns
the automatically set record length.
Each predefined record length corresponds to a maximum number of history seg-
ments, which are stored in the instrument's memory. If option R&S RTB-K15 is instal-
led, you can display the history segments.
Available record length values are:
● 10 kSa (13107 history segments)
● 1 MSa (319 history segments)
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 325

Waveform setup

Parameters:
<RecordLength> Record length in Samples.
If the entered value differs from the predefined values, the
instrument sets the closest value.
CHANnel<m>:TYPE <DecimationMode>
Selects the method to reduce the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform
points with lower sample rate.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated
channel number. The suffix can be omitted.
Parameters:
<DecimationMode> SAMPle | PDETect | HRESolution
SAMPle
Input data is acquired with a sample rate which is aligned to the
time base (horizontal scale) and the record length.
PDETect
Peak Detect: the minimum and the maximum of n samples in a
sample interval are recorded as waveform points.
HRESolution
High resolution: The average of n sample points is recorded as
waveform point.
*RST: SAMPle
Manual operation: See "Acquire Mode" on page 68
ACQuire:TYPE <AcquisitionType>
Sets the type of the aquisition mode.
Parameters:
<AcquisitionType> REFresh | AVERage | ENVelope
REFresh
The aquisitions are displayed as they are done.
AVERage
The aquisitions are averaged.
ENVelope
The envelope of a repetitive signal is shown, representing the
borders in which the signal occurs.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 326

Waveform setup
CHANnel<m>:ARIThmetics <TrArith>
Selects the method to build the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisi-
tions of the signal.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated
channel number. The suffix can be omitted.
Parameters:
<TrArith> OFF | ENVelope | AVERage
OFF
The data of the current acquisition is recorded according to the
decimation settings.
ENVelope
Detects the minimum and maximum values in an sample interval
over a number of acquisitions.
AVERage
Calculates the average from the data of the current acquisition
and a number of acquisitions before. The number of used
acquisitions is set with ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt.
*RST: OFF
ACQuire:PEAKdetect <PeakDetect>
Enables or disables the peak detect acquisition mode.
You can use this command alternatively to CHANnel<m>:TYPE.
Parameters:
<PeakDetect> AUTO | OFF
*RST: OFF
ACQuire:HRESolution <HighRes>
Enables or disables the high resolution acquisition mode.
You can use this command alternatively to CHANnel<m>:TYPE.
Parameters:
<HighRes> AUTO | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 327

Waveform setup
Parameters:
length.
*RST: 1
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt
Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform. The higher
the number, the better the noise is reduced.
Parameters:
<AverageCount> Range: 2 to 100,000
*RST: 2
Manual operation: See "No. of Averages" on page 69
ACQuire:AVERage:RESet
Deletes the waveform and restarts the average calculation.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "No. of Averages" on page 69
ACQuire:AVERage:COMPlete?
Returns the state of averaging.
Return values:
<AverageComplete> 0 | 1
0
The number of acquired waveforms is less than the number
required for average calculation. See ACQuire:AVERage:
COUNt on page 328.
1
The instrument acquired a sufficient number of waveforms to
determine the average.
Usage: Query only
TIMebase:ROLL:AUTomatic <AutomaticRoll>
Enables the automatic roll mode. The instrument switches to roll mode if the timebase
is equal or slower than the roll mode limit defined with TIMebase:ROLL:MTIMe.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 328

Waveform setup
Parameters:
<AutomaticRoll> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Roll" on page 69
TIMebase:ROLL:MTIMe <MinTimeBase>
The roll mode is enabled automatically if the time base exceeds the MinTimeBase,
and if TIMebase:ROLL:AUTomatic on page 328 is set ON.
Parameters:
<MinTimeBase> Limit value for roll mode enabling.
*RST: 500e-3
Default unit: s/div
Manual operation: See "Start Roll Time" on page 69
ACQuire:INTerpolate <InterpolationType>
Defines the interpolation mode.
See also: "Interpolation" on page 69
Parameters:
<InterpolationType> SINX | LINear | SMHD
LINear
Linear interpolation between two adjacent sample points.
SINX
Interpolation by means of a sin(x)/x curve.
SMHD
Sample & hold causes a histogram-like interpolation.
*RST: SINX
Manual operation: See "Interpolation" on page 69
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?
Retrieves the sample rate of the ADC, that is the number of points that are sampled by
the ADC in one second.
Return values:
<ACDsampleRate> ADC sample rate
Default unit: Hz
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 329

Trigger
ACQuire:SRATe? <SampleRate>
Returns the sample rate, that is the number of recorded waveform samples per sec-
ond.
Parameters:
<SampleRate> Default unit: Sa/s
Usage: Query only
15.4.7 Waveform data
Use the following commands are described in Chapter 15.9.1.2, "Analog channels",
on page 429:
● FORMat[:DATA] on page 427
● CHANnel<m>:DATA? on page 429
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:HEADer? on page 430
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts on page 430
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope? on page 432
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:HEADer? on page 432
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XINCrement? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XORigin? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YINCrement? on page 438
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YORigin? on page 437
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YRESolution? on page 438
15.5 Trigger
● General trigger settings.........................................................................................331
● Edge trigger...........................................................................................................333
● Width trigger..........................................................................................................335
● Video/TV trigger.................................................................................................... 337
● Pattern trigger....................................................................................................... 338
● Timeout trigger...................................................................................................... 341
● Serial bus.............................................................................................................. 342
● Actions on trigger.................................................................................................. 342
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 330

Trigger
15.5.1 General trigger settings
This section describes general trigger commands that are independent of the trigger
type.
TRIGger:A:MODE.......................................................................................................... 331
TRIGger:A:SOURce....................................................................................................... 331
TRIGger:A:TYPE........................................................................................................... 332
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:MODE.............................................................................................332
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME...............................................................................................332
TRIGger:A:MODE <TriggerMode>
Sets the trigger mode. The trigger mode determines the behavior of the instrument if
no trigger occurs.
Parameters:
<TriggerMode> AUTO | NORMal
AUTO
The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trig-
ger conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes
precedence.
NORMal
The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs.
*RST: AUTO
Manual operation: See "[Auto Norm]" on page 72
See "Trigger Mode" on page 74
TRIGger:A:SOURce <Source>
Sets the trigger source for the selected A trigger type.
Parameters:
<Source> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | EXTernanalog | LINE | SBUS1 |
SBUS2 | D0..D15
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
One of the analog input channels is the trigger source. Available
channels depend on the instrument type.
EXTernanalog
External trigger input on the front panel
LINE
AC power supply line for the line trigger
SBUS1 | SBUS2
Serial bus 1 or 2
Requires at least one protocol option for serial bus (R&S RTB-
K1 to K3)
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 331

Trigger
D0..D15
Digital channels D0 to D15, can be used as trigger sources for
edge, width, timeout and pattern trigger. Require MSO option
R&S RTB-B1.
Manual operation: See "[Source]" on page 72
See "Source" on page 75
TRIGger:A:TYPE <Type>
Sets the trigger typer.
Parameters:
<Type> EDGE | WIDTh | TV | BUS | LOGic | LINE
EDGE
Edge trigger
WIDTh
Width trigger
TV
Video trigger
BUS
Requires at least one protocol option for serial bus (R&S RTB-
K1 to K3)
LOGic
Pattern trigger, logic trigger
LINE
Trigger on power supply line
Manual operation: See "Trigger Type" on page 75
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:MODE <HoldOffMode>
Enables or disables the holdoff time.
Parameters:
<HoldOffMode> TIME | OFF
*RST: Off
Manual operation: See "Hold Off, Hold Off Time" on page 76
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME <HoldOffTime>
Defines the holdoff time. The next trigger occurs only after the holdoff time has passed.
Parameters:
<HoldOffTime> Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Hold Off, Hold Off Time" on page 76
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 332

Trigger
15.5.2 Edge trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOPe............................................................................................... 333
TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue]..........................................................................................333
TRIGger:A:FINDlevel......................................................................................................333
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling........................................................................................... 334
TRIGger:A:HYSTeresis................................................................................................... 334
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:HFReject.................................................................................. 334
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:NREJect................................................................................... 335
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the slope for the edge trigger.
Parameters:
<Slope> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
POSitive
Rising edge, a positive voltage change
NEGative
Falling edge, a negative voltage change
EITHer
The rising as well as the falling edge
*RST: POSitive
Manual operation: See "Slope" on page 77
TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue] <Level>
Sets the trigger threshold voltage for edge, width, and timeout trigger.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..5
Selects the trigger input. 1...4 select the corresponding analog
channel, 5 is the external trigger input. The number of channels
depends on the instrument.
Parameters:
<Level> Range: Depends on vertical scale.
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "[Levels]" on page 72
See "Trigger Level, Threshold" on page 77
TRIGger:A:FINDlevel
Sets the trigger level to 50% of the signal amplitude.
Usage: Event
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 333

Trigger
Manual operation: See "[Levels]" on page 72

See "Trigger Level, Threshold" on page 77
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling <Coupling>
Sets the coupling for the trigger source.
Parameters:
<Coupling> DC | AC | LFReject
DC
Direct current coupling. The trigger signal remains unchanged.
AC
Alternating current coupling. A highpass filter removes the DC
offset voltage from the trigger signal.
LFReject
Sets the trigger coupling to high frequency. A 15 kHz highpass
filter removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal. Use this
mode only with very high frequency signals.
*RST: DC
TRIGger:A:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level. Hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger
events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level. The automatic, small,
medium, large hysteresis values depend on the vertical scale.
Parameters:
<Hysteresis> AUTO | SMALl | MEDium | LARGE
*RST: AUTO
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:HFReject <State>
Enables or disables an additional 5 kHz lowpass filter in the trigger path. This filter
To folter out higher frequencies, you can use either this command or TRIGger:A:
EDGE:FILTer:NREJect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "HF Reject" on page 77
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 334

Trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:NREJect <State>
Turns an additional 100 MHz lowpass filter in the trigger path on or off. This filter
To folter out higher frequencies, you can use either this command or TRIGger:A:
EDGE:FILTer:HFReject.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Noise Reject" on page 77
15.5.3 Width trigger
To set the trigger level (threshold), use:

● TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue] on page 333
● TRIGger:A:FINDlevel on page 333
● CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis on page 320
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:POLarity............................................................................................ 335
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe..............................................................................................335
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh...............................................................................................336
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa............................................................................................... 336
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the pulse.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative
POSitive
Positive going pulse, the width is defined from the rising to the
falling slopes.
NEGative
Negative going pulse, the width is defined from the falling to the
rising slopes.
*RST: POSitive
Manual operation: See "Polarity" on page 79
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe <RangeMode>
Defines how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limits.
Parameters:
<RangeMode> WITHin | OUTSide | SHORter | LONGer
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 335

Trigger
WITHin | OUTSide
Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range defined by time ±
delta. The time is specified with TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh,
the range around is defined with TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa.
To trigger on an exact value ("Width =" or "Width ≠", set the
range to 0 ("Variation", TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa).
SHORter | LONGer
Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a time set with
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh.
*RST: LONGer
Manual operation: See "Comparison" on page 79
See "Time t1, Time t2" on page 80
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh <Time1>
For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide (defined using TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe), the
<Time1> defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits ±<Delta> (set with
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa).
For the ranges SHORter and LONGer, the width defines the maximum and minimum
pulse width, respectively.
Parameters:
<Time1> Center value, maximum value or minimum value depending on
the defined range type.
Range: 20E-9 to 6.87194685440
Increment: Depends on the <Time1> value
*RST: 20E-9
Manual operation: See "Time t" on page 80
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa <Delta>
Defines a variation range around the width value specified using TRIGger:A:WIDTh:
WIDTh.
Parameters:
<Delta> Variation ±Δt
Range: Minimum is 0. Maximum depends on the defined
pulse width (TRIG:A:WIDTH:WITDH).
Manual operation: See "Variation" on page 80
See "Time t1, Time t2" on page 80
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 336

Trigger
15.5.4 Video/TV trigger
TRIGger:A:TV:STANdard................................................................................................ 337
TRIGger:A:TV:POLarity.................................................................................................. 337
TRIGger:A:TV:FIELd...................................................................................................... 337
TRIGger:A:TV:LINE........................................................................................................338
TRIGger:A:TV:STANdard <Standard>
Selects the color television standard.
Parameters:
<Standard> PAL | NTSC | SECam | PALM | I576 | P720 | P1080 | I1080
PALM = PAL-M
I576 = SDTV 576i (PAL and SECAM)
P720 | P1080 = HDTV 720/1080p (progressive scanning)
I1080 = HDTV 1080i (interlaced scanning)
*RST: PAL
Manual operation: See "Standard" on page 81
TRIGger:A:TV:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects the polarity of the signal. Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity.
The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering,
See also: "Signal" on page 82
Parameters:
POSitive
If the video modulation is positive, the sync pulses are negative.
NEGative
If the modulation is negative, sync pulses are positive.
*RST: NEGative
Manual operation: See "Signal" on page 82
TRIGger:A:TV:FIELd <Field>
Sets the trigger on the beginning of the video signal fields, or on the beginning of video
signal lines.
Parameters:
<Field> EVEN | ODD | ALL | LINE | ALINe
EVEN | ODD
Triggers only on the field start of even or odd fields. Only availa-
ble for interlaced scanning.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 337

Trigger
ALL
All fields, triggers on the frame start (progressive scanning) or
any field start (interlaced scanning).
LINE
Triggers on the beginning of a specified line in any field. The line
number is set with TRIGger:A:TV:LINE.
ALINe
Triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines.
*RST: ALL
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 82
TRIGger:A:TV:LINE <Line>
Sets an exact line number if TRIGger:A:TV:FIELd is set to LINE.
Parameters:
<Line> Range: 1 to 525 (NTSC, PAL-M); 625 (PAL, SECAM,
SDTV I-576); 750 (HDTV P720); 1125 (HDTV
I1080, HDTV P1080)
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Line" on page 82
15.5.5 Pattern trigger
● Pattern definition................................................................................................... 338

● Time limitation....................................................................................................... 339
15.5.5.1 Pattern definition
TRIGger:A:PATTern:SOURce.......................................................................................... 338
TRIGger:A:PATTern:FUNCtion.........................................................................................339
TRIGger:A:PATTern:CONDition....................................................................................... 339
TRIGger:A:PATTern:SOURce <SourceString>
Sets the state for each channel.
Parameters:
<SourceString> String containing 0, 1, or X for each channel.
1: high, the signal voltage is higher than the trigger level.
0: low, the signal voltage is lower than the trigger level.
X: Don't care. the channel does not affect the trigger.
Without MSO option R&S RTB-B1, the pattern has 4 or 2 bits,
depending on the number of channels: <C1><C2>[<C3><C4>].
With MSO option, the pattern has 20 or 18 bits:
<C1><C2>[<C3><C4>]<D0><D1><D2>...<D15>.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 338

Trigger
Example: Without MSO option:

TRIG:A:PATT:SOUR "1X10"
C1 and C3 is set to high, C4 to low, and C2 does not matter
(don't care).
Example: With MSO option:
TRIG:A:PATT:SOUR "XXXX111101010011XXXX"
Analog channels C1 to C4 do not matter (don't care). Digital
channels D0 to D11 are set to high or low, D12 to D15 do not
matter.
Manual operation: See "H | L | X, Set All" on page 83
TRIGger:A:PATTern:FUNCtion <Function>
Sets the logical combination of the channel states .
Parameters:
<Function> AND | OR
AND
The required states of all channels must appear in the input sig-
nal at the same time.
OR
At least one of the channels must have the required state.
*RST: AND
Manual operation: See "And | Or" on page 84
TRIGger:A:PATTern:CONDition <ConditionString>
Defines whether the instrument triggers on fulfillment of the logical condition, or on vio-
lation.
Parameters:
<ConditionString> ""TRUE"" | ""FALSE""
String parameter
*RST: ""TRUE""
Manual operation: See "True | False" on page 84
15.5.5.2 Time limitation
TRIGger:A:PATTern:MODE............................................................................................. 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe.................................................................................340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh]................................................................................ 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa.................................................................................. 341
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 339

Trigger
TRIGger:A:PATTern:MODE <PatternMode>
Disables the time limitation or sets the time comparison mode.
Parameters:
<PatternMode> OFF | TIMeout | WIDTh
OFF
Disables the time limitation.
TIMeout
Defines how long at least the result of the state pattern condition
must be true or false.
WIDTh
Defines a time range for keeping up the true result of the pattern
condition. The range is defined using TRIGger:A:PATTern:
WIDTh:RANGe.
Manual operation: See "Time limitation" on page 84
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe <PatternRange>
Selects how the time limit for the pattern condition is defined.
The time is specified using TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh], the range
around is specified using TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa.
Parameters:
<PatternRange> WITHin | OUTSide | SHORter | LONGer
WITHin
Triggers if the pattern condition remains unchanged longer than
Time - Delta and shorter than Time + Delta.
OUTSide
Triggers if the pattern condition remains unchanged either
shorter than Time - Delta or longer than Time + Delta.
SHORter | LONGer
Triggers if the pattern condition changes before or after the
specified time.
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] <PatternWidth>
For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide, the <PatternWidth> defines the center of a
range which is defined by the limits ±<Delta>.
For the ranges SHORter and LONGer, the pattern width defines the maximum and
minimum values, respectively.
Parameters:
<PatternWidth> Default unit: s
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 340

Trigger
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa <PatternDelta>
Defines a range around the pattern width value specified using TRIGger:A:
PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh].
Parameters:
<PatternDelta> Default unit: s
15.5.6 Timeout trigger
To set the trigger level (threshold), use:

● TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue] on page 333
● TRIGger:A:FINDlevel on page 333
● CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis on page 320
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:RANGe............................................................................................ 341
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:TIME............................................................................................... 341
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:RANGe <Range>
Sets the relation of the signal level to the threshold.
Parameters:
<Range> HIGH | LOW
HIGH
The signal level stays above the trigger level.
LOW
The signal level stays below the trigger level.
*RST: HIGH
Manual operation: See "Range" on page 85
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:TIME <Time>
Sets the time limit for the timeout at which the instrument triggers.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: 6.4e-9 to 13.7439
*RST: 10e-6
Manual operation: See "Time" on page 86
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 341

Trigger
15.5.7 Serial bus
Triggering on the decoded data of a protocol bus is available if at least one serial proto-
col option is installed. The serial bus must be configured correctly. For detailed infor-
mation on serial protocols and their trigger conditions, see the chapter of the relevant
protocol.
15.5.8 Actions on trigger
To generate a pulse on the Aux Out connector on trigger event, use TRIG
ger:OUT:MODE TRIGger. You can also define the pulse length and polarity with
TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth and TRIGger:OUT:POLarity.
TRIGger:EVENt[:ENABle]............................................................................................... 342
TRIGger:EVENt:SOUNd................................................................................................. 342
TRIGger:EVENt:REFSave.............................................................................................. 343
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave.............................................................................................. 343
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave:DESTination........................................................................... 343
TRIGger:EVENt:TRIGgerout........................................................................................... 344
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave............................................................................................. 344
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave:DESTination.......................................................................... 344
TRIGger:EVENt[:ENABle] <EventsEnabled>
Activates the selected actions on trigger event.
To activate the actions, use:
● TRIGger:EVENt:SOUNd on page 342
● TRIGger:EVENt:TRIGgerout on page 344
● TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave on page 344
● TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave on page 343
● TRIGger:EVENt:REFSave on page 343
Parameters:
<EventsEnabled> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Actions on Trigger" on page 87
TRIGger:EVENt:SOUNd <SoundEnable>
If ON, the instrument generates a beep on trigger event. The acquisition is not delayed,
the sound generation runs asynchronously. The minimum time between two beeps is
1 s. If the instrument triggers faster, not all events are notified by a beep.
Parameters:
<SoundEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 342

Trigger
Manual operation: See "Sound" on page 87
TRIGger:EVENt:REFSave <SaveReference>
If ON, the instrument saves reference waveforms of all active channels, and activates
the references. This action works only with single acquisition.
The channels are assigned to the references: C1 to R1, C2 to R2 and so on. If a chan-
nel is off, the assigned reference is also not active.
If the history option is installed, and "Nx Single" > 1, the waveforms of the last acquisi-
tion are saved as reference waveforms.
Parameters:
<SaveReference> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "References" on page 88
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave <SaveScreenshot>
If ON, the instrument saves a screenshot on each trigger event. The screenshot is
saved when the acquisition is complete. During saving, the acquisition stops, and
restarts when saving is finished. Thus, the waveform update rate decreases signifi-
cantly.
To set up the target directory, file name, color and file format, use the following com-
mands:
● TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave:DESTination
● HCOPy:COLor:SCHeme
● HCOPy:FORMat
Parameters:
<SaveScreenshot> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Screenshot" on page 87
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave:DESTination <File>
Defines the target directory and file name for a screenshot that is saved on trigger
event when TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave is ON.
Parameters:
<File> String parameter
String with path and file name
Manual operation: See "Screenshot" on page 87
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 343

Trigger
TRIGger:EVENt:TRIGgerout <PulseOut>
If ON, the instrument generates a pulse on the Aux Out connector on trigger event.
The acquisition is not delayed, the pulse generation runs asynchronously.
Enabling "Pulse" sets the "Setup" > "Aux Out" selection to "Trigger Out", and vice
versa. Selecting another item in the "Aux Out" menu disables the pulse action.
To set the pulse width and polarity of the trigger out pulse, use:
● TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth on page 461
● TRIGger:OUT:POLarity on page 462
Parameters:
<PulseOut> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave <SaveWaveform>
If ON, the instrument saves the data of a selected waveform on each trigger event. The
waveform is saved when the acquisition is complete. During saving, the acquisition
stops, and restarts when saving is finished. Thus, the waveform update rate decreases
significantly.
To select the waveform, use EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce.
Set up the target directory, file name and file format, use TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave:
DESTination and FORMat[:DATA].
Parameters:
<SaveWaveform> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Save Wavef." on page 88
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave:DESTination <File>
Defines the target directory and file name for a waveform that is saved on trigger event
when TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave is ON.
Parameters:
String with path and file name
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 344

Waveform analysis
15.6 Waveform analysis

● Zoom.....................................................................................................................345
● Mathematics..........................................................................................................346
● Reference waveforms........................................................................................... 350
● Search...................................................................................................................355
● History (option R&S RTB-K15)..............................................................................370
15.6.1 Zoom
TIMebase:ZOOM:STATe................................................................................................. 345
TIMebase:ZOOM:SCALe................................................................................................ 345
TIMebase:ZOOM:TIME...................................................................................................345
TIMebase:ZOOM:POSition..............................................................................................346
DISPlay:CBAR:ZOOM[:POSition].....................................................................................346
TIMebase:ZOOM:STATe <ZoomState>
Switches the zoom on or off.
Parameters:
<ZoomState> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "[Zoom]" on page 53
TIMebase:ZOOM:SCALe <ZoomScale>
Defines the horizontal scale for the zoom window in seconds per division, the timebase
of the zoom window. The scaling determines the width of the zoom area (12 divisions *
scaling per division).
Parameters:
<ZoomScale> Range: Depends on various settings
*RST: 50e-6
Default unit: s/div
See "Zoom Scale" on page 92
TIMebase:ZOOM:TIME <Time>
Defines the distance of the trigger point to the reference point in the zoom window. The
value determines the position of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window.
Parameters:
<Time> *RST: 0
Default unit: s
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 345

Waveform analysis

See "Zoom Position" on page 93
TIMebase:ZOOM:POSition <Position>
Defines the position of the zoom window in the upper window.
Parameters:
<Position> Range: Depends on the zoom time base, from nearly 0 to
100 % for large zoom.
*RST: 50
Default unit: %
DISPlay:CBAR:ZOOM[:POSition] <DividerPosition>
Defines the position of the divide bar between normal waveform and zoom window.
Parameters:
<DividerPosition> Vertical position in pixel, measured from the top edge. The verti-
cal display size is 800 px.
Default unit: px
15.6.2 Mathematics
To get the data of a math waveform, use the following commands:

● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA? on page 433
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:HEADer? on page 433
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:POINts? on page 433
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe.......................................................................................... 347
CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine]..................................................................347
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel...........................................................................................348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel:STATe.................................................................................348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:POSition.......................................................................................348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:SCALe......................................................................................... 349
CALCulate:MATH<m>:WCOLor.......................................................................................349
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:EDGE...............................................................................349
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold:HYSTeresis...................................................... 350
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold[:UPPer]............................................................350
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 346

Waveform analysis
CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe <State>
Activates the mathematics function and displays the defined math waveforms.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Selects the math waveform.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <RemComplExpr>
Defines the equation to be calculated for the selected math waveform as a regular
expression.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<RemComplExpr> String parameter, consisting of the mathematical operation and
the source(s), written in parenthesis. Optionally, the unit can be
included in the string. If no unit is given, the last setting is used.
Example: CALC:MATH<2>:EXPR:DEF "ADD(CH1,CH2)"
Same command with unit:
CALC:MATH<2>:EXPR:DEF "ADD(CH1,CH2)ín V"
Delete the unit:
CALC:MATH<2>:EXPR:DEF "ADD(CH1,CH2)ín"
Operation Expression string Comment
Addition "ADD(CH1,CH2) in V" "CH1+CH2" is also possible
Subtraction "SUB(CH1,CH2) in V" "CH1-CH2" is also possible
Multiplication "MUL(CH1,CH2)" "CH1*CH2" is also possible
Division "DIV(CH1,CH2)" "CH1/CH2" is also possible
Square "SQR(CH1)"
Square Root "SQRT(CH1)"
Absolute value "ABS(CH1)"
Reciprocal "REC(CH1)"
Inverse "INV(CH1)"
Common logarithm (basis 10) "LOG(CH1)"
Natural logarithm (basis e) "LN(CH1)"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 347

Waveform analysis
Operation Expression string Comment
Derivative DERI(CH1,1.000E+03) in V CH1 – Source waveform

1.000E+03 – constant value, number of
samples averaged for calculation. See
Chapter 6.2.4.1, "Derivative",
on page 97.
Integral "INT(CH1)"
Low pass filter "LP(CH1,1E6) in V" CH1 – Source waveform

1E6 – constant value, limit frequency of
High pass filter "HP(CH1,1E6) in V"
the low or high pass
FFT "FFTMAG(CH1)" FFT function of the source waveform
Track period (unipolar) "TPER(CH1)" Set the threshold, hysteresis and edge
with:
Track frequency (unipolar) "TFREQ(CH1)"
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:
Track pulse width (unipolar) "TPW(CH1)" THReshold[:UPPer]
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:
Track duty cycle (unipolar) "TDCY(CH1)"
THReshold:HYSTeresis
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:EDGE
See also:Chapter 6.2.6, "Tracks",
on page 98
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel <Label>
Defines a label for the specified math waveform (equation), which is shown at the
waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<Label> String Data
String with label text
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel:STATe <LabelVisible>
Activates the diplay of the label that is defined with CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<LabelVisible> ON | OFF
CALCulate:MATH<m>:POSition <Position>
Sets the vertical position of the math waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 348

Waveform analysis
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<Position> Position value, given in divisions.
CALCulate:MATH<m>:SCALe <Scale>
Sets the vertical scale of the math waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<Scale> Scale value, given in Volts per division
Range: -1.0E-24 to 5.0E+25
Increment: Depends on vertical scale, in 1 - 2 - 5 steps (1 mV,
2 mV, 5 mV, 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV ...)
*RST: 1
CALCulate:MATH<m>:WCOLor <WaveformColor>
Sets the color of the indicated math waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<WaveformColor> YELLow | GREen | ORANge | BLUE | LBLUE | WHITE | CYAN |
PINK | RED | TEMPerature | RAINbow | FIRE | DEFault
*RST: DEF
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:EDGE <Polarity>
Sets the rising or falling edge as a reference for each measurement. The setting helps
to determine values in terms of the power stage switching state.
For unipolar souces, the on edge is the rising edge, and the off edge is the falling
edge.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<Polarity> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Edge" on page 101
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 349

Waveform analysis
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
Sets the hysteresis for correct edge detection.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<Hysteresis> Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Hyst" on page 100
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold[:UPPer] <ThresholdLevel>
Sets the threshold for unipolar track sources. The signal is measured at the crossing
points of the signal with the threshold.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Parameters:
<ThresholdLevel> Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "UL" on page 100
15.6.3 Reference waveforms
In all REFCurve:... commands, the suffix <m> selects the reference waveform.
To get the waveform data, use the following commands:
● REFCurve<m>:DATA? on page 434
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:HEADer? on page 434
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
REFCurve<m>:SOURce................................................................................................. 351
REFCurve<m>:SOURce:CATalog?.................................................................................. 351
REFCurve<m>:STATe.....................................................................................................351
REFCurve<m>:UPDate.................................................................................................. 352
REFCurve<m>:SAVE..................................................................................................... 352
REFCurve<m>:LOAD..................................................................................................... 352
REFCurve<m>:LOAD:STATe...........................................................................................353
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:POSition................................................................................353
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:SCALe.................................................................................. 353
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:POSition...................................................................................353
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 350

Waveform analysis
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:SCALe..................................................................................... 354
REFCurve<m>:WCOLor................................................................................................. 354
REFCurve<m>:LABel..................................................................................................... 354
REFCurve<m>:SOURce <Source>
Defines the source of the reference waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Selects the reference waveform
Parameters:
<Source> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MA1 | MA2 | MA3 | MA4 | MA5 | RE1 |
RE2 | RE3 | RE4 | D70 | D158 | SPEC | MINH | MAXH | AVER
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MA1 | MA2 | MA3 | MA4 | MA5 | RE1 |
RE2 | RE3 | RE4
Any active channel, math, or reference waveform. CH3 and CH4
are only available with 4-channel R&S RTB2000 oscilloscopes.
D70 | D158
Logic probes, sources require MSO option R&S RTB-B1.
SPEC | MINH | MAXH | AVER
FFT waveforms: spectrum, min hold, max hold, average.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 105
REFCurve<m>:SOURce:CATalog?
Returns the source waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Selects the reference waveform.
Parameters:
<Source Catalogue> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | QMA | RE1 | RE2 | RE3 | RE4 | D70 |
D158 | SPEC | MINH | MAXH | AVER
See REFCurve<m>:SOURce on page 351.
Usage: Query only
REFCurve<m>:STATe
Displays or hides the selected reference waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 351

Waveform analysis
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "State" on page 105
REFCurve<m>:UPDate
Updates the selected reference by the waveform defined with REFCurve<m>:SOURce.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Copy" on page 105
REFCurve<m>:SAVE <Filename>
Stores the reference waveform in the specified file.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Setting parameters:
<Filename> String with path and file name
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Save Reference" on page 106
REFCurve<m>:LOAD <Filename>
Loads the waveform data from the indicated reference file to the reference waveform.
To load the correspondent instrument settings, use REFCurve<m>:LOAD:STATe
on page 353.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Setting parameters:
<Filename> String with path and file name
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Load Reference" on page 105
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 352

Waveform analysis
REFCurve<m>:LOAD:STATe
Loads the instrument settings in addition to the reference waveform data. The wave-
form data must be loaded before the settings, see REFCurve<m>:LOAD on page 352.
The settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage and never
written to a USB flash device.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Load Setup" on page 105
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:POSition <Position>
Changes the horizontal position of the reference waveform independently of the chan-
nel waveform settings.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<Position> Default unit: s
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:SCALe <Scale>
Changes the horizontal scale (timebase) of the reference waveform independently of
the channel waveform settings.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<Scale> Default unit: s/div
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:POSition <Position>
Changes the vertical position of the reference waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<Position> Default unit: div
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 353

Waveform analysis
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:SCALe <Scale>
Changes the vertical scale of the reference waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<Scale> Default unit: V/div
REFCurve<m>:WCOLor <WaveformColor>
Selects a color for the reference waveform. The default color is white. You can select
another monochrome color, or a color scale.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<WaveformColor> YELLow | GREen | ORANge | BLUE | LBLUE | WHITE | CYAN |
PINK | RED | TEMPerature | RAINbow | FIRE | DEFault
*RST: DEF
Manual operation: See "Waveform Color" on page 106
REFCurve<m>:LABel <WaveformLabel>
Defines a label for the indicated reference waveform.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<WaveformLabel> String parameter
String parameter
Example: REFCurve2:LABel "Origin"
Sets the label "Origin" for reference R2.
Manual operation: See "Edit Label" on page 106
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 354

Waveform analysis
15.6.4 Search
● General search settings........................................................................................ 355

● Edge search configuration.................................................................................... 357
● Width search configuration....................................................................................357
● Peak search configuration.....................................................................................359
● Rise/fall time search configuration........................................................................ 360
● Runt search configuration..................................................................................... 362
● Data2Clock search configuration.......................................................................... 363
● Pattern search configuration................................................................................. 365
● Search results....................................................................................................... 368
15.6.4.1 General search settings
SEARch:STATe..............................................................................................................355
SEARch:CONDition........................................................................................................355
SEARch:SOURce.......................................................................................................... 356
SEARch:STATe <SearchState>
Enables and disables the search mode.
Parameters:
<SearchState> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: Chapter 15.2.3.1, "Searching for a pulse of specified width",
on page 308
Manual operation: See "Search" on page 118
SEARch:CONDition <SearchCondition>
Parameters:
<SearchCondition> EDGE | WIDTh | PEAK | RUNT | RTIMe | DATatoclock |
PATTern | PROTocol
EDGE
An edge search result is found when the waveform passes the
given level in the specified direction.
WIDTH
A width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width, or pulses
shorter or longer than a given time, or pulses inside or outside
the allowable time range.
PEAK
The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given amplitude.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 355

Waveform analysis
RUNT
The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude.
The amplitude crosses the first threshold twice without crossing
the second one. In addition to the threshold amplitudes, you can
define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width
search: runts with exact width, shorter or longer than a given
time, or runts inside or outside the allowable time range.
RTIMe
The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall
time, or rise/fall times shorter or longer than a given limit, or rise/
fall times inside or outside the allowable time range.
DATatoclock
The Data2Clock search - also known as setup/hold - finds viola-
tion of setup and hold times. It analyzes the relative timing
between two signals: a data signal and the synchronous clock
signal. Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady
before clock edge. Hold time is the time that the data signal is
steady after clock edge.
PATTern
The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states
inside or outside a specified time range. For each channel, its
state and threshold level is defined. The states are combined
logically, and the time of true pattern results is compared with a
specified time range.
PROTocol
The protocol search finds various events in decoded data of sig-
nals, for example, a specified frame type, identifier, data, and
errors. Available search settings depend on the configured bus
type.
Protocol search is not available for bus types PARallel, I2C, SPI
(no CS), SPI (with CS), and UART.
*RST: EDGE
Manual operation: See "Search Type" on page 118
SEARch:SOURce <SearchSource>
Selects the waveform to be analyzed.
Parameters:
<SearchSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | QMA | RE1 | RE2 | RE3 | RE4
Any active channel, math, or reference waveform can be
searched.
For protocol search on CAN and LIN signals, an active serial
bus is the search source.
*RST: CH1
on page 308
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 356

Waveform analysis

See "Data" on page 126
15.6.4.2 Edge search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe..................................................................................... 357
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel....................................................................................... 357
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel:DELTa.............................................................................357
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the slope to be searched for.
Parameters:
<Slope> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST: POS
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel <Level>
Sets the voltage level for the edge search.
Parameters:
<Level> *RST: 0.5 V
Manual operation: See "Level" on page 120
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel:DELTa <DeltaLevel>
Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search
results caused by noise oscillation around the level.
Parameters:
<DeltaLevel> Range: Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set-
tings, no upper limit
*RST: 0.2 V
15.6.4.3 Width search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity.................................................................................. 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel...................................................................................... 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel:DELTa............................................................................ 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe....................................................................................358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh.....................................................................................359
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa..................................................................................... 359
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 357

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity <Polarity>
Parameters:
*RST: POS
on page 308
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel <Level>
Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured.
Parameters:
<Level> *RST: 500 mV
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel:DELTa <DeltaLevel>
Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search
Parameters:
<DeltaLevel> Range: Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set-
*RST: 200 mV
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe <Range>
Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit(s).
To set the width, use SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh.
To set the range ± Δt, use SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa.
Parameters:
<Range> WITHin | OUTSide | SHORter | LONGer
WITHin
Finds pulses inside the range width ± Δt.
OUTSide
Finds pulses outside the range width ± Δt.
SHORter
Finds pulses shorter than the given width.
LONGer
Finds pulses longer than the given width.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 358

Waveform analysis
*RST: WITH
on page 308
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the reference pulse width, the nominal value for comparisons.
Parameters:
<Width> Default unit: s
on page 308
Manual operation: See "Width" on page 121
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa <DeltaWidth>
Sets a range Δt to the reference pulse width set with SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:
WIDTh, if SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide.
Parameters:
<DeltaWidth> Range: Lower limit depends on the resolution, practically no
upper limit
on page 308
15.6.4.4 Peak search configuration
SEARch:MEASure:PEAK:POLarity.................................................................................. 359
SEARch:MEASure:LEVel:PEAK:MAGNitude.....................................................................359
SEARch:MEASure:PEAK:POLarity <Polarity>
Indicates the polarity of a the pulse to be searched for a peak.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST: POS
SEARch:MEASure:LEVel:PEAK:MAGNitude <Magnitude>
Sets the peak-to-peak limit. If the signal exceeds this limit, a search event is listed.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 359

Waveform analysis
Parameters:
<Magnitude> Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Magnitude" on page 122
15.6.4.5 Rise/fall time search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:SLOPe................................................................................. 360
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:LOWer........................................................................ 360
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:UPPer.........................................................................360
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:RANGe................................................................................ 361
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:TIME....................................................................................361
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:DELTa.................................................................................. 361
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:SLOPe <Polarity>
Sets the slope to be found.
Parameters:
POSitive: to search for rise time.
NEGative: to search for fall time.
EITHer: to search for rise and fall time.
*RST: POS
Manual operation: See "Edge" on page 123
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:LOWer <LowerLevel>
Sets the lower voltage threshold. When the signal crosses this level, the rise time mea-
surement starts or stops depending on the selected slope.
Parameters:
<LowerLevel> *RST: 400 mV
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Upper Level, Lower Level" on page 123
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:UPPer <UpperLevel>
Sets the upper voltage threshold. When the signal crosses this level, the rise/fall time
measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope.
Parameters:
<UpperLevel> *RST: 600 mV
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Upper Level, Lower Level" on page 123
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 360

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:RANGe <Range>
Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limit(s).
To set the rise/fall time, use SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:TIME.
To set the range ± Δt, use SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:DELTa.
Parameters:
<Range> LONGer | SHORter | WITHin | OUTSide
LONGer
Finds rise/fall times longer than the given time.
SHORter
Finds rise/fall times shorter than the given time.
WITHin
Finds rise/fall times inside the range time ± Δt.
OUTSide
Finds rise/fall times outside the range time ± Δt.
*RST: LONG
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:TIME <Time>
Sets the reference rise or fall time, the nominal value for comparisons.
Parameters:
<Time> Range: Depends on various settings, mainly time base and
sample rate
*RST: 200e-6
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Rise/Fall Time" on page 124
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:DELTa <DeltaTime>
Sets a range Δt to the reference rise/fall time set with SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:
TIME, if SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:RANGe is set to Within or Outside. The
instrument finds rise/fall times inside or outside the range time ± Δt.
Parameters:
<DeltaTime> Range: Depends on various settings, mainly time base and
sample rate
*RST: 50e-6
Default unit: s
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 361

Waveform analysis
15.6.4.6 Runt search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity....................................................................................362
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:LOWer.............................................................................362
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:UPPer............................................................................. 362
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe..................................................................................... 362
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh...................................................................................... 363
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa.......................................................................................363
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity <Polarity>
Indicates the polarity of a the runt to be searched for.
Parameters:
*RST: POS
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:LOWer <LowerLevel>
Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection. A positive runt crosses the lower
level twice without crossing the upper level.
Parameters:
<LowerLevel> Range: Depends on vertical scale and LSB value.
*RST: 400 mV
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Lower Level" on page 125
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:UPPer <UpperLevel>
Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection. A negative runt crosses the upper
level twice without crossing the lower level.
Parameters:
<UpperLevel> Range: Depends on vertical scale and LSB value.
*RST: 600 mV
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Upper Level" on page 125
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe <Range>
Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit(s).
To set the width, use SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh.
To set the range ± Δt, use SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa.
Parameters:
<Range> LONGer | SHORter | WITHin | OUTSide
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 362

Waveform analysis
LONGer
Finds pulses longer than the given width.
SHORter
Finds pulses shorter than the given width.
WITHin
Finds pulses inside the range width ± Δt.
OUTSide
Finds pulses outside the range width ± Δt.
*RST: LONG
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the reference runt pulse width, the nominal value for comparisons.
Parameters:
<Width> Range: Depends on various settings, mainly time base and
sample rate.
*RST: 200e-6
Default unit: s
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa <DeltaWidth>
Sets a range Δt to the reference pulse width set with SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh
, if SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide.
Parameters:
<DeltaWidth> Range: Depends on various settings, mainly time base and
sample rate.
*RST: 50e-6
Default unit: s
15.6.4.7 Data2Clock search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce..........................................................................364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel............................................................................ 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel............................................................................ 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel:DELTa.................................................................. 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel:DELTa.................................................................. 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe............................................................................ 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe............................................................................. 365
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe..............................................................................365
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 363

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce <ClockSource>
Selects the input channel of the clock signal.
Parameters:
<ClockSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "Clock" on page 126
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel <ClockLevel>
Sets the voltage level for the clock signal. The crossing of clock level and clock edge
defines the start point for setup and hold time.
Parameters:
<ClockLevel> Range: Depends on vertical scale
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel <DataLevel>
Sets the voltage level for the data signal. The data lavel defines the threshold for data
transition.
Parameters:
<DataLevel> Range: Depends on vertical scale
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel:DELTa <LevelDelta>
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel:DELTa <LevelDelta>
Set a hysteresis range to the clock and data levels in order to avoid unwanted search
Parameters:
<LevelDelta> Range: Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set-
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe <ClockEdge>
Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the start point for the setup and hold time.
Parameters:
<ClockEdge> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
*RST: POS
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 364

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe <HoldTime>
Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady
above or below the data level. The hold time can be negative. In this case, the hold
time ends before the clock edge, and the setup time must be positive and longer than
the absolute value of the hold time.
Parameters:
<HoldTime> Range: Depends on time base and sample interval
Manual operation: See "Hold Time" on page 127
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe <SetupTime>
Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady
above or below the data level. The setup time can be negative. In this case, the setup
interval starts after the clock edge, and the hold time must be positive and longer than
the absolute value of the setup time.
Parameters:
<SetupTime> Range: Depends on time base and sample interval
Manual operation: See "Setup Time" on page 127
15.6.4.8 Pattern search configuration
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce................................................................................ 365
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:FUNCtion...............................................................................366
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>...............................................................................366
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>:DELTa.................................................................... 367
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe.......................................................................367
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh]...................................................................... 367
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa........................................................................ 368
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce <Pattern>
Specifies the search pattern - the state for each channel. The state can be set only for
active channels.
Parameters:
<Pattern> String parameter
String containing 0, 1, X|x for each channel. The order of chan-
nels is fixed: CH1 CH2 [CH3 CH4] D0 D1 D2 D3 ...
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 365

Waveform analysis
Example: CHAN1:STAT ON
CHAN2:STAT ON
CHAN3:STAT ON
CHAN4:STAT ON
SEAR:STAT ON
SEAR:COND PATT
SEAR:TRIG:PATT:SOUR '1X10'
CH1, CH3 are high, CH4 is low. These states are logically com-
bined with SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:FUNCtion. CH2 does
not matter (don't care) and can be off.
Manual operation: See "H | L | X, Set All" on page 128
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:FUNCtion <Function>
Parameters:
<Function> AND | OR | NAND | NOR
AND
The required states of all channels must appear in the input sig-
nal at the same time.
OR
At least one of the channels must have the required state.
NAND
"Not and" operator, at least one of the channels does not have
the required state.
NOR
"Not or" operator, none of the channels has the required state.
*RST: AND
Manual operation: See "AND, OR, NAND, NOR" on page 128
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n> <ThresholdLevel>
Sets the threshold value for the specified source channel. You can set different levels
for the channels
Suffix: .
<n> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<ThresholdLevel> Range: Depends on vertical scale
Manual operation: See "Threshold, Hysteresis" on page 128
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 366

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>:DELTa <LevelDelta>
Sets a hysteresis range to the threshold of the specified source channel to avoid
unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<LevelDelta> Range: Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set-
Manual operation: See "Threshold, Hysteresis" on page 128
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe <Range>
Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given ref-
erence time.
To set the reference value width, use SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh].
To set a range Δt, use SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa
Parameters:
<Range> WITHin | OUTSide | LONGer | SHORter
WITHin
Finds patterns steady for a time range width ± Δt.
OUTSide
Finds patterns outside a time range width ± Δt.
LONGer
Finds patterns steady for at least the given width.
SHORter
Finds patterns shorter than the given width.
*RST: LONG
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] <Width>
Sets the reference time of a steady pattern, the nominal value for comparisons.
Parameters:
<Width> Default unit: s
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 367

Waveform analysis
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa <DeltaTime>
Sets a range Δt to the reference pattern duration set with SEARch:TRIGger:
PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh], if SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe is set to
WITHin or OUTSide.
Parameters:
<DeltaTime> Default unit: s
15.6.4.9 Search results
SEARch:RESult:BCOunt?...............................................................................................368
SEARch:RESDiagram:SHOW......................................................................................... 368
SEARch:RESult:ALL?.....................................................................................................368
SEARch:RESult<n>?......................................................................................................369
SEARch:RCOunt?..........................................................................................................369
EXPort:SEARch:NAME...................................................................................................370
EXPort:SEARch:SAVE....................................................................................................370
SEARch:RESult:BCOunt?
Returns the maximum number of search results, which the instrument can store.
Return values:
<BufferedCount> Maximum number of search results
Usage: Query only
SEARch:RESDiagram:SHOW <ResultShow>
Shows or hides the table of search results.
Parameters:
<ResultShow> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
on page 308
SEARch:RESult:ALL?
Returns all result values of the search.
Return values:
<AllResults> List of results items seperated by comma
For each result, six values are returned:
1. Result number as indicated in the search results table
2. X-position (time) of the search result
3. Y-position of the search result, currently not relevant
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 368

Waveform analysis
4. Type of the search result (Edge, Peak, ...)

5. Slope or polarity of the search result
6. For peak searches, the value contains the peak voltage. For
width searches, it contains the pulse width. For edge searches,
the value is not relevant.
Example: SEARch:RESult:ALL?
Returns all four results of a peak search:
1,-4.7750e-04,0,PEAK,NEGATIVE,-1.530e-02,2,
-4.4630e-04,0,PEAK,NEGATIVE,-1.530e-02,3,
-4.1660e-04,0,PEAK,NEGATIVE,-1.530e-02,4,
-3.8690e-04,0,PEAK,NEGATIVE,-1.530e-02
on page 308
Usage: Query only
SEARch:RESult<n>?
Returns the result values of the specified search result.
See also: SEARch:RESult:ALL?
Suffix: .
<n> *
Number of the search result
Return values:
<Result> Comma-separated value list
Meaning of the values:
Result number, time value, y-position (not relevant), search type,
slope or polarity, optional value: voltage for peak search, pulse
width for width search.
Example: SEARch:RESult3?
Returns the result values of the third search result.
3,-4.1660e-04,0,PEAK,NEGATIVE,-1.530e-02
Usage: Query only
SEARch:RCOunt?
Returns the number of search results.
Return values:
<ResultCount> *RST: 0
on page 308
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 369

Waveform analysis
EXPort:SEARch:NAME <FileName>
Defines the path and filename for search results that will be saved with EXPort:
SEARch:SAVE. The file format is CSV, the filename is incremented automatically.
You can change the file name manually in the [Search] > "Save" dialog. Remote con-
trol uses the recent settings.
Parameters:
<FileName> String parameter
Example: EXPort:SEARch:NAME "/USB_FRONT/SEARCH/RESULT"
On first save, the search results are saved to RESULT.CSV, on
second save to RESULT01.CSV, the third to RESULT02.CSV ...
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 119
EXPort:SEARch:SAVE
Saves the search results to the path and file defined by EXPort:SEARch:NAME.
Usage: Setting only
15.6.5 History (option R&S RTB-K15)
● History settings......................................................................................................370
● Displaying history segments................................................................................. 373
● Timestamps...........................................................................................................376
● Export of history data............................................................................................ 380
15.6.5.1 History settings
ACQuire:MEMory[:MODE] <MemoryMode>
Defines how the record length is set.
Parameters:
<MemoryMode> AUTomatic | DMEMory | MANual
AUTomatic
Automatically by the instrument
DMEMory
Predefined values are set with ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]
MANual
User-defined value is set with ACQuire:POINts[:VALue].
The number of available history segments is adjusted automati-
cally.
*RST: AUT
Manual operation: See "Auto" on page 109
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 370

Waveform analysis
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic <AutoRecordLength>
Enables or disables the automatic record length. The instrument sets a value that fits
to the selected timebase.
If you set a specific value with ACQuire:POINts[:VALue], the automatic assign-
ment of a record length is turned off.
Parameters:
<AutoRecordLength> ON | OFF
Example: ACQ:POIN:AUT ON
TIM:SCAL 1e-9
TIM:SCAL 5e-3

ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]
Defines a record length value, the number of recorded waveform points in a segment.
The command turns ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic OFF.
If ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic is turned ON, the query ACQuire:POINts? returns
the automatically set record length.
Each predefined record length corresponds to a maximum number of history seg-
ments, which are stored in the instrument's memory. If option R&S RTB-K15 is instal-
led, you can display the history segments.
Available record length values are:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 371

Waveform analysis
Parameters:
<RecordLength> Record length in Samples.
If the entered value differs from the predefined values, the
instrument sets the closest value.
Parameters:
length.
*RST: 1
ACQuire:AVAilable?
Returns the number of segments that are currently saved in the memory. This number
is available for history viewing.
Parameters:
<Acquisitions> Number of captured segments
Usage: Query only
ACQuire:SEGMented:STATe <State>
If ON, the acquisitions are performed as fast as possible, without processing and dis-
playing the waveforms. When acquisition has been stopped, the data is processed and
the latest waveform is displayed. Older waveforms are stored in segments. You can
display and analyze the segments using the history..
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Fast Segmentation" on page 110
ACQuire:AVERage:CURRent?
Returns the current amount of acquired waveforms that contribute to the average. The
value is independent of the number of available segments, there are more waveforms
in the average available than segments in history.
Parameters:
<CurrentAverages> Range: Minimum is 2; maximum depends on the instrument
settings.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 372

Waveform analysis
Usage: Query only
15.6.5.2 Displaying history segments
The commands in this chapter use numeric suffixes:

● CHANnel<m>: Selects the analog input channel, range 1 | 2 or 1...4 depending on
the number of channels
● MATH<m>: Selects the math waveform, range 1..5
● DIGital<m>: Selects the logic channel, range 0..15
● LOGic: Selects the logic pod, range 1..2
● BUS: Selects the bus, range 1..4
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle]............................................................. 374
BUS:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle].................................................................................374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle].............................................................................374
LOGic:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle].............................................................................. 374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:[ENABle]........................................................................ 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CURRent......................................................................... 374
BUS:HISTory:CURRent.............................................................................................374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CURRent.........................................................................................374
LOGic:HISTory:CURRent.......................................................................................... 374
SPECtrum:HISTory:CURRent..........................................................................................374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent..................................................................................... 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PALL............................................................................... 374
BUS:HISTory:PALL................................................................................................... 374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PALL...............................................................................................374
LOGic:HISTory:PALL................................................................................................ 374
SPECtrum:HISTory:PALL................................................................................................ 374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PALL........................................................................................... 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STARt..............................................................................375
BUS:HISTory:STARt................................................................................................. 375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STARt............................................................................................. 375
LOGic:HISTory:STARt...............................................................................................375
SPECtrum:HISTory:STARt.............................................................................................. 375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt..........................................................................................375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STOP.............................................................................. 375
BUS:HISTory:STOP.................................................................................................. 375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STOP..............................................................................................375
LOGic:HISTory:STOP............................................................................................... 375
SPECtrum:HISTory:STOP...............................................................................................375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP.......................................................................................... 375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed................................................................. 375
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed..................................................................................... 375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed................................................................................. 375
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed...................................................................................375
SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed.................................................................................. 375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed............................................................................. 375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:REPLay........................................................................... 375
BUS:HISTory:REPLay...............................................................................................375
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 373

Waveform analysis
DIGital<m>:HISTory:REPLay...........................................................................................375
LOGic:HISTory:REPLay............................................................................................ 376
SPECtrum:HISTory:REPLay............................................................................................376
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay....................................................................................... 376
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe.................................................................. 376
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe...................................................................................... 376
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe..................................................................................376
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe................................................................................... 376
SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe...................................................................................376
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe.............................................................................. 376
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle] <PlayerControlEnable>
BUS:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle] <PlayerControlEnable>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle] <PlayerControlEnable>
LOGic:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle] <PlayerControlEnable>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:[ENABle] <PlayerControl>
Displays or hides the history player on the screen.
Parameters:
<PlayerControl> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
BUS:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
LOGic:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
SPECtrum:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent <CurrentAcquisition>
Accesses a particular history segment in the memory to display it. The query returns
the index of the segment that is shown.
Parameters:
<CurrentAcquisition> Segment index. There are two ways to enter the index.
Negative index count: the newest segment has the index "0",
older segments have a negative index: -(n-1), .... -1 , 0
Positive index count: the oldest segment has the index 1, and
the newest segment has the index n: 1, 2,..., n
where n is the number of acquired segments.
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
BUS:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
LOGic:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
SPECtrum:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PALL <PlayAll>
Enables the replay of all acquired segments.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 374

Waveform analysis
Parameters:
<PlayAll> ON | OFF
If set to OFF, define the range of segments to be shown using
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt and CHANnel<m>:HISTory:
STOP
*RST: ON
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
BUS:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
LOGic:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
SPECtrum:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt <StartAcquisition>
Sets the index of the oldest segment to be displayed.
Parameters:
<StartAcquisition> Start index. You can enter a positive or negative index, see
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent .
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
BUS:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
LOGic:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
SPECtrum:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP <StopAcquisition>
Sets the index of the latest segment to be displayed.
Parameters:
<StopAcquisition> Stop index. You can enter a positive or negative index, see
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent.
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed <PlayerSpeed>
Sets the speed of the history replay.
Parameters:
<PlayerSpeed> SLOW | MEDium | FAST | AUTO
*RST: AUTO
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
BUS:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 375

Waveform analysis
LOGic:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
SPECtrum:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay <Replay>
If set to ON, the replay of the selected history segments repeats automatically.
Parameters:
<Replay> ON | OFF
*RST: STOP
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe <PlayerState>
Starts and stops the replay of the history segments.
Parameters:
<PlayerState> RUN | STOP
*RST: STOP
15.6.5.3 Timestamps
You can query the timestamps of history segments in two ways:

● Query for the timestamps of all history segments using ...:HISTory:...:ALL
commands.
● Query for the timestamp of a specific segment using ...:HISTory:... com-
mands. Select the segment of interest using CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent
appropriate command.
● CHANnel<m>: Selects the analog input channel.
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle].............................................................. 377
BUS:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle].................................................................................. 377
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle].............................................................................. 377
LOGic:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle]................................................................................377
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle].......................................................................... 377
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?..................................................................... 377
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative?......................................................................................... 377
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?.....................................................................................377
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative?.......................................................................................377
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative?...................................................................................... 378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?................................................................................. 378
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 376

Waveform analysis
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?...............................................................378
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?.................................................................................. 378
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?.............................................................................. 378
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?................................................................................378
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?............................................................................... 378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?...........................................................................378
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?.................................................................... 378
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute?........................................................................................378
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?....................................................................................378
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute?..................................................................................... 378
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute?.....................................................................................378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?................................................................................ 378
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?............................................................. 379
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?................................................................................. 379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?............................................................................. 379
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?...............................................................................379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?.............................................................................. 379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?......................................................................... 379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate?.......................................................................... 379
BUS:HISTory:TSDate?..............................................................................................379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate?..........................................................................................379
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate?........................................................................................... 379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate?...........................................................................................379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?...................................................................................... 379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?....................................................................379
BUS:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?....................................................................................... 379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?................................................................................... 379
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?.....................................................................................379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?.................................................................................... 379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?................................................................................379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle] <TimeTableEnable>
BUS:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle] <TimeTableEnable>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle] <TimeTableEnable>
LOGic:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle] <TimeTableEnable>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle] <TimeTableEnable>
Displays or hides the segment table on the screen.
Parameters:
<TimeTableEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative?
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 377

Waveform analysis
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?
Returns the time difference of the selected segment to the newest segment. To select
a segment, use CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent.
Return values:
<TimeToNewestAcq> Time to newest acquisition
Example: CHAN:HIST:CURR -5
CHAN:HIST:TSR?
--> -1.138757760000E-02
Returns the relative time of the sixth segment. The newest seg-
ment has index 0.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
Returns the time differences to the newest acquisition of all history segments.
Return values:
<TimeToNewestAcq> List of Values
The list starts with the oldest segment, and the newest segment
is the last one.
Example: CHANnel2:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?
--> -4.184565632000E-01,-4.094896352000E-01,-4.005227104000E-01,
-3.915557824000E-01, ...,-8.966924800000E-03,-0.000000000000E+00
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute?
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?
Returns the absolute daytime of the selected acquisition (CHANnel<m>:HISTory:
CURRent).
Return values:
<Hour>, <Minute>, Comma-separated list
<Seconds>
CHAN:HIST:TSAB?
--> 16,24,3.302100000000E+01
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 378

Waveform analysis
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
Returns the absolute daytimes of all history segments.
Return values:
<Hour>, <Minute>, Comma-separated list of hour, minute, and second values.
<Second>
Example: CHANnel2:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?
--> 14,59,4.558154343680E+01,14,59,4.559051036480E+01,
14,59,4.559947728960E+01,...
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate?
BUS:HISTory:TSDate?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate?
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate?
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?
Returns the date of the selected acquisition (CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent).
Return values:
<Year>, <Month>, Comma-separated list
<Day>
CHAN:HIST:TSD?
--> 2014,7,1
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
BUS:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
Returns the dates of all history segments.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 379

Waveform analysis
Return values:
<Year>, <Month>, Comma-separated list of year, month, and day values.
<Day> The list starts with the oldest segment, and the newest segment
is the last one.
Example: CHANnel2:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?
--> 2014,11,26,2014,11,26,2014,11,26,2014,11,26,...
Usage: Query only
15.6.5.4 Export of history data

● CHANnel<m>: Selects the analog input channel.
BPLot:EXPort:NAME...................................................................................................... 380
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:NAME...................................................................................... 380
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME.................................................................................. 380
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:NAME....................................................................................380
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:NAME................................................................................... 380
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME.............................................................................. 380
EXPort:ATABle:NAME.................................................................................................... 380
BPLot:EXPort:SAVE....................................................................................................... 380
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE....................................................................................... 380
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE................................................................................... 381
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE.....................................................................................381
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE.................................................................................... 381
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE............................................................................... 381
EXPort:ATABle:SAVE..................................................................................................... 381
BPLot:EXPort:NAME
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:NAME <ExportPath>
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME <ExportPath>
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:NAME <ExportPath>
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:NAME <ExportPath>
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME <ExportPath>
EXPort:ATABle:NAME <ExportPath>
Parameters:
<ExportPath> String parameter
Example: EXPort:ATABle:NAME "/USB_FRONT/EXPORT/TIMES"
BPLot:EXPort:SAVE
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 380

Measurements
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE
EXPort:ATABle:SAVE
Saves the acquisition timestamps table to the file that is defined by the EXPort:
ATABle:NAME command.
Example: EXPort:ATABle:SAVE
The file contains the following timestamp values:
"","Date","Time"
"Start of Acquisition","2014-11-24","14:35:59"
"Last Acquisition","2014-11-24","14:36:01"
"Acquisitions","150"
"Number","Relative Time","Time to previous",

"Date","Time", "Trigger"
"0","-0.000000000000000E+00","1.009638400000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:01","0.0000000000E+00",Trg'd
"-1","-1.009638400000000E-02","2.000568800000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","9.8990361600E-01",Trg'd
"-2","-3.010207200000000E-02","2.000216800000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","9.6989792800E-01",Trg'd
"-3","-5.010424000000000E-02","2.001423200000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","9.4989576000E-01",Trg'd
"-4","-7.011847200000000E-02","2.000044000000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","9.2988152800E-01",Trg'd
"-5","-9.011891200000001E-02","9.917412000000000E-03",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","9.0988108800E-01",Trg'd
"-6","-1.000363240000000E-01","1.009686000000000E-02",
"2014-11-24","14:36:00","8.9996367600E-01",Trg'd.....
Usage: Event
15.7 Measurements
15.7.1 Quick measurements
In the quick measurement commands, the numeric suffix <m> is irrelevant, omit it.
MEASurement<m>:AON.................................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:AOFF............................................................................................... 382
MEASurement<m>:ARESult?..........................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:ALL[:STATe]...................................................................................... 382
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 381

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:AON
Starts the quick measurement.
Usage: Event
MEASurement<m>:AOFF
Stops the quick measurement.
Usage: Event
MEASurement<m>:ARESult?
Returns the results of the quick measurement.
Return values:
<Data> List of values
Quick measurement results are listed in the following order:
PEAK (Vpp), UPE (Vp+), LPE (Vp-), CYCR (RMS-Cyc), CYCM
(MeanCyc), PER (T), FREQ (f), RTIM (tr), FTIM (tf).
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:ALL[:STATe]
Starts or stops the quick measurement and sets the status bit.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
The suffix is irrelevant.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
15.7.2 Automatic measurements
● Measurement settings...........................................................................................382
● Measurements results...........................................................................................386
● Reference levels................................................................................................... 392
15.7.2.1 Measurement settings
MEASurement<m>[:ENABle]...........................................................................................383
MEASurement<m>:MAIN................................................................................................383
MEASurement<m>:SOURce........................................................................................... 385
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 382

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe...................................................................................386
MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle]...........................................................................386
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RESet...............................................................................386
MEASurement<m>[:ENABle] <State>
Activates or deactivates the selected measurement.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Selects the measurement place.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Measure <n>" on page 139
MEASurement<m>:MAIN <MeasType>
Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source. To query the
results, use MEASurement<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Selects the measurement.
Parameters:
<MeasType> FREQuency | PERiod | PEAK | UPEakvalue | LPEakvalue |
PPCount | NPCount | RECount | FECount | HIGH | LOW |
AMPLitude | MEAN | RMS | RTIMe | FTIMe | SRRise | SRFall |
PDCYcle | NDCYcle | PPWidth | NPWidth | CYCMean |
CYCRms | STDDev | DELay | PHASe | DTOTrigger |
CYCStddev | POVershoot | NOVershoot | BWIDth
See also: Chapter 7.2.2, "Measurement types", on page 134.
FREQuency
Frequency of the signal. The result is based on the length of the
left-most signal period within the displayed section of the wave-
form of the selected channel.
PERiod
Length of the left-most signal period within the displayed section
of the waveform of the selected channel.
PEAK
Peak-to-peak value within the displayed section of the waveform
of the selected channel.
UPEakvalue
Maximum (upper) value within the displayed section of the
waveform of the selected channel.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 383

Measurements
LPEakvalue
Minimum (lower) value within the displayed section of the wave-
PPCount | NPCount
Counts positive or negative pulses.
RECount | FECount
Counts the number of rising or falling edges.
HIGH | LOW
Mean value of the high or low level of a square wave.
AMPLitude
Amplitude of a square wave.
MEAN
Mean voltage value of the complete displayed waveform of the
selected channel.
RMS
RMS (root mean square) voltage value of the complete dis-
played waveform of the selected channel.
RTIMe | FTIMe
Rise or falling time of the left-most rising or falling edge within
the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel.
The reference level for this measurement is set with REFLevel:
RELative:MODE.
SRRise | SRFall
Slew rate of the left-most rising or falling edge within the dis-
played section of the waveform of the selected channel. The ref-
erence level for this measurement is set with REFLevel:
RELative:MODE
PDCycle | NDCycle
Positive or negative duty cycle.
PPWidth | NPWidth
Width of positive or negative pulses.
CYCMean
Mean voltage value of the left-most signal period of the wave-
CYCRms
RMS (root mean square) voltage value of the left-most signal
period of the waveform of the selected channel.
STDDev
Standard deviation of the waveform.
CYCStddev
Standard deviation of one cycle, usually of the first, left-most sig-
nal period.
DELay
Time difference between two edges of the same or different
waveforms.
The edges are defined with MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 384

Measurements
DTOTrigger
Time between the trigger point and a selectable edge, measured
on the middle reference level.
The edge is defined with MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe.
PHASe
Phase difference between two waveforms (time difference/
period * 360).
BWIDth
Burst width, the duration of one burst, measured from the first
edge to the last edge that crosses the middle reference level.
POVershoot | NOVershoot
Positive and negative overshoot of a square wave.
*RST: PEAK
Manual operation: See "Type" on page 139
MEASurement<m>:SOURce <SignalSource>[,<SignalSource2>]
Selects one of the active signal, reference or math channels as the source(s) of the
selected measurement. Available sources depend on the selected measurement type.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Parameters:
<SignalSource> CH1..4 | MA1 | RE1..4 | D0..15
Waveform to be measured, required for all measurement types.
For delay and phase measurements, it is the "Measure Source".
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
Active signal channels 1 to 4
MA1
Active math channel
RE1 | RE2 | RE3 | RE4
Active reference channels 1 to 4
D0..D15
Active digital channels D0...D15. Only available, if MSO option
<SignalSource2> None | CH1..4 | MA1 | RE1..4 | D0..15
Second source waveform, which is required for delay and phase
mesurements ("Measure Source 2").
See "Measure Source, Measure Source 2" on page 140
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 385

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe <SignalSlope>,<ReferenceSlope>
Sets the edges to be used for delay measurement and delay to trigger measurement.
The associated waveforms are defined with MEASurement<m>:SOURce.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Parameters:
<SignalSlope> POSitive | NEGative
Slope of first waveform ("Measure Source").
*RST: POS
<ReferenceSlope> POSitive | NEGative
Slope of the second waveform ("Measure Source 2"). The value
is ignored in delay to trigger measurements.
*RST: POS
Manual operation: See "Measure Source" on page 141
MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle] <StatisticEnable>
Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for all active measurements.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<StatisticEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Statistics" on page 140
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RESet
Deletes the statistical results for all measurements, and starts a new statistical evalua-
tion if the acquisition is running. The waveform count is set to 0 and all measurement
values are set to NAN.
Suffix: .
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset Statistics" on page 140
15.7.2.2 Measurements results
You can query the statistical results using the MEAS:STAT commands.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 386

Measurements
To export statistical results to a csv file, use the EXP:MEAS:STAT commands. Note
that export of statistics is possible only remotely, but not in manual operation.
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout[TIME].................................................................................. 387
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout:AUTO.................................................................................. 387
MEASurement<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?...............................................................................388
MEASurement<m>:RESult:AVG?.................................................................................... 388
MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev?...............................................................................388
MEASurement<m>:RESult:NPEak?................................................................................. 389
MEASurement<m>:RESult:PPEak?................................................................................. 389
MEASurement<m>:RESult:WFMCount?...........................................................................389
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:WEIGht?...........................................................................389
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue:ALL?...................................................................... 390
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue<n>?....................................................................... 390
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:NAME....................................................................390
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:SAVE.................................................................... 390
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:NAME................................................................... 391
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:SAVE.................................................................... 391
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout[TIME] <TimeoutTime>
Sets a waiting time, how long the instrument waits until it returns the measurement
results on MEASurement:RESult?.
After changing measurement or channel parameters, the instrument needs a setup
time of about 200 ms and the time of a valid acquisition (at least 12 * horizon-
tal scale + trigger period). Only after this time, valid measurement results can be
returned.
You can define this waiting time manually, or let it set automatically with
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout:AUTO on page 387.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<TimeoutTime> *RST: 0
Default unit: s
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout:AUTO <AutomaticMode>
The waiting time is set automatically, based on the horizontal scale. For details, see
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout[TIME] on page 387.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<AutomaticMode> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 387

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:RESult[:ACTual]? [<MeasType>]
Returns the result of the specified measurement type.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<MeasType> FREQuency | PERiod | PEAK | UPEakvalue | LPEakvalue |
PPCount | NPCount | RECount | FECount | HIGH | LOW |
AMPLitude | MEAN | RMS | RTIMe | FTIMe | PDCYcle |
NDCYcle | PPWidth | NPWidth | CYCMean | CYCRms |
STDDev | CYCStddev | DELay | PHASe | BWIDth |
POVershoot | NOVershoot
Specifies the measurement type, see MEASurement<m>:MAIN
on page 383. If you omit the parameter, the result of the last
measurement setup is returned.
Return values:
<Value> Measurement result. If no measurement was executed, no value
(NAN) is returned.
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:RESult:AVG? <AverageValue>
Returns the average value of the current measurement series.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<AverageValue> Statistic value
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev? <StandardDeviation>
Returns the statistical standard deviation of the current measurement series.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<StandardDeviation> Statistic value
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 388

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:RESult:NPEak? <NegativePeak>
Returns the minimum measurement result of the current measurement series.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<NegativePeak> Minimum measurement result
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:RESult:PPEak? <PositivePeak>
Returns the maximum measurement result of the current measurement series.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<PositivePeak> Maximum measurement result
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:RESult:WFMCount? <WaveformCount>
Returns the current number of measured waveforms.
The query for MIN and MAX values is not possible.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Query parameters:
<WaveformCount> Number of measured waveforms
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:WEIGht? <BufferSize>
Returns the size of the statistics buffer.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Return values:
<BufferSize> The buffer size is always 1000 result values.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 389

Measurements
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue:ALL?
Returns all values from the statistics buffer.
Note: Valid buffered values can only be read if the acquisition is stopped. As long as
the acquisition is running, the buffer contents is changing and the buffered values are
not valid for reading.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Return values:
<ValueList> Comma separated List of Values
Comma-separated list of statistical values
Usage: Query only
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue<n>?
Returns the nth statistical value from the indicated buffer place.
Note: Valid buffered values can only be read if the acquisition is stopped. As long as
the acquisition is running, the buffer contents is changing and the buffered values are
not valid for reading.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
<n> *
Buffer place. The buffer size is 1000 results.
Return values:
<StatisticValue> Statistical value
Usage: Query only
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:NAME
Defines the path and filename of the statistics file. The file format is CSV. If the file
already exists, it will be overwritten without notice.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Parameters:
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:SAVE
Saves statistical results of the indicated measurement place to the file that is defined
by the EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:NAME command.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 390

Measurements
Suffix: .
<m> 1..6
Usage: Event
See also: EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:SAVE on page 391.
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:NAME
Defines the path and filename of the statistics file. The file format is CSV. If the file
already exists, it will be overwritten.
Parameters:
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:SAVE
Saves statistical results of all measurement places to the file that is defined by the
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:NAME command.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 391

Measurements
Example: The file contains general information, statistical results, long

term statistics, and the individual values that are used to calcu-
late the statistics. The number of values is "Average No."
"Vendor","Rohde&Schwarz",
"Device/Mat.-No.","RTB2004 / 1333.1005K04",
"Serial No.","3900001",
"Firmware Version","02.001",
"Date","2017-11-18 / 16:40:27",
"Meas. Place",,"1",,"2",,"3",,
"Type",,"Frequency",,"Mean Value",,"Frequency",,
"Source 1",,"CH1",,"CH1",,"CH2",,
"Source 2",,,,,,,,,,
"Wave count",,42,,39,,37,,
"Current",,4.998250e+05,,5.648727e-01,,4.998250e+05,,
"Average No.",,1.000000e+03,,1.000000e+03,,1.000000e+03,,
"Minimum",,4.997501e+05,,5.633875e-01,,4.997501e+05,,
"Maximum",,4.998250e+05,,5.650349e-01,,4.998250e+05,,
"Mean",,4.998179e+05,,5.642045e-01,,4.998169e+05,,
"σ-Deviation",,2.199706e+01,,3.677224e-04,,2.326898e+01,,
"Time of first value",,,,,,,,,,
"Time of last value",,,,,,,,,,
"Long term Minimum",,4.997501e+05,,5.633875e-01,,4.997501e+05,,
"Long term Maximum",,4.998250e+05,,5.650349e-01,,4.998250e+05,,
"Long term Mittelwert",,4.998179e+05,,5.642045e-01,,4.998169e+05,,
"Long term σ-Deviation",,2.226370e+01,,3.725295e-04,,2.358995e+01,,
"Long term start time",,,,,,,,,,
"Long term end Time",,,,,,,,,,
"Index","Time Offset","Value","Time Offset","Value",

"Time Offset","Value",
1,,4.998250e+05,,5.649274e-01,,4.997501e+05,
2,,4.998250e+05,,5.649072e-01,,4.998250e+05,
3,,4.998250e+05,,5.650349e-01,,4.998250e+05,
4,,4.998250e+05,,5.641094e-01,,4.998250e+05,
5,,4.998250e+05,,5.640586e-01,,4.998250e+05,
6,,4.997501e+05,,5.642784e-01,,4.998250e+05,
7,,4.998250e+05,,5.637245e-01,,4.998250e+05,...
Usage: Event
15.7.2.3 Reference levels
REFLevel:RELative:MODE............................................................................................. 393
REFLevel:RELative:LOWer.............................................................................................393
REFLevel:RELative:UPPer..............................................................................................393
REFLevel:RELative:MIDDle............................................................................................ 393
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 392

Measurements
REFLevel:RELative:MODE <RelativeMode>
Sets the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements (cursor
and automatic mesurements) as well as the middle reference level for phase and delay
measurements. The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level. The set-
ting is valid for all measurement places.
Parameters:
<RelativeMode> TEN | TWENty | FIVE | USER
TEN: 10, 50 and 90%
TWENty: 20, 50 and 80%
FIVE: 5, 50 and 95 %
USER: levels are defined with REFLevel:RELative:LOWer,
REFLevel:RELative:MIDDle and REFLevel:RELative:
UPPer.
*RST: TEN
Example: REFL:REL:MODE TWENty
MEAS2:MAIN RTIM
Sets the reference levels for all measurements and measures
the rise time between these levels for measurement place 2:
lower reference level = 20% of high signal level
upper reference level = 80% of high signal level
Manual operation: See "Reference Level" on page 140
REFLevel:RELative:LOWer <LowerLevel>
REFLevel:RELative:UPPer <UpperLevel>
Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements (cursor
and automatic mesurements) if REFLevel:RELative:MODE is set to USER. The lev-
els are defined as percentages of the high signal level. They are valid for all measure-
ments.
Parameters:
<LowerLevel> *RST: 10
Default unit: %
<UpperLevel> *RST: 90
Default unit: %
REFLevel:RELative:MIDDle <MiddleLevel>
Set the middle reference level that is used for phase and delay measurements, if
REFLevel:RELative:MODE is set to USER. The level is defined as percentages of
the high signal level. The setting is valid for all measurements.
Parameters:
<MiddleLevel> *RST: 50
Default unit: %
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 393

Measurements
15.7.3 Cursor measurements
15.7.3.1 Cursor settings
CURSor<m>:AOFF........................................................................................................ 394
CURSor<m>:STATe........................................................................................................394
CURSor<m>:FUNCtion...................................................................................................394
CURSor<m>:SOURce.................................................................................................... 395
CURSor<m>:USSOURce................................................................................................396
CURSor<m>:SSOURce..................................................................................................396
CURSor<m>:TRACking[:STATe]...................................................................................... 396
CURSor<m>:X1Position................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:X2Position................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:Y1Position................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:Y2Position................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:YCOupling................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:XCOupling................................................................................................. 397
CURSor<m>:SWAVe...................................................................................................... 398
CURSor<m>:TRACking:SCALe[:STATe]........................................................................... 398
CURSor<m>:SPPeak<n>................................................................................................398
CURSor<m>:SNPeak<n>............................................................................................... 398
CURSor<m>:AOFF
Switches the cursor off.
Suffix: .
<m> 1, the suffix is irrelevant.
Usage: Event
CURSor<m>:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the cursor measurement.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Cursor" on page 143
CURSor<m>:FUNCtion <Type>
Defines the cursor measurement type.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 394

Measurements
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Type> HORizontal | VERTical | HVERtical
To set the V-marker measurement, use CURSor<m>:
TRACking[:STATe].
*RST: VERTical
Value Description Queries for results
HORizontal Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the CURSor<m>:Y1Position
voltages at the two cursor positions and the delta
CURSor<m>:Y2Position
of the two values.
CURSor<m>:YDELta[:VALue]?
CURSor<m>:YDELta:SLOPe?
VERTical Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the CURSor<m>:X1Position
time from the trigger point to each cursor, the time
CURSor<m>:X2Position
between the two cursors and the frequency calcu-
lated from that time. CURSor<m>:XDELta[:VALue]?
CURSor<m>:XDELta:INVerse?
HVERtical Combines the HORizontal cursor and VERTical CURSor<m>:Y1Position

cursor measurements. Two horizontal and two ver-
CURSor<m>:Y2Position
tical cursor lines are set and the voltages and time
from the trigger point are measured at the cursor CURSor<m>:YDELta[:VALue]?
positions, as well as the delta of the voltage and CURSor<m>:X1Position
time values.
CURSor<m>:X2Position
CURSor<m>:XDELta[:VALue]?
CURSor<m>:SOURce <Source>
Defines the source of the cursor measurement.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Source> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MA1 | MA2 | MA3 | MA4 | MA5 | RE1 |
RE2 | RE3 | RE4 | XY1 | XY2 | D70 | D158 | D0..15 | SPECtrum |
MINHold | MAXHold | AVERage
CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
Active analog channel waveforms 1 to 4
MA1 | MA2 | MA3 | MA4 | MA5
Active math waveforms 1 to 5
RE1 | RE2 | RE3 | RE4
Active reference waveform 1 to 4
XY1 | XY2
Active XY-waveforms
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 395

Measurements
D0..15
Active digital channels D0 to D15, available if MSO option
On individual digital channels, only vertical (time) cursor mea-
surements are possible.
D70 | D158
Active digital channels D0...D7 (pod 1) and D8...D15 (pod 2).
Only available, if MSO option R&S RTB-B1 is installed. On pods,
only V-marker measurement is possible.
SPECtrum | MINHold | MAXHold | AVERage
FFT waveforms
CURSor<m>:USSOURce <UseSecondSource>
Enables the second cursor source. To select the second source, use CURSor<m>:
SSOURce.
If enabled, the second cursor measures on the second source. Using a second source,
you can measure differences between two waveforms with cursors. Both sources must
be in the same domain (time domain or frequency domain).
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<UseSecondSource> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Second Source" on page 144
CURSor<m>:SSOURce <SecondSource>
Selects the second cursor source.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<SecondSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MA1 | MA2 | MA3 | MA4 | MA5 | RE1 |
RE2 | RE3 | RE4 | XY1 | XY2 | D70 | D158 | D0..15 | SPECtrum |
MINHold | MAXHold | AVERage
See CURSor<m>:SOURce on page 395.
Manual operation: See "Second Source" on page 144
CURSor<m>:TRACking[:STATe] <State>
If set to ON, the V-Marker cursor measurement is enabled.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 396

Measurements
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CURSor<m>:X1Position <Xposition1>
CURSor<m>:X2Position <Xposition2>
The commands specify or return the positions of vertical cursor lines on the x-axis
(time, frequency for FFT).
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Xposition1> Range: Depends on the current instrument settings, for
<Xposition2> example, horizontal position.
Default unit: s
CURSor<m>:Y1Position <Yposition1>
CURSor<m>:Y2Position <Yposition2>
The commands specify or return the positions of horizontal cursor lines on the y-axis
(voltage, current, level for FFT).
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Yposition2> Range: Depends on the current instrument settings.
Increment: 0.01
Default unit: V
CURSor<m>:YCOupling <Coupling>
CURSor<m>:XCOupling <Coupling>
If enabled, the cursor lines are coupled so that the distance between the two lines
remains the same if one cursor is moved.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<Coupling> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 397

Measurements
CURSor<m>:SWAVe
Autoset for cursor lines, sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depend-
ing on the selected cursor type. For example, for voltage measurement ("Horizontal"),
the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform. For time mea-
surement ("Vertical"), the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive
or two consecutive negative pulses.
Suffix: .
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Set To Trace" on page 146
CURSor<m>:TRACking:SCALe[:STATe] <State>
Enables the adjustment of cursor lines if the vertical or horizontal scales are changed.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform.
OFF
Cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling
is changed.
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Track Scaling" on page 145
CURSor<m>:SPPeak<n>
CURSor<m>:SNPeak<n>
Set the cursor line to the previous / next peak, respectively. The command is only
available for FFT waveforms.
Suffix: .
<n> 1..2
Selects the cursor line.
Usage: Event
15.7.3.2 Cursor measurement results
To get the measurement values of vertical cursor lines (time, frequency for FFT), use:
● CURSor<m>:X1Position on page 397
● CURSor<m>:X2Position on page 397
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 398

Measurements
To get the measurement values of horizontal cursor lines (voltage, current, level for
FFT), use:
● CURSor<m>:Y1Position on page 397
● CURSor<m>:Y2Position on page 397
CURSor<m>:XDELta[:VALue]?........................................................................................399
CURSor<m>:XDELta:INVerse?....................................................................................... 399
CURSor<m>:YDELta[:VALue]?........................................................................................399
CURSor<m>:YDELta:SLOPe?.........................................................................................400
CURSor<m>:XDELta[:VALue]?
Returns the time difference between two vertical cursor lines (Δt).
Suffix: .
Return values:
<Delta> Range: -100E24 to 100E24
Increment: 0.1
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
CURSor<m>:XDELta:INVerse?
Returns the inverse time difference between the two cursors (1/Δt, frequency).
Suffix: .
Return values:
<DeltaInverse> Range: -100E24 to 100E24
Increment: 0.1
Default unit: 1/s
Usage: Query only
CURSor<m>:YDELta[:VALue]?
Queries the delta of the values in y-direction at the two cursor lines.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<YDelta> Delta value
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 399

Applications
CURSor<m>:YDELta:SLOPe?
Returns the inverse value of the vertical difference (e.g. voltage difference) - the recip-
rocal of the vertical distance of two horizontal cursor lines: 1/ΔV.
Suffix: .
Return values:
<Slope> Inverse value
Usage: Query only
15.8 Applications
15.8.1 General
DEVice:MODE
Sets the operation mode or application.
Parameters:
<OperationalMode> YT | ZOOM | XY | QMEas | UPDate | AUToset | MASKtest | FFT
15.8.2 Mask testing
15.8.2.1 Mask setup
MASK:STATe................................................................................................................. 400
MASK:SOURce............................................................................................................. 401
MASK:CHCopy.............................................................................................................. 401
MASK:YPOSition........................................................................................................... 401
MASK:YSCale............................................................................................................... 401
MASK:XWIDth............................................................................................................... 401
MASK:YWIDth............................................................................................................... 402
MASK:SAVE..................................................................................................................402
MASK:LOAD................................................................................................................. 402
MASK:STATe <State>
Turns the mask test application on or off. When turning off, any temporarily stored
masks are deleted.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 400

Applications
MASK:SOURce <Source>
Defines the channel to be compared with the mask, and also the channel from which
the mask is created.
Parameters:
<Source> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
CH3 and CH4 are only available on 4-channel models.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "New" on page 151
See "Copy Channel" on page 153
MASK:CHCopy
Creates a mask from the envelope waveform of the source set with MASK:SOURce.
Example: MASK:STATe ON
MASK:SOURce CH1
MASK:CHCopy
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "New" on page 151
See "Copy Channel" on page 153
MASK:YPOSition <Yposition>
Moves the mask vertically within the display.
Parameters:
<Yposition> Mask offset from the vertical center
Default unit: div
Manual operation: See "Y-Position" on page 153
MASK:YSCale <Yscale>
Changes the vertical scaling to stretch or compress the mask in y-direction.
Parameters:
<Yscale> A value over 100% stretches the amplitudes; a value less than
100% compresses the amplitudes.
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Stretch Y" on page 153
MASK:XWIDth <Xaddition>
Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 401

Applications
Parameters:
<Xaddition> The value is added to the positive x-values and subtracted from
the negative x-values of the mask limits in relation to the mask
center.
Default unit: div
Manual operation: See "Width X" on page 154
MASK:YWIDth <Yaddition>
Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction.
Parameters:
<Yaddition> The value is added to the y-values of the upper mask limit and
subtracted from the y-values of the lower mask limit.
Default unit: div
Manual operation: See "Width Y" on page 154
MASK:SAVE <Filename>
Saves the current mask in the specified file.
Setting parameters:
<Filename> String parameter
Path and file name
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Save, Load" on page 152
See "Save" on page 154
MASK:LOAD <Filename>
Loads a stored mask from the specified file.
Setting parameters:
Path and file name
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Save, Load" on page 152
See "Load Mask" on page 154
15.8.2.2 Actions on violation
MASK:ACTion:SOUNd:EVENt:MODE.............................................................................. 403
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:EVENt:MODE........................................................................... 403
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:EVENt:MODE.......................................................................... 403
MASK:ACTion:PULSe:EVENt:MODE............................................................................... 403
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 402

Applications
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:MODE.................................................................................403
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt................................................................................404
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:DESTination............................................................................. 404
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:DESTination.............................................................................404
MASK:ACTion:YOUT:ENABle..........................................................................................405
MASK:ACTion:SOUNd:EVENt:MODE <EventMode>
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:EVENt:MODE <EventMode>
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:EVENt:MODE <EventMode>
MASK:ACTion:PULSe:EVENt:MODE <EventMode>
Defines when and how often the action is executed.
● SOUNd: Generates a beep sound on mask violation.
● PULSe: Creates a pulse on the [Aux Out] connector. This selection sets the config-
uration of the [Aux Out] connector to "Mask Violation".
● SCRSave: Saves a screenshot on mask violation. To set path and filename of the
screenshot, use MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:DESTination.
● WFMSave: Saves the waveform data on mask violation. To set path and filename
of the data file, use MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:DESTination.
Parameters:
<EventMode> OFF | EACH
OFF
No action is executed.
EACH
The selected action is executed on each violation of the mask.
*RST: OFF
MASK:SOURce CH1
MASK:CHCopy
MASK:ACTion:SOUNd:EVENt:MODE EACH
the instrument beeps at each violation of the mask.

Manual operation: See "Actions" on page 154
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:MODE <EventMode>
Stops the waveform acquisition, after mask is violated for a defined number of times.
You can set how many times with the command MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt.
Parameters:
<EventMode> OFF | CYCLic
OFF
No action is executed.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 403

Applications
CYClic
The acquisition is stopped at defined violation of the mask. The
action is done only once, there is no automatic restart of the
acquisition.
*RST: OFF
MASK:SOURce CH1
MASK:CHCopy
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt 3
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:MODE CYClic
Stops the acquisition at the third violation of the mask.

MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt <EventCount>
Sets the number of mask violations after which the action is executed.
Parameters:
<EventCount> Integer value, number of the violations that executes the action.
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:DESTination <Path>
Defines the directory for a screenshot that is saved on mask violation. The file format is
defined with HCOP:LANG. The filename is manually defined in the "File" > "Screen-
shots" dialog box and is incremented automatically, starting from 01.
Parameters:
<Path> String parameter
Example: Prerequisite: a mask is defined, and a waveform that hits the
mask.
MASK:ACT:SCRS:DEST "/USB_FRONT/MASKS" //directory must exist
HCOP:LANG PNG
MASK:ACT:SCRS:EVEN:MODE EACH
MASK:TEST RUN
RUN
On first violation, the screenshot is saved to <name>01.PNG, on

second violation to <name>02.PNG, the third to
<name>03.PNG ...
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:DESTination <Path>
Defines the directory for waveform data files that are saved on mask violation. The file
format is defined with FORMAT. The filename is manually defined in the "File" > "Wave-
forms" dialog box and is incremented automatically, starting from 01.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 404

Applications
Parameters:
<Path> String parameter
Example: Prerequisite: a mask is defined, and a waveform that hits the
mask.
MASK:ACT:WFMS:DEST "/USB_FRONT/MASKS" //directory must exist
FORM CSV,0
MASK:ACT:WFMS:EVEN:MODE EACH
MASK:TEST RUN
RUN
On first violation, the waveform data is saved to

<name>01.CSV, on second violation to <name>02.CSV, the
third to <name>03.CSV ...
MASK:ACTion:YOUT:ENABle <Yout>
Creates a pulse on the [Aux Out] connector if the mask is violated. This selection sets
the configuration of the [Aux Out] connector to "Mask Violation".
Same as MASK:ACTion:PULSe:EVENt:MODE on page 403.
Parameters:
<Yout> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
15.8.2.3 Mask test
MASK:TEST..................................................................................................................405
MASK:RESet:COUNter...................................................................................................405
MASK:COUNt?.............................................................................................................. 406
MASK:VCOunt?.............................................................................................................406
MASK:CAPTure[:MODE].................................................................................................406
MASK:TEST <Test>
Starts, finishes or interrupts a mask test.
Parameters:
<Test> RUN | STOP | PAUSe
*RST: STOP
Manual operation: See "Run, Stop" on page 151
See "Test" on page 153
MASK:RESet:COUNter
Sets the counters of passed and failed acquisitions to zero.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset" on page 151
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 405

Applications
MASK:COUNt?
Returns the number of tested acquisitions.
Return values:
<TotalCount> Total number of tested acquisitions
Usage: Query only
MASK:VCOunt?
Returns the number of acquisitions that hit the mask.
Return values:
<ViolationCount> Total number of violations
Usage: Query only
MASK:CAPTure[:MODE] <CaptureMode>
Only available with history. The command selects whether all acquisitions are stored in
segments, or only failed acquisition. You can use the history to analyze the segments.
Parameters:
<CaptureMode> ALL | FAILED
*RST: ALL
Manual operation: See "Capt. Fails" on page 152
See "Capture Segments" on page 155
15.8.2.4 Mask data
Use the following commands that are described in Chapter 15.9.1.5, "Masks",
on page 435:
● MASK:DATA? on page 435
● MASK:DATA:HEADer? on page 435
● MASK:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● MASK:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● MASK:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● MASK:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● MASK:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 406

Applications
15.8.3 FFT analysis
● Frequency settings................................................................................................409
● Time settings......................................................................................................... 411
● Waveform settings.................................................................................................411
● Waveform data......................................................................................................412
SPECtrum[:STATe]......................................................................................................... 407
SPECtrum:SOURce....................................................................................................... 407
SPECtrum:FREQuency:WINDow:TYPE........................................................................... 407
SPECtrum:FREQuency:MAGNitude:SCALe......................................................................408
SPECtrum:FREQuency:POSition.....................................................................................408
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SCALe....................................................................................... 409
DISPlay:CBAR:FFT[:POSition]........................................................................................ 409
SPECtrum[:STATe]
Switches on the spectrum analysis.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
SPECtrum:SOURce
Selects the source for the spectrum analysis diagrams.
Parameters:
SPECtrum:FREQuency:WINDow:TYPE
Window functions are multiplied with the input values and thus can improve the spec-
trum analysis display.
Parameters:
<WindowFunction> RECTangular | HAMMing | HANNing | BLACkmanharris |
FLATtop
RECTangular
The rectangular window has high frequency accuracy with thin
spectral lines, but with increased noise. Use this function pref-
erably with pulse response tests where start and end values are
zero.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 407

Applications
HAMMing
The Hamming window has higher noise level inside the spec-
trum than Hann or Blackman, but smaller than the rectangular
window. The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other
bell-shaped functions. Use this window to measure amplitudes
of a periodical signal precisely.
HANNing
The noise level within the spectrum is reduced and the width of
the spectral lines enlarges. Use this window to measure ampli-
tudes of a periodical signal precisely.
BLACkmanharris
In the Blackman window, the amplitudes can be measured pre-
cisely. However, determining the frequency is more difficult. Use
this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal pre-
cisely.
FLATtop
The flat top window has low amplitude measurement errors but
a poor frequency resolution. Use this window for accurate sin-
gle-tone measurements and for measurement of amplitudes of
sinusoidal frequency components.
Manual operation: See "FFT Window" on page 160
SPECtrum:FREQuency:MAGNitude:SCALe <MagnitudeScale>
Defines the scaling unit of the y-axis.
Parameters:
<MagnitudeScale> LINear | DBM | DBV | DBUV
LINear
Linear scaling, displays the RMS value of the voltage.
DBM
Logarithmic scaling, related to 1 mW.
DBV
Logarithmic scaling, related to 1 Veff.
DBUV
Logarithmic scaling; related to 1 μVeff.
Manual operation: See "Vertical Scale" on page 162
SPECtrum:FREQuency:POSition
Defines the vertical position of the spectrum.
Parameters:
<Position> Default unit: div
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 408

Applications
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SCALe
Sets the vertical scale of the spectrum analysis waveform.
Parameters:
<Scale> Range values and unit depend on SPECtrum:FREQuency:
MAGNitude:SCALe.
DISPlay:CBAR:FFT[:POSition] <DividerPosition>
Defines the position of the divide bar between normal waveform and FFT window.
Parameters:
<DividerPosition> Vertical position in pixel, measured from the top edge. The verti-
cal display size is 800 px.
Default unit: px
15.8.3.2 Frequency settings
SPECtrum:FREQuency:CENTer...................................................................................... 409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:FULLspan...................................................................................409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SPAN......................................................................................... 409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STARt........................................................................................ 410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STOP.........................................................................................410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue]..................................................410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio.....................................................410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:CENTer
Defines the position of the displayed frequency domain, which is (Center - Span/2) to
(Center + Span/2). The width of the domain is defined using the command SPECtrum:
FREQuency:SPAN.
Parameters:
<CenterFrequency>
Manual operation: See "Center" on page 159
SPECtrum:FREQuency:FULLspan
Performs the spectrum analysis calculation for the full frequency span.
Usage: Event
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SPAN
The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range,
which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2).
Parameters:

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 409

Applications
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 159
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STARt
Defines the start frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the left display edge:
Center - Span/2
You can set start and stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span.
Parameters:
<StartFrequency> Range: Depends on various other settings, mainly on time
base, span/RBW ratio, and center frequency.
Manual operation: See "Start" on page 158
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STOP
Defines the stop frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the right display
edge: Center + Span/2
You can set start and stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span.
Parameters:
<StopFrequency> Range: Depends on various other settings, mainly on time
base, span/RBW ratio, and center frequency.
Manual operation: See "Stop" on page 158
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue] <ResolutionBandwidth>
Defines the resolution bandwidth - the minimum frequency step at which the individual
components of a spectrum can be distinguished.
Parameters:
<ResolutionBandwidth>
Range: Depends on various other settings.
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 159
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <SpanRBWratio>
Defines the ratio of span (Hz) / resolution bandwidth (Hz). The span/RBW ratio is half
the number of points used for FFT which is defined with manual operation in the menu.
Parameters:
<SpanRBWratio> Range: The value is changed in 2^n steps from 2^10 to
2^15 (1024, 2048,4096,8192,16384, 32768).
Manual operation: See "RBW" on page 159
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 410

Applications
15.8.3.3 Time settings
SPECtrum:TIME:POSition...............................................................................................411
SPECtrum:TIME:RANGe.................................................................................................411
SPECtrum:TIME:POSition <TimePosition>
Sets the time position of the analyzed time range.
Parameters:
<TimePosition>
Manual operation: See "P" on page 159
SPECtrum:TIME:RANGe <TimeRange>
Sets the time range for the time domain diagram.
Parameters:
<TimeRange>
Manual operation: See "W" on page 159
15.8.3.4 Waveform settings
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage[:ENABle]........................................................................ 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum[:ENABle]....................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum[:ENABle]........................................................................ 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum[:ENABle]....................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COUNt........................................................................ 411
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COMPlete?..................................................................412
SPECtrum:FREQuency:RESet........................................................................................ 412
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage[:ENABle] <WaveformEnable>
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum[:ENABle] <WaveformEnable>
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum[:ENABle] <WaveformEnable>
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum[:ENABle] <WaveformEnable>
Enables/diables the indicated waveform.
Parameters:
<WaveformEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Waveform" on page 161
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COUNt <AverageCount>
Defines the number of spectrums used for averaging.
Parameters:
<AverageCount>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 411

Applications
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COMPlete?
Returns the state of spectrum averaging.
Parameters:
<AverageComplete>
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:FREQuency:RESet
Resets the Min Hold, Max Hold, Spectrum and Average waveforms to the current
waveform.
Usage: Event
15.8.3.5 Waveform data
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA?........................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA?.......................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA?........................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA?..........................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:HEADer?.............................................................. 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:HEADer?............................................................. 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:HEADer?...............................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:HEADer?............................................................. 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:POINts?................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:POINts?...............................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:POINts?................................................................ 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:POINts?...............................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XINCrement?........................................................ 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XINCrement?........................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XINCrement?.........................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XINCrement?....................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XORigin?.............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XORigin?............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XORigin?.............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XORigin?............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YINCrement?........................................................ 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YINCrement?........................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YINCrement?.........................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YINCrement?....................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YORigin?.............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YORigin?............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YORigin?.............................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YORigin?............................................................. 414
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 412

Applications
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YRESolution?........................................................ 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YRESolution?....................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YRESolution?........................................................ 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YRESolution?.......................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA?
Returns the data of the indicated waveform points for transmission from the instrument
to the controlling computer. The waveform data can be used in MATLAB, for example.
Return values:
<Data> List of values
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:HEADer?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:HEADer?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:HEADer?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Header> StringData
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:POINts?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:POINts?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:POINts?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:POINts?
Returns the number of data samples that are returned with
SPECtrum:WAVeform:xxx:DATA for the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<DataPoints>
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XINCrement?
Return the level difference between two adjacent samples of the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Xincrement>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 413

Applications
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XORigin?
Returns the frequency of the first sample of the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Xorigin>
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YINCrement?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YINCrement?
Returns the voltage value per bit of the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Yincrement>
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YORigin?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YORigin?
Returns the vertical bit resolution of the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Yorigin>
Usage: Query only
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YRESolution?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YRESolution?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YRESolution?
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YRESolution?
Returns the vertical bit resolution of the indicated waveform.
Return values:
<Yresolution>
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 414

Applications
15.8.4 XY-Waveforms
DISPlay:MODE.............................................................................................................. 415
DISPlay:XY:XSOurce..................................................................................................... 415
DISPlay:XY:Y1Source.................................................................................................... 415
DISPlay:XY:Y2Source.................................................................................................... 416
DISPlay:MODE <Mode>
Sets the diagram mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> YT | XY
YT
Default time diagram with a time axis in x-direction and the sig-
nal amplitudes displayed in y-direction.
XY
XY-diagram, combines the voltage levels of two waveforms in
one diagram.
*RST: YT
DISPlay:XY:XSOurce <Source>
Defines the source to be displayed in x-direction in an XY-diagram, replacing the usual
time base.
Parameters:
CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4-channel R&S RTB2000
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "Source X" on page 164
DISPlay:XY:Y1Source <Source>
Defines the first source to be displayed in y-direction in an XY-diagram.
Parameters:
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH2
Manual operation: See "Source Y1" on page 164
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 415

Applications
DISPlay:XY:Y2Source <Source>
Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y-direction in an XY-diagram. The
command is only relevant for 4-channel R&S RTB2000 instruments.
Parameters:
<Source> NONE | CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
*RST: NONE
Manual operation: See "Source Y2" on page 164
15.8.5 Digital voltmeter
The DVM suffix <m> sets the number of the DVM measurement (measurement place).
DVM<m>:ENABle.......................................................................................................... 416
DVM<m>:SOURce.........................................................................................................416
DVM<m>:TYPE............................................................................................................. 416
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?............................................................................................ 417
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]:STATus?................................................................................ 417
DVM<m>:ENABle <VoltmeterEnable>
Enables and disables all configured meter measurements.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<VoltmeterEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Meter (on/off)" on page 166
DVM<m>:SOURce <Source>
Selects an analog channel as the source of the selected meter measurement.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Sets the number of the meter measurement.
Parameters:
CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4-channel instruments.
DVM<m>:TYPE <MeasurementType>
Sets the measurement type for the indicated DVM measurement.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 416

Applications
Set OFF to disable the measurement.

Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Parameters:
<MeasurementType> DC | ACDCrms | ACRMs | OFF
DC: mean value of the signal
ACDCrms: RMS value of the signal (AC+DC RMS)
ACRMs: RMS value of the signal's AC component (AC RMS)
OFF: disables the selected meter measurement.
*RST: OFF
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?
Returns the current value of the selected meter measurement.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Example: DVM2:SOUR CH2
DVM2:TYPE DCRMs
DVM2:RES?
<-- 7.089E-01
An RMS measurement is performed on measurement place 2,
on channel 2. The result is 708.9 mV.
Usage: Query only
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]:STATus?
Returns the result value and the status of the result.
The status is the decimal representation of a 4-bit register value:
● Bit 0 = 1: result is valid
● Bit 1 = 1: no result available
● Bit 2 = 1: clipping occurs
● Bit 3 = 1: no period found
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<CurrentValue> Measured value
<Status> Decimal status value
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 417

Applications
Example: DVM:SOUR CH1

DVM:TYPE MEAN
DVM:RES:STAT?
<-- 4.968E-01,5
The result value of the mean measurement on channel 1 is
496.1 mV. The result status is 5 (decimal) = 0101 (binary). That
means, the result is valid (bit 0 = 1), and the signal is clipped by
the limits of the ADC range (bit 3 = 1).
Usage: Query only
15.8.6 Trigger counter
TCOunter:ENABle..........................................................................................................418
TCOunter:SOURce........................................................................................................ 418
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:FREQuency?......................................................................... 418
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:PERiod?................................................................................ 418
TCOunter:ENABle <Enable>
Enables or disables the trigger counter measurements.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
TCOunter:SOURce
Sets the measurement source for the counter.
Parameters:
<CounterSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | TRIGger
TRIGger: Trigger source
*RST: TRIG
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:FREQuency?
Returns the frequency of the trigger source.
Return values:
<FrequencyValue> Default unit: Hz
Usage: Query only
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:PERiod?
Returns the period of the trigger source.
Return values:
<PeriodValue> Default unit: s
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 418

Applications
Usage: Query only
15.8.7 Bode plot (option R&S RTB-K36)
15.8.7.1 Bode plot setup
BPLot:ENABle............................................................................................................... 419
BPLot:AUToscale........................................................................................................... 419
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:COUNt.................................................................................. 419
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:AMPLitude............................................................. 420
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:FREQuency............................................................420
BPLot:AMPLitude:MODE................................................................................................ 420
BPLot:FREQuency:DATA?.............................................................................................. 420
BPLot:FREQuency:STARt...............................................................................................421
BPLot:FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................... 421
BPLot:INPut[:SOURce]................................................................................................... 421
BPLot:MEASurement:DELay...........................................................................................421
BPLot:MEASurement:POINt[:DISPLAY]............................................................................421
BPLot:OUTPut[:SOURce]............................................................................................... 422
BPLot:POINts:LOGarithmic............................................................................................. 422
BPLot:REPeat............................................................................................................... 422
BPLot:RESet................................................................................................................. 422
BPLot:STATe................................................................................................................. 422
BPLot:ENABle
Enables the Bode plot diagram.
Parameters:
<PlotEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
BPLot:AUToscale
Sets the start and stop frequencies for the Bode plot automatically.
Usage: Event
See "Stop" on page 171
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:COUNt
Sets the number of different points that you can define for the amplitude profile.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 419

Applications
Parameters:
<NumberOfPoints> Range: 2 to 16
Increment: 1
*RST: 4
Manual operation: See "Points" on page 174
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:AMPLitude
Sets the amplitude of the specified point of the amplitude profile.
Parameters:
<AmplitudeMode>
Manual operation: See "Configuration" on page 174
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:FREQuency
Sets the frequency of the specified point of the amplitude profile.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Manual operation: See "Configuration" on page 174
BPLot:AMPLitude:MODE
Sets the amplitude mode.
Parameters:
<AmplitudeMode> CONStant | PROFil
CONStant
In the amplitude constant mode, there is a fixed amplitude for all
frequencies.
PROFil
In the amplitude profile mode, you can define different ampli-
tudes for different frequency.
*RST: CONS
Manual operation: See "Amplitude Profile" on page 173
BPLot:FREQuency:DATA?
Returns the data of the frequency waveform.
Parameters:
<FrequencyData>
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 420

Applications
BPLot:FREQuency:STARt
Sets the start frequency of the sweep for the Bode plot.
Parameters:
<StartFrequency> Range: 10 to 25e6
Increment: 1
*RST: 100
BPLot:FREQuency:STOP
Sets the stop frequency of the sweep for the Bode plot.
Parameters:
<StopFrequency> Range: 10 to 25e6
Increment: 1
*RST: 1e6
BPLot:INPut[:SOURce]
Selects the channel for the input signal of the DUT.
Parameters:
<InputSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "Input" on page 172
BPLot:MEASurement:DELay
Sets a time delay, that the system waits before measuring the next point of the bode
plot.
Parameters:
<MeasDelay> Range: 0 to 10.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Meas. Delay" on page 175
BPLot:MEASurement:POINt[:DISPLAY]
Enables the display of the measurement points in the bode plot.
Parameters:
<PointDisplay> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Display Meas. Points" on page 175
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 421

Applications
BPLot:OUTPut[:SOURce]
Selects the channel for the output signal of the DUT.
Parameters:
<OutputSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
*RST: CH2
Manual operation: See "Output" on page 172
BPLot:POINts:LOGarithmic
Sets the number of points per decade that are measured.
Parameters:
<PointsPerDecade> Range: 10 to 500
Increment: 1
*RST: 10
Manual operation: See "Points per Decade" on page 174
BPLot:REPeat
Repeats the measurement, using the same parameters.
Parameters:
<RepeatedMeasurement>
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Repeat" on page 172
BPLot:RESet
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset" on page 172
BPLot:STATe
Starts the Bode plot measurement.
Parameters:
<PlotState> RUN | STOP
*RST: STOP
Manual operation: See "Run" on page 172
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 422

Applications
15.8.7.2 Bode plot diagram settings
BPLot:GAIN:DATA?........................................................................................................423
BPLot:GAIN:ENABle...................................................................................................... 423
BPLot:GAIN:POSition..................................................................................................... 423
BPLot:GAIN:SCALe....................................................................................................... 423
BPLot:PHASe:DATA?..................................................................................................... 424
BPLot:PHASe:ENABle?..................................................................................................424
BPLot:PHASe:POSition?................................................................................................ 424
BPLot:PHASe:SCALe?................................................................................................... 424
BPLot:AMPLitude:ENABle.............................................................................................. 424
BPLot:AMPLitude:POSition............................................................................................. 425
BPLot:AMPLitude:SCALe................................................................................................425
BPLot:GAIN:DATA?
Returns the data of the gain waveform.
Parameters:
<GainData>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:GAIN:ENABle
Enables the gain waveform for the Bode plot.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Gain" on page 172
BPLot:GAIN:POSition
Sets the vertical position of the gain waveform in divisions.
Parameters:
<WaveformPosition> Range: -20.0 to 20.0
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 3.0
BPLot:GAIN:SCALe
Sets the vertical scale for the gain waveform.
Parameters:
<WaveformScale> Range: 0.1 to 20.0
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 20.0
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 423

Applications
BPLot:PHASe:DATA?
Returns the data of the phase waveform.
Parameters:
<PhaseData>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:PHASe:ENABle?
Enables the phase waveform for the Bode plot.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Phase" on page 172
BPLot:PHASe:POSition?
Sets the vertical position of the phase waveform in divisions.
Parameters:
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 0.0
Usage: Query only
BPLot:PHASe:SCALe?
Sets the vertical scale for the phase waveform.
Parameters:
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 45.0
Usage: Query only
BPLot:AMPLitude:ENABle
Enables the amplitude waveform for the Bode plot.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Amplitude Profile" on page 173
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 424

Applications
BPLot:AMPLitude:POSition
Sets the vertical position of the amplitude waveform in divisions.
Parameters:
Increment: 0.1
*RST: -5.0
BPLot:AMPLitude:SCALe
Sets the vertical scale for the amplitude waveform.
Parameters:
Increment: 0.001
*RST: 1.0
15.8.7.3 Marker table
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:FREQ?.......................................................................... 425
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:GAIN?........................................................................... 425
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:PHASe?........................................................................ 426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:FREQuency..................................................................................... 426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:GAIN?............................................................................................. 426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:INDex..............................................................................................426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:PHASe?.......................................................................................... 426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:SSCReen.........................................................................................427
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:FREQ?
Returns the delta value of the frequency between the two markers.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<FrequencyDifference>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:GAIN?
Returns the delta value of the gain between the two markers.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<GainDifference>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 425

Applications
Usage: Query only
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:PHASe?
Returns the delta value of the phase between the two markers.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<PhaseDifference>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:MARKer<m>:FREQuency
Returns the frequency for the specified marker.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<MarkerFrequency>
BPLot:MARKer<m>:GAIN?
Returns the gain for the specified marker.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Selects the marker number.
Parameters:
<PhaseValue>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:MARKer<m>:INDex
Returns the index for the specified marker.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<Index>
BPLot:MARKer<m>:PHASe?
Returns the phase value for the specified marker.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 426

Documenting results
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Parameters:
<GainValue>
Usage: Query only
BPLot:MARKer<m>:SSCReen
Resets the marker to their initial positions. This is helpful if the markers have disap-
peared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..2
Usage: Event
15.9 Documenting results

This chapter describes commands on how to transfer data from the instrument to a
computer, how to export data to file, how to print and save screenshots, and how to
manage measurement settings.
● Transfer of waveform data.................................................................................... 427
● Waveform data export to file................................................................................. 439
● Screenshots.......................................................................................................... 440
● Instrument settings: mass MEMomory subsystem................................................443
15.9.1 Transfer of waveform data
This chapter describes data transfer commands that have effect on other commands in
different applications of the instrument, and transfer commands that work in the same
way.
15.9.1.1 Format settings
FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................. 427
FORMat:BORDer...........................................................................................................429
FORMat[:DATA] <DataFormat>,<Accuracy>
Defines the format for data export with
● CHANnel<m>:DATA? on page 429
● CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope? on page 432
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA? on page 433
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 427

Documenting results
● REFCurve<m>:DATA? on page 434

Parameters:
<DataFormat> ASCii | REAL | UINTeger
ASCii
List of values, for example, 1.23,1.22,1.24,.. File format for
waveform export is TXT.
<Accuracy> is 0 which means that the instrument selects the
number of digits to be returned. The query returns ASC,0.
REAL
Binary format. <Accuracy> is 32. The query returns REAL,32.
File format for waveform export is FLT.
The data is stored as binary data (Definite Length Block Data
according to IEEE 488.2). Each waveform value is formatted in
32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating-Point-Format.
The schema of the result string is as follows:
#41024<value1><value2>…<value n> with:
#4 = number of digits of the following number (= 4 in the exam-
ple)
1024 = number of following data bytes (= 1024 in the example)
<value> = 4-byte floating point values
UINTeger
Unsigned integer format, binary values with length 8 bit (1 byte
per sample), 16 bit (2 bytes per sample) or 32 bit (4 bytes per
sample): UINT,8 or UINT,16 or UINT,32. File format for
waveform export is BIN.
The data range for UINT,8 is 0 to 255, the data range for
UINT,16 is 0 to 65.535 and for UINT,32 is 232 - 1.
The schema of the result string is the same as for REAL format.
For data conversion, you need the results of following com-
mands:
...:DATA:XORigin?; ...:DATA:XINCrement?; ..:DATA:
Yorigin?; ...:DATA:YINCrement?; ...:DATA:
YRESolution?. They are described below in this chapter. The
way of data conversion is described in Chapter 15.2.1.4, "Read-
ing waveform data in unsigned integer format", on page 305.
32 bit data is relevant for average waveforms if averaging 512 or
1024 waveforms. The resulting data is 17 bits long (512 wave-
forms) or 18 bit (1024 waveforms).
CSV
Only for waveform export in CSV files. List of comma-separated
values, for example, 1.23,1.22,1.24,..
<Accuracy> is 0 which means that the instrument selects the
number of digits to be returned. The query returns CSV,0.
*RST: ASC
<Accuracy> 0 | 8 | 16 | 32
Length of a data value in bit
0 - for ASC only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 428

Documenting results
32 - for REAL
8 | 16 | 32 - for UINT
*RST: 0
Example: Set the ASCII data format:
FORM ASC
Example: Query for data format:
FORM?
-> ASC,0
Example: Set the unsigned integer format, 16 bit data length:
FORM UINT,16
FORMat:BORDer <ByteOrder>
Defines the byte order for binary data export if FORMat[:DATA] is set to REAL or
UINT,16|32.
Parameters:
<ByteOrder> MSBFirst | LSBFirst
MSBFirst
Big endian, most significant byte first
LSBFirst
Little endian, least significant byte first
*RST: MSBF
Example: Reading waveform data in real format
ByteOrder 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit
MSBF 0xab 0xAB CD 0xAB CD 00 00
LSBF not relevant 0xCD AB 0x00 00 CD AB
15.9.1.2 Analog channels
CHANnel<m>:DATA?..................................................................................................... 429
CHANnel<m>:DATA:HEADer?.........................................................................................430
CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts............................................................................................430
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope?...................................................................................... 432
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:HEADer?......................................................................... 432
CHANnel<m>:DATA?
Returns the data of the analog channel waveform for transmission from the instrument
to the controlling computer. The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB, for example.
To set the export format, use FORMat[:DATA] on page 427.
To set the range of samples to be returned, use CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts.
For envelope waveforms, use the CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope? command.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 429

Documenting results
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Return values:
<Data> List of values according to the format settings - the voltages of
recorded waveform samples.
Example: FORM ASC
CHAN1:DATA?
-0.125000,-0.123016,-0.123016,-0.123016,
-0.123016,-0.123016,...
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.3, "Reading waveform data in real format",
on page 305 and Chapter 15.2.1.4, "Reading waveform data in
unsigned integer format", on page 305
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the channel waveform. For envelope waveforms, use the
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:HEADer? command.
Table 15-1: Header data
Position Meaning Example
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 120000
4 Number of values per sample interval, usually 1. 1
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<DataHeader> Comma-separated value list
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,120000,1
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts <PointSelection>
As a setting, the command selects a range of samples that will be returned with
CHANnel<m>:DATA? and CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope?. As a query, it returns the
number of returned samples for the selected range.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 430

Documenting results
Depending on the current settings, the memory can contains more data samples than
the screen is able to display. In this case, you can decide which data will be saved:
samples stored in the memory or only the displayed samples.
Note: The sample range can only be changed in STOP mode. If the acquisition is run-
ning, DEF is always used automatically. If the acquisition has been stopped, data can
be read from the memory, and all settings are available.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
The command affects all channels, and the suffix is irrelevant.
Setting parameters:
<PointSelection> DEFault | MAXimum | DMAXimum
Sets the range for data queries.
DEFault
Waveform points that are visible on the screen. At maximum
waveform rate, the instrument stores more samples than visible
on the screen, and DEF returns less values than acquired.
MAXimum
All waveform samples that are stored in the memory. Only avail-
able if acquisition is stopped.
DMAXimum
Display maximum: Waveform samples stored in the current
waveform record but only for the displayed time range. At maxi-
mum waveform rate, the instrument stores more samples than
visible on the screen, and DMAX returns more values than DEF.
Only available if acquisition is stopped.
*RST: DEFault
Return values:
<Points> Number of data points in the selected range.
Default unit: Samples
Example: CHAN:DATA:POIN DEF
CHAN:DATA:POIN?;:CHAN2:DATA:POIN?
Returned values: 10416;10416
CHAN:DATA:POIN DMAX
CHAN:DATA:POIN MAX
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.3, "Reading waveform data in real format",
on page 305
Manual operation: See "Points" on page 180
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 431

Documenting results
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope?
Returns the data of the envelope. The envelope consists of two waveforms. The wave-
forms data can be used in MATLAB, for example.
Use this command only for envelope waveforms. For other channel waveforms use
CHANnel<m>:DATA?.
To set the export format, use FORMat[:DATA].
To set the range of samples to be returned, use CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<EnvelopeData> List of values according to the format settings - the voltages of
the envelope points. The list contains two values for each sam-
ple interval.
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:HEADer?
Returns information on the envelope waveform.
Use this command only for envelope waveforms. for all other channel waveforms use
CHANnel<m>:DATA:HEADer?.
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
3 Number of samples 120000
4 Number of values per sample interval. For envelope 2

waveforms the value is 2.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
the instrument.
Parameters:
<EnvelopeHeader> Comma-separated value list
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,200000,2
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 432

Documenting results
15.9.1.3 Math waveforms
In addition to the commands described below, consider also the following commands:
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA?
Returns the data of the math waveform points for transmission from the instrument to
the controlling computer. The waveforms data can be used in MATHLAB, for example.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Return values:
<Data> List of values according to the format settings - voltages, or
magnitudes of a spectrum.
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the math waveform.
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Return values:
<Header> Comma-separated value list
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,120000,1
Usage: Query only
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:POINts?
Returns the number of data samples that are returned with CALCulate:MATH<m>:
DATA?.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 433

Documenting results
Suffix: .
<m> 1..5
Return values:
<DataPoints> Number of data points
Usage: Query only
15.9.1.4 Reference waveforms
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● REFCurve<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA?
Returns the data of the reference waveform for transmission from the instrument to the
controlling computer. The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB, for example.
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Selects the reference waveform, the internal reference storage.
Return values:
<Data> List of values according to the format settings.
Usage: Query only
REFCurve<m>:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the reference waveform.
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Selects the reference waveform, the internal reference storage.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 434

Documenting results
Parameters:
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,200000,1
Usage: Query only
15.9.1.5 Masks
● MASK:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● MASK:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● MASK:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● MASK:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● MASK:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
MASK:DATA?
Returns the data of the mask. The mask consists of two limit curves.
Return values:
<Data> List of values according to the format settings - the y-values of
the mask points. The list contains two values for each sample
interval.
Usage: Query only
MASK:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the mask data that is delivered with MASK:DATA?.
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
3 Number of samples 200000
4 Number of values per sample interval. For masks 2

the value is 2.
Return values:
<DataHeader> Comma-separated value list
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,200000,2
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 435

Documenting results
15.9.1.6 Logic channels
See Chapter 15.12.1.3, "Logic channels - waveform data", on page 534
15.9.1.7 Parameters for data evaluation
To analyze waveform data, you need some parameters, which are queried using the
following commands.
● CHANnel<m>: Selects the analog input channel, range 1 | 2 or 1...4 depending on
the number of channels
● MATH<m>: Selects the math waveform, range 1..5
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XORigin?........................................................................................ 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XORigin?......................................................................... 437
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XORigin?............................................................................ 437
MASK:DATA:XORigin?................................................................................................... 437
LOGic:DATA:XORigin?..............................................................................................437
DIGital<m>:DATA:XORigin?............................................................................................ 437
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XORigin?.......................................................................................437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XINCrement?...................................................................................437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XINCrement?................................................................... 437
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XINCrement?.......................................................................437
MASK:DATA:XINCrement?............................................................................................. 437
LOGic:DATA:XINCrement?........................................................................................437
DIGital<m>:DATA:XINCrement?...................................................................................... 437
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XINCrement?................................................................................. 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YORigin?........................................................................................ 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YORigin?......................................................................... 437
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YORigin?............................................................................ 438
MASK:DATA:YORigin?................................................................................................... 438
LOGic:DATA:YORigin?..............................................................................................438
DIGital<m>:DATA:YORigin?............................................................................................ 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YORigin?.......................................................................................438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YINCrement?...................................................................................438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YINCrement?................................................................... 438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YINCrement?.......................................................................438
MASK:DATA:YINCrement?............................................................................................. 438
LOGic:DATA:YINCrement?........................................................................................438
DIGital<m>:DATA:YINCrement?...................................................................................... 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YINCrement?................................................................................. 438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................. 438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YRESolution?...................................................................438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YRESolution?...................................................................... 438
MASK:DATA:YRESolution?............................................................................................. 438
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 436

Documenting results
LOGic:DATA:YRESolution?....................................................................................... 438
DIGital<m>:DATA:YRESolution?......................................................................................438
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XORigin?
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XORigin?
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XORigin?
MASK:DATA:XORigin?
LOGic:DATA:XORigin?
DIGital<m>:DATA:XORigin?
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XORigin?
Return the time of the first sample of the indicated waveform.
The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined
(FORM UINT, 8|16|32).
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<Xorigin> Time in s
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.4, "Reading waveform data in unsigned inte-
ger format", on page 305
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XINCrement?
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XINCrement?
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XINCrement?
MASK:DATA:XINCrement?
LOGic:DATA:XINCrement?
DIGital<m>:DATA:XINCrement?
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XINCrement?
Return the time difference between two adjacent samples of the indicated waveform.
(FORM UINT, 8|16|32).
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<Xincrement> Time in s
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YORigin?
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YORigin?
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 437

Documenting results
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YORigin?
MASK:DATA:YORigin?
LOGic:DATA:YORigin?
DIGital<m>:DATA:YORigin?
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YORigin?
Return the voltage value for binary value 0 of the indicated waveform.
(FORM UINT, 8|16|32).
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<Yorigin> Voltage in V
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YINCrement?
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YINCrement?
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YINCrement?
MASK:DATA:YINCrement?
LOGic:DATA:YINCrement?
DIGital<m>:DATA:YINCrement?
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YINCrement?
Return the voltage value per bit of the indicated waveform.
(FORM UINT, 8|16|32).
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<Yincrement> Voltage in V
Usage: Query only
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YRESolution?
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YRESolution?
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YRESolution?
MASK:DATA:YRESolution?
LOGic:DATA:YRESolution?
DIGital<m>:DATA:YRESolution?
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YRESolution?
Return the vertical bit resolution of the indicated waveform.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 438

Documenting results
(FORM UINT, 8|16|32).
Suffix: .
<m> 1..4
Return values:
<Yresolution> For default waveforms, the resolution is 8 bit.
If high resolution, average or filter are set for the waveform, the
resolution is 16 bit.
Usage: Query only
15.9.2 Waveform data export to file
EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce............................................................................................ 439
EXPort:WFMSave:DESTination....................................................................................... 439
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME................................................................................................440
EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE.................................................................................................440
EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce <WaveformSource>
Defines the waveform to be exported.
Parameters:
<WaveformSource> CH1..4 | D70 | D158 | MA1 | RE1..4
CH1..4
Analog channels CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4
D70
Pod 1, digital channels D0 to D7 are exported together
D158
Pod 2, digital channels D8 to D15 are exported together.
MA1
Mathematic waveform
RE1..4
Reference waveforms RE1 | RE2 | RE3 | RE4
EXPort:WFMSave:DESTination
Defines the directory where waveforms are saved. The specified directory must exist
before the command is sent.
Parameters:
String with directory path
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 439

Documenting results
Example: EXP:WFMS:DEST "/USB_FRONT/WFM"

Sets the path for saved waveforms to USB flash drive.
Manual operation: See "Destination" on page 179
See "Destination" on page 184
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME <FileName>
Defines the path and filename for a waveform data file that will be saved with EXPort:
WAVeform:SAVE. The data format and file extension is defined using FORMat[:
DATA].
The specified directory must exist before the command is sent (MMEMory:
MDIRectory). Existing files will be overwritten.
You can also change the storage location, file name and/or file format manually in the
[File] > "Waveforms" menu. Remote control uses the recent settings.
Parameters:
Example: FORMAT CSV
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME "/USB_FRONT/WAVEFORMS/WFM01"
EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE
The waveform data is saved to WFM01.CSV. The folder

WAVEFORMS must exist before the command is sent.
Manual operation: See "File Name" on page 179
EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE
Executes saving a waveform, for which the path and filename have been defined by
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME.
Usage: Event
15.9.3 Screenshots
This chapter describes remote commands used to save screenshots.

EXPort:SCRSave:DESTination........................................................................................441
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................... 441
HCOPy:CWINdow..........................................................................................................441
HCOPy[:IMMediate]....................................................................................................... 441
HCOPy:DATA?.............................................................................................................. 442
HCOPy:FORMat............................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy:LANGuage........................................................................................................ 442
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 440

Documenting results
HCOPy:SIZE:X?............................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy:SIZE:Y?............................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy:COLor:SCHeme.................................................................................................442
EXPort:SCRSave:DESTination
Defines the directory where screenshots are saved. The specified directory must exist
before the command is sent.
Parameters:
String with directory path
Example: EXP:SCRS:DEST "/USB_FRONT/SCREEN"
Sets the path for saved screenshots to USB flash drive.
MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
Defines the file name to store an image of the display with HCOPy[:IMMediate].
Parameters:
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.1, "Saving screenshots to file", on page 303
Manual operation: See "File Name" on page 184
HCOPy:CWINdow <CloseWindow>
If ON, open dialog boxes and menus are closed before the screenshot is saved. Thus,
the waveforms and results are always visible on the screenshot.
Parameters:
<CloseWindow> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Close window & menu" on page 185
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Saves a screenshot to the specified file.
Before starting, make sure that:
● The path for storage is defined correctly by MMEMory:CDIRectory
● The file name for storage is defined by MMEMory:NAME.
Usage: Event
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 441

Documenting results
HCOPy:DATA?
Returns the data of the image file. The file format is defined using HCOPy:LANGuage
(BMP | PNG)
Return values:
<ScreenShot> 488.2 block data
Usage: Query only
HCOPy:FORMat <Format>
HCOPy:LANGuage <Format>
Defines the format of the screenshot.
Parameters:
<Format> BMP | PNG | GIF
BMP: Windows Bitmap Format
PNG: Portable Network Graphic
GIF: Graphics interchange format
*RST: PNG
HCOPy:SIZE:X?
Returns the number of horizontal pixels of the oscilloscope screen.
Return values:
<Xsize> Numeric value
Usage: Query only
HCOPy:SIZE:Y?
Returns the number of vertical pixels of the oscilloscope screen.
Return values:
<Ysize> Numeric value
Usage: Query only
HCOPy:COLor:SCHeme <ColorScheme>
Defines the color mode for screenshots.
Parameters:
<ColorScheme> COLor | GRAYscale | INVerted
INVerted inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is
depicted on a white background.
*RST: COLor
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 442

Documenting results
Example: see Chapter 15.2.1.1, "Saving screenshots to file", on page 303

Manual operation: See "Color Mode" on page 185
15.9.4 Instrument settings: mass MEMomory subsystem
The Mass MEMomory subsystem provides commands to access the storage media
and to save and reload instrument settings and data.
The R&S RTB2000 has the following storage devices indicated as drives:
● /INT: internal storage with default directories for each data type
● /USB_FRONT: USB connector on the front panel
Common computer and network drives like C:, D:, \\server\share are not availa-
ble.
Name conventions
The names of files and directories have to meet the following rules:
● Only the 8.3 format with ASCI characters is supported.
● No special characters are allowed.
● Use / (slash) instead of \ (backslash).
MMEMory:DRIVes?........................................................................................................443
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................444
MMEMory:MDIRectory................................................................................................... 444
MMEMory:CDIRectory....................................................................................................444
MMEMory:RDIRectory....................................................................................................444
MMEMory:DCATalog?.................................................................................................... 445
MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?........................................................................................ 445
MMEMory:CATalog?.......................................................................................................446
MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?.......................................................................................... 447
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................... 447
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................... 447
MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................448
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................ 448
MMEMory:STORe:STATe................................................................................................448
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe..................................................................................................449
MMEMory:DRIVes?
Returns the storage devices available on the R&S RTB2000.
Parameters:
<Drive> List of strings, for example, ""/INT"",""/USB_FRONT""
/INT: internal storage
/USB_FRONT: USB connector on the front panel
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 443

Documenting results
MMEMory:MSIS <Drive>
Changes the default storage location (drive).
Parameters:
<Drive> One of the available drives: /INT, or /USB_FRONT
Example: MMEM:MSIS '/USB_FRONT'
Sets the USB flash drive connected to the front panel as storage
location.
MMEMory:MDIRectory <DirectoryName>
Creates a new directory with the specified name.
Setting parameters:
<DirectoryName> String parameter
Absolute path including the storage device, or relative to the cur-
rent directory.
Example: Create directory DATA on the front USB flash device, with abso-
lute path:
MMEM:MDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA"
Example: Create directory JANUARY in the DATA directory, with relative
path:
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA/"
MMEM:MDIR "JANUARY"
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:CDIRectory <DirectoryName>
Specifies the current directory for file access. Before using the command, create the
directory with MMEMory:MDIRectory.
Setting parameters:
<DirectoryName> String parameter to specify the directory, including the storage
device.
Example: MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA"
Example: Chapter 15.2.1.2, "Saving, copying, and loading setup data",
on page 304
MMEMory:RDIRectory <DirectoryName>
Deletes the specified directory.
Note: All subdirectories and all files in the specified directory and in the subdirectories
will be deleted!
You cannot delete the current directory or a superior directory. In this case, the instru-
ment returns an execution error.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 444

Documenting results
Setting parameters:
<DirectoryName> String parameter, absolute path or relative to the current direc-
tory
Example: MMEM:RDIR "/INT/TEST"
Deletes the directory TEST in the internal storage device, and all
files and subdirectories in the directory.
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:DCATalog? <PathName>
Returns the subdirectories of the specified directory. The result corresponds to the
number of strings returned by the MMEMory:DCATalog:LENgth? command.
Query parameters:
<PathName> String parameter
Specifies the directory.
Return values:
<FileEntry> String parameter
List of subdirectory strings separated by commas. If the speci-
fied directory does not have any subdirectory, the current and
the parent directories are returned (".,,0","..,,0")
Example: Query for directories with absolute path:
MMEM:DCAT? "/USB_FRONT/*"
received ".,,0","..,,0","DATA,,0","DATA_NEW,,
0","SCREENSHOTS,,0"
MMEM:DCAT:LENG? "/USB_FRONT/*"
received 5
Example: Query for directories in the current directory:
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA/"
MMEM:DCAT? "*"
received ".,,0","..,,0","JANUARY,,0",
"FEBRUARY,,0"
MMEM:DCAT:LENG? "*"
received 4
Example: Query with filter:
MMEM:DCAT? "/USB_FRONT/DA*"
received "DATA,,0","DATA_NEW,,0"
MMEM:DCAT:LENG? "/USB_FRONT/DA*"
received 2
Usage: Query only
MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? <PathName>
Returns the number of directories in specified directory. The result corresponds to the
number of strings returned by the MMEMory:DCATalog? command.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 445

Documenting results
Query parameters:
Specifies the directory.
Return values:
<DirCount> Number of directories.
Example: MMEMory:DCATalog?
Usage: Query only
MMEMory:CATalog? <PathName>[,<Format>]
Returns the a list of files contained in the specified directory. The result corresponds to
the number of files returned by the MMEMory:CATalog:LENgth? command.
Query parameters:
Specifies the directory. A filter can be used to list, for example,
only files of a given file type.
<Format> ALL | WTIMe
ALL: Extended result including file, date, time and attributes
WTIMe: Result including file, date, time
Return values:
<UsedMemory> Total amount of storage currently used in the directory, in bytes.
<FreeMemory> Total amount of storage available in the directory, in bytes.
<FileEntry> String parameter
All files of the directory are listed with their file name, format and
size in bytes.
Example: Query for files in the DATA directory, with absolute path:
MMEM:CAT? "/USB_FRONT/DATA/*.*"
received: 511104,8633856,"MONDAY.TXT,,8",
"TUESDAY.CSV,,8"
Example: Query for TXT files in the DATA directory, with relative path:
MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA"'
MMEM:CAT? "*.TXT"
received: 511104,8633856,"MONDAY.TXT,,8"
MMEM:CAT:LENGTH? "*.TXT"
received 1
on page 304
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 446

Documenting results
MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? <PathName>
Returns the number of files in the specified directory. The result corresponds to the
number of files returned by the MMEMory:CATalog? command.
Query parameters:
Directory to be queried, absolute or relative path
Return values:
<Count> Number of files.
Example: See examples under MMEMory:CATalog?.
Usage: Query only
MMEMory:COPY <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
Copies data to another directory on the same or different storage device. The file name
can be changed, too.
Setting parameters:
<FileSource> String parameter
Name and path of the file to be copied
<FileDestination> String parameter
Name and path of the new file. If the file already exists, it is over-
written without notice.
Example: MMEM:COPY "/INT/SETTINGS/SET001.SET",
"/USB_FRONT/SETTINGS/TESTSET1.SET"
on page 304
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:MOVE <FileSource>,<FileDestination>
Moves an existing file to a new location.
Setting parameters:
Path and name of the file to be moved
<FileDestination> String parameter
Path and name of the new file
Example: MMEM:MOVE "/INT/SETTINGS/SET001.SET",
"/USB_FRONT/SETTINGS/SET001.SET"
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 447

Documenting results
MMEMory:DELete <FileSource>
Removes a file from the specified directory.
Setting parameters:
File name and path of the file to be removed. If the path is omit-
ted, the specified file will be deleted in the current directory. Fil-
ters are not allowed.
on page 304
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:DATA <FileName>,<Data>
Writes data to the specified file in the current directory MMEMory:CDIRectory, or
reads the data.
Parameters:
<Data> 488.2 block data
The block begins with character '#'. The next digit is the length of
the length information, followed by this given number of digits
providing the number of bytes in the binary data attached.
Parameters for setting and query:
<FileName> String parameter containing the file name
Example: MMEM:DATA "abc.txt", #216This is the file
#2: the length infomation has two digits
16: the binary data has 16 bytes.
MMEM:DATA? "abc.txt"
received: #216This is the file
on page 304
MMEMory:STORe:STATe <StateNumber>,<FileName>
Saves the current device settings to the specified file in the current directory.
Setting parameters:
<StateNumber> Range: 1 to 1
Increment: 0
*RST: 1
File name, with or without file extension
Example: MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA"'
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,"MORNING.SET"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 448

General instrument setup
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.2, "Saving, copying, and loading setup

data", on page 304
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <StateNumber>,<FileName>
Loads the device settings from the specified file in the current directory.
Setting parameters:
<StateNumber> Range: 1 to 1
Increment: 0
*RST: 1
File name, with or without file extension
Example: MMEM:CDIR "/USB_FRONT/DATA"'
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,"MORNING"
Example: See Chapter 15.2.1.2, "Saving, copying, and loading setup
data", on page 304
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Load" on page 178
15.10 General instrument setup

● Display settings..................................................................................................... 449
● System settings.....................................................................................................454
● LAN settings..........................................................................................................458
● USB settings......................................................................................................... 460
● Trigger out.............................................................................................................461
● Firmware update................................................................................................... 462
15.10.1 Display settings
DISPlay:LANGuage........................................................................................................450
DISPlay:DTIMe.............................................................................................................. 450
DISPlay:CLEar[:SCReen]................................................................................................450
DISPlay:PERSistence:TYPE........................................................................................... 450
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME............................................................................................ 451
DISPlay:PERSistence:CLEar.......................................................................................... 451
DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe].........................................................................................451
DISPlay:PERSistence:INFinite.........................................................................................452
DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe................................................................................................. 452
DISPlay:DIALog:MESSage............................................................................................. 452
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 449

DISPlay:GRID:STYLe.....................................................................................................452
DISPlay:INTensity:GRID................................................................................................. 452
DISPlay:INTensity:WAVeform.......................................................................................... 453
DISPlay:PALette............................................................................................................ 453
DISPlay:STYLe..............................................................................................................453
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation[:ENABle]................................................................................ 454
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation:TRACk...................................................................................454
DISPlay:LANGuage <Language>
Selects the language in which the button labels and other screen information is dis-
played.
Parameters:
<Language> ENGLish | GERMan | FRENch | SPANish | RUSSian |
SCHinese | TCHinese | JAPanese | KORean | ITALian |
PORTuguese | CZECh | POLish
Supported languages are listed in the "Specifications" data
sheet.
*RST: ENGL
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 198
DISPlay:DTIMe <DateTimeVisible>
Switches the date and time display in the upper right corner of the screen on or off.
Parameters:
<DateTimeVisible> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Display Date & Time" on page 199
DISPlay:CLEar[:SCReen]
Deletes all waveforms and measurement results.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "[Clear Screen]" on page 45
DISPlay:PERSistence:TYPE <Type>
Defines how long every new data point remains on the screen.
Parameters:
<Type> OFF | TIME | INFinite
OFF
Deactivates persistence.
TIME
Data points remain on the screen for the duration defined with
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 450

INF
Data points remain on the screen infinitely until persistence is
set to OFF.
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Persistence" on page 193
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME <Time>
Persistence time if persistence is active (DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe] is set to
TIME.
Each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration
defined here. .
Parameters:
<Time> Persistence time
Range: 50e-3 to 12.8
Increment: 50e-3
*RST: 50e-3
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Time" on page 193
DISPlay:PERSistence:CLEar
Removes the displayed persistent waveform from the screen.
Usage: Event
DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe] <State>
Defines whether the waveform persists on the screen or whether the screen is
refreshed continuously.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
The waveform persists for the time defined using DISPlay:
PERSistence:TIME.
OFF
The waveform does not persist on the screen. Only the currently
measured values are displayed.
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 451

DISPlay:PERSistence:INFinite <InfinitePersistence>
Sets the persistence time to infinite if DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe] is ON. each
new data point remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the per-
sistence is cleared.
Parameters:
<InfinitePersistence> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe
Closes an open message box.
Usage: Event
DISPlay:DIALog:MESSage <MessageText>
Sends a message text to the instrument and displays it in a message box.
To close the message box, use DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe.
Setting parameters:
<MessageText> String
String that contains the message.
Example: DISP:DIAL:MESS 'My message'
DISP:DIAL:CLOS
Usage: Setting only
DISPlay:GRID:STYLe <Style>
Defines how the grid is displayed.
Parameters:
<Style> LINes | RETicle | NONE
LINes
Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines.
RETicle
Displays crosshairs instead of a grid.
NONE
No grid is displayed.
*RST: LIN
Manual operation: See "Grid" on page 195
DISPlay:INTensity:GRID <Intensity>
Defines the brightness of the grid lines in the diagram.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 452

Parameters:
<Intensity> Range: 0 to 100
Increment: 1
*RST: not available, *RST does not change the intensity
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Grid" on page 194
DISPlay:INTensity:WAVeform <Intensity>
Defines the brightness of the waveform lines in the diagram.
Parameters:
<Intensity> Range: 0 to 100
Increment: 1
*RST: not available, *RST does not change the intensity
Default unit: %
DISPlay:PALette <Palette>
Sets the color and brightness of the displayed waveform samples depending on their
cumulative occurance.
Parameters:
<Palette> NORMal | INVerse
NORMal
Values that occur frequently are brighter than rare values.
INVerse
Rare values are brighter than frequent values, inverse to the
NORMal brightness.
FColor
Rare values are displayed in blue, while more frequent values
are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or
white, with various colors inbetween.
IFColor
Inverses the FColor setting: rare values are yellow or white while
frequent values are blue.
*RST: NORM
Manual operation: See "Inverse Brightness" on page 194
DISPlay:STYLe <Style>
Defines how the waveform data is displayed
Parameters:
<Style> VECTors | DOTS
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 453

VECTors
Individual data points are connected by a line.
DOTS
Only the data points are displayed.
*RST: VECT
Manual operation: See "Dots Only" on page 194
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation[:ENABle] <State>
Enables or disables the display of scale values and units for the x-axis and y-axis at
the grid lines.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Annotation" on page 195
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation:TRACk <State>
If enabled, the grid moves with the waveforms, if you change the waveform's position
in horizontal or vertical direction.
If disabled, the grid remains centered on the display, if you change the waveform's
position.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Track Grid" on page 195
15.10.2 System settings
CALibration................................................................................................................... 455
CALibration:STATe?....................................................................................................... 455
SYSTem:NAME............................................................................................................. 455
SYSTem:DATE.............................................................................................................. 455
SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................... 456
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface[:SELect]...................................................................... 456
SYSTem:BEEPer:CONTrol:STATe....................................................................................456
SYSTem:BEEPer:ERRor:STATe...................................................................................... 456
SYSTem:BEEPer:TRIG:STATe........................................................................................ 457
SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]......................................................................................... 457
SYSTem:SET................................................................................................................ 457
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?................................................................................................457
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?.....................................................................................................457
SYSTem:PRESet........................................................................................................... 458
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 454

SYSTem:EDUCation:PRESet.......................................................................................... 458
SYSTem:DFPRint?.........................................................................................................458
SYSTem:TREE?............................................................................................................ 458
CALibration
Calibration starts the self-alignment process. It can take several minutes. Consider
your timeout settings.
Calibration? returns information on the state of the self-alignment. Return values ≠
0 indicate an error.
Same as *CAL?.
Return values:
<SelfAlignment> Numeric status indicator
CALibration:STATe?
Returns the overall state of the self-alignment.
Return values:
<SelfAlignmentState> NOALignment | RUN | ERRor | OK | ABORt
NOALignment: no self-aligment was performed. Relevant for
service operations.
RUN: self-aligment is running
ERRor: an error occured.
OK: self-aligment has been performed successfully
ABORt: self-aligment has been cancelled
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Save Alignment Log file" on page 197
SYSTem:NAME
Defines an instrument name.
Parameters:
<Name> String with max. 20 characters
SYSTem:DATE <Year>,<Month>,<Day>
Specifies the internal date for the instrument.
Parameters:
<Year> Increment: 1
Default unit: a
<Month> Range: 1 to 12
Increment: 1
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 455

<Day> Range: 1 to 31
Increment: 1
Default unit: d
Usage: SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Date & Time" on page 198
SYSTem:TIME <Hour>,<Minute>,<Second>
Specifies the internal time for the instrument.
Parameters:
<Hour> Range: 0 to 23
Increment: 1
Default unit: h
<Minute> Range: 0 to 59
Increment: 1
Default unit: min
<Second> Range: 0 to 59
Increment: 1
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Date & Time" on page 198
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface[:SELect]
Selects the interface for remote control and web browser access ( ETHernet only).
Parameters:
<Interface> USB | ETHernet
SYSTem:BEEPer:CONTrol:STATe
Enables or disables a sound for general control events, e.g. changing the measure-
ment type in the "Measure" menu.
Parameters:
<ControlBeep> ON | OFF
SYSTem:BEEPer:ERRor:STATe
Enables or disables the beep if an error occurs.
Parameters:
<ErrorBeep> ON | OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 456

SYSTem:BEEPer:TRIG:STATe
Enables or disables the beep if a trigger occurs.
Parameters:
<TriggerBeep> ON | OFF
SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]
Generates an immediate beep. You can use this command, for example, to locate the
instrument.
Usage: Event
SYSTem:SET <Setup>
Defines or queries the device settings that can be saved and load manually with [File]
> "Device Settings".
Parameters:
<Setup> 488.2 block data
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Returns the oldest item of the error/event queue and removes it from the queue.
Return values:
<Error> Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Device-depend-
ent info]"
Example: 0,"No error"
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?
Returns a list of all error/event numbers and their description, and removes it from the
error/event queue.
Return values:
<ErrorList> List of ErrorFormat
List of: Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Device-
dependent info]"
If the queue is empty, the response is 0,"No error"
Usage: Query only
SCPI confirmed
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 457

SYSTem:PRESet
Resets the instrument to the default state, has the same effect as *RST.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Factory Default" on page 178
SYSTem:EDUCation:PRESet
Deletes the password of the education mode.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Education Mode" on page 191
SYSTem:DFPRint?
Returns the device footprint of the instrument. The device footprint contains the config-
uration of the instrument, installed modules, installed software and software licenses.
This information is written in the device footprint xml file might be useful in case of
maintenance or support request.
Return values:
<DeviceFootprint> Block Data
Information as block data.
Usage: Query only
SYSTem:TREE?
REturns a list of the implemented remote commands.
Return values:
<SystemTree> List of commands
Usage: Query only
15.10.3 LAN settings
The following commands take effect if SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface[:

SELect] is set to ETHernet.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:DHCP.......................................................... 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPADdress.................................................... 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:SUBNet........................................................ 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:GATeway...................................................... 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPPort...........................................................459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:VXIPort........................................................ 460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:HTTPport......................................................460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:TRANsfer..................................................... 460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:MACaddress?............................................... 460
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 458

SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:DHCP
Enables DHCP for automatic network parameter distribution.
Parameters:
<DHCP> ON | OFF
OFF
Use the following commands to specify connection parameters:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPADdress
on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:SUBNet
on page 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:GATeway
on page 459
Manual operation: See "IP Mode" on page 202
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPADdress
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:SUBNet
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:GATeway
Return or specify.
● IP address of the instrument.
● IP subnet mask used by the instrument.
● IP gateway used by the instrument.
Parameters:
<FirstByte> Range: 0 to 255
Increment: 1
<SecondByte> Range: 0 to 255
Increment: 1
<ThirdByte> Range: 0 to 255
Increment: 1
<FourthByte> Range: 0 to 255
Increment: 1
Manual operation: See "IP, Subnet mask, Gateway, DNS Server" on page 202
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPPort <IPPort>
Returns or specifies the IP port number (default = 5025).
Parameters:
<IPPort> Range: 1024 to 65535
Manual operation: See "IP Port, VXI-11 Port" on page 203
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 459

SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:VXIPort <VXIport>
Specifies the VXI-11 port number.
Parameters:
<VXIport> Range: 0 to 65535
*RST: 1024
Manual operation: See "IP Port, VXI-11 Port" on page 203
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:HTTPport <HTTPport>
Returns the HTTP port number.
Parameters:
<HTTPport> Range: 0 to 65535
*RST: 80
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:TRANsfer <TransferMode>
Enables automatic transfer speed selection, or selects one of the predefined settings
that corresponds to your network data rate.
Parameters:
<TransferMode> AUTO | FD10 | FD100 | HD10 | HD100
AUTO
Automatic transfer speed
FD10 | FD100 | HD10 | HD100
FD = full duplex, HD = half duplex
10 = 10 Mbps, 100 = 100 Mbps
Manual operation: See "Transfer" on page 203
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:MACaddress?
Returns the instrument's media access control address.
Return values:
<MACaddress> String data
String parameter
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "MAC, VISA" on page 203
15.10.4 USB settings
The following command takes effect if SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface[:

SELect] is set to USB.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 460

SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:USB:CLASs
Selects the USB mode.
● USB TMC (Test & Measurement Class)
● USB VCP (Virtual Com Port)
● USB MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)
Parameters:
<USBClass> TMC | VCP | MTP
15.10.5 Trigger out
TRIGger:OUT:MODE......................................................................................................461
TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth...................................................................................................461
TRIGger:OUT:POLarity................................................................................................... 462
TRIGger:OUT:MODE <OutputMode>
Defines which signals are generated at the [Aux Out] connector.
Parameters:
<OutputMode> OFF | TRIGger | REFerence | MASK | GENerator
OFF
No output
TRIGger
Outputs a pulse when the instrument triggers.
REFerence
Outputs a 10 MHz reference frequency.
MASK
Outputs a pulse when a mask is violated. This function is only
available if a mask is specified.
GENerator
Outputs the waveform that is specified using the function gener-
ator (requires option R&S RTB-B6)
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Pulse" on page 87
See "Aux Out" on page 190
TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth <PulseLength>
Defines the pulse width of the pulse at the [Aux Out] front connector (at trigger event or
mask viaolation).
Parameters:
<PulseLength> *RST: 1E-6
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 461

TRIGger:OUT:POLarity <Polarity>
Defines the polarity of the pulse at the [Aux Out] front connector (at trigger event or
mask viaolation).
Parameters:
*RST: POS
15.10.6 Firmware update
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:OPEN.............................................................................. 462
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:DATA............................................................................... 462
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:CLOSe............................................................................. 462
DIAGnostic:UPDate:INSTall............................................................................................ 463
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:OPEN <TransferItem>
Opens a data transfer for the firmware update file, and checks for errors.
Parameters:
<TransferItem> FIRMware
Example: See Chapter 15.2.2.2, "Using DIAGnostic:UPDdate:TRANsfer",
on page 307
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:DATA <Offset>,<Checksum>,<Data>
Sends the firmware update file data to the internal RAM of the instrument
Setting parameters:
<Offset> Specifies the byte offset of the blockdata in the file.
<Checksum> CRC-16-CCITT type checksum calculated for the raw binary
data in blockdata.
<Data> Block data is composed of a header #nm containing the length
of the data followed by the data in raw binary format. Here, m is
the length of the data in byte, and n is the number of digits in m.
on page 307
Usage: Setting only
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:CLOSe
Closes the file transfer.
on page 307.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 462

Serial bus analysis
Usage: Event
DIAGnostic:UPDate:INSTall <Path>
Starts the firmware update.
Setting parameters:
<Path> Empty string
on page 307
Usage: Setting only
15.11 Serial bus analysis

● General................................................................................................................. 463
● SPI (option R&S RTB-K1)..................................................................................... 466
● I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)...................................................................................... 479
● UART (option R&S RTB-K2)................................................................................. 490
● CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)................................................................................... 499
● LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)..................................................................................... 516
15.11.1 General
BUS:TYPE...............................................................................................................463
BUS:STATe..............................................................................................................464
BUS:FORMat...........................................................................................................464
BUS:LABel.............................................................................................................. 464
BUS:LABel:STATe.................................................................................................... 464
BUS:DSIGnals......................................................................................................... 465
BUS:DSIZe..............................................................................................................465
BUS:POSition.......................................................................................................... 465
BUS:RESult............................................................................................................. 465
BUS:TYPE <Type>
Defines the bus or interface type for analysis. All buses require special option to the
instrument.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Type> PARallel | CPARallel | I2C | SPI | SSPI | UART | CAN | LIN
*RST: PARallel
Manual operation: See "Bus Type" on page 212
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 463

Serial bus analysis
BUS:STATe <State>
Switches protocol decoding on or off.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Decode" on page 212
BUS:FORMat <Format>
Sets the decoding format for the display on the screen.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Format> ASCii | HEXadecimal | BINary | DECimal | OCTal
*RST: HEX
Manual operation: See "Display" on page 215
BUS:LABel <Label>
Defines an additional name label for the selected bus. The maximum name length is 8
characters, and only ASCII characters provided on the on-screen keypad can be used.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the bus.
Parameters:
BUS:LABel:STATe <State>
Displays or hides the bus label. The bus label is shown on the the right side of the dis-
play.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the bus.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 464

Serial bus analysis
BUS:DSIGnals <BitsSignals>
Displays the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BitsSignals> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Bits" on page 215
BUS:DSIZe <DisplaySize>
Sets the height of the decoded bus signal on the screen.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<DisplaySize> SMALl | MEDium | LARGe | DIV2 | DIV4
DIV2 | DIV4
2 or 4 divisions
SMALl | MEDium | LARGe
Size of indicated bus is smaller than 2 div.
*RST: MEDium
BUS:POSition <Position>
Sets the vertical position of the decoded bus signal in divisions on the screen.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Position> Range: 5 to -5
Increment: 0.02
*RST: -3.5
Default unit: DIV
BUS:RESult <ShowResultTable>
Displays or hides the table of decode results.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<ShowResultTable> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Bus Table" on page 216
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 465

Serial bus analysis
15.11.2 SPI (option R&S RTB-K1)
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) is used for communication with slow peripheral
devices, in particular, for transmission of data streams.
SPI (no CS) is a Simplified SPI configuration without chip select line.
A 4-channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI (with CS) and SPI (no CS)
protocols.
● SPI (with CS)- configuration..................................................................................466
● SPI (no CS) - configuration................................................................................... 469
● SPI - trigger........................................................................................................... 473
● SPI - decode results..............................................................................................475
15.11.2.1 SPI (with CS)- configuration
Start the bus configuration with the threshold setting. Use one of the following com-
mands:
● CHANnel<m>:THReshold:FINDlevel on page 320
● CHANnel<m>:THReshold on page 319
In all BUS:SPI... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
BUS:SPI:CS:SOURce...............................................................................................466
BUS:SPI:CS:POLarity............................................................................................... 467
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:SOURce.........................................................................................467
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity.........................................................................................467
BUS:SPI:DATA:SOURce........................................................................................... 467
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce........................................................................................... 467
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce........................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:DATA:POLarity........................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:MOSI:POLarity........................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:MISO:POLarity........................................................................................... 469
BUS:SPI:BORDer.....................................................................................................469
BUS:SPI:SSIZe........................................................................................................ 469
BUS:SPI:CS:SOURce <Source>
Selects the input channel of the chip select line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Source> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | D0..D15
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "Chip Select" on page 223
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 466

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SPI:CS:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects whether the chip select signal is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1).
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
POSitive = high active
NEGative = low active
*RST: NEGative
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
*RST: CH1
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock. The slope marks the
begin of a new bit.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
POSitive: rising slope
NEGative: falling slope
*RST: POS
BUS:SPI:DATA:SOURce <Source>
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce <MosiSource>
Selects the input channel of the MOSI / MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 467

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<MosiSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | D0..D15
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "MOSI / MISO" on page 223
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce <MisoSource>
Selects the input channel of the optional MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1, bus 2 is not available if the MISO source is used.
Parameters:
<MisoSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | NONE | D0..D15
*RST: NONE
BUS:SPI:DATA:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects whether transmitted data is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1) on the
data line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
*RST: POSitive
BUS:SPI:MOSI:POLarity <MosiPolarity>
Selects if transmitted data is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1) on the MOSI/
MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<MosiPolarity> ACTLow | ACTHigh
*RST: ACTH
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 468

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SPI:MISO:POLarity <MisoPolarity>
MISO line.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<MisoPolarity> ACTLow | ACTHigh
*RST: ACTH
BUS:SPI:BORDer <BitOrder>
Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB (most significant bit) or LSB (least
significant bit).
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BitOrder> MSBFirst | LSBFirst
*RST: MSBFirst
Manual operation: See "Word Size" on page 224
BUS:SPI:SSIZe <SymbolSize>
Sets the word length, the number of bits in a message.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<SymbolSize> Range: 4 to 32
Increment: 1
*RST: 8
Default unit: Bit
15.11.2.2 SPI (no CS) - configuration
mands:
In all BUS:SSPI... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 469

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:SOURce.......................................................................................470
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:POLarity.......................................................................................470
BUS:SSPI:DATA:SOURce......................................................................................... 470
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:SOURce.........................................................................................470
BUS:SSPI:MISO:SOURce.........................................................................................471
BUS:SSPI:DATA:POLarity......................................................................................... 471
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:POLarity......................................................................................... 471
BUS:SSPI:MISO:POLarity......................................................................................... 472
BUS:SSPI:BITime.....................................................................................................472
BUS:SSPI:BORDer...................................................................................................472
BUS:SSPI:SSIZe......................................................................................................472
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH1
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock. The slope marks the
begin of a new bit.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
POSitive: rising slope
NEGative: falling slope
*RST: POSitive
BUS:SSPI:DATA:SOURce <Source>
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:SOURce <MosiSource>
Selects the input channel of the MOSI / MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 470

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<MosiSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | D0..D15
*RST: CH1
BUS:SSPI:MISO:SOURce <MisoSource>
Selects the input channel of the optional MISO line.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<MisoSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | NONE | D0..D15
*RST: NONE
BUS:SSPI:DATA:POLarity <Polarity>
data line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
*RST: POSitive
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:POLarity <MosiPolarity>
Selects if transmitted data is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1) on the MOSI/
MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<MosiPolarity> ACTLow | ACTHigh
*RST: ACTH
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 471

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SSPI:MISO:POLarity <MisoPolarity>
MISO line.
Suffix: .
Parameters:
<MisoPolarity> ACTLow | ACTHigh
*RST: ACTH
BUS:SSPI:BITime <BurstIdleTime>
Within the idle time the data and clock lines are low. A new frame begins when the idle
time has expired and the clock line has been inactive during that time. If the time inter-
val between the data words is shorter than the idle time, the words are part of the
same frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BurstIdleTime> Range: 16e-9 to 838.832e-6
Increment: 16e-9
*RST: 100e-6
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Idle Time" on page 224
BUS:SSPI:BORDer <BitOrder>
Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB (most significant bit) or LSB (least
significant bit).
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BitOrder> MSBFirst | LSBFirst
*RST: MSBFirst
BUS:SSPI:SSIZe <SymbolSize>
Sets the word length, the number of bits in a message.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 472

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
Increment: 1
*RST: 8
Default unit: Bit
15.11.2.3 SPI - trigger
To configure the protocol trigger, make sure to set first:

● TRIGger:A:TYPE to BUS
● TRIGger:A:SOURce to SBUS1 | SBUS2
TRIGger:A:SOURce:SPI................................................................................................. 473
TRIGger:A:SPI:MODE.................................................................................................... 473
TRIGger:A:SPI:PATTern..................................................................................................474
TRIGger:A:SPI:PLENgth.................................................................................................474
TRIGger:A:SPI:POFFset.................................................................................................474
TRIGger:A:SOURce:SPI <SpiSource>
Selects the MOSI or the MISO line as trigger source. Only relevant, if both lines are
used and configured.
Parameters:
<SpiSource> MOSI | MISO
TRIGger:A:SPI:MODE <Mode>
Specifies the trigger mode for the SPI protocols (with and without CS).
Parameters:
<Mode> BSTart | BEND | NTHBit | PATTern
BSTart
Burst start, sets the trigger event to the start of the frame. The
frame starts when the chip select signal CS changes to the
active state.
BEND
Burst end, sets the trigger event to the end of the message.
NTHBit
Sets the trigger event to the specified bit number. To define the
bit number, use TRIGger:A:SPI:POFFset.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 473

Serial bus analysis
PATTern
Sets the trigger event to a serial pattern. To define the pattern,
use TRIGger:A:SPI:PATTern.
For a complete configuration of the pattern mode, you also have
to set TRIGger:A:SPI:PLENgth and TRIGger:A:SPI:
POFFset.
*RST: BSTart
Manual operation: See "SPI Trigger" on page 226
TRIGger:A:SPI:PATTern <DataPattern>
Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition. The pattern length is adjusted to the num-
ber of bits defined in the pattern.
Parameters:
<DataPattern> String with max. 32 characters (4 byte + 8 bit) . Characters 0, 1
and X are allowed.
Example: TRIG:A:SPI:PATT "0011XXXX0110"
Sets a 12bit pattern.
Manual operation: See "Data" on page 227
TRIGger:A:SPI:PLENgth <PatternLength>
Returns the number of bits in the previously defined bit pattern (TRIGger:A:SPI:
PATTern). The command can also be used to shorten a previously defined bit pattern.
Parameters:
<PatternLength> Range: 1 to 32
Increment: 1
*RST: 4
Example: TRIG:A:SPI:PATT "0011XXXX0110"
TRIG:A:SPI:PLEN?
12
TRIG:A:SPI:PLEN 4
TRIG:A:SPI:PATT?
"0011"
Manual operation: See "Number of Bits" on page 227
TRIGger:A:SPI:POFFset <PatternBitOffset>
Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern.
Parameters:
<PatternBitOffset> Number of ignored bits
Range: 0 to 4095
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 474

Serial bus analysis
Manual operation: See "Bit Offset" on page 227
15.11.2.4 SPI - decode results
In all BUS:SPI... and BUS:SSPI... commands, the suffix selects the
bus.
BUS:SPI:FCOunt?....................................................................................................475
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STATus?.................................................................................. 475
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STARt?.................................................................................... 476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STOP?.....................................................................................476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MOSI?............................................................................ 476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MISO?............................................................................ 477
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WCOunt?................................................................................. 477
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?................................................................... 477
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?....................................................................478
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MOSI?.................................................................... 478
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MISO?.................................................................... 478
BUS:SPI:FCOunt?
Returns the number of decoded frames.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Return values:
<FrameCount> Total number of decoded frames.
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STATus?
Returns the overall state of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<Status> OK | INCFirst | INCLast | INSufficient
INCFirst
First frame is incomplete
INCLast
Last frame is incomplete
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 475

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<StartTime> Range: depends on sample rate, record length, and time
base
Increment: depends on the time base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STOP?
Returns the end time of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<StopTime> Range: depends on sample rate, record length, and time
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MOSI?
Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MOSI line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<DataMosi> List of decimal values of data bytes
Example: BUS:SPI:FRAM3:DATA:MOSI?
-> 94,177,171,60,242,219,100,0
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 476

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MISO?
Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<DataMiso> List of decimal values of data bytes
Example: BUS:SPI:FRAM3:DATA:MISO?
-> 94,177,171,60,242,219,100,0
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WCOunt?
Returns the number of words in the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<WordCount> Number of words
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified data word.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Selects the word number.
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 477

Serial bus analysis
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?
Returns the end time of the specified data word.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MOSI?
Returns the data value of the specified word on the MOSI line.
Use this command if only one line is defined.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame (1...n)
<o> *
Selects the word number (1...o)
Return values:
<Data> Decimal value of the data word
Usage: Query only
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MISO?
Returns the data value of the specified word on the optional MISO line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame (1...n)
<o> *
Selects the word number (1...o)
Return values:
<Data> Decimal value of the data word
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 478

Serial bus analysis
Usage: Query only
15.11.3 I²C (option R&S RTB-K1)
The Inter-Integrated Circuit is a simple, low-bandwidth, low-speed protocol used for

communication between on-board devices, for example, in LCD and LED drivers,
RAM, EEPROM, and others.
● I²C - configuration..................................................................................................479
● I²C - trigger............................................................................................................ 480
● I²C - decode results...............................................................................................483
15.11.3.1 I²C - configuration
mands:
In all BUS:I2C... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
BUS:I2C:CLOCk:SOURce.........................................................................................479
BUS:I2C:DATA:SOURce........................................................................................... 479
BUS:I2C:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Sets the input channel to which the clock line is connected.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "SCL" on page 232
BUS:I2C:DATA:SOURce <Source>
Sets the input channel to which the data line is connected.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 479

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "SDA" on page 232
15.11.3.2 I²C - trigger

TRIGger:A:I2C:MODE.................................................................................................... 480
TRIGger:A:I2C:ACCess.................................................................................................. 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:AMODe.................................................................................................. 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess................................................................................................481
TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern..................................................................................................482
TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth................................................................................................. 482
TRIGger:A:I2C:POFFset................................................................................................. 482
TRIGger:A:I2C:MODE <Mode>
Specifies the trigger mode for I²C.
Parameters:
<Mode> STARt | RESTart | STOP | MACKnowledge | PATTern
STARt
Start of the message. The start condition is a falling slope on
SDA while SCL is high.
RESTart
Restarted message. The restart is a repeated start condition.
STOP
End of the message. The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA
while SCL is high.
MACKnowledge
Missing acknowledge. If the transfer failed, at the moment of the
acknowledge bit the SCL and the SDA lines are both on high
level.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 480

Serial bus analysis
PATTern
Triggers on a set of trigger conditions: read or write access of
the master, to an address, or/and to a bit pattern in the mes-
sage.
For a complete configuration of the pattern mode, you have to
set:
TRIGger:A:I2C:ACCess (read/write access), and
TRIGger:A:I2C:AMODe and TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess
(address), and/or
TRIGger:A:I2C:POFFset and TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth
and TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern (pattern)
*RST: STARt
Manual operation: See "I2C Trigger" on page 233
TRIGger:A:I2C:ACCess <Access>
Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master.
Parameters:
<Access> READ | WRITe
*RST: READ
Manual operation: See "Slave Address" on page 234
TRIGger:A:I2C:AMODe <AdrMode>
Sets the lenght of the slave address.
Parameters:
<AdrMode> NORMal | EXTended
NORMal: 7 bit address
EXTended: 10 bit address
*RST: NORMal
TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess <AddressString>
Sets the address of the slave device. The address can have 7 bits or 10 bits.
Parameters:
<AddressString> String with max. 7 or 10 characters, depending on the address
length. Characters 0, 1, and X are allowed, but X cannot be
assigned to a specified bit. If at least one X occurs in the
address, the complete address is set to X.
Example: TRIG:A:I2C:AMOD NORM
TRIG:A:I2C:ADDR "1011"
TRIG:A:I2C:ADDR?
Return value (7bit address): "0001011"
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 481

Serial bus analysis
Example: TRIG:A:I2C:AMOD EXT

TRIG:A:I2C:ADDR "10X1"
TRIG:A:I2C:ADDR?
Return value (10bit address): "XXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern <DataPattern>
Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition. Make sure that the correct pattern length
has been defined before with TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth.
Parameters:
<DataPattern> String with max. 24 characters (3 byte * 8 bit). Characters 0, 1,
and X are allowed. X can be assigned to a specified bit. If you
define a pattern shorter than the pattern length, the missing LSB
are filled with X. If you define a pattern longer than the pattern
length, the pattern string is not valid
Example: TRIG:A:I2C:PLEN 2
TRIG:A:I2C:PATT "10X10000XXXX1111"
TRIG:A:I2C:PATT?
Return value (2 bytes): "10X10000XXXX1111"
Example: TRIG:A:I2C:PLEN 1
TRIG:A:I2C:PATT "110"
TRIG:A:I2C:PATT?
Return value (1 byte): "110XXXXX"
Manual operation: See "Data: Bin / Hex pattern" on page 235
TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth <PatternLength>
Defines how many bytes are considered in the trigger condition. To set the pattern for
these bytes, use TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern.
Parameters:
<PatternLength> Number of bytes
Range: 1 to 3
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Number of Bytes" on page 234
TRIGger:A:I2C:POFFset <PatternByteOffset>
Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of interest, relating to the end of the
address bytes.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 482

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<PatternByteOffset> Number of ignored bytes
Range: 0 to 4095
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Byte Offset" on page 234
15.11.3.3 I²C - decode results
In all BUS:I2C... commands, the suffix selects the bus.

BUS:I2C:FCOunt?.................................................................................................... 483
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:DATA?......................................................................................483
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STATus?...................................................................................484
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.....................................................................................484
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STOP?..................................................................................... 484
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AACCess?................................................................................485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACCess?.................................................................................. 485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACOMplete?............................................................................. 485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADBStart?................................................................................ 486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADDRess?................................................................................486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADEVice?................................................................................. 486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AMODe?.................................................................................. 487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ASTart?.................................................................................... 487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?.................................................................................. 487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACCess?................................................................... 488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACKStart?................................................................. 488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:COMPlete?................................................................ 488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STARt?......................................................................489
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?..................................................................... 489
BUS:I2C:FCOunt?
Returns the number of received frames.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:DATA?
Returns the data words of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 483

Serial bus analysis
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<DataWords> Comma-separated list of decimal values of the data bytes.
Example: BUS:I2C:FRAM2:DATA?
returns four data bytes:
-> 69,158,174,161
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STATus?
Returns the overall state of the frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<State> INComplete | OK | UNEXpstop | INSufficient | ADDifferent
INComplete
The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 484

Serial bus analysis
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<EndTime> Range: depends on sample rate, record length, and time
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AACCess?
Returns the address acknowledge bit value for the indicated frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<Acknowledge> INComplete | ACK | NACK | EITHer
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACCess?
Returns the transfer direction - read or write access from master to slave.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<Access> INComplete | READ | WRITE | EITHer | UNDF
INComplete
The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.
UNDF
Access is not defined.
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACOMplete?
Returns the state of the address.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 485

Serial bus analysis
Return values:
<AddressComplete> ON | OFF
ON
Address was received completely.
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADBStart?
Returns the start time of the address acknowledge bit.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<AckStartTime> Range: depends on sample rate, record length, and time
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADDRess?
Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame including the R/W bit.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<AddressValue> Decimal value
Range: 0 to 2047
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADEVice?
Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame without R/W bit.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 486

Serial bus analysis
Return values:
<SlaveAddress> Decimal value
Range: 0 to 1023
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AMODe?
Returns the address length.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<AddressMode> BIT7 | BIT10
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ASTart?
Returns the start time of the address for the indicated frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?
Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<ByteCount im Number of words (bytes)
Frame>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 487

Serial bus analysis
Example: BUS:I2C:FRAM2:BCO?
-> 4
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACCess?
Returns the acknowledge bit value of the specified data byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Selects the byte number.
Return values:
<Acknowledge> INComplete | ACK | NACK | EITHer
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACKStart?
Returns the start time of the acknowledge bit of the specified byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
<AckStartTime> Range: depends on sample rate, record length, and time
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:COMPlete?
Returns the state of the byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 488

Serial bus analysis
<o> *
Return values:
<ByteComplete> ON | OFF
ON
Data byte was received completely.
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified data byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?
Returns the decimal value of the specified byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
<ByteValue> Decimal value
Range: 0 to 255
Increment: 1
Example: BUS:I2C:FRAM2:BYTE2:VAL?
-> 158
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 489

Serial bus analysis
15.11.4 UART (option R&S RTB-K2)
The Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) converts a word of data into

serial data, and vice versa.
● UART - configuration.............................................................................................490
● UART - trigger....................................................................................................... 493
● UART - decode results..........................................................................................495
15.11.4.1 UART - configuration
mands:
In all BUS:UART... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
BUS:UART:RX:SOURce............................................................................................490
BUS:UART:DATA:SOURce........................................................................................ 490
BUS:UART:TX:SOURce............................................................................................ 490
BUS:UART:POLarity................................................................................................. 491
BUS:UART:DATA:POLarity........................................................................................ 491
BUS:UART:SSIZe.....................................................................................................491
BUS:UART:PARity.................................................................................................... 492
BUS:UART:SBIT.......................................................................................................492
BUS:UART:BAUDrate............................................................................................... 492
BUS:UART:BITime....................................................................................................493
BUS:UART:RX:SOURce <Source>
BUS:UART:DATA:SOURce <Source>
Selects the input channel of the data line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
oscilloscopes.
*RST: CH1
Manual operation: See "RX / TX" on page 239
BUS:UART:TX:SOURce <Source>
Selects the input channel of the transmitter TX line.
Suffix: .
 1, bus 2 is not available if the TX source is used.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 490

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<TxSource> CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | NONE | D0..D15
NONE
Disables the optional TX line.
*RST: NONE
Manual operation: See "RX / TX" on page 239
BUS:UART:POLarity <IdleState>
Defines the logic levels of the bus. The idle state corresponds to a logic 1, and the start
bit to a logic 0. If both RX and TX lines are used, the setting affects both lines.
Alternative command for BUS:UART:DATA:POLarity
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<IdleState> IDLLow | IDLHigh
IDLLow: idle low, low = 1
IDLHigh: idle high, high = 1
*RST: IDLH
BUS:UART:DATA:POLarity <Polarity>
Defines if the transmitted data on the bus is high (high = 1) or low (low = 1) active. If
both RX and TX lines are used, the setting affects both lines.
Alternative command for BUS:UART:POLarity .
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
*RST: POS
BUS:UART:SSIZe <SymbolSize>
Sets the number of data bits in a message.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 491

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
Increment: 1
*RST: 8
Default unit: Bit
Manual operation: See "Data Size" on page 241
BUS:UART:PARity <Parity>
Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the bus.
Note: SPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines.
Parameters:
<Parity> ODD | EVEN | NONE
*RST: NONE
Manual operation: See "Parity" on page 240
BUS:UART:SBIT <StopBitNumber>
Sets the stop bits.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the bus.
Note: SPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines.
Parameters:
<StopBitNumber> B1 | B1_5 | B2
1 stop bit, 1.5 stop bits or 2 stop bits are possible.
*RST: B1
Manual operation: See "Stop Bits" on page 240
BUS:UART:BAUDrate <Baudrate>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Baudrate> Range: 100 to 78.1E6
Increment: 100
*RST: 115200
Default unit: Bit
Manual operation: See "Bit Rate" on page 240
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 492

Serial bus analysis
BUS:UART:BITime <BurstIdleTime>
Sets the minimal time between two data frames (packets), that is, between the last
stop bit and the start bit of the next frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BurstIdleTime> Range: Range depends on the bus configuration, mainly on
bit rate and symbol size.
Default unit: s
15.11.4.2 UART - trigger

TRIGger:A:SOURce:UART............................................................................................. 493
TRIGger:A:UART:MODE.................................................................................................493
TRIGger:A:UART:PATTern.............................................................................................. 494
TRIGger:A:UART:PLENgth..............................................................................................494
TRIGger:A:UART:POFFset..............................................................................................494
TRIGger:A:SOURce:UART <UartSource>
Selects the transmitter or receiver line as trigger source.
Parameters:
<UartSource> RX | TX
TRIGger:A:UART:MODE <Mode>
Specifies the trigger mode for UART/RS-232 interfaces.
See also: "UART trigger settings" on page 242.
Parameters:
<Mode> BSTart | SBIT | NTHSymbol | SYMBol | PATTern | PRERror |
SPERror | BREak
BSTart
Burst start. Sets the trigger to the begin of a data frame. The
frame start is the first start bit after the idle time.
SBIT
Start bit. The start bit is the first low bit after a stop bit.
NTHSymbol
Sets the trigger to the n-th symbol of a burst.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 493

Serial bus analysis
SYMBol
Triggers if a pattern occurs in a symbol at any position in a burst.
PATTern
Triggers on a serial pattern at a defined position in the burst.
To define the pattern, use TRIGger:A:UART:PLENgth and
TRIGger:A:UART:PATTern.
To define the position, use TRIGger:A:UART:POFFset.
PRERror
Parity Error: Triggers if a bit error occured in transmission.
FERRor
Triggers on frame error.
BREak
Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit within a defined
time. During the break the stop bits are at low state.
*RST: SBIT
Manual operation: See "UART Trigger" on page 242
TRIGger:A:UART:PATTern <DataPattern>
Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition.
Parameters:
<DataPattern> Binary pattern with max. 32 bit. Characters 0, 1, and X are
allowed.
*RST: 1 = "00000001"
TRIGger:A:UART:PLENgth <PatternLength>
Defines how many symbols build up the serial pattern.
Parameters:
<PatternLength> Number of symbols
Range: 1 to 4
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Numb. of Symb." on page 243
TRIGger:A:UART:POFFset <PatternByteOffset>
Sets the number of symbols before the first symbol of the pattern.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 494

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<PatternByteOffset> Number of ignored symbols
Range: 0 to 4095
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Symbol Offset" on page 243
15.11.4.3 UART - decode results
In all BUS:UART... commands, the suffix selects the bus.

BUS:UART:FCOunt?.................................................................................................495
BUS:UART:RX:FCOunt?........................................................................................... 495
BUS:UART:TX:FCOunt?............................................................................................495
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STARt?................................................................................. 496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?............................................................................496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?............................................................................ 496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STOP?..................................................................................496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?............................................................................ 496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?.............................................................................496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STATe?................................................................................. 496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?............................................................................496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?............................................................................ 496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?.............................................................................. 497
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?.........................................................................497
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?......................................................................... 497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:SOURce?............................................................. 497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?.................................................................497
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?........................................................... 497
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?............................................................497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?.................................................................498
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?........................................................... 498
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?........................................................... 498
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?................................................................. 499
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?............................................................499
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?............................................................ 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?................................................................ 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:RXValue?............................................................. 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:TXValue?..............................................................499
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?........................................................... 499
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?........................................................... 499
BUS:UART:FCOunt?
BUS:UART:RX:FCOunt?
BUS:UART:TX:FCOunt?
Return the number of decoded frames on the data line.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 495

Serial bus analysis
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
Return the start time of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<TxFrameStart> Time in s, range depends on sample rate, record length, and
time base
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
Return the end time of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<TxFrameStop> Time in s, range depends on sample rate, record length, and
time base
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STATe?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?
Returns the status of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<TxFrameState> STER | SPER | PRER | BRE | OK | INS
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 496

Serial bus analysis
STER: start error, no start bit found.

SPERr: stop error, no stop condition found.
PRER: parity error, which indicates a transmission error.
BRE: break condition found. A start bit is not followed by a stop
bit, and the data line remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART
word.
OK: the frame is valid.
INS: the frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.
The acquired part of the frame is valid.
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?
Returns the number of symbols in the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<WordCount> Number of words (symbols, characters)
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:SOURce?
Returns the line on which the specified word was transferred.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Selects the word.
Return values:
<Source> TX or RX
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?
Returns the status of the specified symbol (word).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 497

Serial bus analysis
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
<Status> OK | FRSTart | FRENd | FRMError | STERror | SPERror |
PRERror | INSufficient | BREak
OK: the frame is valid.
FRSTart: frame start not found
FRENd: frame end not found
FRMError: error in frame
STERror: start error, no start bit found.
SPERror: stop error, no stop condition found.
PRERror: parity error, which indicates a transmission error.
INSufficient: the frame is not completely contained in the
acquisition. The acquired part of the frame is valid.
BREak: break condition found. A start bit is not followed by a
stop bit, and the data line remains at logic 0 for longer than a
UART word.
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?
Returns the start time of the specified symbol (word).
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 498

Serial bus analysis
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?
Returns the end time of the specified symbol (word).
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:RXValue?
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:TXValue?
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?
Return the value of the specified symbol (word) on the Rx line and Tx line, respectively.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
<o> *
Return values:
<Value> Range: 0 to 511
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
15.11.5 CAN (option R&S RTB-K3)
CAN is the Controller Area Network, a bus system used within automotive network
architecture.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 499

Serial bus analysis
● CAN - configuration...............................................................................................500
● CAN - trigger......................................................................................................... 501
● CAN - decode results............................................................................................ 505
● CAN - search.........................................................................................................511
15.11.5.1 CAN - configuration
mands:
In all BUS:CAN... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
BUS:CAN:DATA:SOURce..........................................................................................500
BUS:CAN:TYPE.......................................................................................................500
BUS:CAN:SAMPlepoint.............................................................................................501
BUS:CAN:BITRate................................................................................................... 501
BUS:CAN:DATA:SOURce <Source>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
Logic channels D0..D15 are available if MSO option R&S RTB-
B1 is installed.
*RST: CH1
BUS:CAN:TYPE <SignalType>
Selects the CAN-High or CAN-Low line. CAN uses both lines for differential signal
transmission.
If you measure with a differential probe, connect the probe to both CAN-H and CAN-L
lines, and set the type CANH.
If you use a single-ended probe, connect the probe to either CAN_L or CAN_H, and
select the type accordingly.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<SignalType> CANH | CANL
*RST: CANH
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 500

Serial bus analysis
BUS:CAN:SAMPlepoint <SamplePoint>
Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time.
See also: "Sample Point" on page 248.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<SamplePoint> Range: 10 to 90
Increment: 1
*RST: 50
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Sample Point" on page 248
BUS:CAN:BITRate <BitRate>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BitRate> Range: 100 to 2E06
Increment: Depends on the bit rate value
*RST: 50E03
Default unit: Bit/s
15.11.5.2 CAN - trigger

TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE....................................................................................................502
TRIGger:A:CAN:FTYPe.................................................................................................. 502
TRIGger:A:CAN:ITYPe................................................................................................... 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:ICONdition............................................................................................ 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENtifier.............................................................................................. 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:DCONdition...........................................................................................503
TRIGger:A:CAN:DLC......................................................................................................504
TRIGger:A:CAN:DATA.................................................................................................... 504
TRIGger:A:CAN:ACKerror...............................................................................................504
TRIGger:A:CAN:BITSterror............................................................................................. 504
TRIGger:A:CAN:CRCerror.............................................................................................. 505
TRIGger:A:CAN:FORMerror............................................................................................505
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 501

Serial bus analysis
TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE <TriggerType>
Specifies the trigger mode for CAN.
Parameters:
<TriggerType> STOFrame | EOFrame | ID | IDDT | FTYPe | ERRCondition
STOFrame
Start of frame
EOFrame
End of frame
ID
Sets the trigger to a specific message "Identifier" or an "Identi-
fier" range.
Specify the identifier with TRIGger:A:CAN:ITYPe, TRIGger:
A:CAN:ICONdition and TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENtifier.
IDDT
Sets the trigger to a combination of "Identifier and Data" condi-
tion. The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the
specified data pattern.
Specify the "Identifier" (see ID), and the "Data" with TRIGger:
A:CAN:DLC, TRIGger:A:CAN:DCONdition and TRIGger:A:
CAN:DATA.
FTYPe
Triggers on a specified "Frame".
Specify the frame type with TRIGger:A:CAN:FTYPe.
ERRCondition
Identifies various errors in the frame.
Specify the "Error" with TRIGger:A:CAN:ACKerror,
TRIGger:A:CAN:BITSterror, TRIGger:A:CAN:CRCerror
and TRIGger:A:CAN:FORMerror.
*RST: STOF
Manual operation: See "CAN Trigger" on page 249
See "Error" on page 250
TRIGger:A:CAN:FTYPe <FrameType>
Specifies the frame type to be triggered on if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to FTYPe.
Parameters:
<FrameType> DATA | REMote | ERRor | OVERload | ANY
*RST: ERR
Manual operation: See "Frame" on page 250
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 502

Serial bus analysis
TRIGger:A:CAN:ITYPe <IdentifierType>
Selects the length of the identifier: 11 bit for CAN base frames, or 29 bits for CAN
extended frames.
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to ID, IDDT, or FTYPe (data
and remote frames).
Parameters:
<IdentifierType> B11 | B29 | ANY
ANY: use if the identifier length is not relevant. Not available for
trigger type ID.
*RST: B11
Manual operation: See "ID Type" on page 250
TRIGger:A:CAN:ICONdition <IdentifierCondition>
Sets the comparison condition: If the pattern contains at least one X (don't care), you
can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the pattern contains
only 0 and 1, you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified
value.
The command is relevant, if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to ID or IDDT.
Parameters:
<IdentifierCondition> EQUual | NEQual | GTHan | LTHan
*RST: EQ
Manual operation: See "Compare" on page 251
TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENtifier <Identifier>
Defines the identifier pattern. The pattern length is defined with TRIGger:A:CAN:
ITYPe.
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to ID or IDDT.
Parameters:
<Identifier> String containing binary pattern with 11 bit or 29 bit. Characters
0, 1, and X are allowed.
Manual operation: See "Bin / Hex pattern" on page 252
TRIGger:A:CAN:DCONdition <DataCondition>
Sets the comparison condition for data: If the pattern contains at least one X (don't
care), you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value. If the pattern
contains only 0 and 1, you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the
specified value.
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to IDDT.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 503

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<DataCondition> EQUal | NEQual | GTHan | LTHan
*RST: EQ
TRIGger:A:CAN:DLC <DataLength>
Parameters:
<DataLength> Range: 0 to 8
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Default unit: Byte
TRIGger:A:CAN:DATA <Data>
Defines the data pattern. The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with
TRIGger:A:CAN:DLC.
Parameters:
<Data> String containing binary pattern with max. 64 bit. Characters 0,
1, and X are allowed. Make sure to enter complete bytes.
Manual operation: See "Bin / Hex pattern" on page 252
TRIGger:A:CAN:ACKerror <AcknowledgeError>
Triggers on acknowledgement errors. An acknowledgement error occurs when the
transmitter does not receive an acknowledgment - a dominant bit during the Ack Slot.
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE is set to ERRCondition.
Parameters:
<AcknowledgeError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Acknowledge" on page 251
TRIGger:A:CAN:BITSterror <BitStuffingError>
Triggers on bit stuffing errors.
See also: "Stuff Bit" on page 251.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 504

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<BitStuffingError> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Stuff Bit" on page 251
TRIGger:A:CAN:CRCerror <CRCerror>
Triggers on errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check.
Parameters:
<CRCerror> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "CRC" on page 251
TRIGger:A:CAN:FORMerror <FormError>
Triggers on form errors. A form error occurs when a fixed-form bit field contains one or
more illegal bits.
Parameters:
<FormError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Form" on page 251
15.11.5.3 CAN - decode results
In all BUS:CAN... commands, the suffix selects the bus.

BUS:CAN:FCOunt?.................................................................................................. 506
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:TYPE?....................................................................................506
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?................................................................................. 506
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?...................................................................................507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?................................................................................... 507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?.................................................................................... 507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKState?..............................................................................507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKValue?............................................................................. 508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?............................................................................... 508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?................................................................................508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCState?.............................................................................. 509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCValue?..............................................................................509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?.................................................................................509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDTYpe?................................................................................. 509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?.................................................................................510
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BSEPosition?.......................................................................... 510
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 505

Serial bus analysis
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?.................................................................................510
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?.................................................................... 511
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?.................................................................... 511
BUS:CAN:FCOunt?
Returns the number of received frames.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:TYPE?
Returns the type of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Selects the frame (1...n).
Return values:
<FrameType> DATA | REMote | ERR | OVLD
Data, remote, error or overload frame
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<FrameStatus> OK | BTST | CRCD | ACKD | CRC | EOFD | NOACk |
INSufficient
OK: frame is valid.
BTST: bit stuffing error occured
CRCD: wrong CRC delimiter occured
ACKD: Wrong ACK delimiter occured
CRC: cyclic redundancy check failed
EOFD: wrong end of frame
NOACk: acknowlegde is missing
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 506

Serial bus analysis
INSufficient: frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.

The acquired part of the frame is valid.
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<StartTime> Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<StopTime> Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<FrameData> Comma-separated list of decimal values of the data bytes.
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKState?
Returns the state of the acknowledge field.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 507

Serial bus analysis
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<AcknowledgeState> OK | UNDF
UNDF: Undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKValue?
Returns the value of the acknowledge field.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<AcknowledgeValue> Decimal value
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?
Returns the state of the checksum.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ChecksumState> OK | UNDF
UNDF: Undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?
Returns the checksum value.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ChecksumValue> Decimal value
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 508

Serial bus analysis
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCState?
Returns the state of the data length code.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<DLCState> OK | UNDF
UNDF: Undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCValue?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<DLCValue> Non-negative integer
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?
Returns the state of the identifier.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierState> OK | UNDF
UNDF: Undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDTYpe?
Returns the length of the identifier: 11 bits for CAN base frames, 29 bits for CAN exten-
ded frames.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 509

Serial bus analysis
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierType> ANY | B11 | B29
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?
Returns the identifier of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierValue> Decimal value
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BSEPosition?
Returns the position of the bit stuffing error in the specified frame (if available).
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ErrorPosition> *RST: 0
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ByteCount> Number of words (bytes)
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 510

Serial bus analysis
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?
Returns the state of the specified data byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
<o> *
Selects the byte number (1...m).
Return values:
<ByteStatus> OK | UNDF
UNDF: Undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
<o> *
Selects the byte number (1...m).
Return values:
Usage: Query only
15.11.5.4 CAN - search
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition................................................................................ 512
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe.....................................................................................512
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ACKerror.................................................................................. 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:BITSterror................................................................................. 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CRCerror.................................................................................. 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FORMerror................................................................................513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FTYPe......................................................................................514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ITYPe.......................................................................................514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ICONdition................................................................................ 514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:IDENtifier.................................................................................. 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DLENgth...................................................................................515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DCONdition...............................................................................515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DATA........................................................................................515
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 511

Serial bus analysis
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition <SearchCondition>
event, further settings are required.
Parameters:
<SearchCondition> FRAMe | ERRor | IDENtifier | IDData | IDERror
FRAMe
Search for a frame type. Set the frame type with SEARch:
PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe.
ERRor
Search for errors of one or more error types. Set the error types
with SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ACKerror, SEARch:
PROTocol:CAN:BITSterror, SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:
CRCerror and SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FORMerror.
IDENtifier
Search for identifier.
Specifiy the identifier with SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FTYPe,
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ITYPe, SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:
ICONdition and SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:IDENtifier.
IDData
Search for identifier and data.
Set the identifier (see IDENtifier) and the data with SEARch:
PROTocol:CAN:DLENgth, SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:
DCONdition and SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DATA.
IDERror
Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier.
Set the identifier (see IDENtifier) and the errors to be found (see
ERRor)
*RST: FRAM
Manual operation: See "Event" on page 255
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe <Frame>
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition is set to FRAMe.
Parameters:
<Frame> SOF | EOF | OVERload | ERRor | DTA11 | DTA29 | REM11 |
REM29
SOF: start of frame
EOF: end of frame
OVERload: overload frame
ERRor: error frame
DTA11: data frame with 11bit identifier
DTA29: data frame with 29bit identifier
REM11: remote frame with 11bit identifier
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 512

Serial bus analysis
REM29: remote frame with 29bit identifier

*RST: SOF
Manual operation: See "Frame Setup" on page 255
See "Frame Setup" on page 268
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ACKerror <AcknowledgeError>
Searches for acknowledgement errors. An acknowledgement error occurs when the
transmitter does not receive an acknowledgment - a dominant bit during the Ack Slot.
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition is set to ERRor or
IDERror.
Parameters:
<AcknowledgeError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Error" on page 255
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:BITSterror <BitStuffingError>
Searches for bit stuffing errors.
See also: "Stuff Bit" on page 251.
IDERror.
Parameters:
<BitStuffingError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CRCerror <CRCerror>
Searches for errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check.
IDERror.
Parameters:
<CRCerror> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FORMerror <FormError>
Searches for form errors. A form error occurs when a fixed-form bit field contains one
or more illegal bits.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 513

Serial bus analysis

IDERror.
Parameters:
<FormError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FTYPe <FrameType>
Specifies the frame type to be searched for if SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition is
set to IDENtifier.
Parameters:
<FrameType> DATA | REMote | ANY
Manual operation: See "Frame Type" on page 256
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ITYPe <IdType>
Selects the length of the identifier: 11 bit for CAN base frames, or 29 bits for CAN
extended frames.
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition is set to
IDENtifier, IDData, or IDERror.
Parameters:
<IdType> B11 | B29
*RST: B11
Manual operation: See "Identifier condition" on page 256
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ICONdition <IdCondition>
Sets the comparison condition for the identifier: If the pattern contains at least one X
Parameters:
<IdCondition> EQUal | NEQual | GTHan | LTHan
*RST: EQU
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 514

Serial bus analysis
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:IDENtifier <Identifier>
Defines the identifier pattern. The pattern length is defined with SEARch:PROTocol:
CAN:ITYPe.
Parameters:
<Identifier> String containing binary pattern with max. 29 bit. Characters 0,
1, and X are allowed.
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DLENgth <DataLength>
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition is set to IDData.
Parameters:
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Default unit: Byte
Manual operation: See "Data condition" on page 256
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DCONdition <DataCondition>
specified value.
Parameters:
*RST: EQU
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DATA <Data>
Defines the data pattern. The pattern length is defined with SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:
DLENgth.
Parameters:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 515

Serial bus analysis
15.11.6 LIN (option R&S RTB-K3)
The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) is a simple, low-cost bus system used within
automotive network architectures.
Note: SPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines (bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4). If
one of these buses is configured, the number of buses (suffix ) is reduced. Bus 2
and/or bus 4 is not available.
● LIN - configuration.................................................................................................516
● LIN - trigger........................................................................................................... 517
● LIN - decode results.............................................................................................. 520
● LIN - search...........................................................................................................526
15.11.6.1 LIN - configuration
mands:
In all BUS:LIN... commands, the suffix selects the bus.
BUS:LIN:DATA:SOURce........................................................................................... 516
BUS:LIN:POLarity.....................................................................................................516
BUS:LIN:STANdard.................................................................................................. 517
BUS:LIN:BITRate..................................................................................................... 517
BUS:LIN:DATA:SOURce <Source>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
*RST: CH1
BUS:LIN:POLarity <Polarity>
Defines the idle state of the bus. The idle state is the recessive state and corresponds
to a logic 1.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 516

Serial bus analysis
Parameters:
<Polarity> IDLHigh | IDLLow
IDLHigh: Low active, negative polarity
IDLLow: High active, positive polarity
*RST: IDLL
Manual operation: See "Idle" on page 261
BUS:LIN:STANdard <Standard>
Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT. The setting mainly
defines the checksum version used during decoding.
The most common version is LIN 2.x. For mixed networks, or if the standard is
unknown, set the LIN standard to AUTO.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<Standard> V1X | V2X | J2602 | AUTO
*RST: V1X
Manual operation: See "Version" on page 261
BUS:LIN:BITRate <BitRate>
Suffix: .
 1|2
Parameters:
<BitRate> Range: 1 kbit/s to 2.5 Mbit/s
*RST: 9,6E03
Default unit: Bit/s
15.11.6.2 LIN - trigger

TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE..................................................................................................... 518
TRIGger:A:LIN:CHKSerror.............................................................................................. 518
TRIGger:A:LIN:IPERror.................................................................................................. 518
TRIGger:A:LIN:SYERror................................................................................................. 519
TRIGger:A:LIN:ICONdition.............................................................................................. 519
TRIGger:A:LIN:IDENtifier................................................................................................ 519
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 517

Serial bus analysis
TRIGger:A:LIN:DATA......................................................................................................519
TRIGger:A:LIN:DCONdition.............................................................................................520
TRIGger:A:LIN:DLENgth.................................................................................................520
TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE <TriggerType>
Specifies the trigger mode for LIN.
Parameters:
<TriggerType> SYNC | WKFRame | ID | IDDT | ERRCondition
SYNC
Start of frame, triggers on the stop bit of the sync field.
WKFRame
Triggers after a wakeup frame.
ID
Sets the trigger to a specific identifier or an identifier range.
Set the identifier with TRIGger:A:LIN:ICONdition and
TRIGger:A:LIN:IDENtifier.
IDDT
Set the identifier (see ID) and the data with TRIGger:A:LIN:
DLENgth, TRIGger:A:LIN:DCONdition and TRIGger:A:
LIN:DATA.
ERRCondition
Identifies various errors in the frame. You can select one or
more error types as trigger condition.
Select the error types with TRIGger:A:LIN:CHKSerror,
TRIGger:A:LIN:IPERror and TRIGger:A:LIN:SYERror.
*RST: SYNC
Manual operation: See "LIN Trigger" on page 263
TRIGger:A:LIN:CHKSerror <ChecksumError>
Triggers on a checksum error. The checksum verifies the correct data transmission. It
is the last byte of the frame response. The checksum includes not only the data but
also the protected identifier (PID).
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE is set to ERRCondition.
Parameters:
<ChecksumError> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Checksum" on page 264
TRIGger:A:LIN:IPERror <IdParityError>
Triggers on a parity error. Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier. They verify
the correct transmission of the identifier.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 518

Serial bus analysis

Parameters:
<IdParityError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Parity" on page 264
TRIGger:A:LIN:SYERror <SyncError>
Triggers if synchronization caused an error.
Parameters:
<SyncError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Synchronization" on page 264
TRIGger:A:LIN:ICONdition <IdentifierCondition>
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE is set to ID or IDDT.
Parameters:
<IdentifierCondition> EQUal | NEQual | GTHan | LTHan
*RST: EQ
TRIGger:A:LIN:IDENtifier <Identifier>
Defines the identifier pattern.
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE is set to ID or IDDT.
Parameters:
<Identifier> String containing binary pattern. Characters 0, 1, and X are
allowed. Enter the 6 bit identifier without parity bits, not the pro-
tected identifier.
Manual operation: See "Identifier" on page 264
TRIGger:A:LIN:DATA <Data>
Defines the data pattern. The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with
TRIGger:A:LIN:DLENgth.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 519

Serial bus analysis
The command is relevant if TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE is set to IDDT.

Parameters:
Manual operation: See "Bin / Hex" on page 265
TRIGger:A:LIN:DCONdition <DataCondition>
specified value.
Parameters:
*RST: EQ
TRIGger:A:LIN:DLENgth <DataLength>
Parameters:
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Default unit: Byte
15.11.6.3 LIN - decode results
In all BUS:LIN... commands, the suffix selects the bus.

BUS:LIN:FCOunt?.................................................................................................... 521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?......................................................................................521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?...................................................................................521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.....................................................................................521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?..................................................................................... 522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?................................................................................. 522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?................................................................................. 522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDPValue?................................................................................ 523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?.................................................................................. 523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?...................................................................................523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYSTate?................................................................................. 524
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 520

Serial bus analysis
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYValue?..................................................................................524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:VERSion?.................................................................................524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?.................................................................................. 524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?......................................................................525
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?..................................................................... 525
BUS:LIN:FCOunt?
Returns the number of received frames of the active LIN bus.
Suffix: .
 1|2
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?
Returns the data bytes of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<FrameData> Comma-separated list of decimal values of the data bytes.
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<FrameStatus> OK | UART | CHCKsum | PRERror | SYERror | WAKeup |
INSufficient | ERR | LENer
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 521

Serial bus analysis
<n> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
base
Default unit: s
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?
Returns the checksum state of the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ChecksumState> OK | ERR | UNDF
ERR: error
UNDF: undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?
Returns the checksum value.
Suffix: .
 1|2
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 522

Serial bus analysis
<n> *
Return values:
<ChecksumValue> Decimal value
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDPValue?
Returns the parity value.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierParityValue>Decimal value
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?
Returns the identifier state of the selected frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierState> OK | PRERror | UVAL | INSufficient
PRERror: parity error
UVAL: unexpected value
INSufficient: the frame is not completely contained in the acqui-
sition. The decoded part of the frame is valid.
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?
Returns the identifier value (address)
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<IdentifierValue> Decimal value
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 523

Serial bus analysis
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYSTate?
Returns the state of the sync field for the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<SyncFieldState> OK | ERR | UNDF
ERR: error
UNDF: undefined
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYValue?
Returns the value of the synchronization field.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<SyncFieldValue> Decimal value
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:VERSion?
Returns the version of the LIN standard for the specified frame.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<FrameVersion> V1X | V2X | UNK
UNK: Unknown
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 524

Serial bus analysis
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
Return values:
<ByteCount> Number of words (bytes)
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?
Returns the state of the specified data byte.
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
<o> *
Selects the byte number (1...o).
Return values:
<ByteStatus> OK | INS | UART
INS
Insufficient, the byte is not completely contained in the acquisi-
tion.
UART
At least one UART error occured. LIN uses UART words without
parity bit.
Usage: Query only
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?
Suffix: .
 1|2
<n> *
<o> *
Selects the byte number (1...o).
Return values:
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 525

Serial bus analysis
15.11.6.4 LIN - search
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition.................................................................................. 526
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:FRAMe.......................................................................................526
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IPERror...................................................................................... 527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CHKSerror..................................................................................527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:SYERror.....................................................................................527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:ICONdition..................................................................................528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IDENtifier....................................................................................528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DLENgth.....................................................................................528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DCONdition................................................................................ 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DATA..........................................................................................529
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition <SearchCondition>
event, further settings are required.
Parameters:
<SearchCondition> FRAMe | ERRor | IDENtifier | IDData | IDERror
FRAMe
Search for a frame type.
Set the frame type with SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:FRAMe.
ERRor
Search for errors of one or more error types.
Set the error types withSEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CHKSerror ,
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IPERror and SEARch:PROTocol:
LIN:SYERror.
IDENtifier
Search for identifier.
Specifiy the identifier with SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:
ICONdition and SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IDENtifier.
IDData
Search for identifier and data.
Set the identifier (see IDENtifier) and the data with SEARch:
PROTocol:LIN:DLENgth, SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:
DCONdition and SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DATA.
IDERror
Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier. Set the
identifier (see IDENtifier) and the errors to be found (see
ERRor).
*RST: FRAM
Manual operation: See "Event" on page 268
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:FRAMe <Frame>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 526

Serial bus analysis
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition is set to FRAMe.

Parameters:
<Frame> SOF | WAKeup
SOF: start of frame
WAKeup: Wakeup frame
*RST: SOF
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IPERror <IdParityError>
Searches for parity errors.
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition is set to ERRor or
IDERror.
Parameters:
<IdParityError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CHKSerror <ChecksumError>
Searches for checksum errors.
IDERror.
Parameters:
<ChecksumError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:SYERror <SyncError>
Searches for synchronization errors.
IDERror.
Parameters:
<SyncError> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 527

Serial bus analysis
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:ICONdition <IdCondition>
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition is set to
IDENtifier, IDData or IDERror.
Parameters:
<IdCondition> EQUal | NEQual | GTHan | LTHan
*RST: EQU
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IDENtifier <Identifier>
Defines the identifier pattern.
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition is set to
IDENtifier, IDData or IDERror.
Parameters:
<Identifier> String containing binary pattern. Characters 0, 1, and X are
allowed. Enter the 6 bit identifier without parity bits, not the pro-
tected identifier.
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DLENgth <DataLength>
The command is relevant if SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition is set to IDData.
Parameters:
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Default unit: Byte
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DCONdition <DataCondition>
specified value.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 528

Mixed signal option (option R&S RTB-B1)
Parameters:
*RST: EQU
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DATA <Data>
Defines the data pattern. The pattern length is defined with SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:
DLENgth.
Parameters:
15.12 Mixed signal option (option R&S RTB-B1)

● Logic channels...................................................................................................... 529
● Parallel buses........................................................................................................537
15.12.1 Logic channels
Two different sets of commands are described in this chapter:

● LOGic:xxx:xxx:
Refer to the logic pod 1 ("D7...D0") or logic pod 2 ("D8...D15"). The suffix 
selects the logic pod, range 1..2.
● DIGital<m>:xxx:xxx:
Refer to a specific logic channel. The suffix <m> selects the logic channel, range
0..15.
● Logic channels - activity display............................................................................529
● Logic analyzer configuration................................................................................. 530
● Logic channels - waveform data........................................................................... 534
15.12.1.1 Logic channels - activity display
LOGic:PROBe[:ENABle]?..........................................................................................530
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?........................................................................... 530
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?......................................................................... 530
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?............................................................................ 530
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?.......................................................................... 530
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 529

LOGic:PROBe[:ENABle]?
Checks if the logic probe is connected.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the pod.
Return values:
<ProbeEnable> 1|0
1 = connected, 0 = not connected
Usage: Query only
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?
Both commands together return the current status of the indicated logic channel/pod
regardless of the trigger settings, and even without any acquisition.
xxx:CURR:STAT:MIN returns xxx:CURR:STAT:MAX returns Signal
0 0 Low
1 1 High
0 1 Toggle
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Selects the logic channel
 1..2
Selects the logic pod
Return values:
<CurrentState> Range: 0|1
Usage: Query only
15.12.1.2 Logic analyzer configuration
LOGic:STATe........................................................................................................... 531
DIGital<m>:PROBe[:ENABle]?........................................................................................ 531
DIGital<m>:DISPlay....................................................................................................... 531
DIGital<m>:TECHnology.................................................................................................531
LOGic:THReshold:UDLevel....................................................................................... 532
LOGic:THReshold.................................................................................................... 532
DIGital<m>:THReshold...................................................................................................532
LOGic:TYPE............................................................................................................ 533
LOGic:HYSTeresis....................................................................................................533
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 530

DIGital<m>:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................. 533
DIGital<m>:SIZE............................................................................................................533
DIGital<m>:POSition...................................................................................................... 533
DIGital<m>:LABel.......................................................................................................... 534
DIGital<m>:LABel:STATe................................................................................................ 534
LOGic:STATe
Switches the logic pod on or off.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
DIGital<m>:PROBe[:ENABle]?
Tests whether the digital probe is connected and recognized by the instrument.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
For pod 1: a value between 0 and 7
For pod 2: a value between 8 and 15
Return values:
<ProbeEnable> ON | OFF
Usage: Query only
DIGital<m>:DISPlay <State>
Enables and displays the indicated logic channel, or disables it.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Number of the logic channel
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
DIGital<m>:TECHnology <ThresholdMode>
Selects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits and applies it to
the channel group to which the indicated logic channel belongs.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 531

Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
<ThresholdMode> TTL | ECL | CMOS | MANual
TTL: 1.4 V
ECL: -1.3 V
CMOS: 2.5 V
MANual: Set a user-defined threshold value with DIGital<m>:
THReshold
*RST: MAN
LOGic:THReshold:UDLevel
LOGic:THReshold
Selects the threshold voltage for the indicated pod.
Alternative command for DIGital<m>:TECHnology.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<ThresholdMode> TTL | ECL | CMOS | USER
TTL: 1.4 V
ECL: -1.3 V
CMOS: 2.5 V
USER: Set a user-defined threshold value with DIGital<m>:
THReshold
DIGital<m>:THReshold <ThresholdLevel>
Sets the logical threshold for the pod to which the indicated logic channel belongs.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
<ThresholdLevel> *RST: 1.4
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Threshold, Find Threshold" on page 224
See "User Level" on page 275
See "Thresholds" on page 278
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 532

LOGic:TYPE
Selects the method to reduce the captured data of logical channels to a waveform with
lower sample rate.
Parameters:
<DecimationMode> SAMPle | PDETect
SAMPle
Input data is acquired with a sample rate which is aligned to the
timebase (horizontal scale) and the record length.
PDETect
Peak Detect: the minimum and the maximum of n samples in a
sample interval are recorded as waveform points.
*RST: SAMP
LOGic:HYSTeresis
DIGital<m>:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
The setting applys to the logic pod to which the indicated logic channel belongs.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Selects the logic channel.
 1..2
Selects the logic pod.
Parameters:
<Hysteresis> SMALl | MEDium | LARGe
DIGital<m>:SIZE <Size>
Sets the vertical size of the indicated digital channel.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
<Size> Specifies the number of divisions per logic channel.
Range: 0.2 to 8
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 0.3
Default unit: DIV
DIGital<m>:POSition <Position>
Sets the vertical position of the indicated vertical channel.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 533

Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
<Position> Vertical position in divisions
Default unit: DIV
DIGital<m>:LABel <Label>
Defines a label for the indicated logic channel.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
String parameter
Example: DIGital4:LABel "Data"
Defines the label "Data" for logic channel D4.
DIGital<m>:LABel:STATe <State>
Displays or hides the label of the indicated logic channel.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
15.12.1.3 Logic channels - waveform data
For data queries and conversion, consider also the following commands:
● FORMat[:DATA] on page 427
● DIGital<m>:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
● DIGital<m>:DATA:XORigin? on page 437
● DIGital<m>:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● DIGital<m>:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● DIGital<m>:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
● LOGic:DATA:XINCrement? on page 437
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 534

● LOGic:DATA:XORigin? on page 437

● LOGic:DATA:YINCrement? on page 438
● LOGic:DATA:YORigin? on page 438
● LOGic:DATA:YRESolution? on page 438
LOGic:DATA?...........................................................................................................535
DIGital<m>:DATA?......................................................................................................... 535
LOGic:DATA:HEADer?..............................................................................................535
DIGital<m>:DATA:HEADer?............................................................................................ 535
LOGic:DATA:POINts................................................................................................. 536
DIGital<m>:DATA:POINts............................................................................................... 536
LOGic:DATA?
DIGital<m>:DATA?
Returns the data of the specified logic channel/pod for transmission from the instru-
ment to the controlling computer. The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB, for
example.
To set the export format, use FORMat[:DATA].
To set the range of samples to be returned, use DIGital<m>:DATA:POINts.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
 1..2
Parameters:
<WaveformData> List of values according to the format settings.
Example: FORM ASC,0
DIG1:DATA?
1,1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,...
Usage: Query only
LOGic:DATA:HEADer?
DIGital<m>:DATA:HEADer?
Returns information on the waveform of the specified logic channel/pod.
1 XStart in s -9.477E-008 = - 94,77 ns
2 XStop in s 9.477E-008 = 94,77 ns
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 535

Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
 1..2
Parameters:
Example: -9.477E-008,9.477E-008,200000,1
Usage: Query only
LOGic:DATA:POINts <PointSelection>
DIGital<m>:DATA:POINts <PointSelection>
As a setting, the command selects a range of samples that will be returned with
DIGital<m>:DATA?. As a query, it returns the number of returned samples for the
selected range.
Depending on the current settings, the memory can contain more data samples than
the screen is able to display. In this case, you can decide which data will be saved:
samples stored in the memory or only the displayed samples.
Note: The sample range can be changed only in STOP mode. If the acquisition is run-
ning, DEF is always used automatically. If the acquisition has been stopped, data can
be read from the memory, and all settings are available.
Suffix: .
<m> 0..15
 1..2
Setting parameters:
<PointSelection> DEFault | MAXimum | DMAXimum
Sets the range for data queries.
DEFault
Waveform points that are visible on the screen. At maximum
waveform rate, the instrument stores more samples than visible
on the screen, and DEF returns less values than acquired.
MAXimum
All waveform samples that are stored in the memory. Only avail-
able if acquisition is stopped.
DMAXimum
Display maximum: Waveform samples stored in the current
waveform record but only for the displayed time range. At maxi-
mum waveform rate, the instrument stores more samples than
visible on the screen, and DMAX returns more values than DEF.
Only available if acquisition is stopped.
*RST: DEFault
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 536

Return values:
<Points> Number of data points in the selected range.
Default unit: Samples
See also: CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts
15.12.2 Parallel buses
● Parallel bus - line configuration............................................................................. 537

● Parallel clocked bus configuration.........................................................................538
● Parallel buses - decode results............................................................................. 539
15.12.2.1 Parallel bus - line configuration
BUS:PARallel:WIDTh <BusWidth>
Sets the number of lines to be analyzed for the parallel bus.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Selects the parallel bus.
Parameters:
<BusWidth> Maximum number is the number of input channels.
Range: 1 to 4
Increment: 1
*RST: 4
Default unit: Bit
Manual operation: See "Bus Width" on page 278
BUS:CPARallel:WIDTh <BusWidth>
Sets the number of lines to be analyzed for the parallel clocked bus.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<BusWidth> Range: 1 to 15 (clock only) or 14 (clock and CS)
Increment: 1
*RST: 4
Default unit: Bit
Manual operation: See "Bus Width" on page 278
BUS:PARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce <DataSource>
BUS:CPARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce <DataSource>
Defines the logic channel that is assigned to the selected bit.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 537

Use the command for each bit of the bus.

Suffix: .
 1..2
<m> Sets the bit number.
Parameters:
<DataSource> D0..D15
Example: BUS:PARallel:Width 4
BUS:PARallel:DATA0:SOURce D8
15.12.2.2 Parallel clocked bus configuration
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCk:SOURce............................................................................... 538
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCK:SLOPe................................................................................. 538
BUS:CPARallel:CS:ENABle....................................................................................... 539
BUS:CPARallel:CS:SOURce......................................................................................539
BUS:CPARallel:CS:POLarity......................................................................................539
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCk:SOURce <ClockSource>
Selects the logic channel that is used as clock line.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<ClockSource> D0..D15
*RST: D0
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCK:SLOPe <ClockSlope>
Selects if the data is sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock, or on both
edges (EITHer). The clock slope marks the begin of a new bit.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<ClockSlope> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 538

BUS:CPARallel:CS:ENABle <ChipSelectEnable>
Enables and disables the chip select line.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<ChipSelectEnable> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Chip Select" on page 279
BUS:CPARallel:CS:SOURce <ChipSelectSource>
Selects the logic channel that is used as chip select line.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
<ChipSelectSource> D0..D15
*RST: D1
BUS:CPARallel:CS:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects if the chip select signal is high active (high = 1) or low active (low = 1).
Suffix: .
 1..2
Parameters:
15.12.2.3 Parallel buses - decode results
The commands to query results of decoded parallel clocked and unclocked buses are
similar and described together in this chapter..
BUS:PARallel:FCOunt?.............................................................................................540
BUS:CPARallel:FCOunt?...........................................................................................540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?...............................................................................540
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?............................................................................ 540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?..............................................................................540
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 539

BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?........................................................................... 540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?............................................................................. 541
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?........................................................................... 541
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?.............................................................................. 541
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?............................................................................541
BUS:PARallel:FCOunt?
BUS:CPARallel:FCOunt?
Returns the number of decoded frames.
Suffix: .
 1..2
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?
Suffix: .
 1..2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<FrameData> List of decimal values of data words
Usage: Query only
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?
Suffix: .
 1..2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
<FrameStatus> OK | ERRor | INSufficient
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 540

Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?
Suffix: .
 1..2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
Usage: Query only
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?
Suffix: .
 1..2
<n> *
Selects the frame.
Return values:
Usage: Query only
15.13 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)
15.13.1 Function generator
15.13.1.1 Basic settings of the function generator
WGENerator:FUNCtion...................................................................................................542
WGENerator:VOLTage....................................................................................................542
WGENerator:VOLTage:OFFSet....................................................................................... 542
WGENerator:FREQuency............................................................................................... 542
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle...........................................................................543
WGENerator:TRIangle:SYMMetry....................................................................................543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:ETIMe............................................................................. 543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:EXPonential:POLarity.................................................................. 543
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 541

WGENerator:FUNCtion:RAMP:POLarity...........................................................................543
WGENerator:NOISe:ABSolute.........................................................................................544
WGENerator:NOISe:RELative......................................................................................... 544
WGENerator:OUTPut:LOAD........................................................................................... 544
WGENerator:OUTPut[:ENABle]....................................................................................... 544
WGENerator:FUNCtion <Function>
Selects the function to be generated.
Parameters:
<Function> DC | SINusoid | SQUare | PULSe | TRIangle | RAMP | SINC |
ARBitrary | EXPonential
Manual operation: See "Function" on page 285
WGENerator:VOLTage <Amplitude>
Defines the amplitude value (peak-to-peak value) of the selected generator function.
Parameters:
<Amplitude> Numeric value
Range: 6.0000E-02 to 6.00000E+00
*RST: 5.0000E-01
Default unit: Vpp
Manual operation: See "Amplitude" on page 286
WGENerator:VOLTage:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the DC offset of the selected generator function.
Parameters:
<Offset> Numeric value
Range: -3.00000E+00 to 3.00000E+00
*RST: 0.00E+00
Default unit: V
Manual operation: See "Offset" on page 286
WGENerator:FREQuency <Frequency>
Defines the frequency.
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range: Depends on the selected function. For details, refer
to the datasheet.
*RST: 10 kHz
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 285
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 542

WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle <DutyCycle>
Defines the duty cycle value of the generator function pulse.
Parameters:
<DutyCycle> Numeric value
Range: 1.000E+01 to 9.000E+01
*RST: 2.500E+01
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Duty Cycle" on page 286
WGENerator:TRIangle:SYMMetry <Symmetry>
Sets the symmetry for the triangle waveform.
Parameters:
<Symmetry> 50% defines symmetric triangles. Values <50% define triangles
with steeper rising edge leaned to the left. Values >50% define
triangles with steeper falling edge leaned to the right.
Range: 1 to 99
Increment: 1
*RST: 50
Default unit: %
Manual operation: See "Symmetriy" on page 286
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:ETIMe <EdgeTime>
Sets the pulse edge time.
Parameters:
<EdgeTime>
Manual operation: See "Edge Time" on page 286
WGENerator:FUNCtion:EXPonential:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the generator function exponential.
Parameters:
WGENerator:FUNCtion:RAMP:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the generator function ramp.
Parameters:
*RST: NEG
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 543

WGENerator:NOISe:ABSolute <AbsoluteNoise>
Sets the noise of the waveform in volts.
Parameters:
<AbsoluteNoise>
Manual operation: See "Noise" on page 286
WGENerator:NOISe:RELative <RelativeNoise>
Sets the noise of the generated waveform in percentage of the amplitude.
Parameters:
<RelativeNoise>
Manual operation: See "Noise" on page 286
WGENerator:OUTPut:LOAD <Load>
Select the user load, the load of the DUT at its connection. You can select either a
"50Ω" or a "High-Z" (high input impedance) load.
Parameters:
<Load> HIGHz | R50
WGENerator:OUTPut[:ENABle] <OutputEnable>
Enables the function generator and outputs the waveform.
Parameters:
<OutputEnable> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Output" on page 285
15.13.1.2 Arbitrary waveform setup
WGENerator:ARBitrary:SOURce..................................................................................... 544
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:START............................................................................545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:STOP............................................................................. 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:UPDate.......................................................................................545
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:NAME............................................................................... 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:OPEN............................................................................... 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:VISible........................................................................................546
WGENerator:ARBitrary:SOURce <Source>
Selects the input channel for an arbitrary function to be generated.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 544

Parameters:
*RST: CH1
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:START <StartTime>
Sets the start time of the copied waveform part.
Parameters:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:STOP <StopTime>
Sets the end time of the copied waveform part.
Parameters:
WGENerator:ARBitrary:UPDate
Loads the waveform from the selected signal source (WGENerator:ARBitrary:
SOURce).
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Copy" on page 292
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:NAME <FilePath>
Sets the file path and the file for an arbitrary waveform to be loaded.
Parameters:
<FilePath> string
*RST: "
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:OPEN
Loads the arbitrary waveform, that is selected with the WGENerator:ARBitrary[:
FILE]:NAME command.
Usage: Event
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 545

WGENerator:ARBitrary:VISible <ArbWaveformVisible>
Enables the display of the arbitrary waveform.
Parameters:
<ArbWaveformVisible>ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Visible" on page 292
15.13.1.3 Burst settings
WGENerator:BURSt:ITIMe..............................................................................................546
WGENerator:BURSt:NCYCle.......................................................................................... 546
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger[:MODE]............................................................................. 546
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger:SINGle.............................................................................. 547
WGENerator:BURSt:PHASe........................................................................................... 547
WGENerator:BURSt[:STATe]........................................................................................... 547
WGENerator:BURSt:ITIMe <IdleTime>
Sets the idle time between two burst cycles.
Parameters:
<IdleTime> Range: 28n to 17
*RST: 100u
Default unit: s
WGENerator:BURSt:NCYCle <NumberOfCycles>
Sets the number of times the generator outputs one cycle of the waveform per burst.
Parameters:
<NumberOfCycles> Range: 1 to 1023
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "N-Cycle" on page 291
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger[:MODE]
Selects the trigger mode. Each time the generator receives a trigger, it outputs a burst
with the number of cycles defined with WGENerator:BURSt:NCYCle.
Parameters:
<TriggerMode> CONTinuous | SINGle
CONTinuous
Continuously outputs bursts if burst is enabled.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 546

SINGle
Use WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger:SINGle to output one
burst.
*RST: CONT
Manual operation: See "Trigger" on page 291
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger:SINGle
Outputs one burst if WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger[:MODE] is set to SINGle.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Trigger" on page 291
WGENerator:BURSt:PHASe <PhaseOffset>
Sets the start phase of the burst.
Parameters:
<PhaseOffset> Range: 0 to 360
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 0
Default unit: Degree
Manual operation: See "Start Phase" on page 291
WGENerator:BURSt[:STATe] <Enable>
Enables or disables the burst. for the generator.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Burst" on page 291
15.13.1.4 Modulation settings
WGENerator:MODulation[:ENABLE]................................................................................ 548
WGENerator:MODulation:FUNCtion.................................................................................548
WGENerator:MODulation:TYPE...................................................................................... 548
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:FREQuency....................................................................... 548
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:DEPTh...............................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:FREQuency........................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:DEViation...........................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:FREQuency......................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:DEPTh............................................................................. 549
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:HFREquency.................................................................... 550
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:RATE............................................................................... 550
WGENerator:MODulation:RAMP:POLarity........................................................................ 550
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 547

WGENerator:MODulation[:ENABLE] <Enable>
Activates or deactivates modulation of the function generator output. To define the
modulation function, see WGENerator:MODulation:FUNCtion.
Parameters:
<Enable> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Modulation" on page 288
WGENerator:MODulation:FUNCtion <ModulationFunction>
Selects a function for the modulation.
Parameters:
<ModulationFunction>SINusiod | SQUare | TRIangle | RAMP
Manual operation: See "Function" on page 289
WGENerator:MODulation:TYPE <ModulationType>
Sets the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified.
Parameters:
<ModulationType> AM | FM | ASK | FSK
AM
Amplitude modulation. The amplitude of the carrier signal is var-
ied according to the modulation signal.
FM
Frequency modulation. The frequency of the carrier signal is var-
ied according to the modulation signal.
ASK
Amplitude shift keying (ASK) modulation. The amplitude
switches between 100% and the WGENerator:MODulation:
ASK:DEPTh amplitude with a defined modulating WGENerator:
MODulation:ASK:FREQuency.
FSK
Frequency shift keying (FSK) modulation. The signal frequency
switches between the carrier frequency and the WGENerator:
MODulation:FSK:HFREquency at a WGENerator:
MODulation:FSK:RATE.
Manual operation: See "Modulation Type" on page 289
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the modulating waveform for AM modulation.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 548

WGENerator:MODulation:AM:DEPTh <ModulationDepth>
Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the amplitude range that is used for AM
modulation.
Parameters:
<ModulationDepth>
Manual operation: See "AM Depth" on page 289
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the modulating waveform for FM modulation.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:DEViation <Deviation>
Sets the frequency deviation, the maximum difference between the FM modulated sig-
nal and the carrier signal.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
Manual operation: See "Deviation" on page 289
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the modulating waveform for ASK modulation.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:DEPTh <ModulationDepth>
Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the amplitude range that is used for ASK
modulation.
Parameters:
<ModulationDepth>
Manual operation: See "ASK Depth" on page 289
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 549

WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:HFREquency <HoppingFrequency>
Sets the second frequency of the FSK-modulated signal.
Parameters:
<HoppingFrequency> The range depends on the signal type:
Sinus: 100mHz - 25MHz
Sinc/Triangle/Ramp/Exponential: 100mHz - 1MHz
Rectangle/Pulse/Arbitrary: 100mHz - 10MHz
Manual operation: See "Hop. Frequency" on page 290
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:RATE <Rate>
Sets the rate at which signal switches between the carrier frequency and the hopping
frequency.
Parameters:
<Rate> Range: 0.1 to 1E6
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "FSK Rate" on page 290
WGENerator:MODulation:RAMP:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity for the ramp function for a modulation waveform.
Parameters:
15.13.1.5 Sweep settings
WGENerator:SWEep:FEND............................................................................................ 550
WGENerator:SWEep:FSTart........................................................................................... 550
WGENerator:SWEep:TIME............................................................................................. 551
WGENerator:SWEep:TYPE............................................................................................ 551
WGENerator:SWEep[:ENABle]........................................................................................551
WGENerator:SWEep:FEND <StopFrequency>
Sets the stop frequency of the sweep signal.
Parameters:
<StopFrequency>
Manual operation: See "Stop Frequency" on page 288
WGENerator:SWEep:FSTart <StartFrequency>
Sets the start frequency of the sweep signal.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 550

Parameters:
<StartFrequency>
Manual operation: See "Start Frequency" on page 287
WGENerator:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime>
Sets the duration of the sweep.
Parameters:
<SweepTime>
Manual operation: See "Sweep Time" on page 288
WGENerator:SWEep:TYPE <SweepType>
Sets the type of the sweep, a linear, logarithmic or triangle-shaped change of the fre-
quency.
Parameters:
<SweepType> LINear | LOGarithmic | TRIangle
Manual operation: See "Sweep" on page 288
WGENerator:SWEep[:ENABle] <SweepEnable>
Enables or disables sweeping.
Parameters:
<SweepEnable> ON | OFF
Manual operation: See "Sweep" on page 287
15.13.2 Pattern generator
● Square wave......................................................................................................... 553
● Counter pattern..................................................................................................... 554
● Arbitrary pattern.................................................................................................... 555
● Manual pattern...................................................................................................... 558
PGENerator:FUNCtion................................................................................................... 552
PGENerator:PATTern:STATe........................................................................................... 552
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:EXTern:SLOPe................................................................. 553
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 551

PGENerator:FUNCtion <PatternFunction>
Selects the pattern generator function.
Parameters:
<PatternFunction> SQUarewave | COUNter | ARBitrary | SPI | I2C | UART | CAN |
LIN | MANual | I2S | TDM
SQUarewave
Square wave function (e.g. for manual probe compensation).
COUNter
Definition of a 4-bit wide counter pattern.
ARBitrary
Definition of a 4-bit wide and 2048 samples deep pattern.
SPI
SPI BUS signals for measurements without measurement
object. Data rate 100 kBit/s, 250 kBit/s or 1 MBit/s.
I2C
I2C BUS signals for measurements without measurement object.
Data rate 100 kBit/s, 400 kBit/s, 1 MBit/s or 3.4 MBit/s.
UART
UART BUS signals for measurements without measurement
object. Data rate 9600 Bit/s, 115.2 kBit/s and 1 MBit/s.
CAN
CAN BUS signals for measurements without measurement
object up to 50 MBit/s.
LIN
LIN BUS signals for measurements without measurement object
up to 50 MBit/s.
MANual
Manual pattern mode.
l2S
Audio-I2S BUS signal.
TDM
Audio-TDM BUS signal.
*RST: SQUarewave
Manual operation: See "Pattern" on page 294
PGENerator:PATTern:STATe <State>
Activates or deactivates the pattern output.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Manual operation: See "Pattern State" on page 294
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 552

PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:EXTern:SLOPe
Defines the slope of the external arbitrary pattern trigger.
Parameters:
<ExternSlope> POSitive | NEGative | EITHer
POSitive
Rising edge (rise).
NEGative
Falling edge (fall).
EITHer
Rising as well as the falling edge (both).
*RST: POSitive
15.13.2.2 Square wave
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:POLarity.................................................................... 553
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:DCYCle.....................................................................553
PGENerator:PATTern:PERiod..........................................................................................553
PGENerator:PATTern:FREQuency................................................................................... 554
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:POLarity <Polarity>
Defines the polarity of the pattern generator square wave function.
Parameters:
<Polarity> NORMal | INVerted
*RST: NORM
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:DCYCle <DutyCycle>
Sets the duty cycle of the square wave function.
Parameters:
<DutyCycle> Numeric value
Range: 1.00E+00 to 9.900E+01
*RST: 5.000E+01
Default unit: %
Example: PGEN:PATT:SQU:DCYC 20
Sets the duty cycle of the square wave function to 20%.
Manual operation: See "Duty Cycle" on page 295
PGENerator:PATTern:PERiod <PatternPeriod>
Defines the period of the pattern generator function.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 553

Parameters:
<PatternPeriod> Numeric value (Period = Pattern length * Bit time)
Range: MIN 1 Sample * 20ns = 20ns to MAX 2048 Sam-
ples * 42s = 10416s (approx. 2.89h)
*RST: 2.000E-06
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 295
See "Period" on page 299
PGENerator:PATTern:FREQuency <PatternFrequency>
Defines the frequency (period) value of the pattern generator function.
Parameters:
<PatternFrequency> Numeric value
Default unit: Hz
15.13.2.3 Counter pattern
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:FREQuency.....................................................................554
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:DIRection........................................................................ 554
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:FREQuency <Period>
Defines the frequency value of the pattern generator counter function. The user fre-
quency always refers to the switching of the pattern condition. This results in square
waveforms for individual pins.
Pin Frequency
S0 f/2
S1 f/4
S2 f/8
S3 f/16
Parameters:
<Period> Numeric value
Range: 2.380952425301E-02 to 2.500000000000E+07
*RST: 1.000000000000E+05
Default unit: Hz
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:DIRection <CountDirection>
Sets the pattern generator counter direction.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 554

Parameters:
<CountDirection> UPWard | DOWNward
*RST: UPW
Manual operation: See "Direction" on page 296
15.13.2.4 Arbitrary pattern
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:MODE..............................................................................555
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA[:SET].....................................................................555
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:LENGth................................................................. 555
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend................................................................. 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BOR......................................................... 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BAND....................................................... 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:INDex....................................................... 556
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:SINGle............................................................................. 557
PGENerator:PATTern:STIMe........................................................................................... 557
PGENerator:PATTern:ITIMe............................................................................................ 557
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:STATe.................................................................................557
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:NCYCle.............................................................................. 557
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:MODE <TriggerMode>
Defines the arbitrary trigger mode of the pattern generator function.
Parameters:
<TriggerMode> CONTinuous | SINGle
CONTinuous
The CONT function (continuous trigger) issues the pattern con-
tinuously.
SINGle
If the SING setting is activated, the pattern is issued manually.
*RST: CONT
Manual operation: See "Pattern trigger" on page 298
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA[:SET] <ArbitraryData>
Defines the arbitrary pattern.
Parameters:
<ArbitraryData> List of Values
Example: PGEN:PATT:ARB:DATA 0,1,1,1,2,0,3,1,4,0
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:LENGth <PatternLength>
Defines the arbitrary pattern length.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 555

Parameters:
<PatternLength> Numeric value
Range: 1 to 2048
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Pattern Length" on page 298
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend <AppendData>
Defines the arbitrary pattern.
Setting parameters:
<AppendData> List of Values
Example: PGEN:PATT:ARB:DATA:APP 4
From index = n, the oscilloscope appends a 4 in HEX to the
pattern.
Usage: Setting only
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BOR <AppendData>
From index = n, data will be integrated in existing pattern via OR combination.
Setting parameters:
Usage: Setting only
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BAND <AppendData>
From index = n, data will be integrated in existing pattern via AND combination.
Setting parameters:
Usage: Setting only
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:INDex <AppendIndex>
Defines the index of the arbitrary pattern.
Parameters:
<AppendIndex> Numeric value
Example: PGEN:PATT:ARB:DATA:APP:IND 5
PGEN:PATT:ARB:DATA:APP 4
From index = n, a pattern length of 6 will be defined with last
high bit 4.
Manual operation: See "Index" on page 298
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 556

PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:SINGle
Manual output of a pattern (single trigger).
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Pattern trigger" on page 298
PGENerator:PATTern:STIMe <SampleTime>
Sets the time at which each sample is applied for the pattern generator function.
Parameters:
<SampleTime> Numeric value
Range: 2.000E-08 to 4.200E+01
*RST: 2.000E-08
Default unit: s
Manual operation: See "Bit Time" on page 299
PGENerator:PATTern:ITIMe <IdleTime>
Defines the idle time of the pattern generator function. The idle time can be only
defined with activated BURST function.
Parameters:
<IdleTime> Numeric value
Range: 2.000E-08 to 4.200000000000E+01
*RST: 2.5000000000E-01
Default unit: s
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:STATe <BurstState>
Turns the BURST function on or off.
Parameters:
<BurstState> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Manual operation: See "Burst" on page 299
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:NCYCle <PatternCycles>
Defines the BURST pattern cycles. The cycles can be only defined with activated
BURST function.
Parameters:
<PatternCycles> Numeric value
Range: 1 to 4096
*RST: 1
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 557

Status reporting
Manual operation: See "N-Cycle" on page 299
15.13.2.5 Manual pattern
PGENerator:MANual:STATe<s> <State>
Selects the pins S0 to S3 manually and sets their states to high (H) or low (L).
Suffix: .
<s> 0..3
Pins S0 to S3
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
Pin state is set to high (H).
OFF
Pin state is set to low (L).
*RST: OFF
Example: PGEN:MAN:STAT2 ON
Sets the state of pin S2 to high (H).
Manual operation: See "P0/P1/P2/P3" on page 300
15.14 Status reporting
15.14.1 STATus:OPERation register
The commands of the STATus:OPERation subsystem control the status reporting

structures of the STATus:OPERation register:
See also:
● Chapter B.1, "Structure of a SCPI status register", on page 579
● Chapter B.3.3, "STATus:OPERation register", on page 584
The following commands are available:
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?......................................................................................558
STATus:OPERation:ENABle............................................................................................559
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition..................................................................................... 559
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition......................................................................................559
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?..........................................................................................559
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Returns the of the CONDition part of the operational status register.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 558

Status reporting
Return values:
<Condition> Condition bits in decimal representation. ALIGnment (bit 0) ,
SELFtest (bit 1) , AUToset (bit 2), WTRigger (bit 3).
Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <Enable>
Controls the ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation register. The ENABle defines
which events in the EVENt part of the status register are forwarded to the OPERation
summary bit (bit 7) of the status byte. The status byte can be used to create a service
request.
Parameters:
<Enable> Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
Example: STATus:OPERation:ENABle 5
The ALIGnment event (bit 0) and AUToset event (bit 2) are for-
warded to the OPERation summary bit of the status byte.
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
Parameters:
<NegativeTransition> Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
Parameters:
<PositiveTransition> Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Return values:
<Event> Range: 1 to 65535
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
15.14.2 STATus:QUEStionable registers
The commands of the STATus:QUEStionable subsystem control the status reporting

structures of the STATus:QUEStionable registers:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 559

Status reporting
Figure 15-1: Structure of the STATus:QUEStionable register
See also:
● Chapter B.1, "Structure of a SCPI status register", on page 579
● Chapter B.3.4, "STATus:QUEStionable register", on page 584
The following commands are available:
STATus:PRESet.............................................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?..................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:CONDition?.................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:CONDition?.................................................................. 561
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?..........................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:CONDition?....................................................................... 561
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle....................................................................................... 561
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:ENABle.......................................................................561
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 560

Status reporting
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:ENABle........................................................................ 561
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle................................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:ENABle............................................................................. 562
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?......................................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload[:EVENt]?.....................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState[:EVENt]?...................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?..............................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK[:EVENt]?........................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition................................................................................. 562
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:NTRansition................................................................ 562
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:NTRansition..................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition......................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:NTRansition....................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition................................................................................. 563
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:PTRansition................................................................ 563
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:PTRansition..................................................................563
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition......................................................................... 563
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:PTRansition....................................................................... 563
STATus:PRESet
Resets all STATUS:QUESTIONALBLE registers.
Usage: Event
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:CONDition?
Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the status register to check for question-
able instrument or measurement states. Reading the CONDition registers does not
delete the contents.
Return values:
<Condition> Condition bits in decimal representation
Range: 0 to 65535
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <Enable>
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:ENABle <Enable>
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:ENABle <Enable>
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 561

Status reporting
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle <Enable>
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:ENABle <Enable>
Sets the ENABle part that allows true conditions in the EVENt part to be reported in the
summary bit. If a bit is set to 1 in the enable part and its associated event bit transitions
to true, a positive transition occurs in the summary bit and is reported to the next
higher level.
Parameters:
<Enable> Bit mask in decimal representation
Range: 0 to 65535
Increment: 1
Example: STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:ENABle 24
Set bits no. 3 and 4 of the STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:ENABle
register part: 24 = 8 + 16 = 23 + 24
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK[:EVENt]?
Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the status register to check whether an
event has occurred since the last reading. Reading an EVENt register deletes its con-
tents.
Return values:
<Event> Event bits in decimal representation
Range: 0 to 65535
Increment: 1
Usage: Query only
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:NTRansition <NegativeTransition>
Sets the negative transition filter. If a bit is set, a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding
bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the
event register.
Parameters:
<NegativeTransition> Bit mask in decimal representation
Range: 0 to 65535
Increment: 1
Example: STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:NTRansition 24
Set bits no. 3 and 4 of the STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:NTRan-
sition register part: 24 = 8 + 16 = 23 + 24
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 562

Status reporting
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:PTRansition <PositiveTransition>
Sets the positive transition filter. If a bit is set, a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding
bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the
event register.
Parameters:
<PositiveTransition> Bit mask in decimal representation
Range: 0 to 65535
Increment: 1
Example: STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:PTRansition 24
Set bits no. 3 and 4 of the STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:PTRan-
sition register part: 24 = 8 + 16 = 23 + 24
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 563

R&S®RTB2000 Maintenance and support
Contacting customer support
16 Maintenance and support

The instrument does not need periodic maintenance. Only the cleaning of the instru-
ment is essential.
To protect the front panel and to transport the instrument to another workplace safely
and easily, several accessories are provided. The type designations and order num-
bers are listed in the data sheet.
16.1 Cleaning
How to clean the product is described in "Cleaning the product" on page 23.
Do not use any liquids for cleaning. Cleaning agents, solvents, acids and bases can
damage the front panel labeling, plastic parts and display.
16.2 Changing fuses

If the product does not start, it is possible that a blown fuse is the cause.
The product is protected by a fuse of type Size 5x20 mm, 250V~, T2.5H (slow-blow),
IEC60127-2/5.
1. WARNING! The fuse is part of the main power supply. Handling the fuse while the
power is on can lead to electric shock.
Before changing the fuse:
a) Set the switch on the power supply to position [0].
b) Disconnect the product from the power source.
2. The fuse slot is on the rear panel between the main power switch and AC power
supply connector.
Pull out the fuse holder out of its slot.
3. Check the condition of the fuse.
4. Replace the blown fuse. Only use a fuse of the specified type.
5. Insert the fuse holder into its slot until it latches.
16.3 Contacting customer support
Technical support – where and when you need it

For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz product, contact our customer sup-
port center. A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 564

Disposal
to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applica-
tions of Rohde & Schwarz products.
Contact information
Contact our customer support center at www.rohde-schwarz.com/support, or follow this
QR code:
Figure 16-1: QR code to the Rohde & Schwarz support page
16.4 Data security

If you have to send the instrument to the service, or if the instrument is used in a
secured environment, consider the document "Instrument Security Procedures" that is
available on the R&S RTB2000 internet web page.
You can delete all current instrument configuration data and user data with "Setup"
menu > "Secure Erase".
16.5 Storage
Protect the product against dust. Ensure that the environmental conditions, e.g. tem-
perature range and climatic load, meet the values specified in the data sheet.
16.6 Disposal
Rohde & Schwarz is committed to making careful, ecologically sound use of natural
resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products. Help us by dis-
posing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact.
Disposing electrical and electronic equipment

A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste
after it has come to the end of its service life. Even disposal via the municipal collection
points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 565

Disposal
Figure 16-2: Labeling in line with EU directive WEEE
Rohde & Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco-friendly disposal or
recycling of waste material. As a manufacturer, Rohde & Schwarz completely fulfills its
obligation to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste. Contact your
local service representative to dispose of the product.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 566

R&S®RTB2000 Remote control basics
SCPI command structure
Annex
A Remote control basics
A.1 SCPI command structure

SCPI commands consist of a header and, usually, one or more parameters. The head-
ers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords). Queries are formed by appending a
question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either instrument-specific or instrument-independent (common
commands). Common and instrument-specific commands differ in their syntax.
A.1.1 Syntax for common commands
Common (= instrument-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an

asterisk (*), and possibly one or more parameters.
Table A-1: Examples of common commands
*RST RESET Resets the instrument.
*ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers.
*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register.
*IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 567

A.1.2 Syntax for instrument-specific commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following
commands for this section:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
● FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
● HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
● HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
● HCOPy[:IMMediate]
● HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
● HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
● HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
● HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
● HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
● MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
● SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
● SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
● SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
● Long and short form..............................................................................................568

● Numeric suffixes....................................................................................................568
● Optional mnemonics............................................................................................. 569
A.1.2.1 Long and short form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by
upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short
form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the
manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
A.1.2.2 Numeric suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels

or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, ) and are replaced
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 568

by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control

For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec-
tion used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix
1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
A.1.2.3 Optional mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The
instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some
commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes

Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
To refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow parameter
with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
A.1.3 SCPI parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The

parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9,
11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank).
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are
specified in the command description.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 569

Allowed parameters are:

● Numeric values..................................................................................................... 570
● Special numeric values......................................................................................... 570
● Boolean parameters..............................................................................................571
● Text parameters.................................................................................................... 571
● Character strings...................................................................................................571
● Block data............................................................................................................. 572
A.1.3.1 Numeric values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The man-
tissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range
-32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent
alone is not allowed.
Example:
SENS:FREQ:STOP 1500000 = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E6
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. If the unit is missing, the basic unit is
used. Allowed unit prefixes are:
● G (giga)
● MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
● K (kilo)
● M (milli)
● U (micro)
● N (nano)
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
A.1.3.2 Special numeric values
The following mnemonics are special numeric values. In the response to a query, the
numeric value is provided.
● MIN and MAX: denote the minimum (MINimum) and maximum (MAXimum) value.
● DEF: denotes a preset value (DEFault) which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 570

● NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as an
instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of
zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of miss-
ing values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?
Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values

The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonic after the question mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
A.1.3.3 Boolean parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represen-
ted by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
A.1.3.4 Text parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the
header by a white space. In the response to a query, the short form of the text is provi-
ded.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
A.1.3.5 Character strings
Always enter strings in quotation marks (' or ").
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 571

Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1"
HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
A.1.3.6 Block data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data.
For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example, the 4 fol-
lowing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the
transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all
bytes are transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
A.1.4 Overview of syntax elements
The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special charac-
ters.
Table A-2: Syntax elements
: The colon separates the mnemonics of a command.
; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
, The comma separates several parameters of a command.
? The question mark forms a query.
* The asterisk marks a common command.
'' Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are pos-
sible).
"
# The hash symbol introduces the following numeral systems:

● Binary: #B10110
● Octal: #O7612
● Hexadecimal: #HF3A7
● Block data: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 572

Table A-3: Special characters
| Parameters
A pipe in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the
command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a pipe. Only one of these mnemonics needs to be
included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the
mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1
[] Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{} Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
A.1.5 Structure of a command line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of

the following:
● <New Line>
● <New Line> with EOI
● EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";".
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system. If the next command
belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 573

Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP
command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels
in common, the command line can be abbreviated. When abbreviating the command
line, the second command begins with the level below HCOP. The colon after the semi-
colon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
A.1.6 Responses to queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard
IEEE 488.2.
● The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
● Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX
Response: 3.5E9
● Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the
basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in
the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
● Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
● Invalid numerical results
Sometimes, particularly when a result consists of multiple numeric values, invalid
values are returned as 9.91E37 (not a number).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 574

Command sequence and synchronization
A.2 Command sequence and synchronization

IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped (asynchronous) and sequential
commands:
● A sequential command finishes executing before the next command starts execut-
ing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential
commands.
● An overlapping or asynchronous command does not automatically finish executing
before the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take
longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If
overlapping commands must be executed in a defined order, e.g. to avoid wrong
measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This method is called
synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
As a rule, send commands and queries in different program messages, i.e. in separate
command lines.
Do not combine queries with commands that affect the queried value in one program
message because the response to the query is not predictable.
The following messages always return correct results:
:CHAN:SCAL 0.01;POS 1
:CHAN:SCAL?
Result: 0.01 (10 mV/div)
Reason: Setting commands within one command line, even though they are implemen-
ted as sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they
have been received.
For further information, refer to:

● rohde-schwarz.com/rckb: Rohde & Schwarz web page that provides information on
instrument drivers and remote control.
● "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John
M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00). The book offers detailed information
on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
A.2.1 Preventing overlapping execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,

*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be
carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the
corresponding action to occur.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 575

Command sequence and synchronization
Table A-4: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Com- Action Programming the controller

mand
*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the Stan- ● Setting bit 0 in the ESE
dard Event Status Register (ESR) after all ● Setting bit 5 in the SRE
previous commands have been executed. ● Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Send *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This occurs when all pending opera- whose processing must be terminated before
tions are completed. other commands can be executed.
*WAI Stops further command processing until all Send *WAI directly after the command whose
commands sent before Wait-to-Continue processing must be terminated before other
Command (WAI) have been executed. commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped

command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply
block overlapping execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to
the overlapped command, for example:
SINGle; *OPC?
For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instru-
ment to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the fol-
lowing methods:
*OPC with a service request

1. Execute *ESE 1
Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1
2. Execute *SRE 32
Sets the Event Status Bit (ESB - bit No. 5) of the Service Request Enable Register
(SRE) to 1 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC

Example: INIT; *OPC
4. Wait for an ESB service request.

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request

1. Execute *SRE 16
Sets the Message Available bit (MAV - bit No. 4) of the Service Request Enable
Register (SRE) to 1 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?

Example: INIT; *OPC?
3. Wait for an MAV service request.

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 576

Messages
Event status enable register (ESE)

1. Execute *ESE 1
Sets the OPC mask bit (bit No. 0) of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) to 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.

Example: INIT; *OPC?
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence:
*OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
A.3 Messages
A.3.1 Instrument messages
Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indicated
otherwise in the description.
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they are
sent:
● Commands
● Instrument responses
Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter A.1, "SCPI
command structure", on page 567.
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages that the controller sends to the instru-
ment. They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands
are subdivided according to two criteria:
● According to the effect on the instrument:
– Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru-
ment or setting the frequency.
– Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of
the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly
appending a question mark to the command header.
● According to their definition in standards:
– Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in stan-
dard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if imple-
mented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized sta-
tus registers, reset and self-test.
– Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 577

Messages
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as

"SCPI compliant" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific, however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per-
mitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages that
the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement
results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
A.3.2 LAN interface messages
In the LAN connection, the interface messages are called low–level control messages.
These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus.
Command Long term Effect on the instrument
&ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received.
&DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the commands just received and
sets the command processing software to a defined initial
state. Does not change the instrument setting.
&GTL Go to Local Transition to the "local" state (manual control). (The

instrument automatically returns to remote state when a
remote command is sent UNLESS &NREN was sent
before.)
&GTR Go to Remote Enables automatic transition from local state to remote

state by a subsequent remote command (after &NREN
was sent).
&GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a
sweep). The effect of the command is the same as with
that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.
&LLO Local Lockout Disables transition from remote control to manual control
by means of the front panel keys.
&NREN Not Remote Enable Disables automatic transition from local state to remote
state by a subsequent remote command. (To re-activate
automatic transition use &GTR.)
&POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 578

R&S®RTB2000 Remote control - status reporting system
Structure of a SCPI status register
B Remote control - status reporting system

The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface
(STATus... commands).
B.1 Structure of a SCPI status register

Each SCPI status register consists of five parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and
has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each
hardware status is assigned a bit number, which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the
most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus, the contents of the register parts
can be processed by the controller as positive integers.
Figure B-1: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts

The five parts of a SCPI status register have different properties and functions:
● CONDition
The CONDition part is written directly by the hardware or it mirrors the sum bit of
the next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This regis-
ter part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affec-
ted by reading.
● PTRansition / NTRansition
The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition
part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 579

Hierarchy of status registers
– PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.

– PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether
the EVENt bit is set to 1.
– NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
– NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
● EVENt
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it
is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the
transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the
entire register.
● ENABle
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the
sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated
ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed
on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+').
ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result
is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event
can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
B.2 Hierarchy of status registers

As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 580

Hierarchy of status registers
Figure B-2: Overview of the status registers hierarchy
● STB, SRE
The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request
Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB pro-
vides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the
lower-level registers.
● ESR, SCPI registers
The STB receives its information from the following registers:
– The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard
Event Status Enable (ESE).
– The STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers which are
defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.
● Output buffer
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 581

Contents of the status registers
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It
is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in
the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the
STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle
part of the ESR.
B.3 Contents of the status registers

In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more
detail.
B.3.1 Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over-
view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis-
ters. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.
The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and
assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.
Table B-1: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No. Meaning
0...1 Not used
2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error mes-
sage. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.
3 QUEStionable status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be speci-
fied in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 582

Bit No. Meaning
4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
6 MSS bit (main status summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7 STATus:OPERation status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
B.3.2 Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI
register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE
and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set.
The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command
*ESE?.
Table B-2: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No. Meaning
0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1 Not used
2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between
-300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue.
4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 583

Bit No. Meaning
5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is
entered into the error queue.
6 User Request
This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.
7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
B.3.3 STATus:OPERation register
In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instru-
ment is being executing. In the EVENt part, it contains information on which actions the
instrument has executed since the last reading. It can be read using the commands
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?.
See also: Figure B-2
The remote commands for the STATus:OPERation register are described in Chap-
ter 15.14.1, "STATus:OPERation register", on page 558.
Table B-3: Bits in the STATus:OPERation register
Bit No. Meaning
0 ALIGnment
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a self alignment.
1 SELFtest
This bit is set while the selftest is running.
2 AUToset
This bit is set while the instrument is performing an auto setup.
3 WTRIgger
This bit is set while the instrument is waiting for the trigger.
4 to 14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
B.3.4 STATus:QUEStionable register
This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is
operated without meeting the specifications. It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? on page 561 and STATus:
QUEStionable[:EVENt]? on page 562
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 584

Figure B-3: Overview of the STATus:QUEStionable register
Table B-4: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No. Meaning
0 to 2 not used
3 COVerload
This bit is set if a questionable channel overload occurs (see Chapter B.3.4.1, "STATus:QUES-
tionable:COVerload register", on page 586).
4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs (see Chapter B.3.4.2, "STATus:QUEStiona-
ble:TEMPerature register", on page 586).
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 585

Bit No. Meaning
5 ADCState
The bit is set if the signal is clipped on the upper or lower edge of the screen -overflow of the
ADC occurs (see Chapter B.3.4.3, "STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState register", on page 587 ).
6 to 7 Not used
8 NOALigndata
This bit is set if no alignment data is available - the instrument is uncalibrated.
9 LIMit
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see Chapter B.3.4.4, "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit reg-
ister", on page 587).
10 to 11 Not used
12 MASK
This bit is set if a mask value is violated (see Chapter B.3.4.5, "STATus:QUEStionable:MASK
register", on page 587
13 to 14 Not used
15 This bit is always 0.
B.3.4.1 STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload register
This register contains all information about overload of the channels. The bit is set if
the assigned channel is overloaded.
Table B-5: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload register
Bit No. Meaning
0 CHANnel1
1 CHANnel2
2 CHANnel3
3 CHANnel4
B.3.4.2 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register
This register contains information about the instrument's temperature.

Table B-6: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register
Bit No. Meaning
0 TEMP WARN
This bit is set if a temperature warning on channel 1, 2, 3 or 4 occured.
1 TEMP ERRor
This bit is set if a temperature error on channel 1, 2, 3 or 4 occured.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 586

B.3.4.3 STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState register
This register contains all information about overflow of the ADC.

The bit is set if the assigned channel signal is clipped on the upper or lower edge of the
screen. In this case, the signal does not fit in the range of the ADC and overflow
occurs.
Table B-7: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState register
Bit No. Meaning
0 CHANnel1, clipping on the upper limit
1 CHANnel1, clipping on the lower limit
B.3.4.4 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
This register contains information about the observance of the limits of measurements.
This bit is set if the limits of the assigned measurement are violated.
Table B-8: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register
Bit No. Meaning
0 MEAS1
1 MEAS2
2 MEAS3
3 MEAS4
B.3.4.5 STATus:QUEStionable:MASK register
This register contains information about the violation of masks. This bit is set if the
assigned mask is violated.
Table B-9: Bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:MASK register
Bit No. Meaning
0 MASK1
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 587

Application of the status reporting system
B.4 Application of the status reporting system

The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several
devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods
are used:
● Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument
● Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller in order to
find out who sent a SRQ and why
● Parallel poll of all devices
● Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands
● Query of the error queue
B.4.1 Service request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the
controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which
the control program can react appropriately. As evident from Figure B-2, an SRQ is
always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and
enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of a further register,
the error queue or the output buffer. The ENABle parts of the status registers can be
set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In order to
make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to
"1" in enable registers SRE and ESE.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors
occur. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
B.4.2 Serial poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard pos-
sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for
instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru-
ments connected to the controller.
B.4.3 Query of an instrument status
Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of
commands:
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 588

Reset values of the status reporting system
● The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level
registers.
● The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers
(STATus:QUEStionable...)
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the
queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.
B.4.3.1 Decimal representation of a bit pattern
The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of
a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number. To make
this possible, each bit is assigned a weighted value. The decimal number is calculated
as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1.
Example:
The decimal value 40 = 32 + 8 indicates that bits no. 3 and 5 in the status register (e.g.
the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte ) are set.
B.4.4 Error queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of
the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the
Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?. Each call of
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error mes-
sages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Espe-
cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu-
larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as
well.
B.5 Reset values of the status reporting system

The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 589

Reset values of the status reporting system
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does

not change the instrument settings.
Table B-10: Resest of the status reporting system
Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)
Clear STB, ESR - yes - - - yes
Clear SRE, ESE - yes - - - -
Clear EVENt parts of the regis- - yes - - - yes

ters
Clear ENABle parts of all - yes - - yes -

OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other
registers with "1".
Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; - yes - - yes -

Clear NTRansition parts
Clear error queue yes yes - - - yes
Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)
Clear command processing yes yes yes - - -

and input buffer
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA-
TOR> clears the output buffer.
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 590

R&S®RTB2000 List of commands
List of commands
*CAL?.............................................................................................................................................................309
*CLS...............................................................................................................................................................310
*ESE.............................................................................................................................................................. 310
*ESR?............................................................................................................................................................ 310
*IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 310
*OPC..............................................................................................................................................................310
*OPT?............................................................................................................................................................ 311
*PSC.............................................................................................................................................................. 311
*RST...............................................................................................................................................................311
*SRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 311
*STB?.............................................................................................................................................................312
*TRG..............................................................................................................................................................312
*WAI...............................................................................................................................................................312
ACQuire:AVAilable?....................................................................................................................................... 372
ACQuire:AVERage:COMPlete?..................................................................................................................... 328
ACQuire:AVERage:COUNt............................................................................................................................ 328
ACQuire:AVERage:CURRent?...................................................................................................................... 372
ACQuire:AVERage:RESet............................................................................................................................. 328
ACQuire:HRESolution....................................................................................................................................327
ACQuire:INTerpolate......................................................................................................................................329
ACQuire:MEMory[:MODE]............................................................................................................................. 370
ACQuire:NSINgle:COUNt.............................................................................................................................. 313
ACQuire:PEAKdetect.....................................................................................................................................327
ACQuire:POINts:ARATe?...............................................................................................................................329
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic.......................................................................................................................... 325
ACQuire:POINts:AUTomatic.......................................................................................................................... 371
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]............................................................................................................................... 325
ACQuire:POINts[:VALue]............................................................................................................................... 371
ACQuire:SEGMented:STATe......................................................................................................................... 372
ACQuire:SRATe?........................................................................................................................................... 330
ACQuire:STATe..............................................................................................................................................314
ACQuire:TYPE...............................................................................................................................................326
AUToscale......................................................................................................................................................313
BPLot:AMPLitude:ENABle.............................................................................................................................424
BPLot:AMPLitude:MODE...............................................................................................................................420
BPLot:AMPLitude:POSition........................................................................................................................... 425
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:COUNt............................................................................................................... 419
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:AMPLitude........................................................................................ 420
BPLot:AMPLitude:PROFile:POINt<n>:FREQuency...................................................................................... 420
BPLot:AMPLitude:SCALe.............................................................................................................................. 425
BPLot:AUToscale...........................................................................................................................................419
BPLot:ENABle................................................................................................................................................419
BPLot:EXPort:NAME..................................................................................................................................... 380
BPLot:EXPort:SAVE...................................................................................................................................... 380
BPLot:FREQuency:DATA?............................................................................................................................ 420
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 591

BPLot:FREQuency:STARt............................................................................................................................. 421
BPLot:FREQuency:STOP..............................................................................................................................421
BPLot:GAIN:DATA?....................................................................................................................................... 423
BPLot:GAIN:ENABle......................................................................................................................................423
BPLot:GAIN:POSition.................................................................................................................................... 423
BPLot:GAIN:SCALe.......................................................................................................................................423
BPLot:INPut[:SOURce]..................................................................................................................................421
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:FREQ?...................................................................................................... 425
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:GAIN?........................................................................................................425
BPLot:MARKer<m>:DIFFerence:PHASe?.....................................................................................................426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:FREQuency...................................................................................................................426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:GAIN?............................................................................................................................426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:INDex............................................................................................................................ 426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:PHASe?.........................................................................................................................426
BPLot:MARKer<m>:SSCReen...................................................................................................................... 427
BPLot:MEASurement:DELay.........................................................................................................................421
BPLot:MEASurement:POINt[:DISPLAY]........................................................................................................ 421
BPLot:OUTPut[:SOURce]..............................................................................................................................422
BPLot:PHASe:DATA?.................................................................................................................................... 424
BPLot:PHASe:ENABle?.................................................................................................................................424
BPLot:PHASe:POSition?............................................................................................................................... 424
BPLot:PHASe:SCALe?..................................................................................................................................424
BPLot:POINts:LOGarithmic........................................................................................................................... 422
BPLot:REPeat................................................................................................................................................422
BPLot:RESet..................................................................................................................................................422
BPLot:STATe..................................................................................................................................................422
BUS:CAN:BITRate...................................................................................................................................501
BUS:CAN:DATA:SOURce....................................................................................................................... 500
BUS:CAN:FCOunt?................................................................................................................................. 506
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKState?...........................................................................................................507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:ACKValue?.......................................................................................................... 508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?..............................................................................................................510
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BSEPosition?...................................................................................................... 510
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?................................................................................................511
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?............................................................................................... 511
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?............................................................................................................ 508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?............................................................................................................ 508
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?................................................................................................................. 507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCState?...........................................................................................................509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:DLCValue?.......................................................................................................... 509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?..............................................................................................................509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDTYpe?.............................................................................................................. 509
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?..............................................................................................................510
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?................................................................................................................ 507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?.............................................................................................................. 506
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?.................................................................................................................507
BUS:CAN:FRAMe<n>:TYPE?................................................................................................................. 506
BUS:CAN:SAMPlepoint...........................................................................................................................501
BUS:CAN:TYPE...................................................................................................................................... 500
BUS:CPARallel:CLOCK:SLOPe.............................................................................................................. 538
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 592

BUS:CPARallel:CLOCk:SOURce............................................................................................................ 538
BUS:CPARallel:CS:ENABle.....................................................................................................................539
BUS:CPARallel:CS:POLarity................................................................................................................... 539
BUS:CPARallel:CS:SOURce................................................................................................................... 539
BUS:CPARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce........................................................................................................537
BUS:CPARallel:FCOunt?.........................................................................................................................540
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?.........................................................................................................540
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?....................................................................................................... 541
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?........................................................................................................540
BUS:CPARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?........................................................................................................ 541
BUS:CPARallel:WIDTh............................................................................................................................ 537
BUS:DSIGnals.........................................................................................................................................465
BUS:DSIZe.............................................................................................................................................. 465
BUS:FORMat...........................................................................................................................................464
BUS:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle]..............................................................................................................374
BUS:HISTory:CURRent........................................................................................................................... 374
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:NAME....................................................................................................................380
BUS:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE.....................................................................................................................380
BUS:HISTory:PALL.................................................................................................................................. 374
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed...................................................................................................................375
BUS:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe................................................................................................................... 376
BUS:HISTory:REPLay............................................................................................................................. 375
BUS:HISTory:STARt................................................................................................................................ 375
BUS:HISTory:STOP.................................................................................................................................375
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?.............................................................................................................. 379
BUS:HISTory:TSABsolute?......................................................................................................................378
BUS:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?.....................................................................................................................379
BUS:HISTory:TSDate?............................................................................................................................ 379
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?................................................................................................................378
BUS:HISTory:TSRelative?.......................................................................................................................377
BUS:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle]............................................................................................................... 377
BUS:I2C:CLOCk:SOURce.......................................................................................................................479
BUS:I2C:DATA:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 479
BUS:I2C:FCOunt?................................................................................................................................... 483
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AACCess?.............................................................................................................485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACCess?............................................................................................................... 485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ACOMplete?..........................................................................................................485
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADBStart?............................................................................................................. 486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADDRess?.............................................................................................................486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ADEVice?.............................................................................................................. 486
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:AMODe?................................................................................................................487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:ASTart?..................................................................................................................487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?................................................................................................................487
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACCess?...............................................................................................488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:ACKStart?.............................................................................................488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:COMPlete?........................................................................................... 488
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STARt?................................................................................................. 489
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?................................................................................................. 489
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:DATA?................................................................................................................... 483
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.................................................................................................................. 484
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 593

BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STATus?................................................................................................................ 484
BUS:I2C:FRAMe<n>:STOP?...................................................................................................................484
BUS:LABel...............................................................................................................................................464
BUS:LABel:STATe................................................................................................................................... 464
BUS:LIN:BITRate.....................................................................................................................................517
BUS:LIN:DATA:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 516
BUS:LIN:FCOunt?................................................................................................................................... 521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BCOunt?................................................................................................................524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:STATe?................................................................................................. 525
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:BYTE<o>:VALue?................................................................................................. 525
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSSTate?.............................................................................................................. 522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:CSValue?.............................................................................................................. 522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:DATA?................................................................................................................... 521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDPValue?............................................................................................................. 523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDSTate?................................................................................................................523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:IDValue?................................................................................................................523
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.................................................................................................................. 521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STATus?................................................................................................................ 521
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:STOP?...................................................................................................................522
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYSTate?.............................................................................................................. 524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SYValue?...............................................................................................................524
BUS:LIN:FRAMe<n>:VERSion?..............................................................................................................524
BUS:LIN:POLarity....................................................................................................................................516
BUS:LIN:STANdard................................................................................................................................. 517
BUS:PARallel:DATA<m>:SOURce.......................................................................................................... 537
BUS:PARallel:FCOunt?........................................................................................................................... 540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:DATA?........................................................................................................... 540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.......................................................................................................... 541
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STATe?.......................................................................................................... 540
BUS:PARallel:FRAMe<n>:STOP?...........................................................................................................541
BUS:PARallel:WIDTh...............................................................................................................................537
BUS:POSition.......................................................................................................................................... 465
BUS:RESult............................................................................................................................................. 465
BUS:SPI:BORDer....................................................................................................................................469
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity.......................................................................................................................467
BUS:SPI:CLOCk:SOURce.......................................................................................................................467
BUS:SPI:CS:POLarity..............................................................................................................................467
BUS:SPI:CS:SOURce............................................................................................................................. 466
BUS:SPI:DATA:POLarity......................................................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:DATA:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 467
BUS:SPI:FCOunt?...................................................................................................................................475
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MISO?........................................................................................................ 477
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:DATA:MOSI?........................................................................................................ 476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STARt?................................................................................................................. 476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STATus?............................................................................................................... 475
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:STOP?.................................................................................................................. 476
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WCOunt?.............................................................................................................. 477
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MISO?................................................................................................ 478
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:MOSI?................................................................................................ 478
BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?...............................................................................................477
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 594

BUS:SPI:FRAME<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?............................................................................................... 478
BUS:SPI:MISO:POLarity......................................................................................................................... 469
BUS:SPI:MISO:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:MOSI:POLarity......................................................................................................................... 468
BUS:SPI:MOSI:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 467
BUS:SPI:SSIZe........................................................................................................................................469
BUS:SSPI:BITime....................................................................................................................................472
BUS:SSPI:BORDer..................................................................................................................................472
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:POLarity.................................................................................................................... 470
BUS:SSPI:CLOCk:SOURce.................................................................................................................... 470
BUS:SSPI:DATA:POLarity....................................................................................................................... 471
BUS:SSPI:DATA:SOURce.......................................................................................................................470
BUS:SSPI:MISO:POLarity....................................................................................................................... 472
BUS:SSPI:MISO:SOURce.......................................................................................................................471
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:POLarity....................................................................................................................... 471
BUS:SSPI:MOSI:SOURce.......................................................................................................................470
BUS:SSPI:SSIZe..................................................................................................................................... 472
BUS:STATe.............................................................................................................................................. 464
BUS:TYPE...............................................................................................................................................463
BUS:UART:BAUDrate..............................................................................................................................492
BUS:UART:BITime...................................................................................................................................493
BUS:UART:DATA:POLarity...................................................................................................................... 491
BUS:UART:DATA:SOURce......................................................................................................................490
BUS:UART:FCOunt?............................................................................................................................... 495
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.............................................................................................................. 496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STATe?.............................................................................................................. 496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:STOP?...............................................................................................................496
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?...........................................................................................................497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:RXValue?........................................................................................ 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:SOURce?........................................................................................497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?............................................................................................498
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?............................................................................................497
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?............................................................................................ 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:TXValue?........................................................................................ 499
BUS:UART:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?........................................................................................... 499
BUS:UART:PARity................................................................................................................................... 492
BUS:UART:POLarity................................................................................................................................ 491
BUS:UART:RX:FCOunt?......................................................................................................................... 495
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?........................................................................................................ 496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?........................................................................................................ 496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?.........................................................................................................496
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?.....................................................................................................497
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?......................................................................................498
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?......................................................................................497
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?...................................................................................... 499
BUS:UART:RX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?..................................................................................... 499
BUS:UART:RX:SOURce..........................................................................................................................490
BUS:UART:SBIT...................................................................................................................................... 492
BUS:UART:SSIZe.................................................................................................................................... 491
BUS:UART:TX:FCOunt?..........................................................................................................................495
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 595

BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STARt?.........................................................................................................496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STATe?.........................................................................................................496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:STOP?......................................................................................................... 496
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WCOunt?..................................................................................................... 497
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STARt?...................................................................................... 498
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STATe?...................................................................................... 497
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:STOP?.......................................................................................499
BUS:UART:TX:FRAMe<n>:WORD<o>:VALue?......................................................................................499
BUS:UART:TX:SOURce.......................................................................................................................... 490
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:HEADer?......................................................................................................... 433
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:POINts?...........................................................................................................433
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XINCrement?...................................................................................................437
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:XORigin?......................................................................................................... 437
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YINCrement?...................................................................................................438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YORigin?......................................................................................................... 438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................................. 438
CALCulate:MATH<m>:DATA?....................................................................................................................... 433
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle]........................................................................................ 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:CURRent..................................................................................................... 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PALL............................................................................................................ 374
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed.............................................................................................375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe..............................................................................................376
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:REPLay....................................................................................................... 375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STARt.......................................................................................................... 375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:STOP...........................................................................................................375
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?........................................................................................ 379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?................................................................................................378
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?............................................................................................... 379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSDate?...................................................................................................... 379
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?..........................................................................................378
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?................................................................................................. 377
CALCulate:MATH<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle]......................................................................................... 377
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel.........................................................................................................................348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:LABel:STATe..............................................................................................................348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:POSition.................................................................................................................... 348
CALCulate:MATH<m>:SCALe....................................................................................................................... 349
CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe........................................................................................................................ 347
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:EDGE............................................................................................................349
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold:HYSTeresis................................................................................ 350
CALCulate:MATH<m>:TRACk:THReshold[:UPPer]...................................................................................... 350
CALCulate:MATH<m>:WCOLor.................................................................................................................... 349
CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine]............................................................................................. 347
CALibration.................................................................................................................................................... 455
CALibration:STATe?.......................................................................................................................................455
CHANnel<m>:AOFF...................................................................................................................................... 315
CHANnel<m>:AON........................................................................................................................................315
CHANnel<m>:ARIThmetics........................................................................................................................... 327
CHANnel<m>:BANDwidth............................................................................................................................. 317
CHANnel<m>:COUPling................................................................................................................................317
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:HEADer?..................................................................................................... 432
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 596

CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XINCrement?...............................................................................................437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:XORigin?..................................................................................................... 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YINCrement?...............................................................................................438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YORigin?..................................................................................................... 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope:YRESolution?.............................................................................................. 438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:ENVelope?....................................................................................................................432
CHANnel<m>:DATA:HEADer?...................................................................................................................... 430
CHANnel<m>:DATA:POINts.......................................................................................................................... 430
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XINCrement?................................................................................................................437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:XORigin?...................................................................................................................... 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YINCrement?................................................................................................................438
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YORigin?...................................................................................................................... 437
CHANnel<m>:DATA:YRESolution?............................................................................................................... 438
CHANnel<m>:DATA?.....................................................................................................................................429
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:[ENABle].................................................................................................... 374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:CURRent...................................................................................................................374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME........................................................................................................... 380
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE............................................................................................................ 381
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PALL......................................................................................................................... 374
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed.......................................................................................................... 375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe...........................................................................................................376
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:REPLay.....................................................................................................................376
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STARt........................................................................................................................375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:STOP........................................................................................................................ 375
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?......................................................................................................379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?............................................................................................................. 378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?............................................................................................................ 379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSDate?....................................................................................................................379
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?....................................................................................................... 378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?.............................................................................................................. 378
CHANnel<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle].......................................................................................................377
CHANnel<m>:LABel...................................................................................................................................... 320
CHANnel<m>:LABel:STATe...........................................................................................................................321
CHANnel<m>:OFFSet................................................................................................................................... 316
CHANnel<m>:POLarity..................................................................................................................................318
CHANnel<m>:POSition..................................................................................................................................316
CHANnel<m>:RANGe................................................................................................................................... 316
CHANnel<m>:SCALe.................................................................................................................................... 315
CHANnel<m>:SKEW..................................................................................................................................... 318
CHANnel<m>:STATe..................................................................................................................................... 315
CHANnel<m>:THReshold..............................................................................................................................319
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:FINDlevel............................................................................................................. 320
CHANnel<m>:THReshold:HYSTeresis.......................................................................................................... 320
CHANnel<m>:TYPE...................................................................................................................................... 326
CHANnel<m>:WCOLor..................................................................................................................................319
CHANnel<m>:ZOFFset[:VALue].................................................................................................................... 318
CURSor<m>:AOFF........................................................................................................................................394
CURSor<m>:FUNCtion..................................................................................................................................394
CURSor<m>:SNPeak<n>..............................................................................................................................398
CURSor<m>:SOURce................................................................................................................................... 395
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 597

CURSor<m>:SPPeak<n>.............................................................................................................................. 398
CURSor<m>:SSOURce.................................................................................................................................396
CURSor<m>:STATe....................................................................................................................................... 394
CURSor<m>:SWAVe..................................................................................................................................... 398
CURSor<m>:TRACking:SCALe[:STATe]....................................................................................................... 398
CURSor<m>:TRACking[:STATe]....................................................................................................................396
CURSor<m>:USSOURce.............................................................................................................................. 396
CURSor<m>:X1Position................................................................................................................................ 397
CURSor<m>:X2Position................................................................................................................................ 397
CURSor<m>:XCOupling................................................................................................................................397
CURSor<m>:XDELta:INVerse?..................................................................................................................... 399
CURSor<m>:XDELta[:VALue]?..................................................................................................................... 399
CURSor<m>:Y1Position................................................................................................................................ 397
CURSor<m>:Y2Position................................................................................................................................ 397
CURSor<m>:YCOupling................................................................................................................................397
CURSor<m>:YDELta:SLOPe?...................................................................................................................... 400
CURSor<m>:YDELta[:VALue]?..................................................................................................................... 399
DEVice:MODE............................................................................................................................................... 400
DIAGnostic:UPDate:INSTall...........................................................................................................................463
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:CLOSe..........................................................................................................462
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:DATA............................................................................................................ 462
DIAGnostic:UPDate:TRANsfer:OPEN........................................................................................................... 462
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?..................................................................................................... 530
DIGital<m>:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?.......................................................................................................530
DIGital<m>:DATA:HEADer?.......................................................................................................................... 535
DIGital<m>:DATA:POINts.............................................................................................................................. 536
DIGital<m>:DATA:XINCrement?....................................................................................................................437
DIGital<m>:DATA:XORigin?.......................................................................................................................... 437
DIGital<m>:DATA:YINCrement?....................................................................................................................438
DIGital<m>:DATA:YORigin?.......................................................................................................................... 438
DIGital<m>:DATA:YRESolution?................................................................................................................... 438
DIGital<m>:DATA?.........................................................................................................................................535
DIGital<m>:DISPlay.......................................................................................................................................531
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle]......................................................................................................... 374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:CURRent.......................................................................................................................374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:NAME............................................................................................................... 380
DIGital<m>:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE................................................................................................................ 381
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PALL............................................................................................................................. 374
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed.............................................................................................................. 375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe...............................................................................................................376
DIGital<m>:HISTory:REPLay.........................................................................................................................375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STARt............................................................................................................................375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:STOP............................................................................................................................ 375
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?..........................................................................................................379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSABsolute?................................................................................................................. 378
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?................................................................................................................ 379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSDate?........................................................................................................................379
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?........................................................................................................... 378
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TSRelative?.................................................................................................................. 377
DIGital<m>:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle]...........................................................................................................377
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 598

DIGital<m>:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................................................533
DIGital<m>:LABel.......................................................................................................................................... 534
DIGital<m>:LABel:STATe...............................................................................................................................534
DIGital<m>:POSition......................................................................................................................................533
DIGital<m>:PROBe[:ENABle]?...................................................................................................................... 531
DIGital<m>:SIZE............................................................................................................................................533
DIGital<m>:TECHnology............................................................................................................................... 531
DIGital<m>:THReshold..................................................................................................................................532
DISPlay:CBAR:FFT[:POSition]...................................................................................................................... 409
DISPlay:CBAR:ZOOM[:POSition].................................................................................................................. 346
DISPlay:CLEar[:SCReen].............................................................................................................................. 450
DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe................................................................................................................................ 452
DISPlay:DIALog:MESSage............................................................................................................................452
DISPlay:DTIMe.............................................................................................................................................. 450
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation:TRACk................................................................................................................ 454
DISPlay:GRID:ANNotation[:ENABle]............................................................................................................. 454
DISPlay:GRID:STYLe....................................................................................................................................452
DISPlay:INTensity:GRID................................................................................................................................ 452
DISPlay:INTensity:WAVeform........................................................................................................................ 453
DISPlay:LANGuage....................................................................................................................................... 450
DISPlay:MODE.............................................................................................................................................. 415
DISPlay:PALette............................................................................................................................................ 453
DISPlay:PERSistence:CLEar.........................................................................................................................451
DISPlay:PERSistence:INFinite...................................................................................................................... 452
DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME.......................................................................................................................... 451
DISPlay:PERSistence:TYPE......................................................................................................................... 450
DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe]...................................................................................................................... 451
DISPlay:STYLe..............................................................................................................................................453
DISPlay:XY:XSOurce.....................................................................................................................................415
DISPlay:XY:Y1Source....................................................................................................................................415
DISPlay:XY:Y2Source....................................................................................................................................416
DVM<m>:ENABle.......................................................................................................................................... 416
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]:STATus?............................................................................................................. 417
DVM<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?...........................................................................................................................417
DVM<m>:SOURce.........................................................................................................................................416
DVM<m>:TYPE............................................................................................................................................. 416
EXPort:ATABle:NAME................................................................................................................................... 380
EXPort:ATABle:SAVE.....................................................................................................................................381
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:NAME...............................................................................................391
EXPort:MEASurement:STATistics:ALL:SAVE................................................................................................391
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:NAME............................................................................................... 390
EXPort:MEASurement<m>:STATistics:SAVE................................................................................................ 390
EXPort:SCRSave:DESTination......................................................................................................................441
EXPort:SEARch:NAME..................................................................................................................................370
EXPort:SEARch:SAVE...................................................................................................................................370
EXPort:WAVeform:NAME.............................................................................................................................. 440
EXPort:WAVeform:SAVE............................................................................................................................... 440
EXPort:WAVeform:SOURce...........................................................................................................................439
EXPort:WFMSave:DESTination.....................................................................................................................439
FORMat:BORDer...........................................................................................................................................429
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 599

FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................................................. 427
HCOPy:COLor:SCHeme................................................................................................................................442
HCOPy:CWINdow..........................................................................................................................................441
HCOPy:DATA?...............................................................................................................................................442
HCOPy:FORMat............................................................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy:LANGuage........................................................................................................................................442
HCOPy:SIZE:X?............................................................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy:SIZE:Y?............................................................................................................................................ 442
HCOPy[:IMMediate].......................................................................................................................................441
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MAXimum?....................................................................................................... 530
LOGic:CURRent:STATe:MINimum?........................................................................................................ 530
LOGic:DATA:HEADer?............................................................................................................................ 535
LOGic:DATA:POINts................................................................................................................................536
LOGic:DATA:XINCrement?......................................................................................................................437
LOGic:DATA:XORigin?............................................................................................................................ 437
LOGic:DATA:YINCrement?......................................................................................................................438
LOGic:DATA:YORigin?............................................................................................................................ 438
LOGic:DATA:YRESolution?..................................................................................................................... 438
LOGic:DATA?.......................................................................................................................................... 535
LOGic:HISTory:CONTrol:ENABle]........................................................................................................... 374
LOGic:HISTory:CURRent........................................................................................................................ 374
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:NAME................................................................................................................. 380
LOGic:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE.................................................................................................................. 381
LOGic:HISTory:PALL............................................................................................................................... 374
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed................................................................................................................375
LOGic:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe.................................................................................................................376
LOGic:HISTory:REPLay...........................................................................................................................376
LOGic:HISTory:STARt............................................................................................................................. 375
LOGic:HISTory:STOP.............................................................................................................................. 375
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?........................................................................................................... 379
LOGic:HISTory:TSABsolute?...................................................................................................................378
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?.................................................................................................................. 379
LOGic:HISTory:TSDate?..........................................................................................................................379
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?.............................................................................................................378
LOGic:HISTory:TSRelative?.................................................................................................................... 377
LOGic:HISTory:TTABle[:ENABle]............................................................................................................ 377
LOGic:HYSTeresis...................................................................................................................................533
LOGic:PROBe[:ENABle]?........................................................................................................................530
LOGic:STATe........................................................................................................................................... 531
LOGic:THReshold....................................................................................................................................532
LOGic:THReshold:UDLevel.....................................................................................................................532
LOGic:TYPE............................................................................................................................................ 533
MASK:ACTion:PULSe:EVENt:MODE............................................................................................................403
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:DESTination.......................................................................................................... 404
MASK:ACTion:SCRSave:EVENt:MODE....................................................................................................... 403
MASK:ACTion:SOUNd:EVENt:MODE...........................................................................................................403
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:COUNt.............................................................................................................404
MASK:ACTion:STOP:EVENt:MODE..............................................................................................................403
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:DESTination......................................................................................................... 404
MASK:ACTion:WFMSave:EVENt:MODE...................................................................................................... 403
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 600

MASK:ACTion:YOUT:ENABle........................................................................................................................405
MASK:CAPTure[:MODE]............................................................................................................................... 406
MASK:CHCopy.............................................................................................................................................. 401
MASK:COUNt?.............................................................................................................................................. 406
MASK:DATA:HEADer?.................................................................................................................................. 435
MASK:DATA:XINCrement?............................................................................................................................437
MASK:DATA:XORigin?.................................................................................................................................. 437
MASK:DATA:YINCrement?............................................................................................................................438
MASK:DATA:YORigin?.................................................................................................................................. 438
MASK:DATA:YRESolution?........................................................................................................................... 438
MASK:DATA?.................................................................................................................................................435
MASK:LOAD..................................................................................................................................................402
MASK:RESet:COUNter..................................................................................................................................405
MASK:SAVE.................................................................................................................................................. 402
MASK:SOURce..............................................................................................................................................401
MASK:STATe................................................................................................................................................. 400
MASK:TEST...................................................................................................................................................405
MASK:VCOunt?.............................................................................................................................................406
MASK:XWIDth............................................................................................................................................... 401
MASK:YPOSition........................................................................................................................................... 401
MASK:YSCale................................................................................................................................................401
MASK:YWIDth............................................................................................................................................... 402
MEASurement<m>:ALL[:STATe]....................................................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:AOFF..............................................................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:AON................................................................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:ARESult?........................................................................................................................382
MEASurement<m>:DELay:SLOPe................................................................................................................386
MEASurement<m>:MAIN.............................................................................................................................. 383
MEASurement<m>:RESult:AVG?..................................................................................................................388
MEASurement<m>:RESult:NPEak?.............................................................................................................. 389
MEASurement<m>:RESult:PPEak?.............................................................................................................. 389
MEASurement<m>:RESult:STDDev?............................................................................................................388
MEASurement<m>:RESult:WFMCount?....................................................................................................... 389
MEASurement<m>:RESult[:ACTual]?........................................................................................................... 388
MEASurement<m>:SOURce......................................................................................................................... 385
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RESet........................................................................................................... 386
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue:ALL?..................................................................................................390
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:VALue<n>?................................................................................................... 390
MEASurement<m>:STATistics:WEIGht?....................................................................................................... 389
MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle]....................................................................................................... 386
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout:AUTO............................................................................................................... 387
MEASurement<m>:TIMeout[TIME]................................................................................................................387
MEASurement<m>[:ENABle].........................................................................................................................383
MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?........................................................................................................................ 447
MMEMory:CATalog?...................................................................................................................................... 446
MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 444
MMEMory:COPY........................................................................................................................................... 447
MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................................................ 448
MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?......................................................................................................................445
MMEMory:DCATalog?....................................................................................................................................445
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 601

MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................................................448
MMEMory:DRIVes?....................................................................................................................................... 443
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................................................ 449
MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................................................444
MMEMory:MOVE........................................................................................................................................... 447
MMEMory:MSIS.............................................................................................................................................444
MMEMory:NAME........................................................................................................................................... 441
MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................................................... 444
MMEMory:STORe:STATe.............................................................................................................................. 448
PGENerator:FUNCtion...................................................................................................................................552
PGENerator:MANual:STATe<s>.................................................................................................................... 558
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend............................................................................................ 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BAND................................................................................. 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:BOR................................................................................... 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:APPend:INDex................................................................................. 556
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA:LENGth.............................................................................................555
PGENerator:PATTern:ARBitrary:DATA[:SET]................................................................................................ 555
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:NCYCle...........................................................................................................557
PGENerator:PATTern:BURSt:STATe..............................................................................................................557
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:DIRection.................................................................................................... 554
PGENerator:PATTern:COUNter:FREQuency................................................................................................ 554
PGENerator:PATTern:FREQuency................................................................................................................ 554
PGENerator:PATTern:ITIMe...........................................................................................................................557
PGENerator:PATTern:PERiod........................................................................................................................553
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:DCYCle................................................................................................ 553
PGENerator:PATTern:SQUarewave:POLarity............................................................................................... 553
PGENerator:PATTern:STATe..........................................................................................................................552
PGENerator:PATTern:STIMe......................................................................................................................... 557
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:EXTern:SLOPe.............................................................................................553
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:MODE.......................................................................................................... 555
PGENerator:PATTern:TRIGger:SINGle......................................................................................................... 557
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual..................................................................................................... 321
PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation:UNIT......................................................................................................... 321
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:MANual................................................................................................................ 322
PROBe<m>:SETup:GAIN:UNIT.................................................................................................................... 322
REFCurve<m>:DATA:HEADer?.....................................................................................................................434
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XINCrement?.............................................................................................................. 437
REFCurve<m>:DATA:XORigin?.................................................................................................................... 437
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YINCrement?.............................................................................................................. 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YORigin?.................................................................................................................... 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA:YRESolution?............................................................................................................. 438
REFCurve<m>:DATA?...................................................................................................................................434
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:POSition............................................................................................................ 353
REFCurve<m>:HORizontal:SCALe............................................................................................................... 353
REFCurve<m>:LABel.................................................................................................................................... 354
REFCurve<m>:LOAD.................................................................................................................................... 352
REFCurve<m>:LOAD:STATe.........................................................................................................................353
REFCurve<m>:SAVE.....................................................................................................................................352
REFCurve<m>:SOURce................................................................................................................................351
REFCurve<m>:SOURce:CATalog?............................................................................................................... 351
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 602

REFCurve<m>:STATe....................................................................................................................................351
REFCurve<m>:UPDate................................................................................................................................. 352
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:POSition................................................................................................................ 353
REFCurve<m>:VERTical:SCALe...................................................................................................................354
REFCurve<m>:WCOLor................................................................................................................................ 354
REFLevel:RELative:LOWer........................................................................................................................... 393
REFLevel:RELative:MIDDle...........................................................................................................................393
REFLevel:RELative:MODE............................................................................................................................393
REFLevel:RELative:UPPer............................................................................................................................393
RUN............................................................................................................................................................... 313
RUNContinous...............................................................................................................................................313
RUNSingle..................................................................................................................................................... 313
SEARch:CONDition....................................................................................................................................... 355
SEARch:MEASure:LEVel:PEAK:MAGNitude................................................................................................ 359
SEARch:MEASure:PEAK:POLarity............................................................................................................... 359
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ACKerror................................................................................................................513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:BITSterror.............................................................................................................. 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CONDition............................................................................................................. 512
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:CRCerror............................................................................................................... 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DATA..................................................................................................................... 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DCONdition........................................................................................................... 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:DLENgth................................................................................................................ 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FORMerror............................................................................................................ 513
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FRAMe.................................................................................................................. 512
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:FTYPe................................................................................................................... 514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ICONdition............................................................................................................. 514
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:IDENtifier............................................................................................................... 515
SEARch:PROTocol:CAN:ITYPe.....................................................................................................................514
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CHKSerror............................................................................................................... 527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:CONDition............................................................................................................... 526
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DATA....................................................................................................................... 529
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DCONdition............................................................................................................. 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:DLENgth..................................................................................................................528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:FRAMe.................................................................................................................... 526
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:ICONdition............................................................................................................... 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IDENtifier................................................................................................................. 528
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:IPERror....................................................................................................................527
SEARch:PROTocol:LIN:SYERror.................................................................................................................. 527
SEARch:RCOunt?......................................................................................................................................... 369
SEARch:RESDiagram:SHOW....................................................................................................................... 368
SEARch:RESult:ALL?....................................................................................................................................368
SEARch:RESult:BCOunt?............................................................................................................................. 368
SEARch:RESult<n>?.....................................................................................................................................369
SEARch:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................... 356
SEARch:STATe.............................................................................................................................................. 355
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe........................................................................................................ 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel.........................................................................................................364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CLEVel:DELTa............................................................................................. 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce...................................................................................................... 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel.........................................................................................................364
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 603

SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:DLEVel:DELTa............................................................................................. 364
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:HTIMe.......................................................................................................... 365
SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:STIMe.......................................................................................................... 365
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel..................................................................................................................... 357
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel:DELTa......................................................................................................... 357
SEARch:TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe...................................................................................................................357
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:LOWer.................................................................................................... 360
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RISetime:UPPer.....................................................................................................360
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:LOWer......................................................................................................... 362
SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:RUNT:UPPer.......................................................................................................... 362
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:FUNCtion........................................................................................................... 366
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>........................................................................................................... 366
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:LEVel<n>:DELTa................................................................................................ 367
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:SOURce.............................................................................................................365
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa.................................................................................................... 368
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe.................................................................................................. 367
SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh]..................................................................................................367
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:DELTa............................................................................................................... 361
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:RANGe............................................................................................................. 361
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:SLOPe.............................................................................................................. 360
SEARch:TRIGger:RISetime:TIME................................................................................................................. 361
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:DELTa.................................................................................................................... 363
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity................................................................................................................. 362
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:RANGe...................................................................................................................362
SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:WIDTh....................................................................................................................363
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:DELTa...................................................................................................................359
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel.................................................................................................................... 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:LEVel:DELTa........................................................................................................ 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:POLarity............................................................................................................... 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:RANGe................................................................................................................. 358
SEARch:TRIGger:WIDTh:WIDTh.................................................................................................................. 359
SINGle........................................................................................................................................................... 313
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COMPlete?............................................................................................. 412
SPECtrum:FREQuency:AVERage:COUNt.................................................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio.............................................................................. 410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:VALue]........................................................................... 410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:CENTer....................................................................................................................409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:FULLspan................................................................................................................409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:MAGNitude:SCALe................................................................................................. 408
SPECtrum:FREQuency:POSition.................................................................................................................. 408
SPECtrum:FREQuency:RESet...................................................................................................................... 412
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SCALe.....................................................................................................................409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:SPAN.......................................................................................................................409
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STARt...................................................................................................................... 410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:STOP.......................................................................................................................410
SPECtrum:FREQuency:WINDow:TYPE........................................................................................................407
SPECtrum:HISTory:CURRent........................................................................................................................374
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:NAME................................................................................................................ 380
SPECtrum:HISTory:EXPort:SAVE................................................................................................................. 381
SPECtrum:HISTory:PALL...............................................................................................................................374
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 604

SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:SPEed............................................................................................................... 375
SPECtrum:HISTory:PLAYer:STATe................................................................................................................ 376
SPECtrum:HISTory:REPLay.......................................................................................................................... 376
SPECtrum:HISTory:STARt.............................................................................................................................375
SPECtrum:HISTory:STOP............................................................................................................................. 375
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute:ALL?...........................................................................................................379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSABsolute?.................................................................................................................. 378
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate:ALL?..................................................................................................................379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSDate?......................................................................................................................... 379
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative:ALL?............................................................................................................ 378
SPECtrum:HISTory:TSRelative?....................................................................................................................378
SPECtrum:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................407
SPECtrum:TIME:POSition............................................................................................................................. 411
SPECtrum:TIME:RANGe............................................................................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:HEADer?......................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:POINts?........................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XINCrement?...................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:XORigin?......................................................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YINCrement?...................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YORigin?......................................................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage:DATA?........................................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:AVERage[:ENABle].................................................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:HEADer?........................................................................................ 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:POINts?..........................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XINCrement?..................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:XORigin?........................................................................................ 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YINCrement?..................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YORigin?........................................................................................ 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA:YRESolution?................................................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum:DATA?...................................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MAXimum[:ENABle]................................................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:HEADer?......................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:POINts?........................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XINCrement?...................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:XORigin?......................................................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YINCrement?...................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YORigin?......................................................................................... 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum:DATA?........................................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:MINimum[:ENABle].................................................................................................... 411
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:HEADer?........................................................................................413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:POINts?......................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XINCrement?................................................................................. 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:XORigin?........................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YINCrement?................................................................................. 414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YORigin?........................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA:YRESolution?.................................................................................414
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum:DATA?...................................................................................................... 413
SPECtrum:WAVeform:SPECtrum[:ENABle]...................................................................................................411
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 605

SPECtrum[:STATe].........................................................................................................................................407
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?................................................................................................................... 558
STATus:OPERation:ENABle.......................................................................................................................... 559
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition...................................................................................................................559
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition................................................................................................................... 559
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?........................................................................................................................559
STATus:PRESet.............................................................................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:CONDition?..............................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:ENABle.................................................................................................... 561
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:NTRansition............................................................................................. 562
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState:PTRansition............................................................................................. 563
STATus:QUEStionable:ADCState[:EVENt]?.................................................................................................. 562
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?...............................................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:CONDition?............................................................................................ 561
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:ENABle...................................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:NTRansition........................................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload:PTRansition............................................................................................563
STATus:QUEStionable:COVerload[:EVENt]?................................................................................................ 562
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle..................................................................................................................... 561
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?......................................................................................................561
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle............................................................................................................ 562
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition..................................................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition..................................................................................................... 563
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?.......................................................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:CONDition?................................................................................................... 561
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:ENABle.......................................................................................................... 562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:NTRansition...................................................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK:PTRansition................................................................................................... 563
STATus:QUEStionable:MASK[:EVENt]?........................................................................................................562
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition.............................................................................................................. 562
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition.............................................................................................................. 563
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?................................................................................................................... 562
STOP............................................................................................................................................................. 314
SYSTem:BEEPer:CONTrol:STATe.................................................................................................................456
SYSTem:BEEPer:ERRor:STATe.................................................................................................................... 456
SYSTem:BEEPer:TRIG:STATe...................................................................................................................... 457
SYSTem:BEEPer[:IMMediate]....................................................................................................................... 457
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:DHCP..................................................................................... 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:GATeway................................................................................ 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:HTTPport................................................................................460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPADdress.............................................................................. 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:IPPort..................................................................................... 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:MACaddress?........................................................................ 460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:SUBNet.................................................................................. 459
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:TRANsfer............................................................................... 460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:ETHernet:VXIPort...................................................................................460
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface:USB:CLASs............................................................................................ 461
SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTerface[:SELect].................................................................................................. 456
SYSTem:DATE...............................................................................................................................................455
SYSTem:DFPRint?........................................................................................................................................ 458
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 606

SYSTem:EDUCation:PRESet........................................................................................................................ 458
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?....................................................................................................................................457
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?...............................................................................................................................457
SYSTem:NAME..............................................................................................................................................455
SYSTem:PRESet........................................................................................................................................... 458
SYSTem:SET.................................................................................................................................................457
SYSTem:TIME............................................................................................................................................... 456
SYSTem:TREE?............................................................................................................................................ 458
TCOunter:ENABle..........................................................................................................................................418
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:FREQuency?..................................................................................................... 418
TCOunter:RESult[:ACTual]:PERiod?.............................................................................................................418
TCOunter:SOURce........................................................................................................................................418
TIMebase:ACQTime...................................................................................................................................... 324
TIMebase:DIVisions?.....................................................................................................................................324
TIMebase:POSition........................................................................................................................................323
TIMebase:RANGe..........................................................................................................................................324
TIMebase:RATime?....................................................................................................................................... 324
TIMebase:REFerence....................................................................................................................................323
TIMebase:ROLL:AUTomatic.......................................................................................................................... 328
TIMebase:ROLL:MTIMe................................................................................................................................ 329
TIMebase:SCALe...........................................................................................................................................322
TIMebase:ZOOM:POSition............................................................................................................................ 346
TIMebase:ZOOM:SCALe...............................................................................................................................345
TIMebase:ZOOM:STATe................................................................................................................................345
TIMebase:ZOOM:TIME..................................................................................................................................345
TRIGger:A:CAN:ACKerror............................................................................................................................. 504
TRIGger:A:CAN:BITSterror............................................................................................................................504
TRIGger:A:CAN:CRCerror.............................................................................................................................505
TRIGger:A:CAN:DATA................................................................................................................................... 504
TRIGger:A:CAN:DCONdition......................................................................................................................... 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:DLC..................................................................................................................................... 504
TRIGger:A:CAN:FORMerror.......................................................................................................................... 505
TRIGger:A:CAN:FTYPe................................................................................................................................. 502
TRIGger:A:CAN:ICONdition...........................................................................................................................503
TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENtifier.............................................................................................................................503
TRIGger:A:CAN:ITYPe.................................................................................................................................. 503
TRIGger:A:CAN:TYPE...................................................................................................................................502
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling..........................................................................................................................334
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:HFReject................................................................................................................334
TRIGger:A:EDGE:FILTer:NREJect................................................................................................................ 335
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOPe..............................................................................................................................333
TRIGger:A:FINDlevel..................................................................................................................................... 333
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:MODE........................................................................................................................... 332
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME............................................................................................................................. 332
TRIGger:A:HYSTeresis.................................................................................................................................. 334
TRIGger:A:I2C:ACCess................................................................................................................................. 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess.............................................................................................................................. 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:AMODe................................................................................................................................. 481
TRIGger:A:I2C:MODE................................................................................................................................... 480
TRIGger:A:I2C:PATTern.................................................................................................................................482
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 607

TRIGger:A:I2C:PLENgth................................................................................................................................482
TRIGger:A:I2C:POFFset................................................................................................................................482
TRIGger:A:LEVel<n>[:VALue]........................................................................................................................333
TRIGger:A:LIN:CHKSerror.............................................................................................................................518
TRIGger:A:LIN:DATA..................................................................................................................................... 519
TRIGger:A:LIN:DCONdition........................................................................................................................... 520
TRIGger:A:LIN:DLENgth................................................................................................................................520
TRIGger:A:LIN:ICONdition.............................................................................................................................519
TRIGger:A:LIN:IDENtifier...............................................................................................................................519
TRIGger:A:LIN:IPERror................................................................................................................................. 518
TRIGger:A:LIN:SYERror................................................................................................................................ 519
TRIGger:A:LIN:TYPE.....................................................................................................................................518
TRIGger:A:MODE..........................................................................................................................................331
TRIGger:A:PATTern:CONDition..................................................................................................................... 339
TRIGger:A:PATTern:FUNCtion...................................................................................................................... 339
TRIGger:A:PATTern:MODE........................................................................................................................... 340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:SOURce........................................................................................................................ 338
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa................................................................................................................341
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe..............................................................................................................340
TRIGger:A:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh].............................................................................................................340
TRIGger:A:SOURce.......................................................................................................................................331
TRIGger:A:SOURce:SPI................................................................................................................................473
TRIGger:A:SOURce:UART............................................................................................................................493
TRIGger:A:SPI:MODE................................................................................................................................... 473
TRIGger:A:SPI:PATTern................................................................................................................................ 474
TRIGger:A:SPI:PLENgth................................................................................................................................474
TRIGger:A:SPI:POFFset................................................................................................................................474
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:RANGe.......................................................................................................................... 341
TRIGger:A:TIMeout:TIME.............................................................................................................................. 341
TRIGger:A:TV:FIELd......................................................................................................................................337
TRIGger:A:TV:LINE....................................................................................................................................... 338
TRIGger:A:TV:POLarity................................................................................................................................. 337
TRIGger:A:TV:STANdard...............................................................................................................................337
TRIGger:A:TYPE........................................................................................................................................... 332
TRIGger:A:UART:MODE................................................................................................................................493
TRIGger:A:UART:PATTern............................................................................................................................. 494
TRIGger:A:UART:PLENgth............................................................................................................................ 494
TRIGger:A:UART:POFFset............................................................................................................................ 494
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:DELTa.............................................................................................................................. 336
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:POLarity...........................................................................................................................335
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:RANGe............................................................................................................................ 335
TRIGger:A:WIDTh:WIDTh............................................................................................................................. 336
TRIGger:EVENt:REFSave............................................................................................................................. 343
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave.............................................................................................................................343
TRIGger:EVENt:SCRSave:DESTination....................................................................................................... 343
TRIGger:EVENt:SOUNd................................................................................................................................ 342
TRIGger:EVENt:TRIGgerout..........................................................................................................................344
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave............................................................................................................................344
TRIGger:EVENt:WFMSave:DESTination...................................................................................................... 344
TRIGger:EVENt[:ENABle]..............................................................................................................................342
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 608

TRIGger:OUT:MODE..................................................................................................................................... 461
TRIGger:OUT:PLENgth..................................................................................................................................461
TRIGger:OUT:POLarity.................................................................................................................................. 462
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:START........................................................................................................ 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:RANGe:STOP..........................................................................................................545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:SOURce...................................................................................................................544
WGENerator:ARBitrary:UPDate.................................................................................................................... 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary:VISible......................................................................................................................546
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:NAME............................................................................................................ 545
WGENerator:ARBitrary[:FILE]:OPEN............................................................................................................ 545
WGENerator:BURSt:ITIMe............................................................................................................................ 546
WGENerator:BURSt:NCYCle........................................................................................................................ 546
WGENerator:BURSt:PHASe..........................................................................................................................547
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger:SINGle........................................................................................................... 547
WGENerator:BURSt:TRIGger[:MODE]..........................................................................................................546
WGENerator:BURSt[:STATe]......................................................................................................................... 547
WGENerator:FREQuency..............................................................................................................................542
WGENerator:FUNCtion..................................................................................................................................542
WGENerator:FUNCtion:EXPonential:POLarity..............................................................................................543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle....................................................................................................... 543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:PULSe:ETIMe..........................................................................................................543
WGENerator:FUNCtion:RAMP:POLarity....................................................................................................... 543
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:DEPTh........................................................................................................... 549
WGENerator:MODulation:AM:FREQuency................................................................................................... 548
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:DEPTh..........................................................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:ASK:FREQuency..................................................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:DEViation....................................................................................................... 549
WGENerator:MODulation:FM:FREQuency....................................................................................................549
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:HFREquency................................................................................................ 550
WGENerator:MODulation:FSK:RATE............................................................................................................ 550
WGENerator:MODulation:FUNCtion..............................................................................................................548
WGENerator:MODulation:RAMP:POLarity.................................................................................................... 550
WGENerator:MODulation:TYPE.................................................................................................................... 548
WGENerator:MODulation[:ENABLE]............................................................................................................. 548
WGENerator:NOISe:ABSolute.......................................................................................................................544
WGENerator:NOISe:RELative....................................................................................................................... 544
WGENerator:OUTPut:LOAD..........................................................................................................................544
WGENerator:OUTPut[:ENABle].....................................................................................................................544
WGENerator:SWEep:FEND.......................................................................................................................... 550
WGENerator:SWEep:FSTart..........................................................................................................................550
WGENerator:SWEep:TIME............................................................................................................................551
WGENerator:SWEep:TYPE...........................................................................................................................551
WGENerator:SWEep[:ENABle]......................................................................................................................551
WGENerator:TRIangle:SYMMetry................................................................................................................. 543
WGENerator:VOLTage...................................................................................................................................542
WGENerator:VOLTage:OFFSet..................................................................................................................... 542
User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 609

RTB UserManual en 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTB UserManual en 12

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTB UserManual en 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R&S®RTB2000

© 2022 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

1333.1611.02 | Version 12 | R&S®RTB2000

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 3

2.2.1.2 Other connectors on the front panel..............................................................................36

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 4

4.5.1 Shortcuts for acquisition settings.................................................................................. 66

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 5

6.4.1 Segmented memory....................................................................................................107

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 6

8.1.2 Using masks................................................................................................................148

9 Documenting results......................................................................... 176

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 7

9.5 Quick save with onetouch........................................................................................185

10 General instrument setup..................................................................189

11 Network connections and remote operation................................... 201

12 Serial bus analysis............................................................................. 211

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 8

12.1.2 Displaying decode results........................................................................................... 214

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 9

12.6.4 LIN decode results...................................................................................................... 265

13 Logic analyzer (option R&S RTB-B1, MSO).....................................272

14 Signal generation (option R&S RTB-B6)..........................................281

15 Remote control commands...............................................................302

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 10

15.2.1 Documenting results................................................................................................... 303

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 11

15.6.1 Zoom........................................................................................................................... 345

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 12

15.8.2.4 Mask data....................................................................................................................406

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 13

15.11 Serial bus analysis....................................................................................................463

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 14

15.12.2.3 Parallel buses - decode results................................................................................... 539

16 Maintenance and support..................................................................564

A Remote control basics.......................................................................567

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 15

A.1.3 SCPI parameters.........................................................................................................569

B Remote control - status reporting system.......................................579

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 16

B.4.4 Error queue................................................................................................................. 589

List of commands.............................................................................. 591

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 17

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 18

1.1 Safety and regulatory information

Where do I find safety information?

1.1.1 Safety instructions

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 19

Lifting and carrying the instrument

Choosing the operating site

Setting up the product

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 20

Connecting to power and grounding

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 21

Working with hazardous voltages

Working with current probes

User Manual 1333.1611.02 ─ 12 22

– Eddy current loss can cause heating of the sensor head.

Cleaning the product

Meaning of safety labels